Inquiries should be directed to: Office of Admissions and Records Wichita State University Wichita, Kansas 67208 This catalog is for Information only and does not constitute a contract. This catalog becomes effective August 1,1972. TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERALINFORMATION PAGE Academic Calendar for 1972-1973 . . . . . . . . . . 6 Administrative Officers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 The Kansas Board of Regents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Profile of Wichita State University . . . . . . 9 Admission Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Academic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Financial Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Student Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Special Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Special Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Student Activities and Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 UNIVERSITY COLLEGE Admission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Preparation for Degree-Granting Colleges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Certificate and Degree Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Division of Continuing Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Special Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 FAIRMOUNT OF LIBERAL COLLEGE ARTSAND SCIENCES Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Special Programs of Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Special Programs of Preprofessional Nature . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Liberal Arts and Sciences Curriculum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Administration of Justice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 American Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Anthropology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Economics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 English Language and Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Geology and Geography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ..Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . ,.-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Journalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Latin and Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Linguistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 3 PAGE Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Statistics and Computer Science 140 Minority Studies . . 142 Philosophy 144 Physics . . 148 Political Science 149 Psychology 154 Religion . . . . . 157 Romance Languages 159 Sociology 167 Social Work 169 Spanish 164 Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 COLLEGEOF BUSINESSADMINISTRATION Objectives and Programs . . . . Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Business Administration Degree . . Secretarial Training . . . . . . . . . . . Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Business Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Economics . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLLEGEOF EDUCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Accreditation and Certification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Aerospace Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Art Education . . . . . . Educational Administration and Supervision . . . Educational Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . Elementary Education . . . . . . . . Industrial Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Science . . . Logopedics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Military Science . . .Music Education . . . . . . Physical Education, Health and Recreation . . . . . .. . . Secondary Education . . . . . . . .Foundations of Education . . . . . . .Student Personnel and Guidance . . . . COLLEGEOF ENGINEERING . . . . . . Entrance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Core Curriculum WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 4 PAGE Aeronautical Engineering 251 Electrical Engineering 252 Industrial Engineering 254 h4echanical Engineering . . 255 COLLEGEOF FINEARTS Admission . . . . . . . . . . Degree Requirements . . . . Division of Art . . . Studio Arts . . . . . Graphic Design . . . . . . . Art History . . . . . . . . . . . . . Art Education . . . . . . . . . . Division of Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theory-Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLLEGEOF HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dental Hygiene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inhalation Therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medical Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cytotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nursing-Baccalaureate Program . . . . . . . . . . . FACULTY1971-1972 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 5 Academic Calendar for 1972-1973 Fall Semester 1972 August 22-26, Tuesday- Saturday August 28, Monday September 4, Xlonday O r t o b ~ r6, Friday October 7, Saturday October 20, Friday Sovember 3, Friday Uovrrnber 6. Monday Xovelliber 9, Thursday November 21, Tuesday November 22-25, Wednesday- Saturday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . December 11, Monday . . . . December 12-18, Tuesday- Monday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Semester 1973 January 9-13, Tuesday- Saturday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January 15, Monday . . . . Fehruary 23, Friday . . . . . . . February 24, Saturday.. . . . . March 9, Friday . . . . . . . . . . Slarch 17, Saturday . . . . . . . . March 26, Xlonday . . . . . . . . >larch 30, Friday . . . . . . . . . . April 2, Slonday . . . . . . . . . . . April 5, Thursday . . . . . . . . April 17, Tuesday . . . . . . . . April 20-2.3, Friday-Monday April 24, Tuesday . . . . . . . . . klay 3, Thursday . . . . . . . . . . . May 4-10, Friday-Thursday , May 13, Sunday . . . . . . . . . . Summer Session 1973 June 7-9, Thursday- Saturday . . . . . . . . . . June 11, Monday . . . . . . . . . July 4, Wednesday . . . . . . . . August 3, Friday . . Fall semester registration Classes begin Labor Day, holiday Final date for declaring Cr/NoCr Final d i~ tc for removing incompletes S,fidteml reports Final day for nonpenalty grades Adxtising for preregistration for spring semester Preregistration for spring semester Preregistration closes 'Thanksgiving recess Classes close First semester final examinations Spring semester registration Classes begin Final date for declaring Cr/NoCr Final date for re~noving incompletes hlidterm reports Spring recess begins at close of classes Classes resumc Final date for nonpenalty grades Advising for preregistration for fall semester Preregistration for fall semester Prercgistration closes Easter recess Classes resume Classes close Sccond semester final eraminations Coin~nencement Summer Session registration Srl~nmer Session classes begin I-Ioliday (Fourth of July) Siimmer Session closes WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 6 Administrative Officers Clark D. Ahlberg President of the University John B. Breazeale Vice President for Academic Affairs and Dean of Faculties James J. Rhatigan Vice President for Student Affairs and Dean of Students Martin H. Bush Assistant Vice President for Academic Resource Development H. R. Reidenbaugh Executive Vice President of the Board of Trustees and Executive Secretary to the Endowment Association Roger D. Lowe Assistant to the President for Finance and Business Manager Appointmrnf pending Dean of the Graduate School Lawrence E. McKibbin Dean of the College of Business Administration Leonard M. Chaffee Dean of the College of Education Charles V. Jakowatz Dean of the College of Engineering Charles L. Spohn Dean of the College of Fine Arts D. Cramer Reed Dean of the College of Health Related Professions Paul J. Magelli Dean of the Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences Walter S. Friesen Dean of University College Gordon Tenvilliger Director of Summer Session C. Russell Wentworth Dean of Admissions and Records Laura M. Cross Associate Dean of Admisqions and Records Jasper G. Schad Director of Libraries Helen Crockett Director of Continuing Education Max A. Schaible Director of Information and Public Events George M. Platt Director of Planning Frederick Sudermann Director of Research and Sponsored Programs Armin Brandhorst Director of Physical Plant Cecil Coleman Director of Athletics Ethel Jane King Executive Director of the Alumni Association The Kansas Board of Regents Paul R. Wunsch, Chairman Kingman James J. Basham, M.D. Fort Scott Henry A. Bubb Topeka Carl L. Courter Wichita William F. Danenbarger Concordia T. J. Griffith Manhattan Robert W. Helman Goodland Elmer C. Jackson, Jr. Kansas City Jess Stewart Wamego Max Bickford, Executive Oficer Topeka WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 7 lndir:irltralit!j ancl self-esprcssion are prized b ~ j 1)otl1 facult!/ and sttrdcnt.~ at Mrichitn State. 1 8 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Profile of Wichita State University Description Wichita State University, an urban university located in Kansas' largest metropolitan area, provides educational opportunity for stu- dents of varying ages, races and nationalities. More than 13,000 students are enrolled in both daytime and evening courses offered by the various colleges and schools of the University. Better than 1,700 of the student body are enrolled on the G. I. Bill, and the University has the largest minority race en- rollment of any college or university in a 14-state region. Students at Wichita State University can choose from more than 100 areas of academic concentration within the University's eight schools and colleges. These academic units are University College, Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, College of Busi- ness Administration, Co l l e~e of Education, College of Engineering, College of Health Related Professions, College of Fine Arts and the Graduate School. In addition, the University offers an eight-week Summer Session with an enrollment larger than any other college or university in Kansas. I h e academic programs at Wichita State University culminate in bachelor's, master's, specialist's and, in some cases, doctoral de- grees. The University is cooperating with the University of Kansas in offering doctorates in aeronautical engineering and chemistry and offers its o\nl doctoral degree in logopedics. 340re than 1,900 stu- dents are enrolled in the University's graduate programs. The four basic objectives of Wichita State University are: to pro- vide general education; to proviclc advanced and special education; to provide continuing educational opportunities for adults, and to provide graduate studies and stimulate research. The objectives are met through the full employment of the Uni- versity's varied resources. General education is provided through the core curriculum of the University and is fostered by enrolling all entering freshman students in a "general" college known as Uni- versity College. Advanced and special education are provided through the various major studies in liberal arts and sciences and in the degree prosrams of the professional colleges or schools. The Division of Continuing Education provides ongoing educa- tional opportunities for adults through special seminars, workshops, classes and related Uni\.rrsity programs and activities. Graduate st~lclirs and research, the fourth objective, are accom- plished through a variety of grad~late programs authorized by the State Boarcl of Regents and through the ongoing programs of Uni- versity research and sponsored research. Implicit in all objectives of the University is student \velfare and continuing public service. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 9 History Wichita State University began as Fainnount Colleve, founded by the Congregational Church, in 1895. In 1926, Wichita citizens voted to make Fairmount Collere the 34unicipal University of Wichita. On July I , 1964, the University was officially added to the state system of higher education, as an associate of the Univer- sity of Kansas, through an act of the 1963 session of the state legis- lature. Although no longer an associate of the University of Kansas, Wichita State University is proud of its cooperative doctoral pro- grams offered in conjunction with the University of Kansas. Wichita State has grown from 12 students to more than 13,000 students and from 5 instructors to more than 700 faculty member.< since its beginning. Since 1964, the University has nearly doubled its enrollment and has more than doubled its budget. Governance of the University has evolvecl with its changes in leqal status as an institution. Originally led by the Congregational Church, the University was under the direction of a Board of Trustees from 1926 to 1961 as the Municipal University of Wichita. In its present status, Wichita State University is one of six state in- stitutions of hirher education governed by the Kansas State Board of Regents. Accreditation and Associations Programs at Wichita State University are accredited by the fol- lowing professional organimtions: North Central Association of Colleges and Secondary Schools, the National Council for the Accreditation of Teacher Education, the National Association of Schools of Music, the Engineers' Council for Professional Develop- ment (Aeronautical, Electrical and h.lechanical), the American Chemical Society Committee for the Professional Training of Chemi~ts, the American .4ssociation of Colleges and Schools of Business, the American Iledical .4ssociation Board of Schools, and the Council on Dental Educ a t' lon. IVomen graduates of the L'niversit!. with bachelor's d ~ g r e e s or higher are eligible for membership in the American Association of University Women. Human Relations Wichita State University, in pursuit of its educational goals, wel- comes students of nII races, nations, and creeds. It is guided by the principle that equal opportunitv and access to facilities, pro- 10 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY grams, and services shall be available to all. The University accepts, as a primary responsibility, the implementation of this principle in its own affairs and in its relations with the broader community of which it is a part. Admission Information All students entering Wichita State University for the first time must submit an application for aclmission to the Office of Admis- sions, 140 Jardine Hall. Accompanying the application must be transcripts of all high school and college work. Failure to report all schools attended may result in clismissal. Transcripts received in the Office of Admissions will not be returned to the applicant. New students may begin their college study during the Summer Session, the fall semester or the spring semester. Both application and transcripts of previouq work must be received on or before August 1 for fall registration and January 1 for spring registration. Applications and transcripts from high school students will be accepted any time after completion of the junior year ancl are expected early in the senior year. Prospective students are encour- aged to visit the campus for the purpose of discussing their educa- tional plans with an admissions counselor and other University staff members. The admission of a student is independent of race, nationality, or creed. Freshman Students Any graduate of an accredited Kansas high school who has not previously attended a college will be admitted on application to the University. -4 prospective freshman still in high school should submit an application with a sixth semester transcript attached and make arrangements with his high school counselor to take the American College Test (ACT). A Kansas high school graduate should file an application and transcript shoving date of gradua- tion and submit scores from the ACT. An out-of-state student who will graduate or who has graduated from a high school or preparatory school should follow the same procedures outlined above. A non-Kansas resident will be eligible for admission if he ranks in the upper one-half of his high school graduating c!ass. Exceptions may be made under special circum- stances when valid reasons prevail. Priority of admission among out-of-state students will be given to sons and daughters of alumni of this University. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 11 An applicant without a secondary school diploma nrho wishes to be considered for admission to freshman standing should present his case to the Office of Admissions. Special Student Status Admission of special students is restricted to persons over 21 years of age who are not candidate7 for degrees. Upon completion of 60 semester hours with a 2.00 average, a special student may petition for admission to regular standing. Any other special petitioner should present his case through the Office of Admis- sions to the Committee on Admissions. All entering freshmen are enrolled in Universitv College and L, must have submitted transcripts, scores from the American College Testing program, and a health certificate as a condition of their enrollment in University College. The clean of Universitv College will send all freshmen com~le te information about orientation and enrollment. Transfer Students A student who has been enrolled in other colleges or universities may be admitted to unclergraduate study if he is eligible to return to the college or university last attended and meets the required scholastic standards of Wichita State University. Students \vho transfer with fewer than 24 credits will be en- rolled in University College (for further details, see Catalog dis- cussion of University College ) . A transfer student with 24 or more hours of acceptable college credit is not required to complete the American College Test. A transfer stuc'ent with 24 or more acceptable hours, and not on probation, is eligible to apply for admission to a baccalaureate deqee college if he meets specific requirements. Students wishing to transfer to Wichita State University should submit an application and official transcripts from high school and all colleges attended. The transcript from the last college attended should show that the student is eligible to return. Students trans- ferring from a junior college must complete two years of additional college work to qualify for graduation in a four-pear curriculum. In no case will work done in a junior college be credited as work in the junior or senior years in the Universitv. The distribution of transfer courses which are to fulfill either a maior or minor requirement must be approved by the head of the department concerned. Regardless of the credit granted to 12 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY transfer students, the requirement of additional work is at the discretion of the department chairman or chairmen. International Students The University welcomes students from abroad. There are, how- rver, no scholarships or grants available to the newly enterinq undergraduate international student, so it is imperative that he have sufficient funds to cover his expenses while in this country. International students who qualify for admission to Graduate School may apply to their department head or the dean of their college for information on graduate fellowships and assistantships. The admission requirements for international students are as follows: ( 1 ) Graduation from an accredited high school or college. ( 2 ) A certificate of proficiency in the English language. ( 3 ) Notarized statement of financial responsibility in an amount of $3,2.50or more to cover expenses for 12 months. ( 4 ) Enrollment in at least 12 hours at the undergraduate level or in at least nine hours at the graduate level. For further information, write to the International Program director. Graduate School Wichita State University offers graduate work in the following departments: accounting, administration, aeronautical engineering, anthropology, art, biology, chemistry, economics, electrical engi- neering, English, geolog!,, history, logopeclics, mathematics, mechani- cal engineering, music, philosophy, physical education, physics, political science, psychology, sociology, Spanish and teacher edu- cation. For admission to full graduate standing an applicant must have a minimum 2.50 grade average in all work undertaken during the junior and senior years, and a four-year minimum average of 2.50 in his major and minor work. Application for admission to graduate standing must be filed with the Graduate School three weeks in advance of the registration day, and must be accompanied by two complete ancl official transcripts of all college work. Students have no official status in the Graduate School until their applications and transcripts are on file and the transcripts have been evaluated by the Graduate School. An application for admission to candidacy for a higher degree WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 13 should be filed in the Graduate School upon completion of 15 graduate hours, but in no event later than the semester prior to the semester in which the student intends to graduate. Specific requirements vary from department to department and are listed in the Graduate Brrllctin. This bulletin should be con- sulted for information about the requirements in a particular program. Residence Defined The residence of students entering Wichita State University is determined by acts of the legislature (KSA 76-729, 76-730) which read as follows: "Persons enrolling in universities and colleges under the state Board of Regents who, if adults, have not been, or if minors, whose parents have not been residents of the state of Kansas for six months prior to enrollment for' any term or sesn'on in a college or university are nonresidents for fee purposes. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section, the state Board of Regents may adopt rules and regulations authorizing the following to pay an amount equal to resident fees: ( 1 ) Employees of the university or college and their dependents, ( 2 ) persons in the military and their dependents, ( 3 ) other classes of persons having special domestic relation circumstances, and ( 4 ) persons who have lost their resident status within six months of their enrollment. "The state Board of Regents shall adopt rules and regulations prescribing criteria or guidelines for determination of residence of students, so long as such criteria or guideline3 are not in con- flict with the provisions of this act. The state Board of Regents shall adopt rules and regulations prescribing guidelines for the membership composition and procedure of a residence committee for each college and university under its control." The responsibility of registering under proper residence is placed on the student. If there is any possible question of residence under the rules of the college, it is the duty of the student when regis- tering and paying fees to raise the question with the O a c e of Ad- missions and Records. If the student disagrees with the residency determination, he shall within 30 days from the date of opening of such semester or term give notice in writing to the Office of Admissions and Records of appeal to the committee of said deci- sion. If notice of said appeal is not given in writing within 30 days, the determination of the Office of Admissions and Records shall be binding upon said student. REPORTINGCHANGE OF ADDRESS:Each student is required to re- port his correct address at the time of registration each semester. 14 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY This must be the student's actual place of residence and will be the one to which all University correspondence will be sent. If any change in residence is made during the semester, the new address must be reported within three days to the Enrollment Office. Academic Information Registration Specific information regarding reristration is set forth in the Sched- ule of Cotirscs published each semester and Summer Session. Reg- istration will not be permitted after the second week of classes. Falsification of information or \vithholding of information pertinent to records of the University is grounds for dismissal from the Uni- versity. Student Resp~nsibility (1) The student shall consult his adviser on all matters pertaining to his academic career, including any change in his program. ( 2 ) The student shall observe all regulations of his college, and shall select courses according to the requirements of his college. ( 3 ) The student shall attend all meetings of each class for which he is enrolled. The instructor will announce at the beginning of the semester whether he considers attendance in computing final grades. ( 4 ) The student shall fulfill all requirements for graduation. ( 5 ) The student shall be per~onally reqponsible for the fulfillment of all University requirements and the observation of all University regulations. ( 6 ) Sumtizot~sh!y adcisers ant1 other officers: Students are ex- pected to answer promptl!., written notices of advisers, faculty, deans, student health and other University officers. Credit by Examination University credit may b r obtained by examination. A student de- siring University credit by examination should file a petition with the Committee on Admissions, Advanced Standing, and Exce~tionnl Programs. If the request for an examination is approved by the committee, the student will pay the Business Office a $5 fee. Upon presentation of the receipt from the Business Office, the assigned WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 15 instructor will give the examination. Credit will be granted only if a ~ r a d e of C or better is attained and approval is given by the committee. D and F grades will be recorded on the student's transcript. Advanced Placement Credit The designation "advanced placementv-programs, or credit, refers specifically to the courses offered in many high schools, constructed and coordinated under the supervision of the College Entrance Examination Board: examinations furnished bv the CEEB are taken by the student and later sent to the Educational Testing Service for gradine, and subsequently sent by ETS to the college or uni- versity of the student's choice. Tests are assigned grades from a low of (1)to a high of (5) . At Wichita State University, advanced placement credit may be granted in the areas of biology, chemistry, Ennlish, French, Ger- man, history, Latin, mathematics, physics and Spanish. The cor- responding University department, however, reserves the right to determine the eligibility of the student for advanced placement credit. Such credit may be regarded as comparable to other transfer credit, in that no fee is chaqed, nor is the student reexamined over such credit or content. The University admissions office nlill advise students of credit granted as a result of advanced placement exams soon after the exam results are received from ETS. Advanced placement credit may be established on the strength of succe~sful scores earned on the College Board's College-Level Examination Program (CLEP). Students who pass the CLEP examinations with 65th percentile scores or better will be given three hours of credit in the respective core curriculum area for which the test is presented. Graduate Credit for Seniors A senior at Wichita State University who has an overall grade point index of 3.00 or above in the major field and in uDDer division courses, and who is within 10 hours of completing the bachelor's degree, may take work for graduate credit. However, this work must be beyond the requirements for his undergraduate degree, which must be completed within the semester in which the graduate courses are taken; and, the student must have been admitted to the Graduate School. Application for the "Senior Rule" must be made to the Graduate School and approved by the Graduate School, the student's undergraduate dean, and his major adviser, before the course(s) may be taken for graduate credit. 16 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Classification of Students Students are to be classified according to the following table: FRESHMEN:Undcr 24 semester hours and 48 credit points. SOPHOX.IORES: 24 semester hours and 48 credit points. JUNIORS:50 semester hours and 120 credit points. SE~TORS: 90 semester hours and 200 credit points. Meaning of Course Numbers Courses numbered 99 or below are not acceptable for credit in a baccalaureate college. Courses numbered 100 to 199 are primarily for freshmen, but stu- dents from other classes may be admitted for lower division credit. Courses numbered 200 to 299 are primarily for sophomores, but juniors and seniors may be admitted for lower division credit. Freshmen may be admitted if they are qualified and are not ex- pressly excluded. Courses numbered 300 to 399 are primarily for juniors. Seniors will be admitted. Freshmen and sophomores are excluded except as noted. Courses numbered 400 to 499 are primarily for seniors. Juniors may be admitted if they meet the prerequisites and are not specifi- cally excluded. Freshmen and sopohmores are excluded except as noted. Courses numbered 500 to 699 are for graduate students only, and no student may be admitted to these courses unless he has been admitted to the Graduate School. See Graduate Credit for Seniors for special conditions under which seniors may be admitted to graduate courses. Students with completed prerequisites in industrial education, language, engineering, logopedics, mathematics, natural sciences, aerospace students, and military science courses may be admitted to upper division courses in sequence for upper division credit. With these exceptions lower division courses must be taken exclusively until the student has completed 50 hours and 120 credit points, when he may elect upper division courses. University College students are not eligible for enrollment in upper division courses unless admitted through the exception noted above, or by virtue of a 3.25, or higher, grade average. Key to Course Symbols When two course numbers are joined by a hyphen ( - ) , the first semester is prerequisite to the second; when the numbers have an WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 17 ampersand (&) between them, the two semesters may be taken in either order. Unless specifically noted otherwise, the first course listed is offered in the fall semester, the second in the spring. The number of hours of credit for each course is indicated in parentheses following the course title. The number of class meet- ings per week is normally the same as the number of credit hours. Two hours of laboratory work are usually required for one hour credit. In courses involving other than lecture periods, the follow- ing symbols are used: R, lecture; L, laboratory; C, conference; D, demonstration. Grading System Grades are A, B, C, D, I, F, WF, Wd, Au, Cr and NCR. A-Indicates distinguished achievement. B-Indicates superior achievement. C--Indicates average achievement. D-Indicates below average. F-Indicates failure. WF-Indicates withdrawal from a course in which the student was doing failing work. Counts as F. Wd-Indicates withdrawal from a course in which the student was doing passing work. Au-Indicates audit. Cr-Indicates credit. NCR-No credit received. The grade incomplete ( I ) is used when a student may have further time, at the discretion of the instructor, to complete the required work. This work must be completed by the end of the sixth week of classes of the semester in which the student reenrolls. If the work is not completed in this period, the incomplete grade becomes an F. If a student reenrolls in a course in which he has received an incomplete grade, the incomplete will become either an F or a Wd at the discretion of the instructor or dean. No student may enroll in any course more than three times. Each time a student's academic record shows any grade, including Wd or WF, for a given course, this constitutes an enrollment in that course. Exceptions may be made, in writing, by the chairman of the student's major department. No course in which a grade of "C" or better has been earned may be repeated for credit. An auditor may register in a class but will receive no credit. He may do all of the required work, a portion thereof, or no work at all. For the record, attendance and failure to do the required work will be reported to the respective deans. Fees for audit are identical 18 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY with those set for the credit course. Auditing a course later to be pursued for credit is not approved. The change from audit to credit in the course, or the reverse, is effected through the regular change of course cards with the attendant signatures required. No student may make the change from credit to audit unless he is earning a passing grade at the time of the change. After the tenth week of the semester, the student may not change from credit to audit. The grade Cr is given for completion in courses for which no letter grade is given. Credit Points and Credit Point Index For each hour of work which the student takes, credit points are given according to the grade attained as follows: A, 4 points; B, 3 points; C, 2 points; D, 1point; I, Wd, and Au, F and WF, no points. The "credit point index" for any term is calculated by dividing the number of credit points earned by the number of credit hours at- tempted and for which a grade (including F and W F ) was received. The "cumulative credit point index" is calculated by dividing the total number of credit points earned by the total number of credit hours attempted and for which a grade (including F and \YF) has been received. Exception: When a course is repeated for credit, the last enrollment and grade will be used in computing the cumu- lative grade point index. CreditINo Credit Courses A student may take creditlno credit courses up to a maximum of 24 hours. Courses taken for creditlno credit must be outside the student's major, except as allowed by individual departments. A student may choose whether to take a course as a creditlno credit by indicating his choice through his dean's office by the end of the sixth week of the semester during the academic year and the end of the third week of the semester during the Summer Session. Otherwise the course will be treated as a regular graded course. Once a student has decided to take the course as graded or as creditlno credit, he may not change his enrollment from "graded" to "creditlno credit," or vice versa. A grade below a C will be recorded as NCR (no credit received) on the student's transcript. Repeat courses taken initially for a letter grade may not subse- quently be taken for CrINCR, but a course initially taken for CrINCR may be repeated for CrINCR if the student has received an NCR grade. Creditlno credit courses shall not count on a WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 19 student's GPA. However, upon fulfilling the requirements for graduation, the student's overall GPA shall be applied to his credit1 no credit hours. A student may take no more than two courses of credit/no credit per semester. Creclit/no credit courses will apply only to undergraduate students. All courses numbered below 100 and all personal development courses are automatically Cr/NCR. Thesc Cr/NCR courses are not counted in the 24 hours of Cr/NCR maximum permitted. Limitations on Student Load Except in the College of Engineering, the maximum semester schedule for freshmen is 16 hours. for so~homores 17 hours, and for upperclassmen 18 hours, to each of which may be added one hour of military or aerospace studies or physical education. Half the hours of a course audited count towvard the maximum. To register in upper division courses, except by special permission, a student must have completed 50 semester hours and attained 120 credit points. A student whose average for the last 30 hours of work or whose overall averace for more than 30 semester hours is 2.60 or above may apply to'>his dean for permission to take one hour in excess of the maximum load in any session; if the average is 3.00 he may apply for permission to carry two hours in excess. A student with a cumulative credit point index of 3.25 or above may carry more than two excess hours during a semester or summer term without petition. Students in the College of Engineering must apply for permission to take hours in excess of those prescribed in the engi- neering curricula. In order to be eligible to apply for excess hours at least a portion of the students' prior work must have been taken in Wichita State University. Examinations No reexamination shall be given. The grade received on a regular quiz or examination shall be final. Special examinations, when requested, will be given only with the dean's consent. A student who misses an assigned examination should arrange with his instructor to take a make-up examination. The dean of the college will serve as arbitrator only when he cleems it necessary. Exemptions for Superior Achievement A student wvho has completed a minimum of 12 hours at Wichit:l State Universit~, and has a cumulative credit point index of at 20 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY least 3.25 and a credit point index of at least 3.00 the previous semester may be granted the follo\iring privileges: (1) Exemptions from regulations yoverning the maximum num- ber of hours a student can take during a semester or summer term. ( 2 ) Exemption from college regulations, if any, governing the maximum number of hours a student can take during a semester in one department. ( 3 ) Permission to enroll in 300 and 400 courses prior to having established 50 semester hours and 120 credit points. ( 3 ) Permission to have coursc prerequisites waived with the con- sent of the instructor of the course ancl the head of the department in which the course is taken. University Honors Program The University Honors Procram consists of designated sections, specially designed courses and related ,~ctivities established to help outstanding students find challenqing and enriched learning situa- tions. It is one of several avenues leading toward a fuller intellectual life for those \\rho might benefit from smaller classes, seminar situa- tions and inde~endent studv. General policies for the pr0gra.m are established by the Honors Committee and are administered 1)y an honors coordinator \\rho is administratively accountable to the vice president for academic affairs. A student may enter the program at any stage in his career that he and the honors coordinator believe he mav ~ r o f i t from such work. Prospective students or students alreadyLenrolled in the University should contact the coordinator for information on taking part in the program. Any student who has completed 30 semester hours at IVichita State University with a grade point average of 3.25 mav enroll in anv honors course or section for which he is otherwisk eligible. Students are expected to perform at a "B" level, equivalent to a 3.00 grade point average; but no student li7ill be dropped from the program until his performance falls below expectation for at least two consecutive semesters, and then only after an opportunity for consultation and appeals from any such decision. Independent Study Leading to a Degree With Departmental Honors Outstanding students may enroll in their junior and senior years in independent study, which may lead to a degree with depart- mental honors if the work is satisfactorily completed. Any student WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 21 who has junior standing and a cumulative grade point index of at least 3.00 is eligible to undertake a project in his major area of study. A student desiring to undertake independent study should consult with the honors coordinator and obtain approval of the instructor under whom the work will be performed, his depart- mental chairman and the dean of his college. The application must be filed with the honors coordinator and be approved by the Honors Committee not later than the registration time for the student's last semester in the University, or the semester for which he desires credit for the work, whichever comes earlier. An independent study project should consist of original research or of creative work of an outstanding order. In order to graduate with departmental honors the student should complete his project and write up the results according to specifications established by the honors coordinator. He must then stand examination on his project and such aspects of his major field of study as appear rele- vant. The honors coordinator, in consultation with the student's instructor, will appoint a three member faculty committee to con- duct the examination and determine the student's eligibility for graduation with departmental honors. Should the student not secure such a degree either because of failure to complete his project or failure in the examination, he will receive academic credit toward the regular degree for the credit hours completed, with the grade determined by the instructor under whom the work was performed. In no case may any student receive more than six hours of credit for such independent study. Academic Recognition Dean's Honor Rolls The Dean's Honor Roll shall be composed of those students en- rolled in 12 or more hours of work which may include up to six hours of creditlno credit work and who achieve a grade point index of 3.25 or higher on such work. No student receiving no credit on a creditlno credit enrollment may be included on the Dean's Honor Roll in that semester. Graduation With Excellence Degrees are conferred with distinction upon students who have shown exceptional scholarship. Students attaining a scholarship index of 3.90 receive the summa cum lnndc?, those with an index of 3.55 receive the magna cu~izlaude, and those with an index of 3.25 receive the cum lorrde award. Those performing independent study 22 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY and meeting the appropriate requirements will graduate with de- partmental honors. Withdrawal Voluntary Withdrawal Voluntary withdrawal on the part of the student from a course or courses in which he is enrolled must follow official procedure: Procedure ( 1 ) Consult adviser, obtain drop slip(s) at this time, and have adviser sign in appropriate place. ( 2 ) Take drop slip(s) to instructor(s) for grade and signature. ( 3 ) Take drop slip(s) and certificate of registration to dean's office for final signature. ( 4 ) Take completed drop slip(s) and certificate of registration to the Enrollment Office. (5) Refund, if any, will be made according to the schedule pub- lished in the Schedule of Cou~..ses. ( 6 ) Complete withdrawal from the University must be made in writing to the dean's office. Grade ( 1 ) A drop slip marked "M7d" indicates that withdrawal from the course has occurred, but no grade has been earned. ( 2 ) A drop slip marked "i4'F"indicates that withdrawal from the course has occurred, that a grade of "WF" will appear on the stu- dent's permanent record, and that this grade will count as an "F" when the student's grade point average is calculated. ( 3 ) During the first 10 \\reeks of the semester (or the correspond- ing period of a Summer Session), a student may withdraw by official procedure from a course with either " W d or "WF" depending on his status in the course at the time of \vithdrau.al. as judged l>v his instructor. ( 4 ) After the tenth week of the semester (or the corresponding period of a Summer Session). a student who withdraws from a course shall receive the grade of "WF" unless he makes complete withdrawal from the University, in {vhich case his grades shall be determined by his instructors according to his status in the courses at the time of withdrawal. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 23 Adminlstrative Withdrawal -4dministrative withdrawal ma)- be initiated by the student's dean's office in the follo\iing instances: Class attendance so irregular that in the instructor's opinion full benefit cannot be derived from the course; Consecutive absence for two weeks or more; Failure to withdraw from one or more classes by the official pro- cedure given above; Failure to make complete withdrawal from the University by the official procedure given above; Failure to be accepted by a baccalaureate college before the com- pletion of 72 credit hours; Behavior prejudicial to the University. Procedure (1) The student will be notified by the dean's office before final action is taken, and \vill be given a chance to explain his position. ( 2 ) In the case of official notices from the dean's office which are ignored, or returned because the address given by the student at the time of enrollment is incorrect, aclministrative withdrawal will take place. Grade A grade of "WF" will be officially recorded on the student's per- manent record for a course or courses from which he is officially withdrawn; this grade mill count as an "F" when the student's grade point average is calculated. Probation and Dismissal Standards Regulations governing probation and dismissal standards are estab- lished by the various colleges of the University and are to be found in the introductory statement for each college. The Court of Student Academic Appeals The University faculty has established a procedure to adjudicate disputes arising out of the classroom. The jurisdiction of the court includes appeals from students who feel they have been treated unfairly either as to the course grade they receive, or in countering charges of plagiarism, cheating, etc., that an instructor may levy. The court is regarded as an agency to resolve differences that cannot be settled within the framework of the student-faculty classroom relationship. 24 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Any student may use the appeal procedure. Forms are available in the Office of the Vice President for Student Affairs. The general procedure will be explained to students when they pick up the form. The court is an important safeguard for students. Requirements for Graduation A total of at least 124 hours of credit, acceptable toward the degree for which the student is working, is required. This means hours of credit earned and does not include courses with grades of F, Wd, WF, Au, NCR, or I. In addition, a student must have a credit point index of 2.00 or over at the time of graduation. This rule applies to students whose first day of admission to any institution of collegiate rank was on or after September 1958. For the purpose of graduation, a grade point average of 2.00 or better must be earned on all \irork taken at this University which could be applied to the degree sought. A credit point index of 2.00 or better must be achieved in the student's major. No student shall be allowed credit toward graduation for D grade work in excess of one-quarter of total hours. A minimum of 40 hours must be taken in courses numbered 300 and 400 after a total of at least 50 hours and 120 credit points has been attained. At least 30 hours must be taken at Wichita State University and 24 of the last 30 hours or 50 of the last 60 hours must be taken in residence. Not more than six hours of the last 30 nor 10 hours of the total number of hours required for graduation may be nonresident work, such as extension or correspondence courses, provided the dean of college consents. Prescribed Fields of Study (Core Curriculum) (I) Mathematics and Natural Sciences: 9 hours. Courses must be taken in at least tiro of the four subdivisions; a minimum of four hours must be a laboratory science. ( a ) mat he ma tic.^: Any mathematics course taken for degree credit. ( b ) Chemistry: All courses except 201. Geology: 101 ( 4 ) , 111 ( 5 ) , 112 ( 4 ) , 201 ( 3 ) . Physical Science: 101 ( 5 ) . Physics: 103 ( 5 ) , 123 ( 5 ) , 124 ( 5 ) , 243 ( 5 ) , 244 ( 5 ) . ( c ) Biology: 100 ( 4 ) , 111 ( 4 ) , 112 ( 4 ) . Biological Science: 102 ( 5 ) . ( d ) Engineering: 127 ( 3 1 , 199 ( 3 ) , 300 ( 3 ) . WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 25 (11) Communications: 8 hours. Six hours must be in English composition or grammar a and two in Speech 111. ( a ) English: 111 " ( 3 ) ;and one of the following courses: 211 ( 3 ) , 225t ( 3 ) , 311 ( 3 ) , 312 ( 3 ) , 313 ( 3 ) , 314 ( 3 ) . ( b ) Speech: 111 ( 2 ) , additional courses: 212 ( 2 ) , 228 ( 3 ) . (111) Humanities: 12-15 hours, t Courses must be taken in at least three of the six subdivisions. ( a ) Art: All art history courses except 407g and 463. Afusic: 113 ( 2 ) , 114 ( 2 ) , 161 ( 2 ) , 315 ( 2 ) , 316 ( 2 ) , 331 ( 3 ) , 332 ( 3 ) , 493 ( 2 ) ; ensembles and appliecl music where background justifies. Speech: 143 ( 3 ) . ( b ) Histonj: 101 ( 4 ) , 102 ( 4 ) , 103 ( 4 ) , 109 ( 4 ) , 131 ( 4 ) , 132 ( 4 ) ,and all other history courses except 300 and 498. ( c ) Literature (English or foreign): English 103 ( 3 ) , 104, ( 3 ) , 201 ( 3 ) , 223 ( 3 ) , 224 ( 3 ) , 240 ( 3 ) , 252 ( 3 ) , 280 ( 3 ) , 309 (31 , 333 ( 3 ) , plus all literature courses as alternates; French, German or Spanish literature courses. ( d ) Philosophy and Religion: Philosophy, all courses; religion, all courses. ( e ) American Studies: All courses except 498 and 499. ( f ) Humanif ies: 102 ( 4 ) . (IV) Social Sciences: 9-12 hours. $ Courses must be taken in at least three of the five subdivisions. ( a ) Anthropology: All courses. ( b ) Economics: BA 211 ( 3 ) , BA 212 ( 3 ) ,Econ. 211 ( 3 ) , Econ. 212 (3) , Econ. 221 ( 3 ) , Econ. 222 ( 3 ) , any upper division course. ( c ) Political Science: All 100 and 200-level courses, except 150 and 200. ( d ) Psychology: 111 ( 3 ) , all other psychology courses. ( e ) Sociology: 111 ( 3 ) . All other sociology courses may be counted after the student has completed Sociology 111. (V) Electives: 4 hours. Four hours of eleetives in courses offered . . by any department except the student's major department. (Ex- ception: Music majors may take marching band, and physical education majors may take physical education in the 101-108 series under this section.) These electives mav include courses in aero- space studies, military science, physical education and marching band. Stndents exceptionally qualifird in English ;IS selected hy the English depnrtrnent may h r exempted froni thc roniposition requiren~tnt or may h r invitrd to rnroll in English 211 rnther than 111. Thew students, upon coniplrtion of English 211 or upon rrcommrndation of the department, will have satisfird their English Communicntions requirements: Other- wise they must complrte the rvquirenients with one of the additional English coursrs listed above under "Communications." t For English majors and minors. t Selection from 111 and IV must total 24 hours with a minmum of 12 in group 111 and a minimum of nine in group TV. 26 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Additional Requirements The credits of transfer students will be evaluated on the basis of the nature of the course at the institution from which the transfer is made. The student must meet the specific graduation requirements of the college from which he expects to graduate. The specific requirements for major and minor fields of study must be met. A student whose college program has not been interrupted by more than two consecutive cabendar years may graduate under the requirements in effect at the University on the date he first entered any college or university or the requirements of any subsequent Catalog, provided however, that in no case will a student be allowed to graduate under the requirements of a Catalog in effect earlier than two years preceding his matriculation at this University. If his college program has been interrupted by more than two consecutive years a student will be subject to the Catalog require- ments in effect when he enters, or if he elects, the requirements of a later Catalog. The student's financial obligations to the University must be paid in full before a diploma or transcript of record \vill be issued. A Second Bachelor's Degree To be eligible for a second bachelor's degree a student must complete 30 hours in residence in the school from which a second degree is sought in addition to the work required for the first bachelor's degree. Financial Information The current fees, listed below, are subject to change by action of the Board of Regents and/or the legislature. General Academic Fees Resident (Graduate and Undergraduate) 512.00 per cr. hour Nonresident (Graduate and Undergraduate) . . . . . 431.65 per cr. hour Campus Privilege Fees The campus privilege fee is required of every student enrolled for work on or off the Wichita State University campus at the rate of $3.65 per credit or clock hour during the regular semesters and WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 27 Summer Session, in accordance with University policy. The fee will be distributed to pay revenue bonds for parking, Campus Activities Center, stadium addition, Life Sciences Building, the new power plant, library, and for Student Health Services, athletic admis- sions, forensic, Student Government Association, University Forum Board, student publications, concerts, drama, opera productions, etc. Campus Activity Center Operations Fee Each student will be charged a Campus Activity Center operations fee, each semester and Summer Session, as follows: l through8hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2.25 9 through 17 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2.50 18 hours and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2.75 Library Revenue Bond Fee A library revenue 1)oncl fee of 82.50 per student per semester and Summer Session, is charged to support the library revenue bond issue. Audit Courses The charge per semester hour for courses audited is the same as for courses taken for credit. The charge for lioncredit courses, unless otherwise specified, is the same as for credit courses. Extension Courses A. Graduate credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $18.00 per hour B. Undergraduate credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.00 per hour C. No credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.00 per hour D. Noncredit courses based on actual operating costs Workshop Fees Onehour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $26.50 Twohours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.00 Three hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.50 Four hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90.00 Contracts and Compensatory Charges This schedule does not limit the chargcs which may be collected under arrangements with other governmental or private agencies, except that such arrangements may not provide for lesser charges. Compensatory or other charges to more nearly cover actual costs of instruction are specifically authorized. 28 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Departmental Fees 1. hlus~c-During the academic school year, undergraduates en- rolled in six or more hours will be charged no fees for the follow- ing ensembles: 3ltisic 111-511A, 111-.512A, 111-5133, 111-51%. 111-5125I, and 112-512H. No fees will be charged graduate stu- dents enrolled in the above courscs. Summer Session: No fees for these ensembles will bc charged to undergraduate or graduate students enrolled for two or more credit hours in courscs other than the above. 2. AEROSI'ACE FKE-S3.50STUDIES per semester. 3. ~ ~ I L I T A R YSCIENCEFEE--%.^^ per semester. 4. Mus~c-Instrzrmcnt Rental: Instrument rental fee of 34.50 per semester or Summer Session is charged each student requesting the use of a musical instrument owned by if'ichita State University. 5. L~RORATORY be assessed toFEES:The follo\iling fees will recover cost of supplies and breakage. Additional fees will be as- sessed where breakage is excessive. Per Course Chemistry laboratories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $10 Biology laboratories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Geoloev laboratories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ~eran;ics-181, 281,381,481, 511, 577 and 578 . . . . . . . 10 Sculpture--185, 285, 385, 455, 509, 577 and 578 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Miscellaneous Fees Late registration fees: 1 through 3 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 through 6 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 7 or more hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This fee is charged for registration after the beginning of classes. Advanced standing examination fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification carddfee-permanent card . . . . . . . Orientation, new University student fee . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcript per copy charge after first copy . . . . . College of Health Related Professions equivalency examination fee Teacher placement fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residual testing fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACT fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEP fee Drop and Add Fee .4. Drops. Preregistered students may drop courses during regis- tration without charge. Aftcr registration and before the end of the second \\reek of classes (first week in Summer Session) students \i~ill receive a full refund of general academic and spe- cial fees minus a 313 transaction fee for each course dropped. There will be no refund on partial withdrawal after the second week of classes (first week in Summer Session). WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 29 B. Adds. During the first week of classes students may add courses to their schedule with the signature of the dean of the college in which the student is enrolled. During the second week of classes an add card must carry the signature of the instructor and the dean. Students who wish to add courses after thc second week of classes must have approval by the University's Exceptions Committee. C. Drops and Adds. When an approved change of schedule in- volves a drop and add, the fees already paid for the course dropped will apply to the fees for the course being added. A $15 service charge will be assessed for each drop/add trans- action. D. All changes in enrollment become effective on the day the add and/or drop card is received in the Enrollment Office. SPECIALNOTE: In cases where the schedule change is required because of University regulations, clerical errors, misadvising, or change made in the schedule by the University, the dean of the student's college may waive the 315 transaction fee. Unpaid Fees Records of students who leave the University with uncleared obligations may be impounded in the Records Office, and no transcript of record will be issued unless the account is cleared. A student will not be permitted to enroll unless all fees are paid. Assessment and Collection The University controller is responsible for assessment and collec- tion of student fees. A committee consisting of the assistant to the president for finance and business manager, the director of Summer Session and a faculty member from the College of Busi- ness Administration constitutes the Board of Appeals for students who believe their fees have been incorrectly assessed. The decision of this committee is final. Period of Payment All semester fees including the laboratory fees are due and payable in full at the time of enrollment. Students whose fees are not paid in full will not be permitted to attend class. (Fees of students spon- sored by recognized foundations or loan funds are presumed to be paid on presentation to the controller of written recognition of responsibility for such fees.) Refund Policy The following refund policy shall apply to the general academic, campus privilege, and private lessons fees, except $15 of non- 30 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY returnable fees (students carrying seven hours or less, nonreturn- able fee is S5),upon application, for a student who withdraws: 1. Within 1:3 days after the First day of classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% 2. After the thirteenth day after the first day of classes and during the first one-third of the semester or Summer Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50% 3. After the first one-third of the semester or Summer Session . . . . None Housing Expenses Contract costs-University-owned residence halls. Room and board -$950 per year or $475 per semester. Installment payments may be arranged. All housing contrncts, ichcther for University-ozcneci or priuately ounccl housing, are made on a nine-month basis, unlcss specific arrangements are 17mde to the contrary. For information concerning housing regulations and types of housing available to students, see the Student Services section of the Catalog. Financial Aids Assistantships and Student Employment Undergraduate Employment Students may earn a portion of their educational expenses through part-time employment during the school year either through the regular student employment program or the college work-study program. Application for regular employment may be made to the par- ticular department or to the placement office for aid in finding employment. Application for work-study employment is made in the Office of Student Financial Aid. Eligibility for regular or work-study employment: (1) Accepted for enrollment or enrolled as a full-time student ( 12 undergraduate hours or nine graduate hours). ( 2 ) Need-Students with a demonstrated financial need receive priority in placement. (If justified in terms of need, work-study participants may be considered for additional financial aid in the form of scholarships, opportunity grants, and loans.) Selection of students to be employed will be made by the Office of Student Financial Aid, 101 Morrison Hall. Employment authorizations are subject to the approval of the financial aids office and the Committee on Scholarships and Student Aid. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 31 Departmental Assistants Academic assistantships are open to upper division students who have been recommended by their respective departments. Depart- ments may select sophomores with outstanding ability. These assistants grade papers, assist in laboratories, and assume the duties of clerical or technical assistants. Clerical and Technical Assistants Clerical assistants must be recommended by the department con- cerned. Technical assistants must have the committee's permission, be recommended by the department head, have upper division standing, and have an overall and major department grade of 2.25. Library Assistants Library work is available to both men ancl women students. Inter- ested students should apply to the librarian or to the Career Plan- ning and Placement Center. Custodial and Food Service Workers Work is available for a limited number of students in these areas. Interested students should apply to the Office of Buildings and Grounds or to the Office of Director of Food Service. Work-Study Program This program provides a limited number of part-time work assign- ments for students \\rho are in need of earnings from such employ- ment so as to pursue their courses of study. Conditions of eligibility include that a student must: (1) If currently enrolled, be in good standing and in full-time undergraduate or graduate attendance. (Preregistered freshmen and transfer students are also eligible.) ( 2 ) Be capable of maintaining satisfactory standing while em- ployed. ( 3 ) Be a national of the United States or intend to become a permanent resident. Those students from low-income families will be provided prefer- ence in placement, but all students of determined need will be considered for employment. Employment will be limited to an average of 15 hours per week in which classes are in session, or for not more than 40 hours in any other week. Selection of students to be employed will be made by the Office of Student Financial Aid, 101hlorrison Hall. 32 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Graduate Assistantships Graduate assistantship grants are made in several departments upon recommendation of the department concerned and the dean of the Graduate School. These assistantships carry a stipend of up to $2,400. Application should be made to the dean of the Graduate School. Federal Aid Programs Educational Opportunity Grants These grants are made from federal funds allocated to Wichita State University under Title IV of the Higher Education Act of 1965. Grants will range from $200 to 51.000 per year. Students who submit financial aid applications as of January 1 will be considered for these grants if they qualify uncler the re- quirements of the United States Office of Education for the program. Eligibility will be assessed by consideration of the resources at the students' command as well as assets of his parents. Approval for these grants will be based upon the student's finan- cial need and capability of maintaining good standing. Full-time student status must be maintained. A "financial aid package" consisting of aid from various qualify- ing sources is approved for each recipient. The Educational Oppor- tunity Grant portion does not have to be repaid; however, all loans received as a part of the "package" must be repaid. Other matching funds Wichita State University is required to use in approving such a "package" includes student employment, scholarships, and other qualified sources. Information may be obtained from the Office of Student Financial Aid, 101 \!orrison Hall. Law Enforcement Education Program Wichita State University entered this program at its inception (1968) and made its first commitments for the spring semester 1969. The funds are provided by the federal government through the Law Enforcement Assistance Administration, United States Department of Justice. Students who are serving in the law enforcement field may be awarded grants for general academic and special fees, books and supplies. They may also be eligible for consideration for loans. Those students \\rho are preparing for careers in law enforcement and are in full-time attendance in approved fields may also be con- sidered for a 1 a \ ~ enforrernent stuclrmt loan. Provision is made for cancellation of loans at the rate of 25 per- centum for each year of full-time employment in a public state, WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 33 local or federal law enforcement agency. The notes are three percent interest bearing over a maximum of 10 years repayment. Deferral of principal and interest is provided for a maximum of three years for military service in the armed forces of the United States. National Defense Student Loan Fund This fund established under Title I1 of Public Law 85-864 provides for major long-term loans for \YSU students of all class levels. Loans are granted on a competitive basis since funds available do not meet the demand. Undergraduates may borrow up to $1,000 each year and not more than $5,000 during their entire under- graduate program. Graduates may borrow up to $2,500 each year. Total loans made to any student may not exceed $10,000. These loans are made for educational expenses. Interest on these loans do not commence until nine months after leaving attendance. Interest of three percent per year is charged. The principal payment plus interest thereon is repayable at the rate of 10 percent annually over a period of 10 years following graduation or leaving school. klonthly, bimonthly, or quarterly payments may be required. Any borrower who serves as a full-time teacher in a public ele- mentary or secondary school, in a private nonprofit elementary or secondary school, or in an institution of higher education may have his loan cancelled at the rate of 10 percent for each year of approved teaching service up to a maximum of 50 percent of his total loan. Certain teaching positions qualify for a 15 percent cancellation rate and a maximum of 100 percent designated by the commissioner of education. If a borrower becomes a member of the armed forces of U. S., the total amount loaned after April 13, 1970, plus interest can be reduced at the rate of 12%percent for each year of consecutive military service up to a maximum of 50 percent of the loan. Applications are available at the Office of Student Financial Aid, 101 Morrison Hall. Interested applicants should observe deadlines of filing: For fall semester-January 1. For spring semester-November 1. For Summer Session-April 1. Nursing Scholarships These funds established under Title VII and Title VIII of Public Health Service Act as amended provide for major long-term loans and scholarships for WSU students of junior and senior standing who have been accepted into the College of Health Related Pro- fessions School of Nursing. 34 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Eligible students may apply for nursing scholarships. Scholar- ships range up to $1,500 for an academic year. Eligibility will be assessed by consideration of the financial resources at the student's command as well as assets of his parents. Approval for these scholarships will be based upon the student's financial need and scholastic ability. Full-time student status must be maintained. Applications are available at the Office of Student Financial Aid, 101 Morrison Hall. Interested applicants should observe deadlines of filing: For fall semester-January 1. For spring semester-November 1. For Summer Session-April 1. Nursing Loans These funds established under Title VII and Title VIII of Public Health Service Act as amended provides for major long-term loans and scholarships for WSU students of junior and senior standing who have been accepted into the College of Health Related Pro- fessions School of Nursing. Eligible students may apply to borrow up to $1,500 each academic year and not more than $6,000 in the aggregate for any student. Loans are made for educational expenses. Interest of three percent per year does not commence until nine months after leaving attend- ance. The principal payment plus interest thereon is repayable at the rate of 10 percent annually over a period of 10 years following graduation or leaving school. Monthly, bimonthly, or quarterly payment may be required. For any borro\ver who serves as a pro- fessional nurse (including teaching in any of the fields of nurse training and service as an administrator, supervisor, or consultant in any of the fields of nursing) in any public or nonprofit private institution or agency, up to 30 percent of his loan, plus accrued interest, may be canceled at the rate of 10 percent of the amount of such loan plus interest thereon, that was unpaid on the first day of such service for each con~plete year the borrower engages in such employment. For any borrower who serves as a professional nurse in a public or nonprofit hospital in any area determined to have a substantial shortage of such nurses at such hospitals, up to 100 percent of his loan, plus accrued interest, may be canceled at the rate of 15 per- cent of the amount, plus interest thereon, that was unpaid on the first day of such employment for each complete year he engages therein, beginning on or after September 1, 1968. Federal Guaranteed Loans This program became effective in September 1967 and is adminis- tered through regional offices of the Office of Education. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 35 Through this program the maximum undergraduate loan is $1,500 per academic year, not to evceecl an ag~regate total of $5,000. The maximum graduate loan is $1,500 per academic year, with the total aggregate of undergraduate and graduate not to exceed $7,500. A student with an adjusted family income of less than 515,000 a year pays no interest while in an eligible school. The federal govern- ment pays the lender the interest during this period. The student begins repayment to the lender when he qraduates or withdraws from school. An educational certificate is required from the Office of Student Financial Aid, 101 Xlorrison Hall. Applications are available there. Students must then apply to their hometown lending institutions (banks, savings and loan associations, credit unions, etc.). University Aid Programs Under the provisions of the 1963 Kansas Senate bill No. 152, a Board of Trustees was appointed by the governor. This Board of Trustees administers the endowment property formerly owned by the University of Wichita in support of the educational undertakings of Wichita State University. I t receives and administers gifts, be- quests and trusts and manages endowed property and funds as pre- scribed by the donors and approved by the state Board of Regents. Scholarship funds and awards now under the jurisdiction of the Board of Trustees and administered by them in cooperation with the state Board of Regents are listed below. Awards University Citizenship Awards The Wichita Branch of the American Association of University Women established in 1927 an annual gift of $25 to the girl of the junior class who attained the highest efficiency in University citizenship. American Civilization Research Award An award of $50 from a fund established by a private donor will be made annually to a student in American civilization classes whose research project is judged by a selected committee to be the most outstanding submitted during the academic year. Cosmopolitan Achievement Award in Accounting Established in 1953. An award of $50 is made annually to an upper division student with a declared major in accounting upon the recommendation of the Department of Accounting. 36 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Thurlow Lieurance Memorial Fund This award was established in 1964, is given to a senior in the Division of 3lusic in the College of Fine Arts in recognition of scholarship, service to the University and community, and out- standing achievement in the development of his talent. Frank A. Nef Memorial Award Established in 1961, in memory of Dean Frank A. Neff, this award is made to the outstanding junior in the College of Business Administration. Larry Ricks Geology Award Fund Established in 1957, in memory of Larry Ricks. The interest from the investment is used as a cash gift or award made at the end of each academic year to an undergraduate student in geology who shows great promise and excellence in scholarship. H . W . Sullivan Award Established in 1966 in memory of H. W. Sullivan. This award is given annually to the graduating senior who has achieved the highest cum~llative grade point index for work completed toward an engineering degree. The award consists of income .from the H. W. Sullivan funds. William H . Swett Prize for Eficiency William H. Swett, by the terms of his will, established a prize consisting of the income from S5,OOO. "The yearly income therefrom shall be given at the end of each school year to the graduating student who shall have attained the highest average in his studies and school work during his or her last year in college." The fund became available in 1924. Scholarships The following scholarship funds are available to students of Wichita State University. All inquiries regarding student aid and all applications for undergraduate scholarships must be addressed to the Office of Student Financial Aid. Applications for graduate fellowships must be made to the dean of the Graduate School. WSU Recognition Scholarship An honorary award given to a selected group of students with outstanding high school records. Certain special privileges are extended with this scholarship. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 37 The Wichita Chapter of the National Association of Accountants Accounting Awards These awards, established in 1962 by the Wichita Chapter of the National Association of Accountants, will be presented annually in the amount of 350 to two or more full-time male students who are juniors majoring in accounting. Criteria for selection consist of high academic achievement and qualities of leadership and charac- ter. Announcement of award winners will be made at the October meeting of the association. Administratiue Management Society Established in 1958 by the Wichita Chapter of the National m c e Management Association. This is an annual scholarship in the amount of $350 for a junior in business administration majoring in management. The basis for selection of the recipient will be scholastic achievement and financial need. The final date for appli- cation is January 1. Advertising Club of Wichita Scholarship Established in 1%2 by the Advertising Club of Wichita, the scholar- ship is an annual award of $300 or $150 per semester to an adver- tising major or minor of junior or senior status. Criteria are need, scholastic record, and active participation record in outside adver- tising activities. Local Lodge 733 Clark Lindstrom Memorial Scholarship Four scholarships were established in 1962 by Aeronautical Local 733 of the International Association of Machinists. They will be granted to members of Local 733 or their children in the amount of 3200 for the year. The primary criterion for selection will be academic achievement. Each year one grant will be made to a freshman, a sophomore, a junior, and a senior. Final date for application is January 1. Air Force ROTC Scholarships Awarded to cadets in the AFROTC four-year program on a best qualified, competitive basis. Recipients have all general academic and nonrecoverable fees, texts and lab expenses paid, plus $100 per month in cash. For further information contact the Depart- ment of Aerospace Studies. Alpha Tau Sigma Delta Gamma Elizabeth Spicer and Eva C . Hangen Memorial Scholarship Fund Established by the alumni of Alpha Tau Sigma sorority. Interest on the fund to be used to award a scholarship to a deserving mem- ber of the Delta Gamma sorority. 38 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY The Wichita State University Alumni Scholarships Established in 1950 by the Wichita State University Alumni Asso- ciation, these scholarships are open to incoming freshmen and to undergraduate students. They are awarded on the basis of scholar- ship and need, and provide from $100 to $300 a year. The final date for application is January 1. Armed Forces Communications and Electronics Association Scholarship Award The AFCEA Scholarship in the amount of $500 is awarded annually to a sophomore ROTC student majoring in electronics, communica- tions engineering or technical photography. The award is made on the basis of merit and need. Applications should be submitted to the professor of military science by April 15. Army ROTC Scholarship Established in 1W4 by Department of the Army, these scholarships provide for payment of all general academic and nonrecoverable fees and books plus $100 per month during the school year. The four-year scholarship is awarded to qualified high school seniors or other students entering a four-year university for the first time. Awards are made on a best qualified, competitive basis. Three-, two- and one-year scholarships are available to qualified freshmen, sophomore and junior cadets respectively. Further information may be obtained from the professor of mili- tary science. John David Austin Memorial Scholarship Established in 1970 in memory of Jack Austin, the award will go to a junior or senior male student in the College of Business Adminis- tration. Olive Baker-Nease Scholarship Established in 1954 by Stephen G. Nease as a memorial to his wife. The annual income from the estate is available for the schol- arship stipend. Selection of scholarship winners is based upon need, academic achievement, and personality development. Final date for application is January 1. Beech Aircraft Corporation Scholarships Beech Aircraft Corporation, through the Beech Aircraft Foundation, has established two yearly scholarships for entering freshmen who are sons or daughters of Beech Aircraft Corporation employees. The grants are for $500 each and are renewable for the second, or sophomore, year. Studies to be supported include the fields of WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 39 aeronautical, industrial, and electrical engineering; business ad- ministration, including accounting, marketing, production, indus- tral relations, computer application; political science; education, and the sciences. Students must maintain a grade of "C" or better and write a brief report at the end of the school year for Beech Aircraft Foundation. The final date for application is January 1. The Olive Ann Beech Civil Aviation Private Pilot's License Award The Olive Ann Beech Civil Aviation Private Pilot's License Award is presented each year to one member of the Olive Ann Beech Angel Flight and one member of the Walter H. Beech Arnold Air Society. The award provides for complete flying instruction culminating in a private pilot's license for both recipients. Applicants must be a junior or senior member of Angel Flight or Arnold Air Society. Applications for these awards should be submitted no later than September 1of each year to the Department of Aerospace Studies, WSU Armory. Olive Ann Beech Music Scholarship Fund Student applicants must be recommended by the Division of Music Scholarship Committee to the Wichita State University Scholarship Committee for scholarship grants. Applicants must be music majors with 3.00 overall grade point average. Grants are not limited to any specific amount. Walter H. Beech Squadron Scholarship Established in 1952 by Mrs. Olive Ann Beech and daughters. This scholarship carries a stipend of $600 ($330 per year for two years). Recipient must be a junior or senior and an active member of the Arnold Air Society. The final date for application is January 1. The Walter H. Beech Scholarships in Aeronautical Engineering and Aerospace Studies This scholarship is awarded in two parts. The freshman scholarship will be granted to five freshmen for one year in the amount of $250 each on the basis of their high school records and entrance examinations. The upperclass scholarship is awarded at the end of the freshman year to one of the five freshman scholars who at. tained the best academic record. This award shall be a three-year grant in the amount of $600annually. A 3.00 grade average must be maintained to retain the scholarship. Final date for application is January 1. Biological Science Scholarship The Sedgwick County Jjedical Society has established a trust fund to provide scholarships for students preparing for careers in medi- 40 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY cine or research relating to medicine. One scholarship in the amount of S250 will be granted each year to an incoming freshman. The grant may be renewed each year for three years if the recipient maintains a 3.00 grade average and remains in the biological science field. Final date for application is January 1. The Boeing Company Scholarships The Boeing Company contributes annually for scholarship purposes. The scholarshir, awards substantiallv cover general academic and - nonrecoverable fees. The awards are renewable for four years. Boeing scholarship applicants must be entering freshman students who enroll in courses leading to a degree in one of the following fields of study: Enpineering, mathematics, physics or business ad- ministration. In selectinc the winners of the scholarshi~s the com- L. mittee will consider the applicant's scholastic record, his interest in and personal qualifications for his chosen field of study, character and leadership qualities, and need for financial assistance in carry- ing on his educational program. Application must be made through the Office of Student Financial Aid no later than January 1. Luella Bosworth Scholarship Fund Established in honor of the class of 1902, income from this fund shall be used for scholarship awards to students majoring in English. Classification as a senior and the highest overall grade average will be considered by the Department of English and College of Liberal Arts and Sciences in recommending students for this award. Applications are made through the Department of English to the Office of Student Financial Aid prior to the close of each spring semester. Merrill Bosworth Music Schobrship This scholarship, established in 1961, is administered by the Division of h4usic, and is awarded to a music major whose chief performing medium is flute. Final date for application is January 1. Steven W .Burnam Memorial Scholarship Established in 1968, this award is made to a mechanical engineering student. The award may be renewed as long as scholarship require- ments are met. Marjorie Calkins Piano Scholarship The Marjorie Calkins Piano Scholarships were created in 1968 through a bequest by Russell Calkins and his son Russell W. Calkins, 111. Designed specifically for piano majors, this fund provides $300 to be awarded annually to a qualified applicant upon recommenda- WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 41 tion of the Division of Milsic. Applicants should contact the dean of the College of Fine Arts, IVichita State University, Wichita, Kansas, on or before January 1of each year. Wichita Chapter of Certified Public Accountants Scholarship Established in 1957 by the Wichita Chapter of the Kansas Society of Certified Public Accountants, these scholarships are awarded annually to full-time students who have signified their intention of taking a curricular emphasis in accounting and have at least a 3.00 overall grade point index. Other factors considered in granting the scholarships are financial need and accounting potential. The awards may consist of one $300 scholarship, two $150 scholarships, or three $100 scholarships, but, the total must not exceed $300. The Ann V .Christian Scholarship Established in 1964 by R. V. Christian and family. Income from the fund shall be used for scholarships to entering freshmen major- ing in chemistry. Final date for application is January 1. City of Wichita Scholarships The City Commissioners annually award a sum of money from the one and one-half mill levy for scholarship purposes. The Uni- versity makes a number of grants covering part or all of the fees to students with outstanding academic records. The grants are for one year and are renewable to students maintaining a B or better aver- age. The stipulations of the scholarships are: Applicant must have a good scholarship record from high school and recommendations. Some grants are based on scholarship alone, others on scholarship and need for finanical aid. Final date for applications is January 1. Flora Colby Clough Scholarship Established in 1918, the interest on $500 to be awarded to a young woman in the Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, preferably one specializing in En~lish, awarded upon nomination by the English department. National Cystic Fibrosis Research Foundation, Scholarship An annual scholarship of 8300 to a student or students enrolled in the program leading toward the Certificate of Applied Science in. inhalation therapy. Jenkin H . Davies Music Scholarship Established in 1964, this scholarship is awarded annually by the Division of Music to music majors. Final date of application is January 1. 42 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Delta Delta Delta Scholarships These are annual scholarships of at least $100 per year given to a junior or senior girl at the time it is awarded. The basis upon \irhich selection is made is scholastic achievement and financial need. Applications may be obtained in the financial aids office at the be- ginning of second semester. Elmer Fox G Company Student Scholarships Established in 1971 by WSU alumni employed by Elmer Fox & Company and the Elmer Fox and Company Foundation, these two $1,200 two-year scholarships are awarded to junior accounting majors in the College of Business Administration. Selection is made by the Department of Accounting and is based on academic achieve- ment, financial need, and aptitude for success in public accounting. Grand Army of the Republic Living Memorial Scholarship For a lineal descendant of a Union Veteran of the Civil War. See Logopedics Scholarships. Grand Chapter of the Kansas Order of Eastern Star Scholarship A scholarship of $300 is awarded to an eligible junior for use in his senior year. The applicant must be a Mason or member of the Order of the Eastern Star or a child of such members. Applications may be obtained in the financial aids office. The award will be made in August. Dr. John L. Evans Scholarship Established in 1959, this award is available to those whom the authorities of the University may deem worthy, whose ability merits the award, and who need financial help to pursue the premedical course at the University. The final date for application is January 1. Fletcher-McKinley Scholarship Fund The Fletcher-hlcKinley Scholarship Fund has been established in honor of Dr. Worth A. Fletcher, professor of chemistry, and in memory of Dr. Lloyd hlcKinley, who also served as professor of chemistry at Wichita State University. Contributions to this fund are made through the WSU Alumni Association. The amount of the scholarship Li~ill be determined each year by the amount of income from the fund. Foreign Student Scholarship Wichita State University accepts the recon~mendation of the Insti- tute of International Education, 800 Second Avenue, New York 17 N. Y. Direct all queries to this address. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 43 The Glen Gardner Memorial Prize The Glen Gardner hfemorial Prize shall be awarded annually at Commencement to a \T'ichita State University junior student, of a minority group, in recognition of outstanding University and com- munity citizenship, ~vithout emphasis on academic attainment. The initial scholarship award shall be at least 3300. At the appropriate time prior to Commencement, the academic vice r~resiclent and the dean of sh~dents of Wichita State University shall submit a list of candidates for the prize to the University Board of Trustees. The Board of Trustees, assisted by Mrs. Glen Gardner, shall then select the recipient. Sam R. Gardner Memorial Golf Scholarship This endowed scholarship, established in 1968 by the parents, Mr. and hlrs. Sam h4. Gardner, and friends of Sam R. Gardner, is to be awarded to an upperclass student with a grade point average of 2.75 or better. The award will be income from the sum of more than 55,000. A selection will be made upon the recommendation of the coach of intercollegiate golf. Gamey Geology Scholarship Fund Scholarships are a\varded annually to two or three students major- ing in petroleum geology in the amounts from $200 to $500,depend- ing on the financial need. The basis for selection of the recipients of these awards are academic achievements, interest and promise in the field of petroleum geology, and financial need. The final date for application is January 1. Jacob M. and Molly Glickmun Scholarship This endowed scholarship was established by Milton and William B. Glickman in honor of their parents, Jacob h4. and Molly Glick- man, in 1970. The fund \vill provide a 3500 yearly scholarship. The scholarship is restricted to \Trichita residents and will be awarded on the b a s i ~ of academic achievement. The Harry Gore Scholarship Fund Established in 1952, the fund provides that one-half of the income shall be used to make scholarship ,grants. Each scholarship grant is for $6,000 ($1,500 annually for four years), and is made to an entering freshman student. In determining the recipient of a Gore Scholarship the committee considers the student's scholastic record in high school, his ability and participation in general school activi- ties, and his character, industry, and ambition. The final date for application is January 1. 44 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY The Haskins cL Sells Foundation Award for Excellence in Accounting Established in 1966 by Haskins & Sells, an international CPA firm, the award of $500 is made annually to a student who is majoring in accounting and has completed, during the preceding year, the curriculum in accounting normally scheduled for the junior year, and who has enrollecl for his senior year at the University. The award winner will be selected by a committee of faculty members to be appointed by the dean of the College of Business Adminis- tration. The selection will be from the five students attaining the highest grade point average in accounting. The recipient of the award mill be known as the Haskins & Sells Scholar. Jim Hershberger Track and Field Scholarship The Jim Hershberger Annual Track and Field Scholarship was established in 1969. This scholarship, in the amount of S1,500, shall be awarded to a student-athlete in track and field upon recom- mendation by the University track and field coach, Mr. Jim Hersh- berger, and the University financial aids representative. Arthur J . Hoare Scholarship in Mathmetics Established in 1957, this fund provides that income shall be used for annual scholarships to students majoring in mathematics. Stu- dents are recommended by the mathematics department to the Office of Student Financial Aid for these scholarships. The awards shall not exceed full annual fees and costs of books. Applications are made through the Department of Mathematics prior to the close of each spring semester. Earl R. Hutton Scholarship Established in 1968 in honor of Mr. Earl R. Hutton. Annual award of $1,000, providing a renewable four-year scholarship for entering students in aeronautical engineering. The scholarship will be awarded on the basis of potential academic achievement in aero- nautical engineering. The Independent Insurance Agenb of Wichita, Znc. Established in 1956. Annual scholarship awarded to a junior or senior who is enrolled in the College of Business Administration or in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences with a major in eco- nomics. Carries a stipend of $375. The final date for application is January 1. The John C. and Maude A. James Scholarship Established in 1963 by hlaude A. James in honor of her husband, John C. James, the fund provides an income of $500 a year to be WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 45 awarded to an outstanding senior student in the College of Engi- neering. Recommendations are made by a committee from the College of Engineering to the Office of Student Financial Aid. Kansas Chapter, National Electrical Contractors Association, Znc. Scholarship A scholarship of $250 will be awarcled each year to a freshman and a sophomore majoring in electrical engineering. Selections will be based upon academic achievement, financial need, and character. Final date for application is January 1. Kappa Delta Pi, Wichita Alumni Chapter Scholarship Established in 1957, by the Wichita Alumni Chapter of Kappa Delta Pi. Provides an annual stipend of $100 awarded to an active member of the campus chapter of Kappa Delta Pi based on aca- demic achievement, promise as a teacher and need. Final date for application is January 1. Kansas Federation of Women's Club Scholarship An award of $200 a year will be given to an upperclass woman studying to be a teacher in either elementary or secondary levels. Final date for application is January 1. Kappa Pi Art Scholarships Established in 1969, two scholarships are available to outstanding undergraduates currently enrolled on the basis of their art ability, and faculty recommendations, on a semester basis in the amount of $100 and $50. Scholarship money is made available by the student art fairs sponsored by the Alpha Omega Chapter of Kappa Pi, a national honorary art fraternity and Wichita State University. Application dates will be announced each fall and spring. The John Fitzgerald Kennedy Memorial Scholarship This fund, established in 1964 as a memorial to President John F. Kennedy, was initiated by Temple Emanu-El of Wichita and joined in by the Wichita Catholic Diocese, the Wichita Council of Churches, other organizations, and numerous individuals. This scholarship is to be awarded to academically promising Negro students from Wichita high schools who do not qualify for other scholarships on the basis of superior academic record in high school and who could otherwise not afford a university education. The final date for application is January 1. KFH Scholarship in Radio A grant of $300 is awarded annually. The basis upon which the selection of the scholarship winner will be made is academic 46 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY achievement, need, potentiality for a career in radio, character and leadership. The final date for application is January 1. Kirkpatrick and Sprecker Scholarship Established in 1971 by the accounting firm of Kirkpatrick and Sprecker, these three $100 three-year awards are made to sopho- mores majoring in accounting in the College of Business Adminis- tration. Selection is by the Department of Accounting, based on academic achievement, financial need, and potential for success in accounting. Logopedics Scholarships The Logopedics Scholarship Fund provides for a limited number of scholarships ranging from $50 to $200 a semester for students planning to major in Logopedics. These scholarships are provided by the Women's Advisory Council of the Institute of Logopedics, Lambda Tau Delta, Simga Alpha, Chi Sigma, and other interested groups. Applicants are recommended by the Department of Logo- pedics to the University Scholarship Committee. Further informa- tion may be secured by writing to the Scholarship Committee, Institute of Logopedics, Wichita, Kansas. Final dates for applica- tion for the fall semester is January 1 and November 1 for the spring semester. Vincent T . Lombardi Scholarship The award, established in 1971, will be given to a member of the varsity football team who is in his junior year. The student must have a grade point average of 2.00 or better and must demonstrate qualities of leadership, character, personal discipline, pride and dedication. The Anita Lusk Scholarship This endowment fund was established by Anita Lusk. The income from this fund is to be used for scholarships to business students. especially to students recommended by the business department of Wichita High School West, Wichita, Kansas. Leonora N . McGregor Scholarship Fund Established in 1964. Income from this fund shall be used for schol- arships for students of Wichita State University. Final date for applications is January 1. The Men of Webster Scholarship Established in 1967 by the men of Webster Fraternity, founded in 1895 by Nathaniel Morrison, then president of Fairmount College, WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 47 which became a local chapter of Delta Upsilon fraternity in 1959. Income from the funds of The 54en of Webster Building Associa- tion. accumulated through the efforts of its 1,133 members, will be used to provide one or more scholarships for male students. Finan- cial need is a primary factor of selection along with other usual criteria. Final date for application is January 1. The Pearl j. Milburn Memorial Scholarship Establiqhed in 1956, the fund provides a four-year scholarship car- rying a stipend of $2,000 ($500 annually for four years) awarded to an entering freshman who has graduated from a Wichita public high school with B average or better, a record of high school ac- tivities, and need for financial assistance. Recipient must maintain a better than average scholastic record in the University and take two years of English and two years of American history during his college course. Usually awarded once every four years. Final date for application is January 1. Mortar Board Alumni Scholarship Established in 1945, a grant of 3100 will be awarded to the sopho- more girl having the highest scholastic average at the end of her freshman year. Wichita State University Music Scholarships Each year a limited number of scholarships are granted to music students planning to major in this field. Evidence of financial need, musical aptitude and overall high school grade average of B or higher constitutes the basis for recommendation for music scholar- ship grants to the University Scholarship Committee. Interested students should contact the dean of the College of Fine Arts, Wich- ita State University, Wichita, Kansas, for application blanks and detailed information. National Society of Bookkeepers Scholarship Established in 1964 by the Wichita Chapter of the National Society of Bookkeepers, this scholarship pays the general academic fees of the recipient in Accounting 114. Criteria are financial need, apti- tude for bookkeeping, and scholarship. Applicants are chosen by the Department of Accounting. with final selection being made by the education committee of the National Bookkeepers' Society. Dr. Henry Onsgard Scholarship Established in 1958 by former students and friends of Dr. Onsgkrd. The interest from the investment will be used as a stipend for one or more scholarships awarded annually to an upper-division student 48 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY majoring in history. Basis for selection will be academic achieve- ment. activities record, personal achievement, and financial need. Final date for application is January 1. The Daniel S. Pajes Prize in Art History Established in 1971 in memory of Daniel S. Pajes, a sum of $100 to be awarded annually to a junior student majoring in art history. Payne Memorial Business Education Scholarship Established in 1959 in honor of Mr. and Mrs. C . B. Payne. The scholarship is available to business education students. The basis for selection of the winner will be academic achievement and finan- cial need. The stipend is $120. The final date for application is January 1. The Personnel Management Association of Wichita Scholarship This scholarship is available to a full-time student who has attained junior status and has a proven interest in personnel administration, labor relations, or industrial relations. The award is for $150 a semester for four semesters. Academic record must be comrnen- surate with current scholarship requirements. Recipient will receive an honorary membership in the PMAW and must make at least one report to the PMAW each semester. Application blanks and further information are available in the financial aids office. Petroleum Accotlnting Conference Scholarship Established in 1971 by the Petroleum Accounting Conference of Wichita, this scholarship is a $250 award made annually to a junior or senior accounting major in the College of Business Administra- tion. Selection is on the basis of academic achievement, financial need, and evidence suggesting outstanding potential in the field of accounting. Pi M u Epsilon Mathematics Scholarship Established in 1950 by the University of Wichita (Kansas Gamma) chapter of Pi Mu Epsilon, honorary mathematics fraternity, con- sists of the interest on a scholarship fund. I t is awarded to an upper-division student with a declared major in mathematics upon the recommendation of the Department of \lathematics. The award will be made upon the recipient's enrolling as a mathematics major in the following semester. Adrian E. Pouliot Scholarsh'ip Established in 1971, the scholarship is presented to a student en- rolled in the Division of Music. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 49 The Theodore Presser Foundation Mwic Scholarship The Presser Foundation offers scholarships to one or more music majors. The awards are granted each spring by the committee on scholarships and student aid upon the recommendation of the music division faculty. The award is granted to a student in need of finan- cial aid and preference is given to those who expect to become music teachers. Charles E. Rickman Memorial Scholarship The scholarship will be presented to a high school student going into Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. Preference for the award will be given to a student who demonstrates financial need and has earned a grade point average of 3.50 or better in high school. Ritchie Construction Company, Znc. Scholarships The Ritchie Construction Company, Inc., will annually award two scholarships, one to a minority student and one to a son or daughter of an employee. Both carry stipends of up to $450 for the year. Basis for selection will be scholarship, need and character. Final date for application is January 1. James Robertson Scholarship in Znstrzcmental Conducting The scholarship, honoring James Robertson, long-time conductor of the Wichita Symphony and the University Symphony, will be awarded annually to a junior, senior or graduate student at \YSU who is pursuing an interest or career in symphonic conducting. The Minisa Chapter (NSAZ) Secretarial Scholarship Established in 1958 by the Minisa Chapter of NSAI. An annual award of $300 is granted to a girl who has graduated from a high school in Sedgwick County and who has indicated an intention to enroll in the College of Business Administration with an emphasis in secretarial training. Selection of the winner will be made on character, need for financial assistance, personality, and scholastic record in high school. Final date for application is January 1. The Savings and Loan League of Wichita Scholarship The Savings and Loan League of Wichita established this scholar- ship in the amount of $500 in 1967. The recipient of this scholarship shall be a graduate of a Sedgwick County high school, a business administration major in his junior or senior year, either male or female, with proven academic ability. Final date for application is January 1. 50 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Social Work Scholarship Fund A fund established in 1969 by the Wichita Chapter of National Association of Social Workers and the South Central Association of Social Services. Awards from this fund will be made upon recommendation of a subcommittee on grants and aids of the pro- fessional advisory committee on social work education. Applicants must be enrolled in a field experience course, be a social work major and be approved by a faculty teaching the social work sequence. The Sorosis Alumnae Award The interest earned by the Sorosis Alumnae Fund shall be awarded annually to a member of Delta Delta Delta sorority who has com- pleted at least five semesters of work, with an overall average of 3.00, and who has contributed in some outstanding manner to Wichita State University and the Delta Delta Delta sorority. F. C. Sauer Zoology Scholarship Established in 1937 by Mary E. Sauer, the interest on $1,000 to be awarded annually to a deserving student of high scholastic standing above the freshman year, preferably a zoology student, upon the recommendation of the biology department. Wichita Community Theatre Scholarship Established in 1962, a $250 scholarship will be awarded annually to a high school graduate of the Wichita area. High scholastic standing and a desire to major in speech are requisites for applica- tion. Final date for application is January 1. Dr. Walter A. Ver Wiebe Scholarship in Geology Established in 1954 by former students and friends of professor Walter A. Ver Wiebe. This scholarship bears the stipend of from 51,600 to 522,000 for four years and is awarded annually (for from $400 to $500 per year), and may be renewed provided the student is academically qualified. The applicant must be a graduate from high school (or the equivalent) with a high scholastic record, sound character, leadership qualities, and have a primary interest in geology. The applicant must have recommendations and be available for intervie\v. Recommendations are submitted to the University Scholarship Committee. The final date for application is January 1. David Bard Wainwright Memorial Scholarship Fund Established in 1968 by Mrs. Sharon Wainwright as a memorial to her husband, 1st Lt. David Bard Wainwright, graduate of WSU College of Education and distinguished military graduate of Army WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 51 ROTC, who was killed in action in the Republic of Vietnam. In- come from the fund will be used for a scholarship award to the outstanding ROTC cadet in sophomore ROTC who has not accepted a two-year Army ROTC Scholarship. Cadet selected must main- tain a minimum grade point average of 2.50, with a minimum of 3.00 in military science: he must have made contributions to Army ROTC activities during his freshman and sophomore years to include participation in Pershing Rifles and acquisition of honors for meritorious service. He must possess outstanding personality characteristics. Wall Memorial Scholarship This scholarship, given in memory of Lillie Striegel Wall and Henry V. Wall, is awarded to a foreign language major preparing to teach. It is altrarded either during the student teaching semester or for summer study in Mexico or Europe. The stipend of $200 will be awarded upon basis of need, promise as a teacher, and academic achievement. GPA of 3.00 or better. Final date for ap- plication is January 1. Wichita State University Alumni of Arthur Andersen cL? Co. Scholarship Fund Established 1965. Each year alumni of UJichita State University who are employees of Arthur Andersen & Co., an international CPA firm, contribute varying amounts which are matched by the firm to the Wichita State University Alumni of Arthur Andersen & Co. Scholarship Fund. The purpose of this scholarship fund is to stim- ulate higher academic achievement on the part of students majoring in accounting. The awards are to be made by a faculty committee organized for such purpose. The committee is to have freedom in selecting the number and amounts of awards to be given. The recip- ients of the anlards are to be known as Arthur Andersen Scholars. The Grace Wilkie Scholarship The scholarship is t h e interest from an invested principal for which women students are eligible; ho\vever, preference is given to Grace Wilkie Hall residents. Women's Aeronautical Association of Kansas Aeronautical Engineering Scholarship The scholarship is to be awarded to a junior or senior student en- rolled in aeronautical engineering and carries a stipend of $400 annually. A grade average of 2.50 or better is required. The final date for application is January 1. 52 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Women's Symphony Society Scholarship Established by the l;l'omen's Symphony Society, the scholarship is open to music majors with a stipend of from $100 to 3200 per year. ,4pplications may be obtained through the Division of 5fusic. Ira Dean Worden Scholarship The Ira Dean Worden Scholarship is given to a student in the College of Business Administration. WSU Memorial Funds Scholarships Twenty named scholarships, honoring the students and University personnel who died in an airplane crash in Colorado on October 2, 1970, are provided through the \VSU hlemorial Funds. The schol- arships, made possible by generous donations from citizens of \Vichita. the state, and the nation, \\rill perpetuate the names OF those who died. SCHOLARSHIPSHONORISGSTUDENTS-The following 15 scholarships honor the 14 student football players and the student equipment manager xirho died in the crash. First consideration for the scholar- ships is given to students coming from the high school of the player in whose name the scholarship was established. Each year each scholarship will provide one full-fee scholarship for a Kansas resi- dent or a half-fee scholarship for an out-of-state student in the name of one of the 15students who died. Marvin G.Brown Memorial Scholarship Donald G. Christian Memorial Scholarship JohnW .Duren memorial Scholarship MarfinE. Harrison Memorial Scholarship Ronald G. Johnson memorial Scholarship Randall B. Kiesau Memorial Scholarship Malory W .Kimmel Memorial Scholarship Car2 R. Krueger Memorial Scholarship Stephan A. Moore Memorial Scholarship Thomas B. Owen, Jr., Memorial Scholarship Eugene Robinson Memorial Scholarship Thomas T . Shedden memorial Scholarship Richard N . Stines Memorial Scholarship JohnR. Taylor Memorial Scholarship Jack R. Vetter Memorial Scholarship SCHOLARSHIPSHONORISC,UNIVERSITYPERSONSEL-Five scholarships, honoring University staff members and their wives \vho died in the crash, also have been established from the WSU h4emorial Funds. together with funds donated to WSU specifically in memory of these individuals. The purposes and award criteria for each of the scholarships are as follows: WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 53 Carl Fahrbach Memorial Gradztate Assistantship See Graduate Assistantships, Fellowships and Scholarships section of this Catalog. Floyd W . Farmer Memorial Scholarship Awards from the Floyd Farmer 34emorical Scholarship funds will be made to graduates of Wichita high schools who have demon- strated exceptional ability in track and field competition. The awards also will be based on high school grade point average, college potential as indicated by aptitude tests, and leadership qual- ities. The awards are for one year and are renewable upon recom- mendation by an advisory committee. The scholarship is a memo- rial to Floyd Farmer, who was a track enthusiast and administrative assistant to the director of athletics at WSU. Albert C . and Marion Katzenmeyer Memorial Scholarship Awarded to the WSU junior who has demonstrated exceptional leadership and performance in intercollegiate athletics; considera- tion is given to academic achievement and financial need for special preference to a married athlete. The scholarship is for one year and is renewable upon recommendation by an advisory committee. The scholarship is a memorial to Bert Katzenmeyer, director of athletics at WSU, and his wife Marion. Thomas A. Reeves Memorial Scholarship Awarded to a student who has demonstrated an aptitude and a de- sire to pursue a career as an athletic trainer; consideration is given to students currently enrollecl. The award is for one year and is renewable upon recommendation of an advisory committee. The scholarship is a memorial to Thomas A. Reeves, head trainer for athletics. Ben and Helen Wilson Memorial Scholarship Awarded to the WSU athlete who, in his junior year, has demon- strated exceptional leadership and performance in intercollegiate football; academic achievement and financial need are considered. The scholarship is a memorial to Ben Wilson, head football coach, and his wife Helen. YWCA Mansfield Memorial Fund Scholarships The Wichita YWCA, by the terms of the will of Mrs. Bessie Frances Davis Mansfield, will have scholarship funds available to "students either male or female enrolled at an institution of higher learning above the high school and pursuing a program of study leading to an undergraduate or graduate degree." There will be three full- 54 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY time student scholarships not to exceed $1,000 each annually; and $1.000 which can be divided among part-time students. Prefer- ences in selection are: (1) Relatives as specified in the will, ( 2 ) financial needs of the applicant, and ( 3 ) employees or active vol- unteers of YWCA. Application deadline will be June 15 and an- nouncement of recipients will be June 30 so recipients may make complete fall plans contingent on the award. Applications should be obtained from and returned to: hhnsfield Scholarship, Young Women's Christian Association, 350 N. Market, Wichita, Ks. 67202. GRADUATE ASSISTANTSHIPS, FELLOWSHIPS AND SCHOLARSHIPS James Chubb Memorial Fellowship Established in 1 x 1 , the followship will be awarded to a graduate student in the Department of Economics. Preference will be given to members of the Chubb family. Carl Fahrbach Memorial Grndtiate Assistantship Awarded to a full-time graduate student in the Department of Stu- dent Personnel and Guidance in WSU's College of Education. The scholarship is awarded for one academic year and is renewable upon recommendation of an advisory committee. The scholarship is a memorial to Dr. Carl G. Fahrbach, dean of admissions and records. JamesH. Hibbard Memorial Scholarship Established in 1952 by the Wichita Foundation of Medical Re- search, the scholarship provides awards to graduate students in chemistry who are interested in the study of medicine or in research in some phase of medicine. Kiwanis Scholarship in Public Administration Established in 1964 a $1,500 scholarship is being provided by the Downtown Kiwanis Club for graduate study leading to a master's degree in public administration. Final date for application is January 15. Loans The special funds described below provide the Combined Student Loan Fund for students with satisfactory scholarship records. Total loans madc to one student may not exceed $300 and satisfactory endorsers are required for all loans. All loans made to students bear interest at the rate of one percent per month on the unpaid balance. The time and manner of repayment is to be agreecl upon by the student and the University at the time the loan is made. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 55 Application for these loans is made in the Office of Student Finan- cial Aid. No loans will be made to students with 24 or less credit hours. Barclay Student Loan Fund Established in 1931, $100 given by Mr. and Mrs. W. Houston Bar- clay. Dr. L. A. Donnell Loan Fund Established in 1959 in memory of Dr. L. A. Donnell. The fund will be incorporated into the Combined Student Loan Fund with money being loaned to deserving and needy students who have satisfactory scholarship records. Eclwcrrds Loan Fund Established in 1910 by R. E. Edwards of Kinsley, available for aiding deserving students to secure an education in Fairmount College, now incorporated in Wichita State University. The article of gift specifies that recipients shall be encouraged to work and to add to the amount such sums as they can, in order that others may receive similar aid in obtaining an education. Goldsmith Student Loan Fund Established in 1943 by a gift of $2,140 by Dr. and Mrs. W. M. Goldsmith, available to juniors and seniors ivho have completed one year of residence work at the University. The rules governing the fund provide that at least 50 percent of the fund shall be re- served for nonresident students. Znterracial Good Will Fund Established in 1926 for the benefit of Negro students enrolled in the University, to be administered jointly by the University and a Commission of Interracial Good Will. Laura Piper Hoop Memorial Fund Established in 1924 by a gift of $400 made by Major Oscar W. Hoop of the Fairmount class of 1920, in memory of his mother, Laura Piper Hoop. This is to be used as a perpetual loan fund to help worthy students and to be administered according to the discretion of the president of the University. Fred C . Speh Student Loan Fund Established in 1931 by Frederic C. Speh in memory of his son, Fred C. Speh, available to juniors and seniors and administered by the president of the University together ~vi th a committee. The 56 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY maximum amount any one student may borrow is $200. Repayment time is governed by the student's financial circumstances and re- quire life insurance in an amount equal to the sum borrowed. Student Council Loan Fund Established in 1932 by the Student Council, a sum of $150 as a loan fund for needy students, preferably needing financial aid to defray gaduation expenses. Dr. T .Walker Weaver niiemorial Loan Fund Establiched in 1962 by gifts from friends in the memory of Dr. T. Walker Weaver, former University of Wichita Board of Regents member. This fund is to be used for loans to worthy and needy students. Women's Aeronautical Association Loan Fund Established in 1940 by the TVomen's Aeronautical Association of Wichita, a sum of $100 to be loaned to worthy students in the aeronautical curricula. Women's Bible Class, First Presbyterian Church, Loan Funtl Established to provide assistance to worthy students. LOAN FUNDS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES Alumni Loan Fund Wichita State University Alumni Association Loan Fund, established in 1956 by the Alumni Association of the University. All money given by the Alumni Association for this fund is put in the regular loan fund and adrninistcred by the Committee on Scholarships and Student Aid. Boeing Emergency Loan Fund Established by The Boeing Company. This fund was made avail- able to Wichita State University to make short duration emergency loans to students having financial need who are citizens of the United States, and are making satisfactory academic progress. Any major field of study leading to a bachelor's degree will qualify; some preference is given to engineering and science students. Christian Conference Loan Fund Established in 1923 by a friend of Fairmount College, a fund of $300 to enable students more easily to attend YMCA, YWCA, and other Christian conferences. Loans may not exceed $75 each and must be repaid within three months after the date of leaving college, interest at four percent, payable annually. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 57 C . U.W .Scholarship and Loan Fund Established in 1952 by the Council of University Women and consists of $50 to be used only for loans to women and is available to new students on the campus. Delfa Epsilon Loan Fund Established in 1956 by the Epsilon Chapter of Delta Epsilon, science fraternity, to be used for making loans to majors in the following departments: Chemistry, engineering, logopedics, geol- ogy, mathematics, physics, psychology, and zoology. Kansas Engineering Society Loan Fund Established in 1956 by the Kansas Engineering Society, a fund of $400 to be loaned to worthy students enrolled in accredited engi- neering curricula. Loans bear service charge but bear interest only after recipient has left the University. Garvey Loan Fund Established in 1958 by James S. Garvey, a fund to be loaned to worthy students who meet character, citizenship, and need qualifications. Luaj Munro Barker Loan Fund Established in 1968 in ho113r of LUCY Munro Barker by Aline Rhodes for students majorirl: in art at Wichita State University. Wichita Community Theatre, Znc., Loan Fund Established in 1968, this loan is to be used for National Defense Student Loan matching funds. Alpha Phi Omega Loan Fund Established in 1968 by the Beta Alpha Chapter of Alpha Phi Omega, a national service fraternity. The fund is to be used for matching federal funds for the National Defense Student Loan program at Wichita State University. Gamma Psi-Alpha Chi Omega Loan Fund Established in 1969 by Gamma Psi of Alpha Chi Omega. This fund is used for National Defense Student Loan matching funds. Inter Fraternity Council Established in 1965 by the Inter Fraternity Council. The fund is used for National Defense Student Loan matching funds. 58 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY John Liggett Loan Fund Established in 1964 by John Liggett. This fund is used for National Defense Student Loan matching funds. Pete Lightner Memorial Loan Fund Established in 1962, in memory of Pete Lightner. This fund is to be used for loans to worthy and needy music students or athletes. Eugene McFarland Loan Fund Established in 1956 in memory of Dr. h4cFarland to be used for loans to students majoring in art. The Robert H. McIsaac Memorial Loan Fund Robert H. h4cIsaac Memorial Loan Fund established in 1969 in memory of Robert H. McIsaac, with the fund to be used as match- ing funds for the National Defense Student Loan Fund, hlr. Mc- Isaac served for many years in the area of pupil and personnel guidance with the Wichita public schools. His efforts helped to build a comprehensive guidance program at the junior high and high school levels in the Wichita Public School System. Reno B. Myers Memorial Loan Fund for Music Students Established in 1962 by gifts from friecds in the memory of Reno B. Myers. This fund is to be used for loans to worthy and needy stu- dents in music. The Edda H . Lockhead Loan Fund Established in 1966, through the estate of Mrs. Edda H. Lockhead. The loans in any given year shall not exceed five in number and shall be made to students of junior or senior standing in the Fair- mount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. The loan to any one student cannot exceed the sum of 3250 per year. D o u g h Stucky Memorial Loan Fund Established in 1964 in memory of Douglas Stucky. This fund is used for National Defense Student Loan matching funds. Newton Teachers Association Loan Fund Established in 1966 for matching funds for National Defense Stu- dent Loans at Wichita State University. Minnie Ferguson Owens Loan Fund Established in 1940 by Dorothy Owens Meyers, a fund of $200 for payment of fees, available to senior students of voice. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 59 Charles E. Purr Loan Fund Established in 1959 through the estate of Charles E. Parr, a fund to be loaned to worthy students desiring a higher education. Rollins Memorial Fund Established in 1927 in honor of Walter Huntington Rollins, thircl president of Fairmount College, by his classmates of Dartmouth College, Class of 1894, and certain Wichita friends, the sum of $1,000 in perpetual trust, the income from which is to form an accumulative revolving fund to be loaned from year to year to a worthy student or students in the Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. Paul Ross Student Loan Fund This funcl provides for short-term loans to students interested in health related programs. Kansas Sales Execzctiue Club Loan Fzrnd Established in 1957, $1,000 available for loans to juniors and seniors with a major in marketing and who have an interest in selling. Senior Class of 1961 Loan Fund Established by the Class of 1961. The funds provided will be loaned to worthy and deserving graduating seniors. Repayment may be made after graduation. George W .Shepherd Memorial Loan Fund Established in 1962, the funds are to be loaned with no interest charge to students seeking careers as police officers. United Student Aid Funds Loam Many banks participate in this program which was designed to make available long-term loans to students. Applicants contact the bank of their choice (one in the hometown or where residence has been established), complete the necessary application forms, submit the forms to the Office of Student Finan- cial Aid for completion of the education certificate, return the ap- plication to their bank. Eligibility policies require that a student be enrolled full-time and capable of maintaining satisfactory standing. Preference is given to those of sophomore or higher standing; however, a limited number of entering freshmen loans may be avail- able. $1,000 per year to a maximum of 33,000 on undergraduate work is available. Graduate students may borrow up to $1,500 per 60 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY year. A sum, not to exceed $7,500, may be borrowed including undergraduate and graduate study. Notes bear seven percent simple interest from the date of the loan until paid in full. George D. Wilner Loan Fund Established in honor of George D. Wilner, professor emeritus of speech and dramatic art, the fund is used for National Defense Student Loan matching funds. Wichita State Unioersity Men's Fac~clttj Club Established in 196.5 by the Ifen's Faculty Club of the University, the fund is used for National Defense Student Loan matching funds. Alice Campbell Wrigley Memorinl Loan Fund Available to students with high academic achievement, interest, and promise in the field of theater who have financial need. FOUNDATIONS FOR RELIGIOUS EDUCATION The Ransom Foundation Established by Katherine S. Ransom as a memorial for her husband by a gift of 375,000. It is administered as a trust fund under the name of "The Ransom Fund for Religious Education." The Butler Foundation Establishecl by Emily Butler, it is a trust fund of $10,000 to be used for the purpose of assisting in the financing of the "Department of Religious Education of the University of Wichita." At the specific request of the trustees of Fairmount College a small portion of the income of the Joint Ransom-Butler Found a t ' ion is now set aside annually for use in defraying the cost of outstanding lectures in religion, science and literature. The Louisa J . Byington Foundation Established in 1930 and consists of the sum of 51,000 to be used in the Department of Religious Education. Student Services The Division of Student Services assumes the major responsibility for the University's student personnel programs. The division co- operates and ~vorks with all offices, divisions, and dep:lrtments ol the University to help students put their talents to the best pos- sible use. Students who need or desire assistance connected with any phasts WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 61 of -University life are encouraged to contact the Division of Studext Services. The division serves as a focal point for the intcrest and concern of students about matters related to the University, its people, and programs. Vice President for Student Affairs The vice president for student affairs and dean of students is re- sponsible for the coorclination and supervision of student services. He is directly responsible to the president of the University, and his purpose is to encoltrage communication between the division, the students, faculty, and the department heads of the University concerning student life, problems, and activities. Offices of the Associate Deans The offices of the associate cleans of student services are respon- sible for the residence halls, work with off-campus housing prob- lems, serve fraternities and sororities, help social organizations. counsel students with problems or concerns, and encourage scho- lastic achievement. Orientation Advance Registration Period Special orientation programs are presented through small group interaction and discussions, !cd by trained student leaders, for new fall semester students to bccome acquainted with the University, college life, University faculty, and other new students. Personal goals, objectives and expectations are discussed during these sum- mer programs. Shocker Week Prior to the first day of classes, numerous educational and social activities are presented to better acquaint new students with the campus. Library and campus tours are arranged; an activities open house is presented, involving man). organizations \\.hich new stu- dents may find interesting; special programs for residence hall students are planned; educational and entertaining films are shown, and the annual Shocker Wcek Dance provides an early opportu- nity to meet fellow students. Counseling Professional counseling is available on a voluntary basis for students seeking such services. Areas specifically served include: 62 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY ( 1) Emotional and adjustment difficulties. ( 2 ) Vocational and professional planning. ( 3) hlarital counseling. ( 4 ) Educational counseling as related to 1, 2 and 3 above. Testing Center Each student working toward a degree must take the Americn~~ College Test. Information regarding this test and interpretation of scores is available upon recluest. Special tests measuring interests, abilities, and personality are available in connection with the ser- vices of the Counseling Center. Information regarding nationai testing programs ( Graduate Record Examination, etc. ) is also avail- able at the center. Advisement Each student is assigned to a faculty member whose responsibility it is to advise him in academic matters. In the event that cither the student or the faculty member feels that the student is in need of more professional services, a referral to the Counseling Cen- ter may be made. International Program Students from other lands are particularly welcome at Wichita State University. In addition to the services provided to all students through the Division of Student Services, international students will find the International Program Office especially helpful. The office, located in 112 Campus Activities Center, assists international students in adjusting to their new surroundings. The University's International Club, composed of both inter- national and An~erican students, also helps students from other countries through a full program of cultural and social activities. Membership in the club, which meets twice a month, is open to all students. For University admission requirements for international students, see the Admission section of this Catalog. Career Planning and Placement Center The Career Planning and Placement Center, located in 011 Morrison Hall, provides career planning and e~nployment placement services to assist undergraduate students, graduating seniors, graduate stu- dents, and alumni. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 63 Placement services cover all types of employment (with the ex- ception of teaching positions) including part-time school jobs and summer employment as well as permanent career positions for graduates and alumni. The Career Planning and Placement Center receives direct em- ployment listings daily from employers in the Wichita area, the state, and the nation. .Also, many company and government agency recruiters from all over the United States visit the Career Planning and Placement Center each year. Considerable emphasis is also placed on career guidance and counseling with the main objective toward assisting the student to: Study himself Explore occupational areas Choose an occupational area Make a decision either to embark on graduate or professional school study or to select an entry position Plan a job search campaign, prepare for job interviews, and choose an entry position Occupational and career information, employer directories, in- formation on employment trends and opportunities, recruiting litera- ture, and annual salary survey reports are all available in the Career Planning and Placement Center. A special graduate school opportunities section has been added to assist students in planning for advanced study. Teacher Placement Bureau Assistance is given to students and alumni desiring teaching posi- tions. The service is available only to students who have completed 15 semester hours at Wichita State University and who have an over-all C average. The registration fee of $2 is to be paid to the University cashier. Application forms may be obtained from the Teacher Placement Bureau. Veterans Affairs and Selective Service There are certain problems of special concern to veterans and to those students who must maintain continuing relations with local draft boards. Students who have problems or questions pertaining to veterans' benefits or selective service should contact the director of Admissions and Records. Housing The Wichita State University housing policy for 1972-73 classifies the various housing units for students as follows: 64 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 1. University-approved housing, ( a ) University-owned residence halls-Grace Wilkie, Brennan No. 1,No. 2, and No. &required for freshmen to extent of capacity. ( b ) Privately owned residence hall-Fairmount Towers. (c) Fraternities. 2. University-registered housing. Apartments, single rooms, houses, etc., which are nondiscriminatory on the basis of race, creed, or color. The policy further states: 1. All single freshmen under 21 years of age enrolled in nine or more credit hours who are not living with relative or guardian are required to live in University-approved housing, with priority given to University-owned housing. 3. All other students can select their own accommodations; how- ever, University-approved housing is highly recommended. Listings of registered housing facilities are available in the Housing Office. 4. Special exceptions to these regulations will be reviewed by the Housing Office. Admission to the University does not mean automatic room reser- vation, but each student admitted will receive a card from the Admissions Office to be filled in and returned to the Housing Office. Upon receipt of this card, proper information will be sent by the Housing Office. However, for prior or additional information at any time, please write to the Director of Housing, 101 Morrison Hall, Wichita State University, Wichita, Kansas. The University reserves the right to make policy adjustments where the situation demands and to change the residence -of any student or to deny or cancel residence accommodations of any student in cases where such action is deemed desirable. Student Health and Hospitalization Wichita State University maintains the Student Health Service staffed by professional nurses and community physicians. The health service endeavors to provide guidance and education in health matters, to promote good health, to prevent disease, and to care for ill and injured students. All new and transfer students, or students registering anew after an interruption of their program, working toward a degree and enrolled for nine or more credit hours, are required to submit to the Student Health Service a "medical history and physcial examina- tion form" signed by a licensed physician ( M. D.). The appropri- ate form will be mailed to all new applicants for admission to the University, or may be obtained from the Student Health Service. The nurse may be seen at the Student Health Service for first aid, illness, or counseling regarding personal health problems. Services of the staff physicians are available by appointment during the WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 65 scheduled clinic hours as posted in the Student Health Service Office. Polio, tetanus, flu, and other immunizations are offered to those desiring them. Summaries of medical health records are pre- pared for students upon request. The Wichita State University student body has chosen to par- ticipate in the Blue Cross-Blue Shield group plan for accident and sickness coverage. Opportunities to participate in the program are offered at the beginning of each regular semester. Information is available at the Student Health Service. Special Programs Center for Business and Economic Research The Center for Business and Economic Research is committed to economic research, the collection of economic data, and the dis- semination of economic data to business, industry, and individuals interested in the state's economic standing. Among the publications produced by the center are: Kansas Economic Indicators, Wichita Directory of Minority Businesses, and Business Conditions Report. The center is a service of the College of Business Administration. Center for Educational Development The Center for Educational Development in the College of Health Related Professions is designed to provide continuing and adult educational opportunities for all members of the health related professions throughout the state. Through workshops and seminars, the center's goal is to find effective methods of helping health professionals, including those in dental medicine, keep abreast of the latest information in their fields. The center works in cooper- ation with the Kansas Physical Therapy Association; the Kansas City, Missouri, League of Nursing; the state dental association, and similar organizations in neighboring states, as well as other professional health related associations and organizations. Center for Human Appraisal and Communication Research The objectives and philosophy of the Center for Human Appraisal and Communication Research include the extension of research attitudes and interests in the behavioral sciences and the application 66 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY of that knowledge to governmental agencies and the business com- munity. Projects undertaken by the center include management surveys, assessment programs, supervisory selection, promotions, morale research, sales training, ancl other general research on people systems. The center is a service of the College of Business Adminis- tration. Center for Management Development The College of Business Administration's Center for Management Development is designed to provide continuing business education, professional development, specialized information, and direct assist- ance in management development for the state's businesses, in- dustries, and governmental and social agencies. The center conducts ongoing educational programs, such as rsrorkshops, institutes, and seminars, which will help organizational managers to upgrade and improve their professional management skills. Center for Urban Studies The Center for Urban Studies is an interdisciplinary organization which was established to give special attention to the problems of metropolitanism and to carry on both independent and contract research. The staff works with the faculty and graduate students in making studies of economic, sociological and cultural problems as well as governmental problems. A central library of specialized materials on urban and regional problems is being established at the center, and the staff is available to assist in conducting semi- nars, workshops and conferences for officials and interested citizens. The role of the Center for Urban Studies is to stimulate Univer- sity faculty members, graduate students, and other informed and interested citizens to investigate, analyze, and report upon metro- politan problems; to develop explanatory hypotheses, alternative solutions, and the probable consequences of such proposals; to pro- vide seminars and conferences for the study of problems, and to provide information on the areas that have been considered. Project TOGETHER Project TOGETHER is a program which gives comprehensive, in- tensive, flexible tutorial help, personal counseling, career guidance, and assistance in the development of study skills for low income and/or minority students. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 67 Research and Sponsored Programs The Diviqion of Research and Sponsored Programs is responsible for acquiring, reviewing, maintaining, and disseminating information pertaining to progralns administered by federal, state, and local governmental agencies, private foundations, and businesses and industries in which the University is eligible to participate. Among its other duties, the division coordinates the preparation of appli- cations for outside support for general institutional-level programs, and it assists faculty members and qualified students in the devel- opment of proposals for research and training grants or contracts. Summer Session The University maintains its Summer Session as an extension of the regular scholastic year. All work is offered by regularly qualified instructors, and the standards of achievement are identical with those required in the academic year. Credits earned in the Summer Session are accepted by all colleges accredited by or belonging to the associations which accredit the University or in which it has membership. All the colleges and divisions of the University function during the Summer Session. Credit toward both undergraduate and gradu- ate degrees may be earned during the summer. A variety of short term workshops and special institutes is also a feature of the Sum- mer Session. Summer Session Bulletin The Summer Session Bulletin lists dates of enrollment, housing in- formation, fees, and the availability of cultural and recreational op- portunities. This bulletin will be mailed to those requesting it. For the bulletin or information not covered by it, please write to the Director of the Summer Session, Wichita State University, Wichita, Kansas 67208. Admission Requirements and Enrollment The rules governing admission to the Summer Session are the same as those for the regular session. The student may enroll in as many credit hours as the number of weeks for which he is enrolled. Dates for registration are published in the Summer Session Bulletin. Fees For information regarding fees, see the financial section of the Catalog. 68 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Summer Program in Puebla, Mexico Established in the summer of 1966, the summer program in Puebla, Mexico, offers students and teachers of Spanish an academic pro- gram designed to broaden and deepen thrir comprehension of the language, customs, history, and culture of h4exico. Since all classes are taught in Spanish, only students who have had a minimum of two years of college Spanish or the equivalent are eligible to attend. Six hours of undergraduate or graduate credit are available to those who complete the six-week course. To give students two distinct types of living experiences, embrac- ing both the Mexican's family life and the community activities which surround him, studcnts attending the Puebla program for the first time live in a private home for three weeks and in the Hotel Colonial for three weeks. Native liexicans serve as escorts and as conversation leaders. During their stay in Puebla, students have a four-day break from class~xrork for travel. For more information concerning the summer program in Puebla, consult the Summei- Session Bulletin. or contact the WSU Depart- ment of Romance Languages, 200 Jardine Hall. Special Facilities The educational facilities located on the University's 290-acre cam- pus in northeast Wichita offer contemporary surroundings for stu- dents. Equipped for year-round use and comfort, Wichita.State University's instructional facilities are in use for educational pur- poses more hours per day than at any other Kansas college or uni- versity. Among the campus facilities is the Corbin Education Center, one of the last architectural structures designed by the late Frank Lloyd Wright. The center houses the College of Education. To be completed in the near future are a new five-story, 120,000 square-foot Life Sciences Building and the new h4cKnight Art Building, a 49,000 square-foot addition to present art facilities. Special facilities available to students including the following: The Campus Activities Center The Campus Activities Center is designed to provide recreational areas, lounging and reading rooms and opportunities for student groups to meet and carry on their programs. Dining facilities are available to the students, faculty, and their friends. The bookstore sells texts and supplies which meet the students day-to-day cam- pus needs. The program of activities is planned by the CAC Pro- gram Board, a representative body of students, faculty, and alumni. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 69 A share of the campus privilege fee and revenues from food ser- vice, recreation and bookstore pay for the building, all operating costs, and the activities program. No tax money was used in the construction of the building; neither is tax money used to maintain and operate the center and its programs. The Campus Activities Center is the community center of the University, for all the members of the University family-students, faculty, administration, alumni and guests. Harvey D. Grace Memorial Chapel Grace Memorial Chapel, located in the heart of the campus on Yale Boulevard, was built in 1963 and dedicated for use by all creeds and races. The chapel is available to all students for group or indi- vidual worship and meditation. Many student weddings are held in the chapel. Digital Computing Center The Digital Computing Center offers students the opportunity to use the latest methods in accomplishing their educational goals. Student and faculty research, utilizing the center's IBM System/ 360 Model 44 computer, is supported and assisted by the Digital Computing Center's extensive and well-trained staff. Institute of Logopedics The Institute of Logopedics is a private, nonprofit residential and outpatient facility located on 40 acres near the University campus. The institute is the largest residential facility in the world specializ- ing in habilitation and/or rehabilitation of adults and children with speech and language disorders. The institute is University-related through its affiliation with the College of Education's Department of Logopedics. The University department provides academic prep- aration for WSU students wvho wish to be qualified to work with communicatively handicapped children and adults. Observation and practicum opportunities are provided at the institute as part of the professional preparation of students in speech pathology and audiology. Graduate programs in logopedics offered through the University's Graduate School culminate in either a master's or doctoral degree. The PhD in logopedics is awarded by Wichita State University and is the only such degree offered in Kansas. 70 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY University Libraries The University Libraries, housed primarily in Ablah Library, pro- vide resources ancl services to support course offerings and to foster independent study and research. Because the University recognizes the importance of the ability to use library resources effectively, services and materials are planned and arranged to encourage students to locate and use information effectively. The library has an open stack arrangement that provides easy access to nearly all of the material in the collection and encourages browsing and study in all fields of interest. Reference service is provided to assist stu- dents and faculty locating information and to offer instruction in the use of the library collections. A comprehensive collection of nearly a million items has been selected to satisfy the expanding needs of the student body and faculty. In addition to books and periodicals, material such as microforms, corporate reports, college catalogs, pamphlets, pictures and art reproductions, films, records, tapes, and slides, also is avail- able. In addition, the library is a depository for selected official publications of the United States and the State of Kansas. A number of special collections are maintained in the University Libraries. These include local and regional history and papers of William Lloyd Garrison. In addition, the library maintains a re- source center for materials in the field of administration of justice. Facilities for the use of material include individual study carrels, group study rooms, microform reading equipment, listening facil- ities, photocopying services, and typewriters. The Audiovisual Center is located in the lower level of Ablah Library. The center provides information on problems dealing with communication, the selection, production, and use of audiovisual material, and equipment. Olive W. Garvey Laboratory for Advanced Research The Garvey Laboratory for Advanced Research, located at 3241 Victor Place: is a 9,000 square-foot research facility acquired by the Wichita State University Endowment Association in 1969. The laboratory houses selected research programs in geology, biology, chemistry, and psychology. The laboratory also houses the Kansas Regional Medical Program's continuing education projects in car- diac care and cancer care. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 71 KMUW-FM Radio Station KMUI'V-FM radio broadcasts at 89.1 megacycles on the FM radio dial. The 10,000-watt station is one of more than 90 public radio stations that make up the Corporation for Public Broadcasting net- work. In addition to full-time staff, students are employed in major positions and are involved in the total operation of the radio station. Programming for the station includes live coverage of virtually all major speeches and special events held a t the University. Reading and Writing Improvement Laboratories The University provides special aid to students who wish to im- prove skills in reading and study habits. Courses aimed primarily at reading and writing improvement are available. In connection with this service, a battery of tests is administered, and through individual conferences an attempt is made to identify particular weaknesses and to suggest ways to overcome them. A further de- scription of the courses can be found in the listings of the University College. Sports and Recreation Sports and recreation facilities available to University students include a regulation 18-hole golf course; a year-round swimming pool; the 10,200-seat Henry Levitt Arena, used for intercollegiate basketball games and major entertainment events, and Cessna Stadium, a 31,500-seat stadium used for football games and track meets. The stadium is complete with artificial turf and running track, one of the first sports facilities in the nation to have both. Walter H. Beech and Supersonic Wind Tunnels Two University mind tunnels are available for faculty and student use. A supersonic wind tunnel, capable of producing wind velocities from hvo-to-four times the speed of sound, was donated to the University in 1963 by The Boeing Company. The Walter H. Beech Wind Tunnel, donated to the University by the Beech Aircraft Corporation, is a 200 mph closed return tunnel with a 7 x 10-foot test section for studies in aerodynamics. 72 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Student Activities and Organizations Student organizations may be granted the privilege of (1) the use of names in which the name of the University is embodied or suggested, and ( 2 ) the use of the University rooms or grounds for meetings and of bulletin boards for announcements, only if they have filed their registration forms furnishing the Student Govern- ment Association with lists of officers and other executive members, statements of purposes, and copies of constitution and bylaws. Student Government Wichita State University believes that one of its primary tasks is educating for the responsibilities of citizenship in our democratic society. With this in mind, it places an ever increasing emphasis on the role that the Student Government Association plays on the campus. The SGA, under its present constitution, is divided into three organs of student government. The Cabinet, Senate, and Courts carry out the executive, legislative, and judicial functions respec- tivel y. In addition to sponsoring such student activities as Homecoming, Hippodrome, and Parents Day, the Senate, which is completely student elected, charters and registers all other student organizations subordinate to it. It appoints students to University committees and advises the University administration on the student views about policy. Fraternities and Sororities Seven national sororities are recognized by Panhellenic Council at the University: Alpha Chi Omega, Alpha Kappa Alpha, Alpha Phi, Delta Delta Delta, Delta Gamma, Gamma Phi Beta, and Sigma Gamma Rho. Delta Sigma Theta has been recognized by the Student Government Association and is in the process of seeking recognition by the Panhellenic Council. Eight national fraternities are recognized by the Interfraternity Council: Alpha Phi Alpha, Beta Theta Pi, Delta Upsilon, Kappa Sigma, Phi Delta Theta, Sigma Alpha Epsilon, Alpha Kappa Lambda, and Sigma Phi Epsilon. In addition, two other national fraternities have been recognized by the Student Government Association: Kappa Alpha Psi and Omega Psi Phi. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 73 Independent Students Association An Independent Students Association exists on the campus to promote friendship among the student body, as well as to further the educational and social interests of its members. Religious Activities The University welcomes the participation of a number of campus religious groups offering a variety of activities to students. Their programs are developed through campus organizations and/or centers and directors. These programs include informal discussion groups, counseling, worship, service projects, and attendance at off-campus conferences. The value of these resources is recognized within the University community. The WSU registration packet includes an optional religious preference card which is made avail- able to campus religious advisers. Organizations Honorary and Professional Alpha Kappa Delta . . . sociology Alpha Kappa Psi . . . hasiness fraternity Beta Gamma Sigma . . . business administration Delta Sigma Rho-Tau Kappa Alpha , . . forensics Eta Kappa Nu . . . electrical engineering Honors Society . . . honor students Kappa Delta Pi . . . education Kappa Kappa Psi . . . band (men) Kappa 11u Psi . . . broadcasting Kappa Pi , . , art Laml~da Alpha . . . anthropology S.lortar Board . . . seniorwomen 1 lu Phi Epsilon . . . music (\\omen) Omicron Delta Kappa . . . junior and senior men Phi Alpha Theta . . . liistor)~ Phi Delta Kappa . , . education Phi Eta Sigma . . . freshman men Phi Kappa Phi . . . University-wide scholastic Phi Siu Alpha-Sinfonia . . . music (men ) Phi Sigma Tau . . . pliilosophy Pi Delta Phi . . . French Pi Epsilon Delta . , . drama ( National Collpgiate Players ) 74 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Pi Sigma Alpha . . . political science Pi Tau Sigma . . . mechanical engineering Psi Chi . . . psychology Senior Honor \lei1 Sigma Alpha Etcl . . . logopedics and speech therapy Sigma Alpha Iota . . . music ( women ) Sigma Delta Pi . . . Spanish Sigma Gamma Epsilon . . . geolog) Sigma Gamma Tau . . . aeronautical engineering Sigma Pi Sigma . . . physics Spurs . . . sophomore women Tau Beta Pi . . . engineering Tau Beta Signla . . . band (women ) Departmental Accounting C l i~b American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics American Institute for h,lining, hletallurgical and Petroleum Engi- neers American Society of 3,lechanical Engineers Anchorettes Angel Flight Anthropology Club Army Blues Arnold Air Society Art Council Art Education Biology Club Chemistry Club CHRP-health related professions organization Circolo Italiano Dialectics Geology Industrial Education Club TineersInstitute of Electronics and Electrical En&' Le Cercle Francais Liberal Arts Council Media Women I\lusic Edl~cators National Conference Pershing Rifles Physical Education 3lajors Political Science Club Prelaw Club Psychology Club Rifle Club WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 75 Scabbard and Blade Sigma Delta Chi Spanish Club Student Advertising Club a ion Student Branch of the Association for Childhood Educ t ' Student Education Association Student A. F. T. Student Physics Society Special Interests ,411-Tribal Indian Student Association Alphabettes Alpha Phi Omega Amateur Radio Club Anandn hiiarga Yogn Society Arab Club Association for Environmental Ilnprovements Black Student Uniou Campus '4dvance Campus Crusade for Christ Campus Girl Scouts Chess Club Christian Science Organization Committee for Student Rights Ear Flying Club International Club Little Sisters of Slinerva YIECHA-I\Iovimiento Estucliantil Chicano de Aztlan Orchesis Peace Action Coalition Peace Coordination Committee Shoutin' Shockers Sisters of Golden Heart Sky Diving Clul-, Stereo Club Student Book Exchange Student International lieditation Society Student Volunteer Tutorial University Activities Council University Debate Society Veterans on Campus The Way Women's Liberation Women's Physical Education Club 76 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Young Americans for Freedom Young Democrats Young Life Young People's Socialist League Young Republicans Zero Population Grourth Living Groups Brennan Hall I11 Brennan Residence Hall Association Harvard Club Yale Club Governing Associated Women Students Board of Student Publications Campus Activities Center Program Board Engineering Council Interfraternity Council Inter-Residence Council Panhellenic Council Student Government Association University Forum Board WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 77 The Jlorr.i.s.on Hall clock tower is one of Wichita Statr's most easil!y identified s!jrnbols. 78 UNIVERSITY COLLEGE WALTER S. FRIESEN, EdD, Dean University College is the first academic home of all new freshmen working toward a degree at Wichita State University. New trans- fers from other colleges who have not completed 24 semester hours with at least a 1.70 grade point average, or who have not declared an academic major, also are admitted into University College. Spe- cial students and guest students who are not pursuing a degree at Wichita State University are enrolled in the Division of Continuing Education. University College exists to help new students make a successful transition to University study. The staff of counselors and special instructors provide academic orientation, individual and group as- sistance in personal planning, continued academic advising, and special instruction in reading and writing development. Students remove high school deficiencies, fulfill prerequisites, and choose a major while in University College. Students also complete many of their core curriculum (general educational) requirements and, in some cases, begin their major studies. Although University College interprets the core curriculum and assists students in their selection of courses, all classroom instruction is provided by the faculty from the various departments in the six undergraduate de- gree-granting colleges of the University. HIGH SCHOOL PREPARATION Students are advised to prepare for college by selecting their high school courses carefully. The preferred minimal high school prepa- ration includes four units of English, two units of one foreign language, two units of history and social science, one-and-one-half unit of algebra, one unit of geometry, and two units of natural sciences, exclusive of general science. Engineering students should take college algebra and trigonometry, if possible. ADMISSION University admission reclnircments are set forth elsewhere in the Catalog. No stucl~nt admittetl to University College may be sched- uled for orientation and enrollment until he has on record at the University all his transcripts, his ACT scores, and a completed health certificate. Transfer students admitted on probation or un- decided about an academic major are enrolled in University College and are subject to the same procedures as new freshmen. UNIVERSITY COLLEGE 79 ORIENTATION, PERSONAL PLANNING AND REGISTRATION ACTIVITIES The most important function of University College is academic ad- vising. Faculty from the six undergraduate degree colleges and suc- cessful students from the various academic departments in the Uni- versity join the professional counselors and staff of University Col- lege and the Division of Student Services in providing orientation, personal planning, testing, academic advising, and registration ser- vices to students in University College. All new University College students are required to remit a non- refundable orientation fee and to attend an intensive orientation and personal planning session before enrolling for courses. Orienta- tion programs are developed and implemented by University Col- lege and Student Services. Information about orientation programs and enrollment is sent by the dean of University College to new students shortly after they have been officially admitted. The most comprehensive and personalized program is July orien- tation and registration for new students entering in the fall semester. All new University College students are expected to participate in the July program. New students entering University College for the spring semester beginning in January, participate in a one-day program of orienta- tion, personal planning, and registration the week before classes start. New students entering University College for the Summer Ses- sion enroll without a formal orientation program and participate in the scheduled July orientation and registration for fall. PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT AND ACADEMIC ADVISING All students have the benefit of academic advising throughout their stay in University College. Students who have declared an academic major field of study are in most cases assigned to faculty advisers from the department of their choice. Students who are undecided are assigned to University College counselors or randomly to faculty advisers from the various acadelnic departments. Two one-hour credit courses-P. D. 100 Freshman Seminar and P. D. 102 Occupation Seminar-havc been established to help students develop their personal plans thoughtfully and system- atically over a semester time period. he freshman seminar is designed for the new student and led by a team of faculty and student assistants. The occupation seminar was created to help students who, after several semesters in college, have not been able to decide on an occupational goal or educational major. (See course descriptions under Special University College Courses at the end of this section.) 80 UNIVERSITY COLLEGE Students enrolled in the freshman or occupation seminars are ascigned advisers from the faculty and student leaders who direct the seminars. STUDENT RESPONSIBILITY As part of his adjustment to the University's academic environment, the new student is expected to know the academic rules and regu- lations of the University as contained in this Catalog and the Schedule of Courses. At the end of the first eight weeks in each semester, reports of unsatisfactory grades are mailed to the student. I t is the student's responsibility to determine the meaning of his unsatisfactory grades, to seek advice, and to plan steps to improve his performance. University College advisers and counselors expect to help students analyze their difficulties and make adjustments. Students are expected to maintain a C average in all work for which they are registered for credit during any semester. Failure to maintain this standard implies the advisability of limiting the student's program. In the event of complete withdrawal, students must complete all the steps of the withdrawal procedure listed in the general regulation5 section of the Catalog. PREPARATION FOR DEGREE-GRANTING COLLEGES When the student has completecl23 hours of credit and has achieved the designated minimum ~ r a d e point average, he is eligible to transfer from University College to one of the undergraduate degree-granting co1le:res. (College of Education and College of Health Related Professions require a minimum of 2.00; the other four colleges, a mirlimum of 1.70. After completion of 64 hours, all undergraduate colleges require a 2.00 average.) The student should transfer from University College to the degree-granting college 11s soon as he has decided on a major course of study and has met the requirements. In any event, he must qualify to nznke a fransfcr the time he ha.s accumulated 72 hours of credit, or lie rcithdrazun from the University. The student who has accumulated 50 semester hours and still has not declared an academic major mall be required to take P. D. 102, Occupation Seminar. to assist him in his planning. The student who has accumulated 50 semester hours and has not get achieved the required grades must plan his program carefully with a coun- selor to repeat courses failed earlier so that the necessary grade points can be acquired before the 72-hour rule forces him to be withdrawn from the University. In addition to the general requirements stated here, some of the degree-granting colleges have specific requirements to be met as UNIVERSITY COLLEGE 81 conditions to acceptance. The student must acquaint himself with these requirements and build his schedule of courses accordingly. Procedure for Transferring to a Degree College To transfer from the University College to a degree-granting college the student consults with his faculty adviser and/or a University College counselor regarding his curriculum choice and academic eligibility. Then he signs a form requesting the dean to transfer his records to the dean of the college he has selected. If the student has ncc~imulated the credit hours and grade points required to transfer, he may request a transfer at any time in the semester. If the student decides on a curriculum during the semester in which he will complete 24 hours, he should request that his records be evaluated and that a transfer be made. The transfer will, in such cases, be made after the grades for that semester are recorded and the dean of the degree colleee has officially accepted the student into the degree program. NOTI': The student initiates his own transfer. No one else can take this action for him. ACADEMIC PROBATION AND DISMISSAL STANDARDS 1. Graduation renuires a C (2.00) average on all course work for credit; therefore, the University College probation level is 2.00 and the student will be placed on academic probation whenever his cumulative grade point average falls below 2.00. The dismissal level is 1.50 for students with 24 or fewer credit hours; it is 1.70 for students with 25 to 71 credit hours; and it becomes 2.00 for students with 72 hours or more. (Student must be eligible to transfer to a degree-granting college when he has accumulated 72 hours or he will be dismissed from the University.) 2. A student will be continued on probation while his cumulative grade point index falls below 2.00 and is higher than the dismissal level. Moreover, a student will be continued on probation if his semester grade point index is at least a 2.00 even though his cumulative grade point index has not been raised above the dis- missal level. 3. A student is not dismissed unless he entered the semester on probation. Moreover, a student will not be dismissed before he has completed 12 semester hours of credit work at Wichita State University unless other standards are specified as a condition of admission. (Credit work excludes I, Wd, Au, CR/NCR.) 4. A transfer student admitted on probation must complete at least 12 semester hours of credit work and achieve a 2.00 grade point index on work at Wichita State University before probation is removed. 82 UNIVERSITY COLLEGE 5. Policy in the degree-granting colleges states that a student on probation is limited to a maximum load of 12 hours per semester. Exceptions must be made by the dean. 6. Policy in the degree-granting colleges states that no student is allowed credit toward graduation for D grade work in excess of one fourth of the total hours. Also, a student may not transfer higher grades from another institution to make up for less than a 2.00 cumulative grade point index at Wichita State University. READMISSION AFTER ACADEMIC DISMISSAL A student who has been academically dismissed in accordance with academic policy may seek readmission to the University by ap- pealing in writing for an exception to the regulations. University College requires all petitioners to appear in person for a series of counseling interviews and to prepare a detailed program of studies for the approval of the dean before the written petition is for- warded to the University Committee on Admission, Advanced Standing ant1 Exceptions. Because suclz planning requires carefztl attention, the student must initiate his admission process at least 10 da!ys before fhe first day of enrollment. Interviews are not con- ducted during any of the scheduled enrollment periods. The case for readmission must be developed by the student- usually around an explanation of circumstances contributing to the failure and a presentation of evidence that success is likely. TWO-YEAR CERTIFICATE PROGRAM IN ADMINISTRATION OF JUSTICE In cooperation with the Department of Administration of Justice in Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, University College awards an Associate of Applied Science Certificate in administration of justice. The objectives of the two-year certificate program are to serve all students interested in the field of administration of justice who are admissible to the University, and to assist them in their pre- service and in-service training requirements. The requirements for the certificate include the following: A. Completion of at least 64 credit hours with at least a C (2.00) grade point average overall for all courses taken; B. Completion of at least 18 credit hours of courses in the De- partment of Administration of Justice with a grade of C or better in every administration of justice course; C. Completion of at least 24 credit hours of work outside the Department of Administration of Justice. The preferred courses outside the required 18 credit hours in administration of justice are the University's core curriculum courses which will best qualify the student to pursue a baccalaureate pro- gram in administration of justice. UNIVERSITY COLLEGE 83 Students are advised by faculty in the Department of Adminis- tration of Justice, and a coordinator of services is appointed from among the counselors of University College. Certification requires the candidate to file an application for certification with the chairman of the Department of Administra- tion of Justice. The chairman will review the candidate? ban- scripts and recommend certification to the dean of University College \!rho signs and awards the certificate. Applications for certification must be filed with the department chairman two months before the date of graduation and awarding ceremonies (no later than the first of April). GENERAL AND PREPROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS Minimum requirements for the bachelor's degree are 124 semester hours with a 2.00 grade point average. To graduate in four years, a student should take 15 to 16 hours each semester. In most cases, a typical semester load of 15hours is equivalent to 15class meetings per week, escept that laboratory hours are usually double the regular class hours. If the student is und~cided as to his area of emphasis, he may enroll in any of the courses selected from the 45 hours of required courses listed elsewhere under the "Universitv Reauirements for Graduation," or other courses approved by the adviser and dean. If, however, the student is firm in his conviction as to a major, or field of profc,ssional interest. the student's adviser will suggest courses from both areas, i. c., those from the "University Require- ments" mentioned above. as well as introductorv courses. in areas of major or professional goals. The core curriculum studies offered in University College are applicable to most of the preprofessional programs which may be pursued at Wichita State University. Prelaw The prelaw student is advised to obtain a general education con- centrating on stutfic*~ which c-mphasize verbal comprehension and expression, creative thinking, and critical understanding of human institutions and vali~es nrith \i~liich the law deals. The prelegal adviser will provid~ information relative to requirements for en- trance to law school. Health Related Programs The dean of the College of FIcalth Related Professions and his staff provide counseling in cari>er planning for all health related professions including mrdicinc. veterinary ~nedicine, dentistry, op- tometry, pharmacology, osteopathy, physical therapy, occupational therapy, radiologic tc.chnology, mortuary science, etc. 84 UNIVERSITY COLLEGE Students interested in these health professions will enroll through the University College for their first 24 semester hours and then transfer to either the College of Health Related Professions or the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences for the degree program of studies. HEALTHPROFESSIONS101. Tntroduction to Health Professions is a one-hour credit course which should be taken by new students who are interested, but uncertain in thcir choice of a health related profession. (Examples: Nursing, medical technology, inhalation therapy, physical therapy, etc.) Enrollment in this course is also highly recommended for students who are firm in their decision to enter a specific health related profession. (See College of Health Related Professions for course description.) DIPLOMA NURSING Students seeking to prepare themselves for admission to a diploma- granting hospital school of nursing enroll in University College for specific courses selected to meet the common admission requirements of the three affiliated hospitals: St. Francis Hospital, St. Joseph Hospital and Rehabilitation Center, and Wesley Medical Center. I t is the student's responsibility to apply to the nursing school of his choice and to determine the specific requirements of that school. The suggested curriculum, below, has been developed through con- sultation with the three hospital schools of nursing and the College of Health Related Professions. The suggested program, followed by two years of clinical experience and study in the hospital, quali- fies the student for a diploma and prepares him for the State Registered Nurse Examination. The student should plan at least one summer and two full semes- ters of study; an additional semester may be required for students who have hicrh school deficiencies. Biolocy 100 or 112 is a pre- requisite to Biology 223. Biology 223 should precede Biology 120. Successful work in high school algebra is a necessary preparation for Chemistry 103. Summer Hrs. Chemistry 10.3, General Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 First Semester 'H. P. 101 Introduction to Health Professions . 1 BiologylOOor112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Psychology 111, General Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 English 111, College English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Sociology "1 or Anthropology 202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Second Semester Biology 223, Human Biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biology 120, Introduction to hlicrobiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4 Psychology 260, Child Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speech 111, Extemporaneous Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 'Not required. UNIVERSITY COLLEGE 85 DIVISION OF CONTINUING EDUCATION The Division of Continuing Education, an administrative unit of University College, was established to meet the educational needs of those citizens in our community who are not regularly enrolled students in another college of the University, through academic work of a cultural, vocational or semiprofessional nature. The functions of this program, which is directed to the adults of our community, are: (1) To provide continuing education in a variety of fields for those who wish to study for their own personal enrichment. ( 2 ) To cooperate with business and industry in providing for groups of employees specialized courses, with or without credit. ( 3 ) To sponsor lectures, conferences and institutes for the benefit of students and the general public. ( 4 ) To afford, through cooperation with degree-granting col- leges, courses during evening hours leading to a degree in one of the colleges of the University. (5 ) To maintain administrative facilities for students who have matriculated for special programs or for an unspecified degree, and who are not enrolled in another college of the University. NOTE: Veterans expecting to secure GI Bill benefits for educa- tion should note that the Division of Continuing Education does not offer a degree and, therefore, cannot extend GI benefits except under most unusual circumstances. To secure such benefits the student must be enrolled in University College or in one of the six degree-granting colleges. Transferring Credit from Continuing Education Students who accumulate credits in the Division of Continuing Education and who subsequently ~vish to work toward a degree, must transfer to the University College or to one of the degree- granting colleges. In making that transfer the student must meet all of the requirements for registering in that college. Students transferring to the University College must file high school transcripts, college transcripts and scores of the American College Test. Residence and Extension Credit All credit courses offered by Wichita State University within the City of Wichita carry residence credit; credit courses offered at locations outside the city may carry extension credit. Correspon- dence work is offered by V'ichita State University through the University of Kansas. Standards and Requirements Students who do not meet the requirements for admission to credit courses may be admitted to such courses as audit students. Such 86 UNIVERSITY COLLEGE persons are enrolled as special students, pay the same fees and receive the same lecture and classroom privileges as credit students. They are not required to take announced examinations. Bulletin Prior to each semester a bulletin is prepared by the Division of Continuing Education announcing registration dates, courses of- fered, schedule of classes, and other pertinent information. The bulletin is available upon request. SPECIAL UNIVERSITY COLLEGE COURSES HUMANITIES 299. International Seminar. (4). An interdisciplinary travel seminar: a study of European culture which includes observaions ot art and architecture in principal European cities, lectures and discussions of European political, social and economic problems given I)y foreign nationals; and conducted visits to various historic places of interest. Seminar under direction of a member of the faculty. PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT 100. Freshman Seminar. (1). A study of the University as a resource for personal development, and the development of an individual master plan for study and self-development in the University. 102. Occupation Seminar. (1). A study of occupations and curriculums; development of a personal profile from test results and past experiences selec- tion of a major curriculum, and development of a master plan to be followed. SELF IMPROVEMENT COURSES The following courses are not applicable to a degree in the bacca- laureate colleges. Engl. 70. E n Jish for Foreign Students. (3). 2R; 1 C. Designed to determine the students' facility with the English language. All foreign students are re- quired to enroll and participate until approval of the instnictor is obtained. Math. 52. Algebra. (5). The topics from high school algebra essential to the study of university level mathematics. May be used, in meeting department prerequisites, in place of one and one-half units of high school algebra. Pre- requisite: None. Math. 60. Plane Geometry. (2). For students without high school credit in plane geometry. May be ~ised in meeting department prerequisites, in place of one unit of high school geometry. Prerequisite: One unit of high school alge- bra or hlathematics 52, or conctirrent enrollnient in Mathematics 52. Personal Cevelopment 60. Reading Improvement Techniques. (2). 2R; 1L. Designed for those students who seek to improve reading skills. Reading and study habits are diagnosed and results are used to design a program of self- improvement in these and other skills for each student. Personal Development 80. Writing Improvement Techniques. (2). 2R. De- signed for those students who are interested in developing writing skills directly related to use in academic courses. Emphasis will be placed on individualized and basic skill development. UNIVERSITY COLLEGE 87 4." 88 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS AND SCIENCES PAUL J. MAGELLI, PhD, Dean Regardless of the area of his ultimate specialization, man is, before all else, 3 member of civilization. Ours is a complex civilization, one which requires an ever-increasing degree of wphisticated uncler- standing. To study the liberal arts and sciences means, in essence, to study the range and scope of man's knowledge about himself ancl about his universe. Consequently, the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences has a number of functions, purposes, and responsibilities. Above all, it m u ~ tprovide a broad educational basis for all students, regardless of their ~pecific major. their educational goal, or their college. We ask each student to strive for a well-balanced and integrated study of the basic areas of human knowledge ancl creativity. Within the college a student's erlucation is developed according to his particular interest in one of the four main types of study: Preparation for professional and technical studies, education in a specified discipline, cross-cultural education, and preparation for teaching. The concept as outlined above underlies most of the re- quirements and curricula of the college ancl hopefully encourages students to explore a variety of possibilities. The college expects all students to become literate in at least one foreign language, as well as proficient in English and to give attention to the natural sciences and social science5 and to humanities, regardless of their professional interests. Faculty and students are constantly at work to maintain flexibility in the face of pressures to conform, to develop leadership in defining issues, and to discover, if possible, better answers to continuing problems. The College of Liberal Arts and Sciences hopes to accomplish these aims while maintaining aca- demic freedom and the right of dispassionate inquiry into all areas of human knowledge. In this manner, we hope that students will learn to make vigorous responses to all manner of contemporary, social, and academic problems which do not always lend therselves to traditional solutions. Liberal arts, then, in addition to preparation for teaching, Grad- uate School, and professional endeavors, is also the college within the University for students who do not specifically aim at a career objective but seek to find themselves in the thrill of the discovery of new and challenging ideas and ways of making their life ex- periences meaningful. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 89 REQUIREMENTS ADMISSION A student may be admitted to Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences if he has successfully completed 24 semester hours and is not on probation as defined by this college. PROBATION AND DISMISSAL STANDARDS I t is expected that students will make satisfactory progress in their studies. A student who fails to do so may be placed on probation at any time ancl ultimately dismissed from the University. Students who have earned up to 63 hours ~vill be required to earn a grade point average (GPA) of at least 1.70 each semester. Stu- dents who have comaleted more than 63 hours will be reauired to earn an average of acleast 2.00 each semester. Students ~ 6 o d not achieve the required GPA will be placed on probation and must make at least 2.00 each semester while on probation. A student with 63 hours or less not on probation who fails to earn a grade point average of at least 1.70 in any semester will be placed on arobation for the follo\ving. semester. At the end of the semester - in which the student has been placed on probation, and was re- quired to earn at least a 2.00 GPA, his transcript will be reviewed. Students who failed to earn the required average will be dismissed. Students who live up to the probation requirements will be con- tinued on this status as long as they earn at least a 2.00 average and until their accumulative grade point average has reached the mini- mum level commensurate to their hours of college credit earned. A student with more than 63 hours not on probation who fails to earn a GPA of 2.00 in a semester will be placed on probation for the follow in^ semester. At the end of the semester in which the student L, has been on probation, he will be continued on probation if his grade point average for the semester is at least 2..00 and until he reaches a cumulative GPA of 2.00. If he fails to earn at least a 2.00 for any semester on probation, he will be dismissed for poor scholarship.* O NOTE: No student on probation who enrolls in fewer than seven hours shall be placed on academic dismissal for the failure to raise the cumulative grade point index to the required level; however, if such a student has earned seven or more hours in two or more terms, he must achieve a grade point average for the semesters of 2.00 as listed above to be continued on probation. A student who has been dismissed for poor scholarshi may enroll only with special permission of the Committee on Admissions, ~ f v a n c e d Standing, and Exceptional Programs. TRANSFER OF CREDIT WITHIN THE UNIVERSITY Hours complcted in colleges other than Fairmount College or University College shall be transferred for credit under the follo\i - ing general rules: 90 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE ( 1 ) Credit shall transfer when, in the judgment of the academic official charged with revienling the transcript of a student, the work offered constitutes progress to\i:ard. his new degree goal in Fair- mount College. Not more than 21 hours shall he transferred, except in cases involving state certification rccluirements. ( 2 ) In the courses listed helow the following limitations shall be in effect: ( 3 ) Credit in courses in industri~tl education, library science. and elementar!, education (except for children's literature) \i.ill not be transferred. Only one credit hour in one semester and not more than eight hours maximum credit shall transfer for chorus, band. or othcr ensembles. Applied music shall transfer not to exceed eight hours. Applied art shall transfer r?ot to exceed eight hours. DEGREE REQUIREMENTS The Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Science degrees are con- ferred in this college. Each degret. requires a minimum of 124 credit hours and a grade point index of 2.00. The general require- ments for graduation are listed "Requirements for Graduation" earlier in the Ccrtalog. The following are the requirements for a degree from Fairmount College: English: The student milst complete English 111, and 211 or 225. with a grade of C or better, and at least three semester hours OF American or English literature. (Note: Such ;I course may he chosen in such a ma). as to satisfy core curricl~lum requirements simultaneously. ) Histor!/-Political Science: The student must demonstrate a pro- ficiency in the field of American political system and institutions by ( a ) passing an examination offered once each semester. at an an- nounced time, by the departments of history and political science, or ( b ) passing one of the follonring courses: History 131 or 132, or Political Science 121 or 211. (Note: These courses also satisfy core curriculum requirements. ) Mathematics: The student must complete satisfactorily five or six semester hours of mathematics courses numbered 100 or above. (Note: All such mathematics courses will satisfy core curriculum requirements. ) Foreign Languages: In fulfilling his degree requirements in foreign languages, the student may choosc either ( 1) or ( 2 ) helorr,: (1) a. If a candidate for the BA degree, he must completc satisfactorilj- five semester hours beyond the level of 112. IVhilv high school credit may apply to this requirement, the student mu:;t take at least one college course, regardless of the number of high FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 91 scliool credits presented, or demonstrate equivalent proficienc!, through examination. b. If a candidate for the BS degree, he must complete satis- factnrilv three semester hours bevond the level of 112. \\'hilt high school credit may apply to this requirement, the student must take at least one college course, regardless of the number of liig!? school credits presented, or demonstrate ecluivalent proficienc!? t h r o u ~ h examination. ( 2 ) He may complete s:~tisfactorily the 111-112sec~uence. or thc equivalent, in a second langnage, if he also can present at least two high school units or two college semesters of another language. Regardless of the number of high scliool credits presented, at least one course must he taken in col!ege. NOTI: Orle year of high scliool work n-ill be considered as the* equivalent of one college semester. With the permission of the appropriate clepartmcnt a student with high school credit in foreign language may enroll for college credit at a level one semester I>elo\v that for n~hicli his high school credit makes him eligil~le. Under certain conditions, a student may petition to enroll for credit in the first course of that 1;ingl~age. Such permission is granted on an individual 11nsis to students whose language experience has h e w interrupted or for whom special circumstances prevail. \Vitliouf this permission no credit \vill lw given for \vork done at a level \vhich duplicates high school foreign language study. hTntura?Science: .A student nresentinr fewer than t\vo units of L, high school laboratory scievce (exclusive of gcneral science) must complete satisfactoril!. 14 semester hours, four of which must be in a laboratory science. -1student presenting two units of high school laboratory science (exclusive of general science) must com- nlete satisfactorilv a minimum of nine semester hours, four of which must be in a laboratory science. Except for stuclents majoring i ! ~ the natural sciences, four semester hours must be taken in each of the physical and biological science divisions as listed in the Univer- sity core curriculum. Courses elected 11y the student may satisf>- core curriculum requirements. NOTE: It is recommended that the follo\ving course work be completed by the time the student achieves EO hour5 and 120 credit points or within the nest semester therc:tfter: Six semester hours of English composition Five or six hours of mathematics, depending on the sequence the student chooses 10 hours of foreign language or the equivalent Four or five hours of a laboratory science course. I t is not expected that students working toward a Bachelor of Science degree will be able to fulfill the foreign language require- ment within this time limit. 92 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE MAJOR AND MINOR OFFERINGS The College of Liberal Arts and Sciences offers majors in the following fields: administration of justice, American studies, anthro- pology, art, art histon, bioloqy, chemistry, classical languages, eco- nomics, English, French, geology, German, history, journalism, linguistics, logopedics, mathematics, minority studies, music, philos- ophy, physics, political science, psychology, religion, social work, sociology, Spanish, and speech. Candidates for the Bachelor of Arts degree shall elect: ( 1 ) A major in one field of study of not less than 24 hours or more than 41 hours, or a combined major consisting of 24 hours from one field of study and 12 hours from an allied field of study (such combined major must be arranged with approval of the departments involved by the beginning o f the junior year), or a major from a professional field, including art, economics, logopedics, and music; ( 2 ) at least 12 hours of upper division work in the major field; ( 3 ) work in such additional fields of study out5ide the major field of study as the faculty of the major field of study may deem appropriate. Any hours in one field of study above 41 must be counted as in excess of the 124 hours required for graduation. Students who major in art, logopedics, and music must establish hvo minors in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. h4inors are offered in all fields of study listed above and in geography, and police science. h4inors acceptable from outside Fairmount College are engineering and accounting, and such education courses as are necessary for certification. Candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree should consult with their major adviser relative to requirements. The Bachelor of Science degree is available in the following fields of study: admin- istration of justice, biology, chemistry, geology, mathematics, and physics and riormally requires 43 hours for the major. However, any hours in one field of study above 43 must be counted as in excess of the 124 hours required for graduation. SPECIAL PROGRAMS OF STUDY The Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences provides courses which are basic for certain professional fields and for sub- sequent professional studies. The liberal arts studies are recognized as vital in establishing the background resources for such areas. Although there are many similarities in the broacl pattern of pre- professional education, there are marked differences in specific requirements. ART HISTORY The program in art history is designed to prepare students for the whole range of activities related to the art of the past: criti- FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 93 cism, connoisseurship, colleqe and secondary level teaching, and conservation. MAJOR: A major in art history leadins to a Bachelor of Arts de- gree in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, requires a minimum of 30 hours of art history ancl must include Art 101, 102, and 463. In addition the course Introduction to Methods and Media of Painting (Art 229) must be taken. Because of the international nature of the study, the student must become proficient in reading one of the following languages: French, Italian or German. ( A minimum of 13 hours in one language is required. ) MINOR: Students \$rill complete 15 hours in art history. Art 101 and 102 are required. (Courses are listed under Art in College of Fine Arts. ) MUSIC See Music in Collegc of Fine Arts section for requirements and curriculum. FIELD MAJOR This major is designed to provide a field of study wherein three or more fields of study are correlated to secure a broader apprecia- tion of the cultural and dynamic factors of human conduct. The selection of the courses is made with the counsel of the adviser and the approval of the dean of the college. Such a major cuts across departmental lines and is determincd by the field of specific interest but must be an acceptable combination. Normally the allocation of the 36 hours required for the major is 18 hours in the major depart- ment and not less than nine in each of two allied departments. LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES The Latin American Studies program consists of courses from several departments ancl allows the major to pursue a broadly-based program of study which \\fill lead to a better understanding of both historic and contemporary Latin America. The major in Latin American Studies offers two alternatives with emphasis on either Spanish language or the social sciences. (See description below.) A minor is also offered. Spanish Lanqrtage Emphnsis, MAJOR:A major in Latin American Studies with an emphasis in Spanish consists of at least 32 hours and must include Anthropology 308. Economics 370 or 471, History 225,226 and 328, Geography 364, Political Science 423, Spanish 340, 426, and any other 300-400 level course in Latin American literature. Other courses must be elected from the following: Anthropology 346, History 325, 326, 327, 329, and Political Science 420. Approved 94 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE special projects courses related to Latin America taken in the departments listed above may also count toward the major in Latin American Studies. Proficiency in reading Portuguese is required. Social Science Emphasis, h l ~ j o ~ :A major in Latin American Studies with an emphasis in social science consists of at least 30 hours and includes 21 hours of required courses (Anthropologv 308, Economics 471, History 225, 226, 328, Geography 364 and Political Science 423). An additional nine hours must be selectecl from the following: Anthropology 346, History 325, 326, 327, 329, Economics 370 or 470, Political Science 420, and Spanish 342. Approved spe- cial projects courses related to Latin America taken in the depart- ments listed above may also count toward the major in Latin Ameri- can Studies. Majors must take at least 13 hours of Spanish or demonstrate equivalent competence in reading and conversation. MINOR:A minor in Latin American Studies consists of the follow- ing: Anthropology 308," Economics 471,t Geography 364, History 226, and Political Science 423. In addition, Spanish must be chosen to meet the Liberal Arts language requirement. FIELD TRIPS Student attendance on filed trips is mandatory in those courses for which trips are (1) listed in the Catalog description of the course or ( 2 ) are identified by the instructor as essential for earning credit in the course. Absences from such trips are permitted only when prior approval is granted by the instructor. Credit may be withheld for the course until the field trips have been completed by the student. Inasmuch as field trips constitute an extension of classroom or laboratory instruction into areas removed from the campus, student behavior and conduct on field trips must accord with the appropri- ate patterns of conduct established for students in classrooms and laboratories on the University campus. SPECIAL PROGRAMS OF PREPROFESSIONAL NATURE The advisers in the various preprofessional fields and closely related departments will provide specific information relative to courses and requirements. PRELAW In a statement of policy by the Association of American Law Schools, emphasis is placed upon undergraduate studies which provide "comprel~ension and expression in words; critical under- * Onp threc-hour prerequisite: Elther Anthropoloq 124 or 202. t One three-hour prer~quisite: Econ. 232. Econ. 221 as a prerequisite for Econ. 222 may be waived for students choosing the Latin American minor, but who are not majoring 111 economics. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 95 standing of the human institutions and values with which the law deals, and creative power in thinking," to be achieved through disciplined study in the fields of the student's choice. Degree requirements for a Bachelor of Arts degree ucill provide a general education and concentration in a field of major study. The prelegal adviser will provide information relative to requirements for entrance to law school. PREMEDICAL, PREDENTAL, PREVETERINARY, PREPHARMACY, PREOPTOMETRY Schools of medicine emphasize for admission a broad education as well as prescribed studies in the sciences. The prospective phy- sician should also possess those qualities of character which make for effective citizenship and professional competence. Preparation for the study of medicine should include, therefore, courses of study which develop disciplined thinking, intelligent appreciation of values, and sympathetic understanding of man and society. Since vital aspects of the study of medicine are associated with scientific knowledge and techniques, courses in biology, chemistry, physics, and allied fields are required. Students may choose to major in these fields but other majors may be selected in preparation for the study of medicine. The dean of the College of Health Related Professions and his staff provide general counseling and assistance in career planning. All premedical and predental students entering this University are required to maintain a tran~cript in the office of the dean of CHRP. An interview with the dean of the college also is required each semester. The counselor for studies will provide in- formation relative to the Medical College Admission Test recom- mencled by the Association of American Medical Colleges. CHRP maintains a file of medical school catalogs and other pertinent in- formation for the student to plan for admission to medical school. Students are urged to consult with the premediral counselor at the earliest possible time in regard to the o;;?orr.~nities and require- ments in this professional field. While the four-year degree program is definitely preferable, it is possible in some medical schools to gain admission on the basis of a three-year program of studies. Students of Wichita State Univer- sity who have taken 94 hours of preparation, the last 30 of which must have been taken at \Irichita State University, have complied with the re scribed fields of study requirements, have 188 credit points with no more than 20 hours of D grade work, have passed the first year of medical or dental school (for 30 hours) and are eligible for admission the second year may be granted the degree of Bachelor of Arts by Wichita State University if application be made by the candidate for such a degree. Students with a major in 96 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE biology are required to complete with the 94 hours either the zoology or microbiologv option listed under the biology department. Schools of dentistry require prescribed preparation in the sciences as well as general education. Although the entrance requirements are generally of the same character, the student should give careful attention to the pattern in the school of his choice. Emphasis upon the sciences, generally with a major in biology, is recommended. The counselor for predental studies will provide a specific program of course work for either the three-year or four-year program. The preparation for the study of veterinary medicine generally includes the essential pattern of basic education and emphasis upon science with special reference to biology. The counselor for pre- veterinary medicine studies will provide a specific program of course work. Schedules may be arranged to meet entrance requirements of the various schools of optometry, osteopathy, pharmacy, mortuary science, and related professional fields. PRETHEOLOGICAL Students interested in pursuing graduate theological work should arrange their programs of preparation in consultation with the chairman of the Department of Religion. Specific requirements set forth by the individual seminaries can thus be satisfied. PUBLIC SERVICE There is a growing demand for college graduates in the field of public service. The foreign service of the United States offers an attractive field to a limited number of young men and women who desire a career abroad. The federal government and an increasing number of cities ancl states are using the principles of the merit system for their employees. Related fields open to properly trained college graduates are found in municipal research bureaus and legislative reference bureaus. Preparation for such service is not confined to any one department. Students interested in public ser- vice as a career should consult with their advisers or the heads of their departments as to the courses which will best prepare them. Students interested in public administration should also consult the civil service bulletins. SOCIAL WORK A major and minor are provided in the sociology department of the Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences for training in various areas of social work. Courses are designed for four types of students: (1) All students as preparation for intelligent and responsible community participation; ( 2 ) the student who, upon graduation, may accept a position not now requiring professional FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 97 graduate training; ( 3 ) the student who plans to go on to a graduate school of social work; ( 4 ) the stuc!ent who is preparing to enter another of the helping professions. See social work later in this section of the Catalog for curriculum requirement. The University is a member of the Council on Social Work Education. TEACHING Students in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences may qualify for secondary teaching certificates in Kansas ancl in several other states. Those who plan to qualify for the standard secondary teach- ing certificate must complete the program as outlinecl in the College of Education section. LIBERAL ARTS AND SCIENCES CURRICULUM COURSES IN THE HONORS PROGRAM The following courses are designed for use by the honors program for honors students. The precise content of any such course for a given semester must be approved for each offering by the Honors Committee. Any such course may be taken no more than twice by any one student for academic credit toward a degree. The A clesig- nation indicates the course may apply as credit for Group I core curriculum requirements; B indicates the course may apply as credit for Group I1 core curriculum requirements; C indicates the course may apply as crezit for Group I11 core curriculum requirements; D incicates the ccurse may apply as credit for Group IV core cur- ruculum requirements. The general course titles are worded ac- cording to these core curriculum group titles. Honors 100A. Special Studies in Mathematics and Natural Science. (1-4). Honors 100B. Special Studies in Communications. (1-4). Honors 100C. Special Studies in Humanities. (1-4). Honors 100D. Special Studies in Social Sciences. (1-4). Honors 200A. Proscminar in Mathematics and Natural Sciences. (1-4). Honors 200B. Proseminar in Communications. (1-4). Honors 200C. Proseminar in Humanities. (1-4). Honors 200D. Proseminar in Social Sciences. (1-4). Honors 300A. Colloquium in Mathematics and Natural Science. (1-4). Honors 300B. Colloquium in C3mmunications. (1-4). Honors 300C. Colloquium in Humanities. (1-4). Honors 300D. Colloquium in Social Sciences. (1-4). Honors 400. Honors Seminar. (1-4). Honors 410. Independent Study. (1-4). 98 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE SPECIAL INTERDEPARTMENTAL COURSES Humanities 299. '~nternational Seminar (4) . An interdisciplinary travel seminar: A study of European culture which includes observations of art and architecture in principal European cities, Iectr~res and discussions of European political, social and economic prol~lrnls givcn I I V foreign nationals; and conducted visits to various historical places of intcrcst. Srminar under direction of a member of the faculty. ADMINISTRATION OF JUSTICE The program in administration of justice provides a broad, multi- disciplinary background for preservice and in-service students seeking course work to increase their ability as practitioners in the American justice system. The program provides for special- ization in a field of tlie student's particular interest, i. e., law en- forcement, courts, or correctinns. MAJOR:The major in administration of justice consists of at least 30 hours, including Administration of Justice 100 or 101, 201, 310 or 312, 321, and 403, and 15 hours in one of the following areas of specialization: I. General Administration of Justice (15 hours) An overview of administratinn of justice allowing exposure to a variety of specializations. 15 elective hours in administration of justice course work (nine of which must be upper di\.ision), of which a minilnun1 of 12 hours must be distributed among at Icast three of the four specialty areas listed below. (A course although Iistcd in tu-o arcas fulfills the distribution requirement for only one area.) 11. Agency Administration (15 hours) Management of law enforcement and corrections agencies' line and staff services. AJ 301, 433, 436, 4.39, and three elective hours in administration of justice course work. 111. Corrections Services (15 hours) Rehabilitative casework ant1 court-directed supervision of convicted offenders in both correctional institutions and the community. AJ 360, 406, 433. 456, and three elective hours of administration of justice course work. IV. Investigation (15 hours) Scientific and traditional criminal investigation services provided by law enforcement agencies. AJ 243, 244. 443, 446, and three elective hours in administration of justice course work. V. Prevention Programs Development (15hours) Development of community-l~ased law enforcement and corrections; crime and delinquency prevention programs. AJ 360, 406 or 433, 136, 460, and three elective hours in administration of justice course work. In addition to the aforementioned departmental requirements, students majoring in administration of justice will be directed to select a minimum of 2-1 hours of supportive course work in one or more of the follo\ving departments: sociology, social work, psy- FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 99 chology, political science, anthropology, chemistry, biology, geology, and physics. With his adviser's assistance and approval, the student will select courses from these departments which best relate to his particular administration of justice specialty area. (NOTE: These courses may be cho5.en in such a way ;IS to satisfy certain sections of the University core curriculum requirements simultaneously.) S~ISOR:The minor consists of at least 18 hours of administration of justice including .\J 100 or AJ 101, and hvo upper division courses. CERTIFICATE:An Associate of Applied Science certificate in ad- ministration of justice will be awarded by University College on completion of a 6 1-hour, two-year program. (See University College section. ) PREREQUISITES:AJ 100 or AJ 101or departmental consent is a pre- requisite for all other administration of justice courses, plus addi- tional requirements when noted. Lower Division Courses 100. Introduction to the Administration of Justice. (3). An introduction to the philosophy and history of law enforcement, identifying multiple facets of the administration of justice system, including the police, the courts, correctional agencies, and the offender. The administration of justice role as it relates to the individual and to society. Through visitation and contact with administra- tion of justice agencies, the student is acquainted with the responsi~iilities and problems of his personal development for an administration of justice career. 101. Law Enforcement Operations and Procedures. (3). An introduction to law enforcement operations and pr;)cedures inclrltling police organization and administration. Emphasizes the pcllicr role in society and operational procedures including deployment of person~lrl, arrpst procedures, crime scene techniques, and other basic police tactics. (Required for in-service students only.) 103. Law Enforcement in the Community. (3). Rights and duties of citizens. Constitutional provisions aflrcting law enforcement officers, emphasizing due process, search and seizure, ant1 informant identity. Interview and interrogation techniques and procedures used in all phases of contacts within the community structure. 106. Traffic, Transportation, and Highway Safety. (3). Enforcement problems created I)y modern transportation in society. Traffic control, engineering, edu- cation, enforcement procedures. as well as accident investigation, are included. Use of traffic records and statistics fcr selective enforcement. 124. Dactyloscopy and Personal Identification. (3). Physical descriptions em- phasizing the sciencc of fingerprints and personal identification. The Henry system of classification inclrldinq indii.idua1 characteristics, patterns, and classifications. Comparison procedure. 201. Agency Administration I. (3). A survey of management models, ad- ministrative techniques, and patterns of organizational structure characteristic of administration of justice agencies. 221. Criminal Law. (3). History, scope and nature of law; parties to crime; classification of offenses; act and intent; capacity to commit crime and defenses. Elements of major criminal statutes. An overview of criminal processes and rules of evidence. 100 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 243. Special Investigation. (3). Care, collection, and preservation of evi- dence. Sources of information and locating subjects. Crime scene recording. Investigative techniques applicable to specific offenses. 244. Criminalistics and Scientific Crime Detection. (3). Scientific aids avail- able to law enforcement officers, including forensic chemistry, physics, and microanalysis. Investigative procedures from crime scene, through laboratory analysis, to court presentation. Prerequisite: AJ 243 or consent ot department. 245. Investigative Photography. (3). Photography as applied in law enforce- ment. This includes field experience and the use of specialized equipment. Diagramming the crime scene. Prerequisite: AJ 243 or consent of department. Upper Division Courses 301. Agency Administration 11. (3). An intensive examination of a variety of emerging administrative and management innovative concepts. The proc- esses related to the determination and implementation of management philoso- phy for the administration of iustice agency and its individual practitioners will be explored. Prerequisite: AJ 201 or consent of department. 310. EDP in Administration of Justice. (3). A survey of use and potential of electronic data r c e s s i n g in police, courts, and correctional agencies The ethical and lega problems confronting society and the agencies of the justice system occasioned by the use of computers as information gathering and storage instruments will be examined, as well as the advantages of using EDP in basic and applied research in the administration of justice. 312. Research Methods. (3). An introduction to statistical methods, includ- ing experimental design, the analysis of statistical processes, and related pro- cedures; and the general methodology of research as it pertains to the admin- istration of iustice. 321. Law and the Administration of Justice Process. (3). Examination of recent judicial interpretations affecting legal process, rules of evidence, sub- stantive law, and administrative law. In-depth study of statutoy provisions with emphasis on the conflict of laws and legal trends affecting a m~n~stration of justice personnel. 360. Community Prevention Programs. (3). An analysis of the typologies, philosophies, and operations of existing and projected community-based crime prevention programs. Emphasis will also be placed on a variety of govern- mental and nongovernmental community support and action programs, which, although not traditionally identified as such, appreciably contribute to the ad- ministration of justice process. Program categories to be analyzed include: citizen involvement (vo unteer practitioners and civilian advisory groups), edu- cational, religious, and family, welfare, and youth services. 403. Senior Seminar. (3). An intensive study of the theory and operation of the total criminal justice system. Required of all administration of justice majors. Prerequisite: Senior standing and consent of department. 406. Conflict Resolution in the Administration of Justice. (3). An analysis of community and individual reaction to agency policy and services. Emphasis will be placed on the a ency's role as mediator between offenders and victims of crime and between o 8 e r groups and individuals in conflict. 421. Independent Study. (1-3). Study in a specialized area of the admin- istration of justice system with emphasis on the student's research project. Pre- service students may be assigned intern positions in one or more of the opera- tional agencies. Prerequisite: 15 hours in the administration of justice core and department consent. May be repeated for credit not to exceed a total of six hours. 433. Planning in the Administration of Justice. (3). Analysis of planning techniques related to the procedures, personnel, physical and specialized equip- FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 101 ment, budget, and extra-agency activities. Prerequisite: AJ 201, or consent of department. 436. Public and Community Relations. (3). Analysis of techniques utilized by administration of justice agencies in both public and community relations programs which are designed to optimize the agency's communication capa- bility. Special emphasis will be placed on the unique characteristics of both public and community relations. 439. Techniques of Agency Staff Supervision. (3). Analysis of the personnel supervision, training, and evaluation techniques utilized by administration of justice agencies, with emphasis on techniques which will optimize the agency- practitioner work relationship. Prerequisite: AJ 201. 443. Forensic Science. (3). Analysis of the medical role of prevention, detec- tion, and treatment as related to the administration of justice. Emphasis will be placed on medical specialty areas, such as pathology and psychiatry, which have significant effect on segments of the administration of justice process. 446. Seminar on Investigation Theory and Practice. (3). Analysis and dis- cussion of investigative theory and practice with special emphasis on trcli- nological innovation and current judicial perspective. Prerequisites: AJ 24:3 and 244. 453. Field Corrections Techniques. (3). An analysis of the trchniques of probation, parole, after-care supervision, and related scr\.ices. Special emphasis will be placed on field corrections techniques as they relate to other segments of the administration of justice system. 456. Institutional Corrections Techniques. (3). An analysis of the techniques of institutional correctional practice, including diagnostic centers. halfway houses, and other related treatment models. Spccial emphasis will be placrd on institutional corrections techniques as they relate to other segments of thc administration of justice system. 460. Techniques of Prevention Program Development. (3). An analysis of th:. techniclues utilized to organize and develop traditional and projcctctl crime. prevention and related govc~rnmental and nongovernment~il sponsored prozmms. Special emphasis will be placecl on the techniques of identifying existin% cnln- munity service resourcrs and subscq~~ently increasing their levcl of invol\.r- ment in the administration of justice proccss. Prerequisite: AJ 360, or consent of department. AMERICAN STUDIES The program in American Stuclies provides a broad cultural back- ground and, proportionately, a specialization in a field of the stu- dent's particular interest. ~ ~ A J O R :37 hours minimum, consisting of American Studies 301 (2-4), nine hours from American Studies 311, 312, 321, 322, 411, 412, and American Studies 498 (3-6) and 499 (3-6) (required); 18 hours to be chosen from at least three of the following groups: English: 2.52, 262, 302, 303, 440 History: 131, 132, 331,333, 334,437, 438, 441, 444, 445 Political Science: 121, 211, 315, 316 Anthropology: 309, 310, 336, 337, 490, 498 Philosophy: 356 Economics: 307 Speech: 432 Geography: 302. 102 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE ~ I I N O R :A minor in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences con- sists of 1.5hours, including American Studies 301 (2-4) plus at least six other upper division hours. 301. Introduction to American Studies. (2). .in examination of the America11 background from an interdisciplinary perspective. The intent is to show ho\v thr humanities and social sciences can bc linked in the study of America. Prerequisite: Consent of department. hlay be repeated for a total of four hours crcdit. 311. The Colonial Period. (3). Those ideas and ideals, originally fostered 1)y the English colonists, which were to become the foundation of the new democracy. 312. The 20th Century. (3). The many contributing factors shaping tlie 20th century American ci.rrilization. 321. The Midlands and the High Plains. (3). The background, the factors in the settlement of this vast area, and tlie results of this settlement. 322. The American Southwest. of the sett1enir:nt of t h r (3). The backgro~~nd American Southwest, the impact of the com~ningling of three different cultures. and the evolving of a fourth culture. 411. The Romantic Revolution. (3). The impact of the Romantic Revolutio~~ on the nation's civilization as a liberating force in the period of its greatest change. 412. The Growth of Nationalism. (3). American Civilization during the period of its awakening to its place as a nation and the problems encountered. 498. Introduction to Research. (3). Bibliography, methodology, and th:. pliilosoph of research. Prerequisite.: Dcpartrnent conscnt. l i a y be repeated for a totarof six hollrs credit. 499. Seminar in American Studies. (3). Seminar and individual conferences organized around a problem or proble~ns prescntccl 1)). a reprtrsc:~tati.r~c~figure. theme, or period, i, e. , the Industrial Revolution, Reconstruction, \Vestwart1 Xligration, .\lark Twain and the Slississippi. Prel.eq11isite: Departnient con- sent. )lay he rep~atecl for >i total of six hours credit. ANTHROPOLOGY MAJOR: A major in anthropology consists of at least 30 hours, including Anthropology 124 or 202, 201, 447, an area course and one course in Archaeology (308, 336, or 337). Certain courses in related departments not to cxceed six hours, when they meet the particular needs of the student and are approved by his adviser, may be counted on the major. MINOR:The minor consists of 15 hours of anthropology selectycl in consultation with the stuclcnt's major adviser. Lower Division Courses 124. General Anthropology. (3). An introduction to the fields of physic;~l nnthropology, :~rchaeology and linguistics, analysis of thc concepts of socipt\. and c~ilture with special emphasis on nonliterate peoples of the world. 130. Afro-Amcrican Heritage. (3). The \Vest African and New Ii'orld hc,rit;lgcs of Black America. Analysis of Afro-American contributions to the social cultural, cconomic and political life of the United States. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 103 201. Paleoanthrop~log~.(3). The study of man's biological and c u l t u r ; ~ ~ development from early Paleolithic times through the rises of Bronze ilgc civi!izations. 202. Cultural Anthropology. (3). The meaning of culture, its significance for human beings: its divcrse forms among peoples of the world, past and present. 203. Peoples of the World. (3). A survey of the c~iltural configurations of nonliterate peoples of aboriginal America, Asia, Occanla, and Afric,~. Prc,- requisites: Anthro. 124 or 202. Upper Division Courses 301. Approach to Archaeology. (3). An introduction to the problems of studv- ing past cultures. Special attention is focused on methodology and techniques available to archaeologists and the theoretical rationale leading to sorind intcr- pretntions of the structure of extinct cultures. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 201 or eqriivalent. 305. African Ethnohistor~. (3). Human origin, migration patterns, suhsistencr and technological developments in Africa; analysis of African societies from European discovery through the emergence of modern nations. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 202. 306. Peoples of the Pacific. (3). A survey of the races, languages, and culture.; of nonliterate peoples of Polynesia, Micronesia, and Indonesia. Prerequisitr: Anthro. 124 or 202. 307. Peoples of Africa. (3). A description and analysis of the culture areas of Africa south of the Sahara. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 202. 308. High Cultures of Central and South America. (3). A cultural survcy of the Aztec, Maya and Inca Indian civilization. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 202. 311. The Indians of North America. (3). A survey of tribal societies and native confederations north of Mexico, from the protohistoric through the historic period. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 201 or equivalent. 312. Peoples of Asia. (3). Study of tribal cultures and civilizations of Asia in terms of major culture areas, racial varieties and linguistic patterns. Prerequi- site: Anthro. 124, 201 or 202. 318. Culture and Personality. (3). The relationship of individual personality, both normal and abnormal, to group membership and cultural configuratior~. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 202, or department consent. 319. Applied Anthropology. (3). The application of anthropological knowl- edge in the solution of social problems in industry, public health and public administration. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 202. 322. Primitive Esthetics. (3). A survey of the arts of preliterate peoples wit11 special attention to their function in the cultural setting. Prerequisite: Anthro. 121 or 002. 323. Primitive Folklores. (3). Survey of the oral literature of Africa, thr Americas, and the Pacific. Thc role of myths, tales, riddles ant1 proverbs ill reflecting a people's value and world view. Prerequisite: Anthro. 121 or g r a d ~ ~ a t estanding. 325. Social and Cultural Change. (3). A critical examination of the processual dynamics of social and cultural change the world over. with special cmphasis on contemporary non-European areas. Prerequisite: Six hours anthropology. 326. Social Organization. (3). A survey of the varieties of social organization among nonindustrialized peoples throughout the world. Deals with family systems, kinship, residence patterns, and lineape, clan and tribal organizations. Prerequisite: Six hours of anthropology. 104 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 327. Primitive Religion. (3). .4n examination of various concepts concern in^ the realm of the su crnatural as held by primitive people. Relates such re- ligious and magical teliefs-and the resultant practices-to the larger patterns of cultural contest. Prt:requisitc: Six hours of anthropology. 328. Introduction to Linguistics. (3). Principles of descriptive and historical linguistics: Phonetics and phonology, rnorpholo,gy and syntax. (Also German 327.) 335. Prehistory of North America. (3). A survey of the prehistoric cultures of North America north of Mexico from the earliest peopling of the continent to the time of European colonization. Prerequisite: Anthro. 201 or equivalent. 338. Early Man in the New World. (3). A critical examination of facts and theories concerning early man in the h e w \Vorld, from the peopling of the continent to the beginning of the Archaic Tradition, and of the role of cultural contacts between East Asia and North America. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 201 or equivalent. 340. The Indians of the United States: Conquest and Survival. (3). An an- thropological inquiry into four centuries of cultural contact, conflict, resistance, and renascence. Prerequisite: Anthro. 124 or 201 or equivalent. 345. Economics of Preindustrial Societies. (3). The study of methods of division of labor, organization of markets, concepts of money and property allocation in tribal societies. An emphasis will be placed on kinship units as units of consumption and production. Prerequisite: Six hours of anthropology. 346. Peasant Society. (3). A cross-cultural survey of anthropological studies of peasant societies in Asia, Europe, Latin America, etc. Emphasis wil'l br placed on the nature of peasant societies as compared with tribal or industrial societies. Prerequisite: Six hours of anthropology. 354. Physical Anthropology. (4). A course dealing with the biological evolu- tion of man through time, and the variations among populations past and present. Prerequisite: Anthro. 201 and department consent. 355. Fossil Evidence for Human Evolution. (3). A detailed examination of man's evolutionary history as evidenced by fossil remains and a survey of various interpretive explanations of the fossil record. Prerequisite: Anthro. 201 or Bio. 223 or equivalent. 356. Human Variability. (3). A critical examination of the biological and genetic aspects of human variation and of various classifications of man. Pre- requisite: Anthro. 201 and Bio. 100. 360. Anthropology of Law. (3). Organizational structures and processes which maintain social order in preindustrial societies. Prerequisite: Six hours of anthropology. 361. Political Anthropology. (3). The study of political organization in non- Western societies. Topics covered would include the origin of the state, pre- Colonial ~ol i t ics , the impact of colonialism upon these politics, and problems in post-Colonial political development. Emphasis will be placed upon African political systems. 411. Culture History of the Southwest. (3). A comprehensive survey of the prehistoric, historic and living crrltures of the American Southwest with parti- cular emphasis on the cultural continuities and changes covering some 12,000 years. Prerequisite: Nine hours of anthropology or consent. 412. Indians of the Great Plains. (3). An investigation of the cultural dynamics of the Indian occupation of the Great Plains region, from the beginning to the present. Prerequisite: Nine hours of anthropology. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 105 436. Advanced Studies in Archaeology and Ethnohistory. (3). Sp~cinl arpn and theory problems in an historical approach to culture. Prerequisite: 12 hours of anthropology. 447. Theories of Culture. (3). A survey of the main theoretical movements in cultural anthropolo,qy, including both historical and contemporary schools of thought. Prerequisite: Six hours of anthropology. 449. Educational Anthropology. (3). A course dealing with the basic concepts of anthropolow and their application to social science units in elementary and secondary grades. Explores the nature of sul)cultures in American society and the problems they pose for the classroom teacher. A course for education majors and graduate students. Also listed as Fd. Ed. 449. Cannot be used to meet requirements of the core curricr~lum for anthropology. 451. Language and Culture. (3). An introduction to historical and descriptive linguistic. Deals with the ethnography of communications, lexicostatistics and linguistic determinism. Prerequisite: Six hours of anthropology. 455. Seminar: Perspective on Human Design and Expression. (3). Surveys of concepts from anatomy, medicine, biology, anthropology, neuropsychology- concerned with human form and behavior. Discussion of individual dlfferences. Consent required. (Also PE 455.) 462. Aspects of Linguistic Theory. (3). (Also English 462 and Linguistics 462.) 490. Field Methods in Anthropology. (3-8). A course which instructs the student in archaeological and ethnological field methods through actual par- ticipation in a field research program. The project depends upon the specific Summer Session and varies from year to year. Prerequisite: Consent of in- structor. 498. Anthropological Problems. (2-3). Special prohlems in cultural anthro- pology. Prerequisites: 12 hours of anthropology. hlay be repeated up to six hours. Graduate Courses 500. Comprehensive Seminar in Anthropology. (3). A review of the important concrpts in archaeology, physical anthropology and cultural anthron,)lor.\. in preparation for graduate comprehensive csnmination. Prerequisite: Open only to graduate majors in anthropology. 501. Seminar in Archaeologv. (3). Comprehrnsivr analysis of archaeoloeical data with emphasis on theoretical prohlems of interpretation and reconstruction. Prerequisite: Anthro. 301 or consent. LIay he repeated up to six hours. 502. Methods in Anthropology. (2-3). A course designed to develop abilities in the conception and invrstieatio~l of anthrnpoloqical problems, interview and observation techniques as well as more specializecl methods such as photog- raphy, mapping and tape recording. Prerequisite: Department consent. May be repeated up to six hours. 505. Museum Methods. (3). An introduction to museum techiniques relating to acquisition of collections ant1 related procedures such as accessioning, cataloging, clocumentation. presentation and stor:tqe. Emphasis will be given to current trcnds in museolopical philosophy concerning purpose, function and relevance of museums, as well as career opport~~nities. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 506. Museum Exhibition. (3). Contemporary philosophy of exhibition design; the application of recent concepts to the planning and installation of an exhihit. Prerequisite: Anthro. 505 and consent of instructor. 106 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 537. Special Problems in Anthropology. (1-3). Intensive study on advanced theoretical questions in cultural antliropoloc!. or archaeology. Prerequisite: Five hours of anthropology. \lay be repc,aterl up to six hours. 548. Recent Developments in Anthropolo.gy. (3). A review of the latest dis- coveries and interpretations in the science of man. Prerequisite: Five hours of anthropology. May he repeated up to six hours. 570. Independent Reading. (1-3). Prerequisitr: Department consent. \lay l ) ~ repeated up to a total of six hours. 575-576. Thesis. (2-2). ART STUDIO-MAJOR See College of Fine Arts for requirements and curriculum. ART HISTORY-MAJOR See College of Fine Arts for requirements and curriculum. BIOLOGY MAJOR: A major in biolo(:y leading to a Bachelor of Arts degree requires 30 hours of biology, and must include Biology 111, 112, and 201, or the equivalent. Chemistry 111, 112, 231 and 232 or the equivalent, are required. A major in biologv lending to n Bachelor of Science degree re- quires 40 hours of biology, and muTt include 111, 112, and 201, or the equivalent, Chemistry 111: 112, 231, 232, or the equivalent, Physics 123, 12-1, and the courses listed in one of the three options, said option to 11e selected by the beginning of the junior year. Botany Option: Biology 322, 329 ancl 330. Jlict.obiology Option: Biolog! 301, 324 and either 325, 424, or 460. Students planning to do graduate work in microbiology are expected to complete satisfactorily hlathematics 142. Zoology Option: Biology 225 or 310, 309 and 320. h l r so~:A minor in biology rrquire5 15 hours. including Biology 111, 112 and 201. Several of the courses offered in the biology department are service courses, and are so designated. Service courses cannot be taken for creclit to\vard a biology major 01. minor. Lower Division Classes 100. Principles of Biology. (4). 3R; 2L. A general course in biology designed for students not majoring in sciences. Credit will not count toward a major or minor in l~iology. C r e d ~ t will not I>r ~ ~ i \ e nfor hoth Biology 100 and Science 102: Biological Science. 102. Riological Sciencc. (3). 5R. Llan in the living world. An introduction to the basic concepts of the I~iological sciences, with emphasis upon man himself. 111. Introductory Botany. (1). 3R; 3L. Frindamcntals of plant science in- cluding plant structure, clcveloplnent ancl physiology; relationships of major FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 107 plant groups, and biological principles illustrated with plant materials. Con- curent enrollment in frehhman chemistry is recommended. 112. Introductory Zoology. (4). 3R; 3L. Fundamentals of animal science including animal structure, development and physiology; relationship of major animal groups, and biological principles illustrated with animal materials. Concurrent enrollment in freshman chemistry is recommended. 120. Introduction to Microbiology. (4). 3R; 2L. Service course. Funda- mentals of microbiology with emphasis on microorganisms important in sanita- tion and disease. 201. Introductory Cellular Biology. (3). 3R. Fundamentals of cellular biol- ogy including basic constituents, structure, metabolism, responsiveness, co- ordination and reproduction. Prerequisite: Biol. 111 and 112, and Chem. 112 or concurrent enrollment. 223. Introductory Anatomy and Physiology. (5). 4R; 2L. An introduction to the structure and functions of the human body. Credit not applicable toward the core requirement for laboratory science. Prerequisite: Biol. 100 or 112. 225. Comparative Anatomy. (5). 3R; 4L. An intensive study of representa- tive chordates, with emphasis on vertebrate anatomy. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. Upper Division Classes 300. Ecology and Man. (3). 3R. An introduction to the fundamentals of ecology with emphasis on man as a part of the environment. Service course. Not for core credit. 301. Bacteriology. (5). 3R; 6L. An introduction to growth, development and mctabolis~n of bacteria and related forms. Prerequisite: Biol. 201, and Chem. 231 or concurrent enrollment. 302. Pathogenic Microbiology. (4). 3R; 3L. An introduction to the important pathogenic microorganisms and their relations to health and disease in man. Prerequisite: Biol. 301. 309. Invertebrate Zoology. (4). 3R; 3L. A compartive stud of the mor- phology and phylogeny of the invertebrates with emphasis on d e basic body types and their major variations. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 310. Vertebrate Zoology. (4). 2R; 4L. Evolution, distribution, systematics, natural history, and special characters of vertebrate animals. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. Biol. 225 recommended. 311. Microscopic Technique. (3). 9L. Preparation of materials for the study of minute anatomy. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 312. Parasitology. (3). 1R; 6L. The parasites of man and other vertebrate hosts. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 320. Comparative Animal Physiology. (4). 3R; 3L. A survey of physio- logical phenomena in the major groups of animals with attention to as a unifying discipline in zoology. Prerequisite: Biol. 201 and C%2$:"3~ 322. Plant Physiology. (5). 3R; 6L. The functional dynamics of plant metab- olism and growth, including water relations, nutrition, translocation, photo- synthesis, respiration, and various aspects of development. Prerequisite: Biol. 201 and Chem. 231. 324. Microbial Physiology. (3). 3R. The physiology and metabolism of micro- organisms. Prerequisite: Biol. 301 and Chem. 231. 325. Microbial Physiology Laboratory. (2). 6L. An introduction to the basic techniques involved in the study of microl)ial physiology. Prerequisite: Biol. 301 and Chem. 231. 108 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 329. Nonvascular Plants. (4). 2R; 6L. An introduction to the structure, re- production, and evolution of the algae, fungi, and bryophytes. Special empha- sis on cytology, physiology. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 330. Vascular Plants. (4). 2R; 6L. An introduction to the structure, repro- duction and evolution of the maior groups of living and extinct vasular plants. An introduction to flowering plant systematics will be included. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 343. Mycology. (4). 2R; 4L. The structure, development and reproduction of fungi with emphasis on the cytology and physiology of forms of scientific and economic importance. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 381. Entomology. (5). 3R; 4L. An introduction to the morphology, physi- ology, life cycles, behavior, ecology and economic significance of insects. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 401. Genetics. (4). 4R. The mechanisms of heredity and variation in plants and animals with a critical review of the concept of the gene. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. 402. Comparative Embryology. (4). 2R; 4L. Cametogenesis, fertilization, and developmental processes in animals with emphasis on vertebrates. Pre- requisite: Biol. 201. Biol. 225 recommended. 406. Analytical Methods in Biology. (2). 1R; 3L. The principles, capabilities and applications of modern techniques of instrumental measurement in biologi- cal research and teaching. Prerequisite: Biol. 201, Chem. 231, and Phys. 124. 412. Physiological Plant Ecology. (4). 2R; 6L. Principles and patterns of plant distribution and of adaptations of plants to particular habitats. Emphasis on the experimental approach to ecology. Field trips an integral part of the laboratory. Prerequisite: Biol. 322 or consent of instructor. 413. Animal Behavior. (3). 3R. A survey of animal behavior, including human, with maior emphasis on the analysis of behavior as a concert of physiological processes. Prerequisite: Biol. 201 or department consent. 414. Animal Behavior Laboratory. (2). 6L. Individual or team research projects in the area of behavior. Prerequisite or corequisite: Biol. 413. 415. Limnology. (5). 2R; 6L. Introduction to the biological and physical processes that operate in lakes, streams, and estuaries. Assigned readings, individual projects and field trips required. Prerequisite: Biol. 201 and consent of instructor. 419. Ecology. (3). 3R. Principles underlying the interrelationships of living organisms and their environments. Prerequisite: Biol. 201 or consent of de- partment. 420. Field Ecology. (3). 9L. Techniques for analysis of systems consisting of living organisms and their environments. Field trips required. Prerequisite or corequisite: Biol. 419 or consent of instructor. 421. Genetics Laboratory. (3). 9L. Use of viruses, bacteria, fungi and Droso- phila to illustrate principles of mutagenesis, gene action, recombination and population dynamics. Prerequisite: Biol. 301 and 401. 422. Protozoology. (4). 2R; 6L. Survey of the free living and arasitic protozoa; identification, life cycles and host-parasite relationships empxasized. Prerequisite: Biol. 301 or 309 or 312. 423. Cytology. (3). 2R; 3L. The structure, chemistn~, development, and function of the cell with particular reference to chromosomes and their bearing on genetics. Prerequisite: Biol. 201. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 109 424. Immunobiology. (3). 3R. The nature of antigens, antibodies, and their interactions; cellular and humoral aspects of immunologic phenomena. Pre- requisite: Biol. 201. 425. Immunobiology Laboratory. (2). 6L. Slrthods of immunization and techniques for qualitati\,c and quantitative clcterminations of antibody pro- duction and antigen-a~ltibocly reactions. Prcmrequisitc or cor~.quisite: Bic>l. -12 L, C h ~ m . 2:32 or conhent of inbtructor. 430. Histology. (4). 2R; 6L. S4icroscopic anatomy of lzertebrates with em- phasis on tlie rnammnl. Pr~!requisitr.: Biol. 223. 460. \licrobial Genetics. (4). 4R. The, relationship betwectn development, metabolism, and grnetics in ~nicroorganisms. Prerequisite: Biol. :301 and 401 or drpartmcnt conwnt. 482. Topics in Botany. (2). Prerequisite: Conscnt of instructor. hlay ht, repeated once for credit. 483. Topics in Zoology. (2). I'rrrequisitr: Consent of instructor. Slay bi. rcpcatcd once for crcdit. 484. Topics in hficrobiology. 12). Prerequisite: Consent of instrr~ctor. ;\la!- be rc,peatcd once for credit. 490. Biological Literature. (1). 2R. An introtlr~ction to tlie use of biological litrmt~~rcsand tlie prrp;tr;ltion of reports. Prcrcquisitc: 20 hrs, biology. Graduate Courses 500. Biology Seminar. (1). Rc\.iews of current research in biology. Pre- requisite: Hiol. 490 or co~lsent of instructor. ;\lay he repeatcd once for crcdit. 501. Comparative Invcrtcbrate hlorphology. (3). 3R. A drtailecl analysis of thr! nnatomy of invcrtebrnte organ ~ystcms and their evolution. Prerecluisitc: Biol. SO9 or consent of instructor. 502. Special Problems in Animal Behavior. (3). 3R. Emphascs nrp on prc.1.- predator interactions ; ~ n d the cffect of R cl ian~ing cnvirc>n~iient on heha\-ior:~l patterns. Prerequisite: Biol. 119 or const-nt of instructor. 503. Special Problems in Ecology. (5). 2R; 6L. Emphasis on conservation of natural rrso1:rcc.s. land and lvater use, n~ildlife and fisheries managem~nt , ancl effects of pollr~tion. Assigned readings. inc1ivid:tal projrcts, and ficld tri:>s required. Prcrcquisitc: Uiol. 415, 419. 420 or consent of instructor. 504. Advanced Immunologv. (3). 3R. Contemporary proble~iis in i~iimnnoloqic rf.se3rch. Lectur~s , assigned readings and reports. Prrrcquisite: Biol. 42.1 and consent of instructor. 505. Physiological Genetics. (3). 3R. S~ud i r s of the physiocheniical nntr~rc. of genetic ~iintcrial :~ncl tlie mechnni\ms of g c n ~ t i c rcqr~lntion of mc~taholism. 507. hlicrobial \letabolism. (3). 3R. Studies of the degradatir .~ and bin- syntl~etic metabolic pathlrnys of rcprcsc.nt;rtive bacteria, yeasts and highrr f u n ~ i . Prcrecjr~isitc: Biol. :301 or consent of instructor. 510. Physiological Basis of Behavior. (3). 3R. A modcrn approach to co- ordinator~ mechanisms \~.liich will stress the csscntial unitv of nervous and endocrine function. Prrrcqnisite: Biol. 320 or consent of instructor. 520. Radiation Biology. (3). 3R. hlechanisms of the genetic and non- genetic cffccts of rac?iations on unicellular and multicellular systems. Sr~rvcy:; of the physical properties of radiations and of radiation chemistry are included. Prercquisite: Conscnt of instructor. 561. Research. (1 to 5). Rcscarcli opportunities offered in botany, microbiology and zoology. A maximum of eiqht hours may be taken for credit. 576. Thesis. (2). 110 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE CHEMISTRY ~ , IAJOR.A major with a Bachelor of Arts degree requires Chem- istry 324, 332, 346, 347, and the ncccssary prerciquisites, which in- clude lfathematics 244 (o r equivalent) and one year of collegr p!lysics. Students with a sul~stantial interest in the 1~ioIogicnl sciences may satisfy the RA requircments by substituting Chemis- try 461 for Chemistry 321 or Chemistry 3.16. Jf substitution is made for 324 Chemistry 323 is required. A major with a Bachelor of Science degree consists of the B-4 requirerncnts, a reading knon.lcclge (or two semesters) of German, and a minimum of eight hours of -100 level courses which must in- clude Chemistry 111. Chcmistry 4Gl may he included in the 400 level courses, but it cannot be substituted for Chemistry 324 or 340 in meeting the BS requiremcnts. It is recommended that at least one credit hour of laboratory work be included in the 400 level courses. Additional physics ancl mathematics beyond the minimum requirements is strongly recommenclccl. This curriculum meets thc standards of the Amcrican Chemical Society in the professional training of chemists. The student who is working toward the Bachelor of Science degree should consult closely with the depart- ment in planning his curriculum. The premedical student who majors in chemistry should be ad- vised by a member of the chemistry department faculty. MINOR. The chemistry minor consists of at least 14 hours and must include at least four hours from Chemistry 302, 304, 323, and 331. Lower Division Courses 103. General Chemistry. (5). 3R; 4L. A hricf sllrvey of inorganic, organic. and biological chemistry for the student ~ v h o plans to take only one course in ~:hmmistry. This course is recommcndcd for students in dental hygiene, anti nursing, as well as those majoring in social science and the humanities. Stu- dents who espect to major in thc natural sciences shol~ld take Chem. 111-11.3. Credit will not be granted for both Chem. 103 and Chem. 111. 1 1 1 . General Chemistry. (5). 3R; 4L. An introduction to the general laws of chemistry and tllc. nonmetals and their compounds. The Chem. 111-112. course seclucnce is designed tc~ n ~ c e t the needs of natural science mc~jors and is not recommended for students with plan to take only one course in chemistry. Students who have had gooti high school preparation in chenristry and mnthc- matics should consitlcr the a'lternnte ;~ffordc-d by Cl~em. 123-1.24. Prerequisite: 1.5 units of high school algrbra or \lath. 52. Credit wil! not be granted for hot11 Chem. 103 and Clrem. 111. 112. General and Inorganic Chemistry. (5). 3H; 4L. 71'h(*chemistry of metals. rlrctrocltc.~nistr~,ionic rr4ililihria. :ind ictrotl~~ction to cli~alitnlivc nn;~l!rsis ant1 organic chc-mistry. Prc,rerlr~isite: Clicvn. 111 wit11 ;I gmtlr of C or better. 123-124. General and Analytical Chemistry. (5-5). 3R; 6L-3R; 6L. General c.hemistry and inti-otlllctory qll;tntitati\,e nn;llysis, incll~dinq ml~clr of the ma- terial ordinarily prt2scntc.d in Cl~crn. :32:3. St~~r lcnts s ~ ~ c c e s s f ~ ~ l l ~\ v h o complet~- this scqucmce arc not r r q ~ ~ i r e d to taktx Chvrn. 32:; as n prrr,:quisitc for Clien~. 324. Prerequisite: !.S units of high school al::c.bra, one 11r1it of his11 school chemistry, and consent of department. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 111 201. Glass Blowing. (1). 2L. Limited enrollment open to students upon recommendation of thc chemistry department. Upper Division Courses 302. Chemistry of Materials. (2). Fundamental general chemistry applied to chemical technology. Prerequisite: Chem. 112 (or equivalent) with a grade of C or better. 304. Elementary Physical Chemistry. (3). For students preparing for geology, biology, and medicine. Not for chemistry majors. Prerequisite: Chem. 112 (or equivalent) with a grade of C or I~etter. 323. Introductory Analytical Chemistry. (4). 2R; 6L. The fundamental prin- ciples of gravimetric and volumetric analysis. Prerequisite: Chem. 112 with a grade of C or better. 324. Analytical Chemistry. (4). 2R; 6L. Analysis of complex mixtures and introduction to instrumental methods and organic analysis. Prerequisite: Chem. 32.3 (or 123-124), and 345. Corequisite: Chem. 346. 331-332. Organic Chemistry. (5-5). 3R; 6L-3R; 6L. Introduction to the chemistry of carl~on compounds. Prerequisite: Chem. 112 (or equivalent) with C or better and consent of department. 345-346. Physical Chemistry. (3-3). 3R-3R. Introductory physical chemistry for students having a background in physics and calculus. Prerequisite: Chem. 331, Math. 243 (or equivalent), and one year of college physics. 347. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. (2). 6L. Physical chemistry experiments. Corequisite: Chem. 346. 401. Chemical Literature. (1). The use of the chemical literature. Pre- requisite: 20 hours of chemistry and consent of instructor. 411. Inorganic Chemistry. (3). The periodic table; theoretical and descriptive inorganic chemistry. Prerequisite: Chem. 345. Corequisite: Chem. 346. 412. Systematic Inorganic Chemistry. (2). Preparation, properties and reac- tions of selected elements. Prereclr~isite: Chem. 345. Corequisite: Chem. 346. 413. Inorganic Chemistry Laboratory. (1 to 2). 3L or 6L. Experimental methods of inorganic che~nistry. Prerequisite: Chem. 411 or concurrent enrollment. 424. Advanced Analytical Chemistry. (3). 2R; 3L. Instrumental methods of chemical analysis. Prerequisite: Chem. 324 and consent of instructor. 425. Electronics. (2). 1R; 4L. Provides a working knowledge of electronic devices and circuits for the student or research worker who has little or no background in electronics. Prer~quisite: Consent of instructor. 433. Organic Techniques. (3). 1R; 6L. The theory and practice of organic chemical preparations. Prerequisite: Chem. 332 and consent of instructor." 441. Advanced Physical Chemistry. (3). Introduction to quantum chemistry, atomic and molec~llar spectra, statistical thermodynamics, and reaction rate theory. Prerequisite: Chem. 346. 461. Biochemistry. (4). 3R; 3L. In introduction to protein, lipide, and carbo- hydrate chemistry. Prerequisite: Chem. 332 and 323 (or equivalent) or consent of instructor.* 499. Independent Study and Research. (1 to 3). Prerequisite: Chem. 346 and consent of department. May be repeated for credit up to a maximum of three hours. 0 At least one semester of physical chemistry is recommended in addition to the pre- requisites Listed. 112 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE Graduate Courses 500. Chemistry Seminar. (1). Review of current periodicals. Reports on student and faculty research. Prerequisite: 20 hours of chemistry. May be repeated for credit. 504. Radiochemistry. (3).2R;3L. Natural and artificial radioactivity; sources, preparations and properties. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 511. Theoretical Inorganic Chemistry. (3). Theory of honding, molecular structure and spectra. Prerequisite: Chem. 411 and consent of instructor. 512. Coordination Chemistry. (3). Principles of coordination chemistry; structures and reactions of complex compounds. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 519.' Special Topics in Inorganic Chemistry. (1 to 3). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 521. Advanced Analytical Chemistry. (1). Analytical chemistry of the less familiar elements. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 523. Analytical Spectroscopy. (3).2R; 3L. Absorption, emission, NMR and mass spectroscopy. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 524. Electroanalytical Chemistry. (3). 2R; 3L. Electrometric methods of analysis. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 529.' Special Topics in Analytical Chemistry. (1 to 3). Prerequisite: Con- sent of instructor. 531. Advanced Organic Chemistry. (3).Recent advances in organic chemistry. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 532. Heterocyclic Chemistry. (3).Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 533. Qualitative Organic Analysis. (3). 1R; 6L. Identification of organic compounds. Prerequisite: C o n s ~ n t of instructor. 534. Quantitative Organic Analysis. (3).Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 535. Physical Organic Chemistry. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 539.' Special Topics in Organic Chcmistry. (1 to 3). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 541. Quantum Chemistry. (3).Quantum chemistry with emphasis on valence theory. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 542. Chemical Kinetics. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 543. Introductory Statistical Mechanics. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of in- instructor 545. Chemical Thermodynamics. (3). Classical Thermodynamics with an in- troduction to statistical thermodynamics. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 546. Molecular Spectroscopy. (3). Modem techniques and theory in the area of fluorescence spectroscopy and nuclear and electron spin resonance. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. 549.O Special Topics in Physical Chemistry. (1 to 3). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 561. Advanced Biochemistry. (3). Enzyme mechanisms, metabolic feedback, transport phenomena, hormones, porphyrins and nucleic acids. Prerequisite: Chem. 461 or its equivalent. 0 May be repeated for credit. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 113 569.' Special Topics in Biochemistry. (1 to 3). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 591.' Research in Inorganic Chemistry. (1 to 5). 592." Research in Analytical Chemistry. (1 to 5). 593.' Research in Organic Chemistry. (1 to 5). 594.' Research in Physical Chemistry. (1 to 5). 596." Research in Biochemistry. (1 to 5). ECONOMICS Y~AJOR:The economics major in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences consists of a minimum of 30 hours and a maximum of 41 hours. Econ. 221, 222, 238, 340, 421 or 424, and 425 are required. MINOR: A minor in economics in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences consists of 15 hours exclusive of Econ. 100 and 190 and must include Econ. 221. (Courses are listed under economics in the College of Business Administration. ) ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE ~ ~ A J O R :A major consists of 33 hours and must include 225, 260, 261, 262, and 446. In addition, courses must be selected from three groups as indicated below: Period Courses: ( 1) One of the following: 370, 371, 373, 374, 375, 376, 401, 402. ( 2 ) One of the following: 232,341,342. Jfajor Author Courses: One of the following: 301, 430, 431, 433, 4,%. Stuclies in Literary Types: One of the following: 302, 303, 321, 323, 324, 331, 332, 333. English 111 is not counted on an English major. Also, only six hours from the following will be credited toward the major: 211, 311, 312, 313, 311, ,316, 317 (except as noted bclow for the major with a creative writing sequence). h51son: A minor consists of 1.5hours. Required are the follo\ving: two of these courses: 260, 261, 262, and at least six hours of upper division work. English 111 is not counted on a minor. MAJOR \VITH A C R E ~ T ~ T E SEQUENCE:\\JRITINC With the written permission of the chairman of the clepartmcnt, a student desiring a creative writing sequence wilI fulfill the requirements for the regular major with the following exceptions: required courses are 225: 261 or 262, and 446. (The group requirements remain as set forth above.) In addition, the student must select at least 12 hours 'May be repeated for credit. 114 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE from the following: 311, 312, 313, 314. 316, 317, and University Honors ( 1-6). \IAJORFOR STUDEATSPLANNISGTO TEACH ENGLISH IN S E C O N D ~ Y SCHOOL: The teaching major in either the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences or the College of Education is 36 hours with the same requirements as listed for the regular major above, plus these addi- tions: Studier in Lnn~rrtrr(r.: 215; 361, 46'3, or 463, and Major Author Course: 433 or 434. h11son FOR STUDENTS TO TEACH ENGLISH A SECONDPLANNING AS SUBJECTIS SECOSDARY Thc teaching minor requirement is S<:II~OI,S: 24 hours, including the following: 215; 225; 252 or 262; 260 or 261; 323 or 324; 433 or 4.34. NOTE: A 2 . 3 grade point index in English is required of all majors ancl minors applying for admission to the professional semes- ter of student teaching in secondary school English. MINORFOR OTHERSIN THE COLLEGEOF EDUCATION:The English minor requirement for those planning to teach in elementary school is 18 hours, including the following: 211; 215; 260 or 261; 262; 302 or 323 or 324 or 342; 433 or 434. NOTE: A 2.00 grade point index in the minor field is required for admission to the elementary professional semester in the College of Education. Lower Division Courses 103 & 104. Masterworks of European Literature I & 11. (3-3). Literary classics in translation. I: From the Greeks to the Renaissance. 11: From the Renaissance to the modem world. 111. College English. (3). Planning, writing, and criticizing compositions; classroom discussions; conferences. See University College. 201. Narrative in Literature and Film. (3). (2-I.+wtyre; 2-Laboratory). A com arative aesthetic analysis of the art of narration In l~terature and especially in fik. 211. Advanced Writing. (3). Prerequisite: Englisl) 111 and sophomore stand- ing. Recommeded for non-English majors. 215. Inhoduction to English Linguistics. (3). Introduction to linguistic prin- ciples, including phonological ancl grammatical concepts. (Same as Linguistics 215.) Required of all English teaching major.;. 223. Books and Ideas. (3). Open to any student I)ut designed primarily for those who wish a course in litcratl~re whicll is appreciative rather than historical. Recommended for non-English maiors. 221. 20th Century British and Arnr:rican Literature. (3). Sot credited toward an English major or minor. 225. Literary Theory and Critical \Yriting. (3). Instruction in critical reading and critical writinq througll stutl!? of ~.cprrsentntive works in drama, poetry, and prose fiction. Limited to English ~najors or ~ninors. Required of all English majors. Prerequisite: English 111 ant1 sophoniort, standing. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 115 240. hlajor Plays of Shakespeare. (3). Designed especially for nonmajors who wish to study the best work of Shakespeare's whole career in one semester. Will not apply on English major of students who attain credit in Engl. 433 or 434. 252. Modern American Writers. (3). 255. American Democracy. (3). Same as Political Science 211 (see for descrip- tion). 260. Major British Writers I. (3). From the beginning through the 18th century. Required of all Enplish majors. (Formerly Engl. 221.) 261. hlajor British Writers 11. (3). From the 19th century to the present. Required of all English majors. (Formerly Engl. 222.) 262. hlajor American Writers. (3). From Poe to James. Required of all English majors. (Formerly Engl. 231.) 280. Sophomore Studies. (3). Prerequisites: Engl. 111 and 211 or 225 or department consent. Course content will van. f ron~ one semester to another. (Sample topics: Black Literature, Xlocles of Tragedy, etc.) May be repeated for credit. Upper Division Courses NOTE: NO difference is implied between 300 and 400 courses in the English curriculum. All are open to juniors and seniors alike. 301a. American Authors. (3). Emphasis on Hawthorne and Melville. 301b. American Authors. (3). Emphasis on Emerson, \Vhitman, and Dick- inson. 301c. American Authors. (3). Emphasis on James and Twain. 301d. American Authors. (3). Emphasis on Eliot, Stevens and Frost. 301e. American Authors. (3). L~npliasis on Faulkner and the Moderns. 301f. American Authors. (3). Emphasis on writers selected by the individual instructor. 302a. American Fiction. (3). Development, 302b. American Fiction. (3). Thematic and other approaches. 303. American Drama. (3). 309. Theme and Idea in Literature. (3). Reading. discussion, and some writing on literature from all periocls, centered on rrrcat themes of human thought and action, designed especially for non-English majors. SIay not Ile offered for graduate credit. 310. Interrelated Arts. (3). Interdepartmental course presenting an aesthetic analysis of three arts, emphasizing style rather than the history of art. May not he offered for graduate crrtlit. 311 & 312. Creative Writing: \Vorkshop in Prose Fiction. (3-3). May not be repeated for credit. hlay not I 1 ( 3 olFrrrtl for graduate credlt. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 313 & 314. Creative Writing: Workshop in Poetry. (3-3). May not be repeated for credit. XIay not he ofrered for graduate credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 316 & 317. Playwriting 1 & 11. (0-0). The writing of scripts for performance. Emphasis on 130th \,erbal and visual asprcts of playwriting. If possible, the 116 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE scripts will be performed. Prerequisite: Engl. 324 and Speech 243 and 259; and consent of instructor. (Same as Speech 316 & 317.) May not be repeated for credit. hlay not bc oflered for graduate credit in English. 321. Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama. (3). 323. Later British Drama. (3). Selected plays from the Restoration to the modem period. 324. Contemporary Drama. (3). Continental. English, Irish, and American plays of the twentieth century. 331 & 332. The English Novel I & 11. (3-3). I: Defoe through Thackeray. 11: George Eliot through Galsworthy. 333. Contemporary Fiction. (3). En~l i sh , American, and continental novels of the 20th century. 341. Modem British and American Literature from 1900 to 1922. (3). 342. Modern British and Amcrican Literature from 1923 to 1945. (3). 343. Modem British and American Literature from 1946 to present. (3). 370. Elizabethan Literature. (3). Sidney, Spenser, Jonson, and their con- temporaries. 371. The Age of Donne. (3). The Metaphysical poets, the Cavalier poets, and their contemporaries. 373. The Romantic Age. (3). \\'ordsworth, Coleridge. Byron, Shelley, Keats, and their contemporaries. 374. Victorian Literature. (3). C;~rlyle, Tennyson, Browning, Arnold, Ruskin, Hopkins, Hardy, and their contemporaries. 375 & 376. The Neoclassical Age I & 11. (3-3). I: Dryden, Pope, Swift, and their contemporaries. 11: Johnson, Fielding, Richardson, Sterne, and their contemporaries. 399. The Bible as Literature. (3). 401. Old English. (3). 402. Medieval Literature. (3). \lidtlle English poetry, prose, and drama from the 12th to the 15th century. 430. Milton. (3). 431. Chaucer. (3). 433 & 434. Shakespeare I & 11. (3-3). I: Shakespeare's work to 1600. 11: Shakespeare's work after 1600. 440. Folklore. (3). 446. Literary Criticism. (3). Explores various historical and modern ap- proaches to literary criticism and research. Required of English majors. Pre- requisite: Engl. 225. May not be offered for graduate credit. 450. Workshop. (1-4). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 461. History of the English Language. (3). Linguistic and cultural investiga- tion of thc c1evel~)pment of En~l i sh . Prerequisite: Engl. 215 or Linguistics 327 or consent of instructor. 462. Aspects of Linguistic Theory. (3). Examination of aspects of the struc- ture of English and their relation to linguistic theory. Prerequisite: English 215 or Linguistics 327 or consent of instructor. (Same as Linguistics 462.) FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 117 463. The English Language in America. (3). Investigation of English, both past and present, in the \Vestern Hemisphere. Prerequisite: Engl. 215 or Linguistics 327 or consent of instructor. 471 & 472. World Masterpieces I & 11. (3-3). I: Selected readings in Oriental, Herbrew, Greek, Roman, and Medieval European literature in trans- lation. 11: Selected readings in European literature of the late Medieval, Renaissance, and modem periods in translation. 473. Mythology in World Literature. (3). h4ythology in literary works of ancient Greece and Rome, of hiedieval Europe, and of some Oriental and New \Yorld culture. Some study of comparative mythology and of the recur- rence of myths in later periods of literature. 473 & 476. Independent Reading. (1-3; 1-3). Dcsigned for majors and non- majors who wish to pursue special reading or research projects in areas not normally covered in course work. Admission to courses is by departmental consent. May not be offered for graduate credit. 480 & 481. Special Studies. (1-3; 1-3). The individual instructor will select and announce his own topic. May be repeated for credit. 491. Dialectology. (3). An introduction to the study of dialect in language, with special attention to regional dialect in America and methods of studying it. Prerequisite: Engl. 215 or Linguistics 327 or consent of department. (Same as Linguistics 491.) 492. The Study of Social Dialects. (3). 4 study of dialectal variation in re- lation to social classes. Prerequisite: Engl. 215 or Linguistics 327 or consent of department. (Same as Linguistics 492.) 493. Afro-American English. (3). A detailed study involving the analysis of samples of the languncc, of the characteristics of urban Afro-American speech and writing. Prerequisite: Engl. 491 or 492 or consent of department. (Same as Linguistics 493.) 494. Standard English as a Second Dialect. (3). Bibliography, survey, and presentation of methods of teaching standard English to speakers of English clialects. Contrastive analysis ant1 tlinlcct tlistri ution and comparisons. Thr nature of language learning. Prerequisite: Engl. 492 or 493 or consent of department. (Same as Linguistics 494.) Graduate Courses 501a. Graduate Readings in Pre-Renaissance Literature. (3). Early and mid- dle English poetry, prose, and drama to the 15th century. 501b. Graduate Readincs in 16th Century Litcrature. (3). Wyatt, Surrey, Sidney, Spenser, and their contemporaries. 501c. Graduate Readings in 17th Century Literature. (3). Jonson, Herrick, Donne, Mamell, and their contemporaries. 501d. Graduate Readings in 18th Century Literature. (3). Dryden, Pope, Swift, Fielding, Sterne, Johnson, Boswell, Burns, and their contemporaries. 501e. Graduate Readings in Romantic Literature. (3): Wordsworth, Cole- ridge, Byron, Shelley, Keats, Scott, and their contemporaries. 501f. Graduate Readings in Victorian Literature. (3). Writers from Carlyle to Yeats studied in relation to political events and the social, scientific, and religious thought of the age. 501g. Graduate Readings in 20th Century British Literature. (3). Yeats, Joyce, Lawrence, Auden, Spender, and their contemporaries. 502a. Graduate Readings in American Literature I. (3). From the be in n i n ~ s to 1870. Emohasis on Emerson. Thoreau. Hawthorne. h,lelville. it: man, Dickinson. - 118 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 502b. Graduate Readings in American Literature 11. (3). From 1870 to 1920. Emphasis on James, Twain, Crane, Dreiser. Robinson, Frost. 502c. Graduate Readings in American Literature 111. (3). From 1920 to 1970. Eliot, Stevens, Hemingway, Faulkner, and their contemporaries. 504a. Graduate Studies in Drama. (3). Selected topics in the history and nature of dramatic literature. \I7ith drpartment consent, may he repeated for credit. 504b. Graduate Studies in Fiction. (3). Selected topics in the development of the form and content of prosct fiction. \\'ith department consent, may be repcatrd for credit. 501c. Graduate Studies in Poetry. (3). Srlcctcd topics in forms, techniques, and history of poctr!-. \Vith dcpart~ncnt conscnt, may I)e repeatecl for credit. 504d. Graduate Study in Criticism. (3). Srlected topics in the theory and practice of literary criticism. \Vith department consent, may be repeated for credit. 504e. Graduate Studies in Linpuistics. (3). Selrcted topics in theories of language and methods of lingrlistic study. IVitIi department consent, may be repeatecl for credit. 506. Introduction to Cmduate Study in English. (3). A course especially designed to prepare students to perfo~m effectively in graduate classes in English. The course is concerned with: (1) hasic bihliographical tools; (2) terminology, 110th technical and historical; (3) various approaches to the study of literature, such as intrinsic analysis of a literary work, the relationships of biography to literary strldy. and the relevance of other disciplines, such as psychology, to literature; (4) the writing of interpretative and research essays. Throuqhout the semester a 11:ilancr l>rtwern criticism and research is main- tained. 509a-510a. Creative Writing: Fiction. (3-3). Advanced work in creative writing. Students who plan to offer creative writing in prose fiction as a thesis will he required to complete hvo scmcsters. Prerequisite: Consent of coordina- tor for creative writing. IVith department consrnt, may he repeated for credit. 509b-510b. Creative Writing: Poetry. (3-3). Advanced work in the writing of poetry. Students who plan to offer creative writing in poetry as a thesis will be required to complete two semesters. Prerequisite: Consent of coordinator for creative writins. \Vith department consent. may I,e repeatecl for credit. 511. Directed Reading. (1-3). Designed for graduate students who want to pursue special research in areas not normally covered in course work. Pre- requisite: Department consent. With department consent, may he repeated for credit. 520. Graduate Seminars in Special Topics. (3). Intensive study of selected texts, writers, or literary problems. Seminar discussions, reports, and research projects. L\'ith department consent, may l>c rrpeated for credit. 531. Graduate Studies in a hlajor Author. (3). Careful study of the works of a major author. Readings in secondary sorlrcrs, reports, cliscnssions, and papers. hlay be repeatrd for credit with change of content. 575. Master's Essay. (1-3). FRENCH (See Romance Languages) GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY The geology dc,pnrtn~cnt is ree\rnluating its course offerings and its undergraduate and eraduate programs. Please contact the depart- ment for current additional information. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 119 MAJOR:A major with a rjachelor of Arts degree requires 35 hours of geology including: ( 1) Geol. 333,337, and prerequisite courses; ( 2 ) At least two additional courses from the following: 331, 336, 347,350, 361,440; ( 3 ) A summer field course from an accredited university (or Geol. 335-336 if approved by the department). A major with a Bachelor of Science degree requires 40 hours of geology including: ( 1) Geol. 333, 337, and prerequisite courses; ( 2 ) At least two adclitional courses from the following: 331, 336, 317,350,361,440; ( 3 ) A summer field course from an accredited university (or Geol. 335-336 if approved by the department). ( 4 ) In addition 35 hours are to be selected from the fields of the sciences and mathematics to include: ( a ) a minor in one of the sciences or in mathematics; ( I ? ) 14athematics through JIath. 243 or 246; ( C ) 10 hours of phyqics; ( d ) not less than five hours of chemistry; ( e ) not less than four hours of biology. Nom: NO major is offered in geography. MINOR: A minor in geology consists of 15 hours. A minor in geography consists of 15 hours. including Georgraphy 201 and at least one upper division course. GEOLOGY Lower Division Courses 101. Physical Science. (5). 5R; D. hlan in the physical world; offering some basic concepts in the physical sciences. 102. Earth and Spacc Science. (4). 3R; 2L. A general survey of man's physical environment; includes clements of geology, geography, meteorology, climatology, oceanography, and astronomy. Lectures, films, and demonstra- tions. Lat~oratory and field experiences. h'ot open to students who have taken Geol. 105, Geol. 111, or Geog. 201. So t for major or minor credit in geology. 111. General Geology. (5). 3R; AL. 'rhe earth and its materials, structure and history; the various processes operating to change its aspects and compo- sition. Field trip(s) required. 112. Historical Geology. (4). 2R; 6L. IIistory of the earth from the time of its origin as a planet to the appcarance of man. Prerequisite: GeoI. 111. Field trip(s) required. 211. Astronomy (3). Celestial geometry, flow of ener in the cosmos, evolu- tion of galactic and stellar systems, origin and nature oKe solar system. Does not apply towarcl BS in geology. Prerequisite: Math 141. 225. Mineralogy. (5). 3R; 6L. Crystallogra hy, and the determination of minerals by physical, optical, and chemical megods. Prerequisite: Geol. 112 120 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE and Chem. 111 or concurrent enrollment. Field trip(s) required at the option of the instructor. 226. Petrology. (4). 3R; 3L. The origin, modes of occurrence, alterations, classifications, and methods of determination of the igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks. I'rrrequisitc: Grol. 112ancl 225. Field trip(s) required. Upper Division Courses 331. Geomorphology. (3). 2R; 3L. Genesis and interpretation of land forms; major physiographic provinces of North America. Prercquisite: Ceol. 112 or Geog. 201. Field trip(s) required at the option of the instructor. 333. Struchual Geology. (3). The mechanics of rock deformation; the de- scription and genesis of features resulting from diastrophism. Prerequisite: Geol. 226 and Physics 123 or 103. Field trip(s) required. 335. Field Mapping. (2). 6L. Field ma ping methods, with special reference to use of level, compass, barometer, alisade, and air photos. Prerequisite: Geog. 201 or Geol. 112. Field trip(s) required. 336. Field Geology and Stratigraphic Mapping. (3). 9L. Field geology and stratigraphy of Eastern Kansas. Prerequisite: Geol. 112. Field trips required. 337. Invertebrate Paleontology. (3). 2R; 3L. Invertebrate fossils, criteria of identification, classification. Prerequisite: C;eoI. 112, or hiology majors upon instructor's consent. Field trip(s) required. 347. Sedimentology. (3). 2R; 3L. Origin, classification, textures, and struc- tures of sedimentary rocks. Prerequisite: Geol. 225 or department consent. Field trip(s) required. 350. Principles of Stratigraphy. (3). 2R; 3L. Principles and techniques of description, classification, correlation, interpretation, and dating of the sedi- mentary rock record. Prerequisite: Geol. 337. Geol. 347 recommended. Field trip(s) required. 361. Economic Resources. (3). 2R; 3L. Distribution, classification, composi- tion and oricin of ecmomic resources, metallic and nonmetallic. Prerequisite: Geol. 226. Field trip(s) required. 405.' Regional Geology of the United States. (3). A detailed regional survey of the general geology, geomorphology, stratigraphy, and structural geology of the United States. Prerequisite: Geol. 331 or concurrent enrollment. 425.' Optical Analysis. (4). 2R; 6L. Use of the polarizing microscope; min- eral identification and rock classification. Prerequisite: Department consent. 436.' Vertebrate Paleontology. (3). 2R; 3L. Systematic study of the fossil records of the vetebrates; laboratory training in identification of fossil bones and teeth; emphasis on regional faunnas; collecting and museum trips required. Prerequisite: Geol. 112; biology majors upon instructor's consent. 438.' Micropaleontology. (3). 2R; 3L. This course is designed to prepare students for research work in laboratories of oil companies, geolo ical surveys and oceanographic stations. Emphasis on latest techniques, ident#cations, and use in correlation of foraminifera (including fusulinids), dinoflagellates, cocco- liths, palynomorphs, etc. Prerequisite: Geol. 112 and consent of instructor. Field trip(s) required at the option of the instructor. 439.' Palynology. (3). 2R; 2L. An introduction to the study of both modem and fossil spore and pollen morphology as applied to problems of plant tax- onomy and evolution, paleoclimates, phytogeography, paleoecology, interpre- tation of sedimentary environments, biostratigraphy, Pleistocene climates and May be offered only in alternate years. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 121 archaeology. Emphasis is on vascular plants, but includrs study of dinoflagel- lates and related algae and nonvascular plants. Prerequisites: Geol. 112, or Biol. 330 and consent of instructor. 440.' Map Interpretation and Photogeology. (3). 2R; 3L. Construction, use, and interpretation of maps; use and interpretation of aerial photographs. Prerequisite: Geol. 112 or Geog. 201. 443'. Subsurface Geology. (3). 2R; 3L. All subsurface methods, including laboratory, logging, testing, treatment, valuation, and mapping methods. Pre- requisite: Geol. 226 and Physics 124 or 103. Field t r ip(~) required at the option of the instructor. 444." Peboleum Geology. (3). 2R; 3L. Origin, migration, and accumulation of oil and as in the earth's crust. Distribution and significant features of modern fielct. Prerequisite: Geol. 112. Field trip(s) required at the option of the instructor. 445.' Subsurface Formation Evaluation. (2). Detailed study of fluid content, fluid pressures, and other characteristics of subsurface formations as revealed by electric logs, other types of mechanical lo s and various testing devices. Introduction to the principles and uses of sf&-in pressure build-up data. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 4GO. Planetary Geoscicnce. (3). 2R; 3L. Elements of astrogeolorn, nature and origin of the solar and planetary system, imagery mapping of lunar and plane- tary surfaces, eochemistry and geophysics of planets and meteorites. Pre- requisites: ~ e o e .101, 102, or 111. 470. Geohydrology. (3). The hydrologic cycle, physical and chemical prop- erties of water, fluid flow through permeable media, exploration for and eval- uation of ground water, water quality and pollution, water law. Prerequisites: Geol. 111, Math. 243, or consent of instructor. 480.' Geochemistry. (3). 3R. The chemistry of earth materials; the impor- tant geochemical processes and cycles operating on and within the earth through time. Prerequisites: Geol. 226 and Chem. 112 or consent of instructor. 485.' Geophysics. (3). Physics of the eath. Fundamentals of geophysical exploration. Prerequisites: Geol. 333 and Physics 103 or 124. 490.' Special Studies in Geology. (1-3). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. hlay be repeated, but total credit may not exceed six hours. 499.1 Research in Geology. (1-3). Research on special problems in the field of aeolo~gy: (a) General; (h) mineralogy; (c) petrology; (d) structural; (e) a leontology; (f) economics; (g) sedimentation; (h) petroleum; (i) stratigrapgy; (j) geophysics. Prerequisite: Department consent. Graduate Courses 500.f Research in Geology. (1-3). Research on special roblems in the field of geology: (a) General (b) mineralogy; (c) petrology; (x)structural; (e) a leontology; (f) economics; (g) sedimentation; (h) petroleum; (i) stratigrapgyi (j) geophysics. Prerequisite: Department consent. 505.' Advanced General Geology. (4). 2R; 6L. Principles, physical processes, structure, earth history, and economic implications of geology, based upon a study of original sources; student reports. Prerequisite: Instructor's consent. Field trip(s) required at the option of the instructor. 506.' Advanced Historical Geology. (3). Historical geology of the world. Emphasis on original sources and current research investigations. Prerequisite: Instructor's consent. Fieltl trip(s) rcquirccl at thr option of the instructor. - - -- ~ - O May be offered only in alternate years. t M a y be repeated for credit u? to six hours. 122 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 521." Advanced Stmtigmphy. (3). 2R; 3L. Advanced concepts and principles of stratigraphic analysis and interpretation. Emphasis on original sources and current research investigations. Firld prol)lem required. Preresquisite: Geol. 350 or consent of instructor. Field trip(;) required at the option of the instructor. 525.- X-ray Analysis and CIny hiineralogy. (4). 3R; 3L. Introduction to the principles of x-ray diffraction ant1 spectographv; use of x-ray dilfraction apparatus in mineral identification ant1 cr!rstal stn~ctrlre study. Special empha- sis on the origin and idrntification of clay minrrals. Prcrcquisite: Geol. 225 or consent of instructor. 530." Igneous and Metamorphic Pctrolo~y. (4). 2R; 4L. Mineral paragenesis, bulk chemical compositions. physic:ll-chetniral relationsi1ips, textures, structures, origins, and classifications clf ifinrcnls ant1 mctnmorphic rocks. Thin-section studies facilitate rock identifications and the drtcrrnination of petrogenetic relationships. Prrreqr~isite: C;col. 123 and consent of instructor. 532." Sedimentary Petrology. (3). 2R; 3L. Detailed study of sedimentary rocks and thcir origins. Detcrrnination'; of mineral compositions, textures, structures, fal~rics, and petrogenrtic relntinnsliips are facilitated 1)y the use of thin sections, peels, and ~eochcmical anal!;srs. Prerequisite: Geol. 425 and consent of instructor. 534. Geotectonics. (3). Physical and geological principles of cr~lstal deforma- tion and ttrctonic intrrprrtativn; orogenies and vpcirogenies in their time-space relationships; especial reference to s t r~~ctura l geology of North America. Pre- requisite: Instrrlctor's consrnt. Field t r ip (~ ) required at the option of the instructor. 537." Palcoecology. (3). Rcconstl-uction of nncirnt terrestial and marine environments. Emphasis on synthesis of total raw data (paleontological, sedi- mentary, mineralogical, stratigraphic, etc.). Prerequisite: Instructor's consent.. Field trip(s) required a t the option of the instructor. 542.' Ore Deposits. (3). 2R; DL. An advancrtl treatment of the occurrence, classification, and orisin of mrtallifvrous orr tleposits. Prerequisite: Instructor's consent. Field trip(s) required at the option of t h ~ instructor. 549 & 550. Ceology Seminar. (1-1). Review of periodicals.c ~ ~ n c n t Reports on students ancl faculty research. Prerequisite: Instructor's consent. May be repeated for credit up to two hours each. 575 & 576. Thesis. (2-2). GEOGRAPHY Only courses 201, 2%. and those cross-listed with geology, are intended as physical science courses. All other geography courses are intended as social science offerings. Lower Division Courses 125. Principles of Geography. (3). An introductory course on college geog- raphy, emphasizing the relationship 11c.twt.rn human activities and natural environment. 201. Physical Geography. (3). 2 R ; 3L. Empliasis upon the physical basis of geography, inclutling climntc. terrain, soils, lantlforms, and the seas; economic resources; cartographic clcmc.nts; introcluction to regional studies. Field trip(s) required at the option of the instructor. ~p 'May be offered only in alternate years. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 123 210. World Geography. (3). A general survey of world geography, including an analysis of the physical. political, economic, historical, and human geography of the major world regions. 223." Economic Geography. (3). A geoqraphical analvsis of the distribution and utilization of I~asic world resources. 235." Descriptive hleteorology. (3). 2R; 2L. An introductory shtdy of the atmosphere and its properties and the various phenomena of weather; a brief survey of important principles of ~ h ~ s i c a l ,dynamic, synoptic, and applied meteorology. Prercq~~isite: Consent of instructor. Does not apply toward a major or minor in geology. Ficld trip(s) rrql~irrtl at the option of the instructor. Upper Division Courses 302." Geography of the United States and Canada. (3). Physical, political, econon~ic, historical, and human geoqraphy of the United States and Canada. Lectures, assigned readings, films, and reports. 331. Geon~orphology. (3). 2R; 3L. (See Geol. 331.) 335. Field 31apping. (2). 6L. (See <;eel. 335.) 342." Geography of Europe. (3). 3R. Physical, political, economic, historical, and human geography of Europe. Lectures, assigned readings, films and reports. 361. Economic Resourccs. (3). 2R; 3L. (Sec Geol. 361.) 364." Geography of Latin America. (3). 3R. Phvsical, political, economic, historical, and human geography of Latin America. Lectures, assigned read- ings, films, and reports. 402." Geography of Africa. (3). Physical, political, economic. historical, and human geography of Africa. Lectures, assigned readings, films and reports. 422." Geography of Asia. (3). 3R. Physical, political, economic, historical, and human geography of Asia. I,~~cturc~s,a signed readings, films and reports. 440." Map Interpretation 'and Photogeology. (3). 2R; 3L. (See Geol. 440.) 470. Urban Geography. (3). 2R; 3L. Geography of cities; the origin, growth, functions, characteri\tics and environmental prol:lems of urban areas; structure and dynamic elements of intraurl~an spaccA; land use nnlvsi$ and approaches to urban planning; prol)lems of urban ecology. GERMAN MAJORA: A major in German consists of a minimum of 24 hours beyond the level of German 112 ancl including German 325 and 327. It i g strongly recommenclecl that the major program include a t lcast two of the survey courses offered. In addition, the student should elect courses in one other foreign language, English language and literature. linguistics, history, and philosophy. Native speakers of German are not normally permitted to enroll in 100-200 level German courses nor to receive credit in such courses by advancecl standing examination. A minimum of 12 hours in upper division courses including German 325 and 327 is normally required for a native speaker to earn a German major. Native May br. offered only in alternate years. 124 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE speakers of German should consult with the department before enrolling In German courses. ~ I I N O R : a minimum of 11 hoursA minor in German consists of beyond the 112 level. to include German 223 and one upper division course. 1 4 . 4 ~ 0 ~B: The teaching major in German in either Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences or in the College of Education consist of at least 50 semester hours chosen from the follo\iling categories : At least 21 hours in the language beyond the 111-112 level, as listed unc1t.r Slajor A, and ( A ) At lea5t 21 hours in a second language as listed under Minor, or ( R ) At least 15 hours from one or more of the following related fields: English, history, linguistics, philosophy, political science (these will be chosen in consultation with the teacher education adviser) or ( C ) A totally separate second major as prescribed by the Catalog. NOTE: Students who wish to enter the student teaching program must have 3 2.75 grade point average in German and department consent in order to be admitted to the profess~onal semester, which includes Secondary Education 442Y and 447. I t is urgent that such students consult with the departmental professor in charge of teacher education early in their college careers. Lower Division Courses 60. German for Graduate Reading Examination. (3). Open to upper division and graduate students only. A reading course designed to prepare students to fulfill department requirements of a reading knowledge of Gennan for the MA or MS degrees. KO previous knowledge of German required. Will not count toward a degree. 111-112. Elementary German. (5-5). 191. Elementary German Review. (3). Intensive practice and review of basic German stn~cture. Primarily for students whose study of German has I~een interrupted or whose preparation in elemrntary Gennan is inadequate to per- mit satisfactory perfomlance in 220 or 225. Does SOT apply on lil~eral arts and sciences language requirement For graduation nor on German major or minor. Prerequisite: German 112 or equivalent and departmental consent. 223. Intermediate German I. (3). Intensive reading and discussion of short works; pammar review. Prerequisite: German 112 or equivalent. 224. Intermediate German 11. (3). Readings in German civilbation accom- panicd by e~tensive studies of selected literary works. Prerequisite: German '323 or equivalent. (German 221 satisfies thc corc curriculum literature re- quirement.) 225. German Conversation and Composition 1. (2). Development of oral and written skills. Prcrrq~~isite: (:emian 2 2 3 or consent of instrt~ctor. 226. German Conversation and Composition 11. (2). Contintlation of G e m ~ a n 225. Prerequisite.: Ckrnlan 2Z5. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 125 Upper Division Courses Except as noted, :dl upper division literature courses have as a prcrcq~iisiteor corequisite German 340 or consent of instructor. 311. Civilization of the German-Speaking Countries. (3). Selected topics on significant aspects of life and thought in Germany, Austria, and Switzerland. The emphasis will Ile on the modem period with special attention paid to the interrelation of cultural trcnds. A knowlctlge of German is desiral~lt. Ilut not required. Prc,rc.ql~isite: Upper division standing. 321. German in Technical Fields. (3). Supervised individual readings in the student's field of specialization-humanities, social sciences, or nntuml sciences. Prerequisite: German 223. Does not satisfy core curriculum literature re- quirement. 325-326. Advanced Composition and Grammar. (2-2). Prerequisite: German 2226 or department consent. 327. Introduction to Linguistics. (3). Principles of descriptive and historical linguistics: phonetics and phonolog~., morphology and syntax. The phonologi- cal and gr:lmniatical structures of Sloclcm Stanclard German and its develop- ment from Proto-Germanic. Required for a GemIan major. Prereqr~isite: Completion of liberal arts foreign language requirement. (Same as Linguistics 327 and Anthropology 328.) 329. Linguistics in the Teaching of German. (3). The principles of linguistics applied to thc problems of teaching German. Constrastive analysis of the phonological ant1 grammatical structures of Enslish and German. Prerequi- site: German 327 or consrnt of instructor. (Same as Linguistics 329.) 331. Modern German Literature in English Translation. (3). Consideration of the works of one major author, of a literary movement or trend, or of a specific genre. May he repeated oncr for credit. Does not count on German major or minor. Prereqi~isite: Upper dix~ision standing. 340. Introcluction to the Study of German Literature. (3). Basic introcluction in literary methodology. Theory of genres and literary rnovemcnts. Prerequi- site: German 22-1. 351. Survey I. (3). hledieval period through the 18th century with special emphasis on storm and stress and classicism. 352. Survey 11. (3). 19th ccntury: Romanticism and realism. 353. Survey 111. (3). Xlodern literature: Naturalism to the present. 427. Comparative Germanic Readings. (3). Historical development of German and its rrlationship to other Gernlnnic Inn r~~ages I~ased on text material in Old English, Old Sorse, Gothic, and Oltl I l i ~ l i German. Prerequisite: German 327 or consent of instructor. 428. hliddle Hioh German Language and Literature. (3). The guided reading of Sliddle High German epic and Isric poetry and shorter verse narratives; fundamentals of h.liddle I-iigh German grammar. Prerequisite: German 327 or consent of instructor. 435. Drama. (3). 436. Contemporary Literature. (3). 437. Goethe. (3). Intrnsive study of some significant works of Goethe, pre- dominantly Werthcr and Fatist. 438. Lyric. (3). The reading. interpretation, and appreciation of selected lyric poetry of leading German poets. 126 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 441. Seminar in Special Topics. (3). Special studies in (a) a particular period, (b) a specific genre, (c) the works of one outstanclina author, or (d) stylistics and literary translation. Prerequisite: two upper division literature courses or department consent. &lay be rrpeated once for credit. HISTORY MAJOR:31 hours minimum. The maior will specialize in one of the following areas: ( 1) Ancient and Jledieval. ( 2) Modern Europe. ( 3 ) Ensland. ( 4 ) United States. ( 5 ) Latin America. Students electing group I through 111 will take 101 and 102 and one other lower divisi*~n course. Students electing group IV or V will take 131 and 132 and one other lower division course. Nine upper division hours are to be selectcd from courses in the appro- priate group, chosen in consultation with an adviser. All majors will takc 498 and 300. In addition. sufficient hours will be elected to bring the total to 31. At least five of thcse hours must be a t the upper clivision level and may not he in the area of specialization. MINOR: A minor in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences consists of 15 hours, including either 101 and 102 or 131 and 132 and at least three upper division hours. Lower Division Courses 101 & 102. History of Western Civilization. (4-4). 101: Prehistory to 1648. 102: 1648 to the present. 103 & 104. Evolution of the Non-Western World. (4-4). 103: An examina- tion of the political, social and cultural roots of the non-Western peoples; Africa, Near East, Inner Asia, China, Japan, India and Southeast Asia. 104: A study of the non-\l'estc>rn world in motlern times; Africa, Near East, Inner Asia, China, Japan, India and Southeast Asia. 113 & 114. English History. (3-3). 113: From the earliest times to the begin- ning of the Stuart period, emphasizing the origin and development of institu- tions, customs, and nationalism. 114: From the beginning of the Stuart period to the present. 131 & 132. History of the United States. (4-4). 131: Survey from the colonial period through the Civil War. 132: Survey from Reconstruction to the present. 225 & 226. History of Latin America. (3-3). First semester: Spanish and Portuguese colonization of America. Second semester: The national period From the wars of independence to the present. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. 241 & 242. History of Russia. (3-3). 241: Political and cultural history of the Russian Empire. "42: The revolution and the Soviet State. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. 271 & 272. The Far East. (3-3). A survey of the social, economic, and political development of the Far East with emphasis on China, India, and Japan. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. FAIRtvlOUNT COLLEGE 127 Upper Division Courses 300. Introduction to Historical Research and Writing. (2). Basic instruction in research methodology, composition, and criticism. Required of history majors. 301. The Ancient Near East. (3). Political and cultural history on ancient Mesopotamia, Iran, Egypt, Palestine, Syria, and Asia Minor to the death of Alexander the Great. 305 & 306. Greek History. (3-3). 305: The Hellenic World from prehistoric times to the end of the Peloponnesian War. 306: The 4th century and the Hellenistic period. 307 & 308. Roman History. (3-3). 307: The Roman Republic. 308: The Roman Empire. 321. Medieval Social and Intellectual History. (2). Survey of the social and intellectual history of Europe from the 4th to the 15th centuries. 322. Byzantine History. (3). Survey of Byzantine history from its origins in the late Roman \Vorld to its fall in 1453 with an investigation of its major institutions and foreign relations. 323 and 324. Medieval History. (3-3). 323: The history of Europe from the fall of the Roman Empire through the Crusades. 324: Continues to 1500. 325. The Bolivarian States. (3). Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, and Bolivia from independence to the present. 326. Republic of Mexico. (3). Mexico from the independence movement to the present. 327. Argentina, Brazil, and Chile. (3). From independence to present. 328. Inter-American Relations. (2). Includes economic and cultural as well as political topics. 329. Central America and the Caribbean. (2). From the independence period to the present, with special attention to U. S. involvement in this area. 331. The American Colonies. (3). Colonizaion of the New World with em- phasis on the British peoples and their development. 333. The American Revolution and the Early Republic. (3). Examination of selected phases of the Revolutionary, Confederation, and Federal periods. 331. Age of Jefferson and Jackson. (3). Political, economic and cultural de- velopment of the United States from the election of Thomas Jefferson to the end of the hjlexican war, with emphasis on the growth of American nationalism. 335. The Negro in the United States. (3). Negro life, culture, and history from the 17th century to the present. 337. Economic History of Europe. (3). Same as Econ. 305. (See for de- scription.) 338. Economic History of the United States. (3). Same as Econ. 307. (See for description.) 339. The American City: From Village to Metropolis. (3). Urbanization and urban life from colonial times to the present: changing life styles and thought patterns, urban architecture, ethnic assimilation, emergence of the suburb, political and ecological adjustments, and the influence of new technology and forms of business organization. 350. Military History. Major military developments and the conduct of war from antiquity to the mid-20th century. 128 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 352. The Indian in American History. (3). Indian life, culh~re, and history from the early 16th century to the present, with emphasis on the impact of federal Indian policy since 1800. 380 & 381. History of Science. (3-3). 380: Ancient and Medieval science from its beginnings in the Near East to the end of the Middle Ages. 381: Rise of modern science from its first formative steps in the Medieval world to the 20th century. 382. Social and Environmental History of Science and Technology. (3). An examination of the social and environmental implications of the development of science and technology from its earliest beginnings to the present clay. 411. England under the Tudors. (3). 412. England under the Stuarts. (3). 413. 18th Century Great Britain. (3). From the accession of William and Mary to the French Revolution. 414. 19th Century Great Britain. (3). From the French Revolution to the death of Queen Victoria. 415. The Reign of George 111. (3). Political, constitutional, economic, and religious developments in England from 1760 to 1820. 423. The Italian Renaissance. (3). Italian history from the 14th through the 16th centuries with an emphasis on cultural achievements. 424. The Reformation. (3). The great religious changes of the 16th century in the political, social, and intellectual contexts. 429 & 430. Constitutional History of the U. S. (3-3). 429: The evolution of the American Constitutional system from English and colonial origins through the Civil War. 430: American Constitutional development from Reconstruc- tion to the present. 431. Civil War and Reconstruction. (3). 432. America's Gilded Age, 1877 to 1900. (3). Emphasis on roots of ur l~an problems, foundations of dissent, policy toward minority groups, ancl evaluation of imperial expansion. 433 & 434. The United States: The 20th Century. (3-3). 433: The Progres- sive Era, the First \?'orld War, ancl the Twenties. 434: The Great Depression, the Mew Deal, the Second TVorlcl \\Tar and the Postwar Era. 436. Origins of the Industrial State. (3). United States economic development ancl policy, Civil War to present. Emphasis upon changes in the reputation and influence of I~usinessmen in American society. 437 & 438. Social and Intellectual History of the United States. (3-3). 437: Survey of American thought and society to the end of the Civil War. 438: The significant social and intellectual currents from the middle of the 19th century to present, with special reference to the interaction between ideas and social structure. 440. History of the Old South. (3). Examination of Southern Civilization prior to the American Civil \$Tar. 441. History of Kansas. (3) History of the Kansas region from Spanish ex- ploration to the present, with principal emphasis on the period after 1854. 442 & 443. I-Iistory of Eastern Europe. (3-3). The development of the Bulgar, Czech. Magyar, Polish, Rumanian, and Yugoslav peoples. 444. The Atlantic and Trans-Appalachian West. (3). Exploration and settle- ment of the coastal ancl trms-Appalachian frontiers from colonial times to about 1840. FAlRMOUNT COLLEGE 129 445. The Trans-Jlississippi Wrest. (3). Spanish, French and Anglo-American penetration and settlement west of the Mississippi River from the 16th cen tun to allout 1900. 447 & 448. Diplomatic History of the United States. (3-3). 447: From inde- pendence through the Spanish American \f.ar. 448: Continues to present. 451. Constitutional Ilistory of England. (3). 453 & 454. History of Russian Thought. (3-3). 455. Europe 1870-1914. (3). Politics and diplomacy leading to World War I. 456. Europe 1914 to Present. (3). Politics and diplon~acy leading to World War 11. 457 & 458. Social and Intellectual History of Europe. (3-3). 457: The Social and Intellectual History of Europe in the 17th and 18th century. 458: The Social and Intellectual IIistory of Europe in the 19th ancl 20th Century. 461. The French Revolution and the Napoleonic Period. (3). 462. 17th Century Europe. (3). 463. Bourbons and the Enlightenment. (3). Emphasis on Europe in the 18th century. 461. Europe, 1815-1870. (3). 466. History of the Soviet Union. (3). A survey of Soviet History from the Bolshevik Revolution to the present. 470 & 471. Modern Germany. (3-3). 470: Creation of the Cerman Empire and its role in world affairs 1848 to 1914. 471: Establishment and collapse of the \Veimar Republic, the rise ancl fall of Hitler's Third Reich, the divided Germany of the present, and the role of each in \vorld affairs, 1914 to the present. 472 & 473. Modem France. (3-3). 472: Restoration, reaction and revolution; Bourbon Restoration, Revolution of 1848, Napolcon I11 and Second Empire, and the Frnnco-Prussian \Var. 473: Crisis and decline; formation of the Third Repul)lic, impact of \Vorld War 11, interwar challenges, Vichy, prohlcms of the Fourth and Fifth Repul-lics, withclraw-a1 from Indochina and Middle East, and prelude to major power involvcment. ,187 & 488. European Diplomatic History. (3-3). 487: European international politics and diplomatic practices, with rmphasis and actions of the great powers and their statesmen, Concert of Europe to \Vorld fVar I. 488: \'ersailles settlement, totalitarian aggression, appeasement, II'orld War 11, the "cold war," and decolonization of Southeast Asia ancl Middle East as prelutle to major power involvement. 491. Workshop in American History. (1-3). May be repeated for graduate credit but will not satisfy requirements for thr blaster of Arts degree. 492. Workshop in European History. (1-3). hlay be repeated for graduate credit hut will not satisfy rcqr~iremcnts for the Master of Arts degree. 495. Special Topics in History. (1-3 in an area). 498. Historiography. (2). Review of the major schools of historical thought, philosophies of history. ancl en~inctnt historians, from the ancient v~orld to the present. Graduate Courses 505. Seminar in Ancient History. (3). Prerequisitc: Consent of department. 506. Seminar in Medieval Hi~tory . (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 130 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 507. Seminar in Renaissance and Reformation. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 508. Seminar in 17th and 18th Century Europe. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 509. Seminar in English History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 510. Seminar in Modern German History. (3). Prrrequisite: Consent of department. 511. Seminar in hlodern French History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 512. Seminar in Slavic History. (3). Prercquisitr: Consent of department. 513. Seminar in the IIktory of Science. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 514. Seminar in Latin American History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 520. Seminar in American Colonial History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 521. Seminar in American Constitutional History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 522. Seminar in American Diplomatic History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 523. Seminar in American Civil War and Reconstruction. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 524. Seminar in American Economic History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 525. Seminar in American Social and Intellectual History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 526. Seminar in the American West. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 527. Seminar in American State and Local History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 528. Seminar in 20th Century America. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of depart- ment. 531. Reading Seminar in American History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May be repeated for credit. 532. Reading Seminar in American History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May Ile repeated for credit. 534. Reading Seminar in Latin American History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May be repeated for credit. 535. Reading Seminar in the IIistory of Science. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May be repeated for credit. 553. Readings in Modem European History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May he repeated for credit. 554. Readings in Modem European History. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May he repeated for credit. 555. Reading in Ancient History. (3). Prereqnisitr: Consent of department. May be repeated for credit. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 131 556. Readings in hledieval I-Iistory. (3). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May be repeated for credit. 575. Thesis Resesrch. (1-2). 576. Thesis. (1-2). 595. Special Topics i n ~ i s t o r y . (1-3). Open only to graduate students. May be repeated for credit to a maximum of four hours. ITALIAN (See Romance Languages) JOURNALISM MAJOR: The major in journalism consists of at least 26 hours, in- cluding Journalism 11a5,226. 380, and 44'7, and a concentration of not less than 15 hours in one additional field of studp in a school or college of the University. In addition, one of the following se- quences must be completed: News-Editorial Sequence: Joum. 330, 336, 445,447, and 448. Radio-Television Sequence: Joum. 322, 324 or 326, 330, and 336. Advertising Sequence: Journ. 238, Mkt. 330, Art 171, Graphic Art 297, Jonrn. Adm. 305, Joum. Adm. 407. INOR OR: A minor in journalism consists of at least 15 hours, includ- ing Journ. 115,226,330,336, and/or 380 or 447. Lower Division Courses 115. Introduction to Mass Communication. (3). Required for the major in journalism. The role of mass communication in media, with emphasis on the history of American journalism. Consideration of the freedom and respon- sibilities of the mass media. 226. Newswriting. (3). 2R; 3L. Required for the major in journalism. Evaluation, reporting, and writing of various types of news stories. Prerequi- site: Journ. 115. Reasonable typing competence required. 232. Introductory Photojournalism. (3). 2R; 3L. Basic photographic theory and technique, with emphasis on aspects of importance to journalists, writers, and editors. Using the department's cameras and laboratory facilities, students take, develop, and prepare photographs for publication. Prerequis~te: Journ. 115. 238. Advertising Principles. (3). Survey of advertising fundamentals and media in relation to modern business activities; introduction to copywriting, layout, visualization, market research, packaging, and related problems. Pre- requisite: Journ. 115. Upper Division Courses 322. Beginning Radio and TV News. (3). 3R; 5L. Theory and technique of preparing news for the broadcast media. Prerequisite: Joum. 330. 324. Television News Film. (3). 3R; 5L. Advanced work with TV news production with an emphasis on news film. Prerequisite: Journ. 322. 326. Newscasting. (3). 3R; 5L. Advanced work in radio news including writing and audiotapes. Prrreqnisitp: Journ. 322. 327. Sunflower Reporting. (3). Optional to students who have completed Journ. 330. Writing for the campus newspaper. Prerequisite: Journ. 330. 132 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 33U. Advanced Newswriting and Reporting. (3). 2R; 3L. Reporting and writing the more demanding types of material: feature, interpretive, and puh- lic affairs and stories, editorials, and interviews. Prerequisite: 226.J o ~ ~ r n . 336. Editing. (3). 2R; 3L. Selection, evaluation, and preparation of copy and pictures for publication; copyreading, rewriting, headline and caption writing, page makeup. Prerequisite or concurrent: Journ. 330. 360. Journalism Internship. (3). On-the-job experience and training in news, advertising or public relations, radio, television 1,roatlcasting. Prerequisite: Journ. 330. 380. History of Communications. (3). Research into the development of mass nlr,tl~n. Emph:i\is xvill I T qivc~t to thr, tlcvelnpnirnt and presentation of original research papers. Bibliography and criticism in mass commnnications. Prerequisite: Journ. 3.30. 445. Editorial Writing. (3). A study of editorial judgment, including practice in the writinq of ectitorials and editorial page features. A study of research materials availal~le to editorial page writers. Prerequisite: Jonrn. 336. 447. Law of the Press. (3). An examination of the statutory laws governing the mass media with an emphasis on lil~el, free press vs. fair trial and the fair- ness doctrine with research into case histories. Prerequisite: Journ. 336. 448. Special Topics in Journalism. (3). Directed individual research in vari- ous aspects of journalism ant1 mass communications, or related topics. Prepara- tion of a major term paper. Prerequisite: Journ. 380 and senior standing. 466. World Press. (3). A study of international corn arative press and broad- cast systems with em hasis on press freedoms and tleir relation to historical political freedoms; p/& cross-cultural communications. Open to journalism juniors and seniors and seniors and graduate students from throughout the University. LATIN AND GREEK (See Romance Languages) LINGUISTICS MAJOR: A major in linguistics consists of a minimum of 24 hours from the courses listc~tl I)c.lo\~-, including nt least nine hours from Group A ant1 at least one pho~rrticscourse ( Linguistics 22*3,French 305, or Spanish :3:35). A major must 1)e combined with either a minor in a foreign 1:irlguajie or the 1 1 1-112ssequence in two different foreign languages and t h r c ~ hot~rs beyond 112 in one of them (or the equivalent ) . ~I INQR.A minor in linguistics consists of 15 hours from the courses listed below ~ r ~ h i c h not also counted towards the stu- are dent's major. At least six liol~rs must be taken from Group A. Courses Group A ( basic linguistic. theory ) 215. Linguistics. Introduction to English Linguistics. (3). (Same as Engl. 215). 225. Linguistics. Phonetics and Plionology. (3). Thcs prodr~ction and transmis- sion of speech sor~ntls ant1 th~.ir role in Principleslingl~istic s t r ~ ~ c t r ~ r e . of articulatory and acor~stic phoric,tics, with transcription rscrcises; phonemic and distinctive feature phonologics. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 133 134 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 135 298. Special Studies. (1-3). The intlividual i l~s t ru~ to r will select and announce his own topic. Credit will be assiqncd to Group A, B, or C depending on content, hlay he repeated for credit when content varies. 327. Linguistics. 1nh.oduction to Linguistics. (3). (Sarne as German 327.) 462. Linguistics. Aspects of Linguistics Theory. (3). (Same as Engl. 462.) 464. Linguistics. Comparative Linguistics. (3). kfethods of establishing genetic relationship between languages and reconstructing protolanguages. Survey of the major language fwmilics of thr worlri. 'rypological comparisons of languages and the problem of langrlagr uni\.c,rsals. Prerequisite: Linguistics 215 or 327. 465. Linguistics. Structure of a Selected Non-Indo-European Language. (3). The language offered will depend on 5tudent clelnand and availability of staff. hlay sometimes be conducted as a field methods course. hlay he repeated for credit when different languages are offered. Prerequisite: Linguistics 215 or 327. 491. Dialectology. (3). (Same as Engl. 491.) Group B (linguistic study of specific languages or language groups) 401. English. Old English. (3). 461. English. History of the English Language. ( :3) . 463. English. The English Language in America. (3). 492. English. The Study of Social Dialects. (3). 493. English. Afro-American English. (3). 494. English. Standard English as a Second Dialect. (3). 305. French. Advanced French Phonetics and Diction. (2). 335. Spanish. Spanish Phonetics and Diction. (2). 435. French and Spanish. Introduction to Romance Linguistics. (3). 329. German. Linguistics in the Teaching of German. (3). 427. German. Comparative Germanic Readings. (3). 428. German. Middle High German. (3). Group C (areas of contact between liriguistics ~ ~ n c lother disciplines) 212. Logopedics. The Development of Language. (3). 451. Anthropology. Language and Culture. (3). 325. Philosophy. Symbolic Logic. (3). 426. Philosophy. Advanced Symbolic Logic. (3). 440. Philosophy. Ph i losop l~~of Language. (3). 345. Psychology. Psycholinguistic5. (3). 498. Linguistics. Special Studies. (1-3). The individual instructor will select and announce his own topic. Credit will Ile assigned to Group A, B, or C depending on content. \lay be repeated for credit when content varies. 499. Linguistics, Directed Readings. (1-3). Credit will be assigned to Group A, B or C depending on content. \lav be repeated for credit. MATHEMATICS Since a satisfactory major depends primarily on a suitable combi- nation of courses. the courses nrhich comprise the major must be 136 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE - -- approved by the department. 13ec:1use of the importance of verbal experience in learning mathematics, ic student intending to major in mathematics should take English 111 or Speech 111 during his first college semester. ~ ~ A J O R :For the BA degree ill mathematics, the major requires Xlathematics 244, 307, 313, 335, and l~ ine additional hours of upper division work in the department. In itddition, Philosophy 325 or Computer Science 300 is required. The foreign language should be French. German, or Russian. For the BS degree in mathem;ctics, the major requires Mathe- matics 244, 307, 313, :3:33.336. :34fi, ,lnd nine additional hours of upper division work in the department. In addition, Philosophy 325 or Computer Science 300 is required. The student must also complete nine semester hours of upper division work in philosophy or in one of the natural or social sciences. The foreign language must be French, German. or Russian. For the BS degree in mathematics with emphasis in computer science, the student must complete Xlath. 244, 307, 313, 335, 346; Statistics 471; and Computer Science 199, 228, 300, 381. Recom- mended electives are Statistics 472 and Math. 336 ancl 452, and other courses in Ccrnputer Science. For the BS degree in rn:ithernatics with emphasis ill statistics, the student must complete 8,lathematics 244, 307, 313, 335, 336, ancl Statistics 371-372 and 171-472. He must also complete either Philosophy 325 or Computer Science 308 ancl nine semester hours of upper division work in p11ilosol)hy or one of the natural or social sciences. Recommenrled schedules for c ~ c h of these degree prograxns are available in the iiepartment officcl. .4 calendar indicating when particular courses are to l ~ c ofiVi-c~,l is also available. A student majoring ill mat1lem:~tics sl~ould coils:ilt closely with his adviser on any of these programs. ~ I I N O H : in requires minimum 15A minor mathematics a of semester hours of credit cou:scs. inclutling three hours of upper clivision work. For somc curricula in t h ~ University, ontl ant1 one-half units of high school algebra and onc tinit of high school geometry is re- quired. For students lacking such prerequisites, thc. mathematics department offers remedin1 courses, as listed below. Remedial Courses 52. Algebra. (5)." The topics from high school algebra essential to the stud! of university level inathe~natics. h h y I)e used, in meeting department pre- requisite in place of one ant1 one-half units of high school algehra. Pre- requisite: None. O Hours do not apply toward s Wichita State Univer~ltydegree. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 137 60. Plane Geometry. (2).' For students without high school credit in planc geometry. May be used in meeting department prerequisites, in place of one unit of high school geometry. Prerequisite: One unit of high school algehra or Math. 52, or concurrent enrollment in Math. 52. Lower Division Courses 121. Discrete Mathematics I. (3). Set theory, probability, and the elements of statistics. Prerequisite: One unit of high school algebra. 122. Discrete Mathematics 11. (3). Linear algelxa and related topics. Pre- requisite: 121. 139. College Trigonometry. (2). A study of the trigonometric functions with applications. Prerequisite: Math. 140 or equivalent high school preparation. (No credit for students who have completed hlath. 141.) 140. College Algebra. (3). Functions, theory of equations and inequalities, complex numhers, and exponential ancl logarithmic functions. Prerequisite: One and one-half units of high school algehra or Mathematics 52 and one unit of high school geometry or 5,lath. 60. 141. Algebra and Trigonometry. (5). Functions, theory of equations and inequalities, complex numhers, the trigonon~etric functions, exponential and logarithmic functions, and other standard topics prerequisite to a heginning study of analysis. Prerequisite: One and one-half units of high school algebra or Math. 52, and one unit of high school geometry or Math. 60. 142. Introductory Analysis I. (5). Analytic geometry and the calculus in an interrelated form. Prerequisite: Math. 141 with a C or hetter or two units of high school algebra, one unit of high school geometry, and one-half unit of high school trignometry, or Slath. 139 and 140 with C or hetter in each. 243. Introductory Analysis 11. (5). A continuation of Math. 142. Includes a study of integration and applic~tions and an introduction to infiinite series. Prerequisite: ,Math. 142 with a C or better. 244. Introductory Analysis 111. ( 3 ) . A continuation of Math. 243. Includes a study of multiple integration and partial derivatives. Prerequisite: Math. 243, with a C or better. 245. Survey of Analysis. (3). A brief, but careful introduction to mathe- matical analysis for stuclents of the humanities, the social sciences, ancl husi- ness. Prerequisite: Math. 140 or 141. Credit in both 215 and 142 is not allowed. Upper Dlvision Courses 303-304. Topics in Modern Mathematics I and 11. (3-3). An investigation of the newer topics of secontlary school curriculums. Not open to mathematics majors. May be repeated for cretlit with consent of department. Prerequisite: Consent of department. 307. Linear Algebra I. (3). All elementary study of linear algebra including a study of linear transformations ~tntl ~natrices ovrr finite dimensional spaces. Prerequisite or corequisite: Xlath 244. 311. Elementary Geometry. (3). The structure of Euclidean geometry. Pre- requisite: Math 243 or 245. 313. Fundamental Concepts of Algebra I. (3). Croups, rings, fields. Pre- requisite: Math 307 or consent of dt.partmcnt. (Not for major graduate credit.) * Hours do not apply toward a Wichita State University degree. 138 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 315. Elementary Number Theory. (3). Properties of the integers studied by clen1ent;lry nieans. Prerequisite: \lath 245 or upper cli\.ision standing or \lath 244 or consent of department. 335. Intermediate Analysis I. (3). A detailed study of limits, continuity, and integration. Prereqnisitr: Xlath 2-L-l with C or better. (Sot for major gradu- ate credit.) 336. Intermediate Analysis 11. (3). l'he calculus of functions of several variables, line and surface integrals. Prerequisite: hlath 307 and 335 with C or better in each. 346. Ordinary Differential Equations. (3). Integrating factors, separation of variables, critical points, linear difFerential equations with constant coefficients, variation of paranleters, esistence a11t1 uniqueness for initial value problems, and systems. Prerequisite: hlath 244 with a C or better. (Not for major graduate credit.) Not ope11 to str~tlents with credit in 349 or 446. 373-374. Elementary Mathematics I ancl 11. (3-3). Topics necessary to an understanding of the elemc>nt;lry school curriculum, such as set theory, the real numbers and geometry. Prerequisite: Elementary education major or consent of department. Xot for major or minor credit. 412. Modern Geometry. (3). Funcla~nental concepts of geometry. Pre- requisite: Math 013 or constLnt of departn~ent. 114. Funda~nental Concepts of Algebra 11, (3). .\ ~ont inu~t t ion llatli :3!rJ.of Prerequisite: Math 315 wit11a C: or. I~c~ttt~r. 431. Intermediate Analysis LII. A continuation of Math 336. Prerequisite: Math 336 with C or better. 437. Elementary Topology. (3). Prinlilrily the topology of metric spaces. Prerequisite: Math 335 with a C or better or consent of department. 438. Introduction to Complex Analysis. (3). Basic treatment of analytic functions. Prerequisite: Lint11346 \vith :I C: or Irrttc'r or consent of department. 147-448. Engineering \Iatl~~:matics I rind 11. ~ n i ~ t r i c t ? ~ .(343). \'c,c.tor ;t11t11\,>1>, infinite series, orthogonal and special functions, Fourier series, and boundary value problems. Prerequisite: Math 346, with C or better. (No credit for mathematics majors.) 452. Numerical Analysis. (3). Numerical solutions of algebraic and dif- ferential equations. Prerequisite: Math 307 and 333 with C or better in each. 454. Linear Algebra 11. (3). A colltini~ntion of hlath 307. Prerequisite: Math 307 and 313. 470. Introduction to Combiuatorial 31athematics. (3). Permutations, generat- ing functions, partitions, distrib~~tions,and elements of graph theory. Pre- requisite: Math 335 or consent of tlepartment. 499. Individual Proiects. (1 to 5). hlay he repeated to a total of 10 credits. Prerequisite: Consent of department. (Not for grarli~ate credit.) Graduate Courses 501-502. Real Analysis I and 11. (3-3). A stutl!. of the foundation of analysis and the fundamental results of modern real analysis. Prerequisite: Math 431 or consent of d e p a r b e n t . 503-504. Abstract Algebra I and 11. (3-3). A treatment of the standard basic topics in abstract a1gel)ra. Prcreclr~isite: Llnth 414 or consent of department. 505-506. Complex Analysis I and 11. (3-3). Theory of analytic functions. Prerequisite: Math 431 or or consent of department. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 139 507-508. Topology I and II. (3-3). Point set and algebraic topology. Pre- requisite: Math 437 or consent of department. 520. Proseminar. (1). Oral presentation of research in areas of interest to the students. Prerequisite: Major standing. 521. Individual Reading. (1 to 5). Prerequisite: Consent of department. May I)c rppeated up to n nlaslmuln of live Ilourb \irltli tllc conscnt ot tnc deyartlllcnt. 525. Special Topics. (2 or 3). May be repeated by consent. A. Analysis. B. Algebra. C. Geometry. D. Topology. E. Applied Mathematics. F. Foundations. G. Number Theory. H. Statistics. Prerequisite: Consent of instruclar. 531-532. Topics for Mathematics Teachers I and 11. (3-3). To ics for sec- ondary school mathematics teachers, related to the secondary sciool mathe- matics curriculum. Topics to be chosen according to the needs and interests of individual students. Slay be repeated for credit with departmental consent. (Not applicable toward the MA or MS in mathematics.) 546. Ordinary Differential Equations. (3). Existence, uniqueness, stability, and other "qualitative theories" of ordinary differential equations. Prerequisite: Math 335 and 346 or consent of department. 553-554. Numerical Analysis I and 11. (3-3). Numerical approximations of solutions to initial and boundary value problems of ordinary and partial dif- ferential equations. Prerequisite: Math 335 or consent of department. 555-556. Partial Differential Equations I and 11. (3-3). Existence and unique- ness theory for boundary value problems of partial differential equations of all types. Prerequisite: Math 335 or consent of department. 575-576. Thesis. (2-2). Prerequisite: Consent of department. 581-582. Selected Topics in Engineering Mathematics. (3-3). Advanced topics in mathematics of interest to engineering, including such topics as tensor analysis, calculus of variations, and partial differential equations. (Not applica- ble toward the MA or MS in mathematics.) STATISTICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE The courses in statistics iund computer science listed here are offered by the mathematics department. No major or minor is offered, but a BS degree in mathematics with emphasis in computer science and a BS degree in mathematics with emphasis in statistics are available and are described at the beginning of the mathematics section of the Catalog. For further information, consult the mathematics de- partment. All courses here satisfy core and liberal arts mathematics requirements. As a part of the 124 semester hours required for graduation, a student may take up to 13 semester hours of statistics and/or com- puter science courses in addition to the 43 semester hours of course work allowed in mathematics. 140 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE STATISTICS Upper Division Courses 301. Elementary Statistics. (3). Elementary descriptive statistics, binomial and normal distributions, elementary problems of statistical inference; linear correlation and regression. Prerequisite: Math 121, 140, or 141. Not open to students with credit in hlath 243 or to mathematics majors. 302. Elementary Probability. (3). Probability functions, random variables, and expectation of finite sample spaces. Prerequisite: Math 121, 140, or 141. Not open to students with credit in Math 243 or to mathematics majors. 371-372. Statistical Methods I and 11. (3-3). 2R; 2L. In 371, basic experi- mental statistics; problems of statistical inference; confidence limits; forms of correlation; and analysis of variance. In 372, sampling; additional analysis of variance; randomized block; Latin square; factorial; nlultiple and curvilinear correlation. Prerequisite: Math 243 or 245. 471-472. Probability and Statistics I and 11. (3-3). A course in the theory of the subject. Prerequisite: 335 with C or better. COMPUTER SCIENCE Lower Division Courses 199. Introduction to the Computer. (Same as Engr. 199.) (3). Automatic data processing, digital computers, flow charting, computer languages, Fortran IV, sorting techniques, and the solntion of elementary problems. Prerequisite: Math 140 or 141. 228. Computer Organization and Programming. (3). (Same as Engr. 228). Introduction to hasic concepts of compnter organization ancl operation. Study of machine and assemlrly language programming concepts which illustrate basic principles and techniques. Prerequisite: CS 199 or Engr. 199 or equivalent. Upper Division Courses 300. Logic for Computers. (3). Symbolic logic, axiomatic development of propositional calculus. Boolean Algebra, switching circuits, predicate calculus and formal languages. Emphasis on formalizing mathematical systems. Pre- requisite: h4ath 307. 311. Introduction to Discrete Structures. (3). Relations and mappings. AIge- braic structures, including semigroups. Theory of graphs. Applications of these concepts to problems in computer science. Prerequisite: CS 199 or equivalent and Math 243. 312. Data Structure. (3). The formal specification of data structures. Linear lists and arrays, orthogonal lists and multilinkecl structures. Representation via trees and graphs. Searching and sorting techniques. Prerequisite: CS 230 or equivalent and CS 311. 320. Programming Languages. (3). Formal definition of programming lan- guages, includin syntax and semantics. Underlying properties of algorithmic languages, incluc8ing scope of declarations, storage allocation, grouping of state- ments, binding time of const i t~~mts , t~l~routinesand tasks. Prerequisite: CS 230 or equivalent and CS 31 1. 381. Computer Solution of Numerical Problems. (3). Finite differences, inter- polation, solution of systems of equations, numerical integration. The student will use the computer facility in the solution of problems. Prerequisite: CS 199 and Math 244 and 307, with C or I)t.tter in each. 382. Special Topics in Computer Science. (3). Topics such as sequential machines, automata theory, computahilih and solval~ility. Prerequisite: CS 381. and hlath 313. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 141 391. Logic Design and Switching Theory. (3). 2R; 3L. (Same as EE 391.) An introduction to the theory and application of switching devices with par- ticular emphasis on computer applications. Coml~inatorial, sequential, and threshold logic concepts and realizations; network minimization methods, hazards, codes, and computerized logic design. Prerequisite: CS 311 and Phvsics 124 or equivalent. 498. Individual Projects. (1-3). hlay he repeated for a total of six hours credit. Prerequisite: Consent of department. MINORITY STUDIES The overall goal of the Department of y4inority Studies is to pro- vide a coherent and sociallv relevant education, humanistic and pragmatic, which prepares students for service to the entire com- munity and therefore enriches the total society. The minority studies department offers courses and programs which may bring about a more favorable interaction with people and thus reduce the racial tension in the society. The emphasis within the department is on cross-cultural communications. The department provides ex- periences by which a student might exp!ore his or her own unique- ness and. also provides favorable methods of interacting with other people. In order for the department to meet its goal. the curriculum is geared to three areas of the student's development: (1) his func- tioning as a unique individual, ( 2 ) his functioning as a participant- leader in an age of technology, and ( 3 ) his functioning as a trained specialist and humanist. These functions overlap and therefore the department is designed to ;;::dress itself to the curriculum and the community. The department does not agree with those ~ v h o oversimplify the black, Chicano or Indian situation bj. denying that these minorities are any different from other Americans and implying that they should not be singled out for special attention. The department becomes equally impatient with the advocates of a complete restoration of black, Indian or Chicano cultures. The realities of life preclude the return to the idyllic life styles devoid of the technological accomplishme~~ts of mass communication, mass production, mass transportation, mass education, and mass medical treatment. MATOR:The major in minority studies consists of at least 24 hours including: llinority Studies 210, 330, 336, 380, 440, 445, and 448 and a concentration of not less than 15hours in one additional field of study in a school or college of the University. Minority studies majors must follow this sequence unless devia- tions are approved, in advance, b y the department. Certain courses, in related areas not to exceed six hours that meet the particular needs of the student and if approved by his adviser. may be counted towards a major. 142 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE üü IN OR: A minor in minority studies consists of at least 15 hours. The courses are to be approved by the student's departmental ad- viser and must include Minority Studies 210, 330, 306, and 380. Lower Division Courses 100. Introduction to Minority Studies. (3). Orientation to the nature and scope of minority studies. Emphasis on the unique nature of the experiences of minority groups in this country. A cursory examination of some alternative styles of behavior to deal with problems peculiar to minority people in the United States will be undertaken. 210. Fundamentals of Cross-Cultural Communications. (3). An examination of the effects of different cultures on language and methods of communicating. Also, a study of communications and its relationship to hehavior in this country. Upper Division Courses 330. Individual Group Cross-Cultural Communications. (3). Designed to enable students to explore their own unique character and behavioral traits as related to their particular ethnic group. An exploration of the relationship between their particular ethnic group's language and behavior. Prerequisite: Minority Sh~dies 210. 336. Biracial Cross-Cultural Communications. (3). An examination of con- cepts and behaviors useful in analyzing interpersonal behavior in an organiza- tional setting between two selected ethnic groups. Readings and face to face encounters with situations involving progress of morale, productivity, motiva- tion, leadership, authority, communication, and the introduction of change will be used to facilitate an understantling of these areas of human interaction. Prerequisite: Minority Studies 330. 380. Multiracial Cross-Cultural Communications. (3). This course will be a special laboratory group experience for advanced students. Leadership styles, group development skills, and interpersonal competence in a multiethnic setting will be developed. Prerequisite: Minority Studies 336. 440. Advanced Multiracial Cross-Cultural Communications. (3). This will be an advanced study on special topics in human relations. Prerequisite: Minority Studies 380 or concurrent enrollment. 445. Cross-Cultural Communications Theory. (3). Varying in content, this course will offer specific consideration of important areas of cross-cultural communications such as current issues, theory of structured exercises, and lahoratory planning. Prerequisite: Minority Studies 440 or concurrent enroll- ment. 448. Practicum in Cross-Cultural Communications. (2-5). This will be an investigation and analysis of methods of experimental research in cross- cultural communications with emphasis on experimental designs that can gather legitimate data on specific ethnic groups. The application of cross- cultural communications and additional skills gained through courses in allied departments, i. e., economics, linguistics, political science, etc., in research problems. Credit hours to be determined by degree of difficulty and time necessar). for each project. Prereq~lisite: \,finorit!, Strtdies 445 or concurrent enrollment. MUSIC See College of Fine Arts section for requirements and cu&iculum. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 143 PHILOSOPHY The Department of Philosophy offers a wide range of courses in order to enable an undergraduate major to acquire familiarity with the varieties of philosophic inquiry and to pursue in some detail those topics in which he becomes especially interested. MAJOR:A major requires (1) a minimum of 23 semester hours of philosoph~, courses, at least 12 of which must be upper division courses, and ( 2 ) incluc1e:l within the 24 hour major, certain re- quired courses selected from three areas of study as follows: * I. Logic (Three hours) : 225 or 325 or 426. 11. Value Theor)- ( Threc hours ) : 244 or 313 or 360 or 375. 111. History of Philosoph) (Six hours ) : 331, and 333 or 334. ~ I I N O R :A minor consists of 15 hours of philosophy selected in consultation with the department, with the aim of orienting the student to the philosophic aspects of his major field. Lower Division Courses 121. Introduction to Philosophy. (3). An introduction to the philosophic principles and methods employed in treating the problems of truth and validity, reality ancl appearance, and good and evil, by means of an analysis of the classical doctrines of the nature of things, the structure of knowledge, and the criteria for moral value. 150. Introduction to Contemporary Philosophy. (3). An introduction to the basic problems and trends in recent philosophy. 225. Logic. (3). An introduction to the basic principles of rational thinking, with an emphasis on argument forms, deductive techniques, and methods of proof. 226. Introduction to Philosophy of Science. (3).A study of the basic sophic presuppositions of the scientific method, as exemplified in the pro^!% of induction, deduction, hypothesis, evidence, probability, verification, defini- tion, and experimental technique. 244. Ethics. (3). A comprehensive study of the classical and modem theories of social and moral value as they give meaning to the concepts of law, morality, tradition and social reality. Upper Division Courses 304. Analytic Philosophy. (3). A crilieal examination of various contemporary philosophical problems as seen through the writings of philosophers such as Moore, Carnap, Ayer, Russell, Rylc. Wisdom, Strawson, Quine, \Vittgenstein and others. Prerequisite: Three hours of philosophy or consent of instructor. 305. Philosophy of Education. (3).An examination of educational concepts. with an emphasis on the implications of such concepts with respect to the problems of moral, political ancl religious education in a secular, democratic society. 313. Social and Political Philosopl~y. (3). An examination of various philo- sophical theories of the state and society. Prerequisite: Phil. 121 or eauivalent. O When npplicable, Philosophy 490 (Special Studies) can be substituted for one or more of the required courses, with the approval of the department. Also, University honors courses having core credit which are taught by the philosophy staff can be included as part of the 24 hour major requirement, with department approval. 144 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 325. Symbolic Logic. (3). The logic of truth-function and quantification; relations, identity and definite descriptions. Russell's paradox. 331. Ancient Philosophy. (3). A study of the basic philosophic systems from the pre-Socratic to the Hellenistic Period. with an emphasis on the works of Plato and Aristotle. 332. Medieval Philosophy. (3). An examination of the medieval doctrines of Augustine, Bonaventurc, Aquinas, Averroes, Avicenna, Roger Bacon, Duns Scotus, William of Ockham and others. 333. Early Modern Philosophy. (3). A study of the philosophical thought of the 17th century with selections from such philosophers as Hobbes, Descartes, Spinoza, Leibnitz and Locke. 334. Late Modem Philosophy. (3). A study of the philosophical thought of the 18th century with selections from such philosophers as Berkeley, I~Iume, and Kant. 335. 19th Century Philosophy. (3). A study of the philosophical thought of the 19th century including selections from such philosophers as Hegel, Fichte, Schelling, Schopenhauer, Xlill, Xlars, Kierkegaard, Peirce, and Nietzsche. 340. Epistemology. (3). A critical examination of the nature of knowledge and of the philosophical prol~lems concerning skepticism, knowledge of the self material objects, other minds, the past, present and future, universals, and necessary truths. Selections from both historical and recent writings. Pre- requisite: Phil. 121 or equivalent. 350. Metaphysics. (3). An exploration of some basic topics in the theory of reality. Issues inclucle such notions as space, time, substance, causality, par- ticulars, universals, appearancp, essence and being. Prerequisite: Phil. 121 or equivalent. 356. American Philosophy. (3). A study of philosophy in America with readings selected from such authors as Peirce, Jamcs, Royce, Santayana, Dewey, Lewis and Quine. Prercquisitc: Phil. 121 or equivalent. 360. Ethical Theory. (3). A concentrated study of ethical theory in the context of certain fundamental ethical proldems. Prerequisite: 121 or 244 or equivalent. 366. Philosophy of Literature. (3). An exploration of the philosophic themes present in literature. Special attention is devoted to literature as an aesthetic phenomenon and the associated problems of the essential nature of literature as a particular art form, thr author's intentions, the criteria of aesthetic appre- ciation, and literature as knowledge. Emphasis on the special type of litera- ture-poetry, drama, the novel. the short story-is the instructor's choice. 369. Existentialism. (3). An esamination of the leading contemporary philo- sophic movement in Europe as expressed in the writings of Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Schopenhauer, Heidegger, Sartre, Camus and Jaspers. Prerequisite: Phil. 121 or equivalent. 375. Aesthetics. (3). A study of the various philosophic conceptions of the fine arts, and an analysis of the notions of imitation, imagination, expression, creativity, feeling, intuition and technique, as they relate to the aesthetic con- text of artist, ar~dience and the work of art. 380. Phenomenology. (3). A study of the phenomenological movement in philosophy, with spccinl attention to its source in Hussrrl; and an introduction to its recent developments in such thinkers as Schcler, Heidegger, Sartre, Merleau-Ponty, and Straus. Prerequisite: 121 or equivalent. 420. Logical Theory. (3). A study of t h ~views of selected philosophers con- cerning the naturc and function of logic and other selected prol~lems in logical theory. Prerequisite: Phil. 225 or 325. or consent of instructor. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 145 425. Philosophy of Science. (3). Consideration of the presuppositions, results and limitations of the natural and social sciences; the relations among the sciences; the nature of the philosophic problems and scientific methods used. 426. Advanced Symbolic Logic. (3). An axiomatic development of the propo- sitional and first-order functional calculi, including such topics as proofs of consistency and completeness, prenes and skolem normal forms, Lowenheim's theorem, and the decision problem. Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor. 440. Philosophy of Language. (3). An examination of philosophical problems concerning the nature and function of languaae; discussion of traditional and recent theories of meaning, and the relevance of philosophy of language to other areas of philosophy. Prerequisite: Phil. 225 or 325 or equivalent, or consent of the instructor. 446. Philosophy of Religion. (3). An examination of some basic religious problems such as the nature grounds of religious belief, religious Ian fuage: the existence and nature of Chd, human immortality, the problem o e v ~ l 475. Philosophy of the Social Sciences. (3). A study of such to ics as the relations of social science with natural science an1 philosophy, me8odological problems peculiar to social science, the nature of sor~nd explanation, concepts and constructs, the roles of mathematics and formal theories in social science. 480. Studies in a Major Philosopher. (3). A concentrated study of the thought of one major philosopher announced by the instructor when the course is scheduled. May be repented for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 490. Special Studies. (3). The instructor will announce the topic for study. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor. 499. Directed Readings. (1-3). A course designed for the student interested in doing independent study and research in a special area of interest. Fre- requisite: Departmental consent. May be repeated for credit. Graduate Courses 500. Seminar. (3). 501. Selected Topics in Epistemology. (3). The instructor will announce the topic for study. May be repeattd for credit with department consent. Pre- requisite: Consent of the instructor. 502. Selected Topics in Metaphysics. (3). The instructor will announce the topic for study. May be repeated for credit with department consent. Pre- requisite: Consent of the instmctor. 506. Selected Topics in Ethical Theory. (3). The instructor will announce the topic for stucly. May be repeated for credit with department consent. Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor. 510. Directed Readings. (1-3). Repeatable for credit up to sis hours. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 575-576. Research and Thesis. (2-2). PHYSICS 1 4 ~ ~ 0 ~ : a physics major: The followring courses are required for General College Physics ( 123-121or 2-43-2441, 311, 333-334, 339-340, and 454, Ylath 335 and 346, ant1 one semester of chemistry. For a Bachelor of Arts degree, one uppel- division physics laboratory course and three ac!ditional hours of physics are required. For a 146 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE Bachelor of Science degree, three upper division physics laboratory courses and eight additional hours of physics are required. Also required for the Bachelor of Science degree is a reading knowledge, or two semesters of German, IZussian, or French. h41;r.o~:A minor in ph!rsics consists of General College Physics (123-124 or 243-244) and at least six additional hours of physics. Lower Division Courses 103. Introductory Physics. (5). 4R; 3L. A general physics course for liberal arts students and those who have not hot1 physics in high schocl. Topics to be included are: Mechanics, heat, electricity ancl magnetism, wave phenomrna, and modem physics. Kot open to students who can meet the pi.crc:rluisites for Physics 243. Prerequisite: One year of high school algeljra. 110. Introduction to hlodern Astronomy. (4). A general survey course in astronomy intended for the lil~eral arts major with little or no hackground in the physical sciences or mathematics. Suhjects studied will include the charac- teristics and origin of the solar system; the distril~ution, characteristics, and evolution of stars and associated ohjects; and the nature and evolution of the universe. 111. Laboratory in Modern Astronomy. (1). 21.. The application of the tech- niques and the analysis of thr data of nod ern astronom).. Intended for the student with some I~ackground in the physical sciences. Prerequisite: Two semesters of high school algebra or the equivalent or the consent of the in- structor. Prerequisite or corequisitr: Physics 110. 123-124. General College Physics. (5-5). 4R; 3L. First semester: hlechanics, heat and sound. Second semester: Electricity, light, and modem physics. In- tended for students who have a working knowleclge of alegbra and trigonom- etry but who have had no calculus. Prerequisite for 123: High school trig- onometry or Math 141. Prerequisite for 124: Physics 123 or 243. 243-244.' General College Physics. (5-5). 4R; 3L. Intended for stutlents who have had an introduction to calculus. First semester: Mechanics ancl heat. Second semester: Electricity and light. Prerequisite: High school physics, or Introductory Physics 103, or junior standing in the University. Co- requisite for Physics 243: Mat11 2 3 . Prerequisite to Physics 244; Xlath 243 with a grade of C or better and, Physics 123 with consent of department, or Physics 243. 243(E)-244(E). General College Physics Lectures. (4-4). 4R; OL. The lecture portion of Physics 243-244 and carries the same prerequisites. Open only to engineering students. 261. General Physics Lnhoratory. (1 or 2). 3L. The general college physics laboratory for students who have taken Physics 243(E) ancl 244(E) and wish to transfer to liberal arts. Prerequisite: Physics 243(E). Upper Division Courses 300. Seminar. (1). Stuc!ent reports on topics of general interest in physics. bfay be repeated for credit up to two hours. hlay not be counted for credit toward a minor in physics. Prerrq~~is i tc :Complption of, or concurrent enroll- ment in, an uppcr division physics course. and consent of instructor. 311. Topics in Modern Physics. (3). An introduction to selected areas of modern physics with emphasis on the features of atomic, nuclear, and solid state physics which require nioclifications of classical physics for their explana- ..~. 8 Credit will not be given for both 123 and 243 or both 124 and 244. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 147 - - tion. Prerequisitc: The sequence of 123-124 with a arade of B or better in both, or Physics 244 or department consent. Corequisite: Math 244. 320 & 321. Classical Physics Laboratory. (1-1). 3L. An intermediate labora- tory with esperin~ents tlrawn from the following areas of classical physics: hlechanics, optics, electricity and magnetism. Corequisite: Physics 333 or 345. 333-334. Electricity and Magnetism. (3-3). Direct and alternating currents; electric antl magnetic field theory inclutlinr an introduction to Maxwell's elec- tromagnetic wave theory. Prerequisitc for 333: The sequence of Physics 123- 124 with a grade of F3 or hettcr in hoth, or Physics 244 with a gracle of C or better, and )lath 214 with a grade C or better. 339-340. Elementary hfechnnics. (3-3). Motion of a particle in one and sev- eral dimensions; motion of systems of particles; motion of rigid bodies; moving coordinate systems, mechanics of contin~lous media, ancl the Lagrangian Equa- tions of hfotion. Prerequisite for 339: The sequencr of Physics 123-124 with a pat le of B or better in I~oth, or Physics 234 with a gracle of C or better, and hlath 244 with grade of C or hvtter. Prerequisite for 340: Physics 339. 315. Physical Optics. (3). Electroma~metic waves. diffraction and interference, radiation. scattering, and optical properties of solids. Prerequisite: The se- qurnce of Physics 123-123 with a gracle of R or l~et ter in both, or Physics 244, ancl Math 244. 350. Thermophysics. (3). The laws of thermodynamics, thermodynamic po- tentials and appl~cations; distri1,ution functions, Boltzmann equation, transport phenomena antl fluctuations; introduction to statictical mechanics. Prerequisite: The sequence of physics 123-122 with a grade of B or better in both, or Physics 244, and Math 244. 380. Special Studies in Physics. (1-5). hlay he repeated, but total credit may not exceed two hours for physics 111ajors. Prerequisite: Department consent. 402. Numerical Methods in Chemistry and Physics. (2). 1R; 3L. Applications of numerical methods to ~ roh lems in chrmistrv and uh\~sics. Roots of eouations. curve fitting, interpolatidn, extrapolation and smodthkg of experimenial data; numerical differentiation and integration. computer programmina. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 421 & 422. Modern Physics Laboratory. (1-1). 3L. An advanced laboratory with experiments drawn from various areas of modem physics. In 421, the emphasis is on a tletermination of the fundamrntal constants of physics. 422 is devoted to esneriments in nuclear physics. Prerequisite for either course: Physics 311, and 320 or 321. 425. Electronics. (2). 1R; 4L. Provides a working knowledge of electronic devices and circuits for the student or research worker who has little or no hackground in electronics. Prerequisitc,: Consent of instructor. 454-455. h,lodcrn Physics. (3-3). Introduction to quantum mechanics, the Schrocdinger equation, elementary pcrturhation thcory, one- and multielectron atoms, molec~rlar physics. Prerequisitc: Physics 311 and department consent. Physics 454 is a prerequisite for 455. 456. Applications of Quantum hlechanics. (3). Applications of quantum mechanics to prohlems in solid state and nuclear physics. Prerequisite: Physics 454. 460. Introduction to Theoretical Physics. (3). Tcchniques of mathematical physics and their application to I~or~ntlaryvalue problems in mrchanics, electricity and magnetism, wave motion, etc. Prerequisite: Consent of in- structor. 148 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE Graduate Courses 511. Classical Mechanics. (3). Introduction to mechanics of continuous media, Lagrange's Equations, calculus of variations, Hamilton's Principle, rigid l~otly motion, special relativih. Prercquisitc: Ph~rsics 330, and XIath. 346. 511. Elementary Statistical Mechanics. (3). An introduction to the basic concepts antl methods of statistical mechanics with applications to sitnplr ph~,sical systems. Prerrquisitr: \lath 3-16; Physics 340. 515-516. Introduction to Solid State Physics. (3-3). The basic knowledge of the naturr and properties of the solitl state inclurling the structural, thermal, mechanical. elrctrical, and rnaqnetic properties. Electron theory of metals, I~and theory of solitls. Prcbrc-quisitr: Physics 311, or dcpartment consent, and >,lath 346. 521. Individual Rcadin~s . (1 to 3). Prerecluisite: 30 hours of physics ancl department consent. May be repeated for credit up to three hours. 529. Sclected Topics in Physics. (2 or 3). Xlay I)e repeated for credit up to six hours. Prerequisite: Department consent. 533-534. Elementary Quantum Ylechanics. (3-3). Elementary principles, formulations, ancl methods of quantum mechanics with spccial application to atomic antl molpcl~lar phrnomena. Prerequisite: Physics 340 ancl 4.54 or dcpartment consent, and hfnth 346. 535-536. Classical Electricity and Magnetism. (3-3). Vector fields, field equa- tions, stress and energy, static mametic and elr,ctric fields, electromagnetic waves. Prerequisite: Physics 3.34 and \lath 346. 537-538. Nuclear Physics. (3-3). The nuclear two-body problem and nuclear forces, models of the nucleus, nuclear clecas. theory of nuclear reactions, and strancc particles. Prchrcquisitr: Physics 453. 550. Seminar. (1). Revicw of current periotlicals. Reports on student and faculty r c ~ a r c h . >lay I)e repeatrcl for cretlit up to two hours. Prercquisite: 20 hours of physics. 551. Research and Thesis. (1-3). Xlay I,e rtspeatetl for credit up to six hours. POLITICAL SCIENCE l f ~ j o n :A major consists of 30 hours. Requirements are as fol- lows: Pol. Sci. 313 or 4-14, and 447 or 449; three hours each from Groups 2, 3, '1; ancl 3: antl enough xlrlitional hours to complete the 30-hour major requirement. INOR OR: A minor consists of three hours from Group 1; and 12 additional hours, six of n.hich m11st he upper division. (1) Political Theory 233. 331, 114,446, 447, 449, 458. ( 2 ) American Political Behavior sncl Institutions 121. 219, 315. 316, 317, 318, 410, 4.51. 152, 454, 177, 490: 492. (3) Comparative Government 206,227. 238, 330. 333. 339, 360, 120, 423, 426. ( 4 ) Intrrnatiollal Relation:; ,335, .7.36. 433, -134. 436. (5) Public Ad1ninistrati::n :321, ,464, 480, 487. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 149 Lower Division Courses 121. American Political System. (3). An analysis of the basic patterns and structure of the American political system, with emphasis on policies and problems of American politics. 150. Workshop. (1-4). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 200. Research Techniques. (3). Introduces the beginning student to research techniques in political science. Recommended for majors. 211. American Democracy. (3). Currents in the development of American democracy with emphasis on the ideas ancl ideals which have contributed to the development of Americanism and the literature which deals with these currents of thought. 219. State Government. (3). The role of the states in the federal system, and the patterns of politics and institutions in the several states. Particular attention to the State of Kansas. (Formerly offered as Pol. Sci. 319.) 226. Comparative Politics. (3). An analysis of the basic patterns and structures of Western democratic political systems, transitional systems, and dictatorial or totalitarian systems. 227. Comparative Analysis of Wcstern Democracies. (3). Utilizing experience from Great Britain, France, the British-speaking Commonwealth and Western Europe, and analysis of the characteristics of these systems. 228. Autocracy, Dictatorship, and Totalitarianism. (3)..An analysis of limited access-mass-participatory-political systems, their trad~tions and development, with special emphasis on Nazi Germany, Soviet Russia, and hlainland China. 232. Basic Ideas in Political Theory. (3). Introduces the student to recurring themes of political thouqht, examines their diverse meanings and considers problems that arise when values seem to be in contradiction. Upper Division Courses 315 & 316. The Presidency, Congress, and Public Policy. (3 & 3). First semester focuses upon the evoltltion of the Presidential office, the recruitment of Presidents, and the nature of Presidential power. Second semester focuses on the Congress, with particular attention to interest articulation in the legis- lative process. Either semester may I>e taken independently of the other, but if both are taken it is recommended that they he taken in sequence. 317. Urban Politics. (3). An analysis of politics in urban areas, including such topics as the nat l~re ancl distribution of community power, influence, and leadership, the nature of community conflict, the formation of policy, urban problems and political solutions, ancl trends in urban politics. 318. Political Parties. (3). The role of political parties in the American political decision-making process at the national, state and local levels. 321. Introduction to Public Administration. (3). A general survey of the scope and nature of pul,lic administration; policy and administration; admin- istrative regulation and adjuclicatlon; organization and management; budgeting and fiscal management; public personnel administration; political, judicial, and other controls over the administration. 330. Soviet Politics and Government. (3). A general introduction to the study of Soviet Russia. Discussion of historic and demographic factors; the Marxist-Leninist ideology; party, state, and legal struchlre; social structure of the USSR; federalism and the nationalities; industry, agriculture, and trade unions; policy formulation; political power; factors of stability and instability. 150 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 333. Comparative Western Democracies. (3). Comparative studies of selected Western political systems. The student is assumed to have basic knowledge of the structure of prototypes of Il'estern democracies. 335 & 336. International Politics and Institutions. (3-3). First semester: An analysis of the controls governing the nation-state system; special consideration of such concepts as balance of power, collective security, propaganda and diplomacy. Second semester: Emphasis on international law and the develop- ment of international organizations. Either 335 or 336, but not both, will be accepted toward a major in history. 339. Government and Politics in Asia. (3). The breakdown of the "colonial" systems during and aftcr World War 11. Japan, China, India, Southeast Asia, Southwest Asia. Continuing political instability in Asia. (Formerly offered as Pol. Sci. 229.) 345. Classical and Medieval Political Theory. (3). An analytical study of the major offerings of the Greek, Roman, and Feudal periods. The contributions of Plato, Aristotle, and the Stoics are emphasized in the early period; the works of Seneca, Cicero, and the Roman lawyers during the second; and the juridical impact of the feudal system and the philosophic legacy of the ecclesiastical writers during the third. (Formerly offered as Pol. Sci. 343 & 344.) 360. Primitive Law and Government. (3). Same as Anthro. 360. (See for description.) 400. Ethnic Politics. (3). An intensive analysis of the literature and data on the role of ethnic groups in the political system. Attention will be given to the network of relationships which affect, and are effected by, ethnic groups. Par- ticipants in the course will be evpected to develop and complete a research project for presentation and evaluation. 420. Politics of Developing Areas. (3). A survey of the political systems in Latin America, Africa, the Middle East, South and Southeast Asia. Special attention to colonialism as a system, the effects of colonialism and patterns of emerging nations. 423. Government and Politics of Latin America. (3). An examination of the political institutions and processes which currently exist in the Latin American republics. Emphasis will be on the social, economic and psychocultural fac- tors which affect these institutions and processes. In addition, students will be given an opportunity to participate in an original research experience. 426. Comparative Politics of the Middle East. (3). An examination of the political institutions and processes of Middle Eastern governments. The social, economic and Islamic cultural factors which affects these institutions and proc- esses will be studied. 433. Policy Development in Foreign Relations. (3). The process of foreign policy making in the American structure of government. Particular attention will be given to the problems of federalism and separation of powers in foreign policy development. 434. Problems in Foreign Policy. (3). Analysis of the alternative courses of action open to the United States in the present international political system. 436. Soviet Foreign Policy. (3). The concept, content, and control of Soviet foreign relations; instruments and tools of Soviet diplomacy; "strategy and tactics"; change and continuity from Russia to Soviet foreign relations and policy aims; execution of foreign policy in selected areas. 440. American Political Behavior. (3). An intensive examination of the at terns of political behavior in the United States through primary and seeonfa; analysis of existent data. Emphasis will be given to the development and pres- entation of an original research paper. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 151 444. Modem Political Theory. (3). A description and analysis of the works of the principal political theorists of the modern state. Beginning with Machiavelli, the most persistent problems of early and modem nationalism are examined through the writings of Hobbes, Locke, Rousseau, Hegel, Burke, hlarx, and others. 446. Seminar on Comparative Marxism. (3). An examination and evaluation of the ideas which have helped to shape the "ideologies" of the various party- states. The contribution of Marx, Engels, Kautsky, Bernstein, Luxemburg, Lenin, Trotsky, Stalin, Mao, Khrushchev, Tito, Togliatti, etc. 447. Contemporary Political Theory. (3). Major patterns and developments in political thought in the Twentieth Century. Emphasizes controversies over the role and purpose of political philosophy in modern society. 449.' Approaches to the Study of Political Science. (3). Scope and methods of olitical science and research techniques designed to prepare the student for e iger graduate work in political science or administrative research. Prerequi- site: Senior standing. 450. Workshop. (1-4). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 451. Public Law. (3). An analysis of the role of appellate courts, and espe- cially of the United States Supreme Court, in the American political system. Emphasis is placed upon judicial review of state and federal legislation, the separation of powers, federalism, the taxing power, and the commerce clause. 452. Public Law. (3). An analysis of the role of appellate courts, and especially of the United States Su reme Court, in the American system. Emphasis is placed upon t!e guarantees of the Bill of Rigcit&: the 14th Amendment. 454. Judicial Process and Behavior. (3). Focuses upon the behavior and policy-making roles of courts and judges. 458. American Political Thought. (3). Consideration of selected topics in the development of political ideas in the United States. 464. Comparative Public Administrntion. (3). A study of the administrative systems of selected develo ed and developing countries with special attention to the various methods anfapproaches of comparative analysis and to the rela- tionships between administrative institutions and their environmental settings. 477. Introduction to Urban Affairs. (3). An introduction to the study of the metropolis as a social, political and economic system. Prerequisites: Principles of Economics (Econ. 211) and a course in sociology or political science. An interdisciplinary approach. Same as Econ. 477 and Soc. 477. 479. Urban Government Finance. (3). Analysis of urban government expendi- ture and revenue systems. Introduction to urban financial administration. Same as Econ. 455. 480. Administration and the Policy Making Process. (3). The roblems of government encountered in the administration of public policy. ~ f eapproach will be analytical rather than descriptive. May be repeated for credit. 487. Theory of Administration. (3). A study of organizational theory and the various approaches to the study of organization. 490. Special Topics in American Politics. (3). An analysis of selected topics in American politics in a seminar setting. Content will vary depending upon the instructor, but will include problems of policy (civil rights, business and government, etc.) and of structure (federalism, the party system, etc.). May be repeated for credit. 499.' Directed Readings. (2 or 3). A course designed for the exceptional student to meet his needs and deficiencies. May be repeated for credit. Pre- requisite: Senior standing and consent. Prerequisite may be waived by department consent. 152 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE Graduate Courses 500. Advanced Directed Readings. (1 to 3). Prerequisite: Department con- sent. May be repeated for credit. 501-502. Method and Scope of Political Science. (3-3). The first semester emphasizes philosophy of science and methodology (as distinguished from "method" and "technique"), and exposes the student to recent works of methodological import in the various subfields within the discipline. The second semester will place emphasis on methods and techniques of data col- lection and analysis in political science. Prerequisite: Department consent. 510. Seminar in Comparative Government. (3). The comparative study of selected aspects of the politics and institutions of foreign governments. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 520. Seminar: The Administrative Process. (3). Consideration of the rocess and environment of administration, with special attention begin given $e role of the executive in policy formulation, organization, planning, budgeting, staffing, coordination, communications, and administrative responsibility. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 521. The Budgetary Process. (3). Analysis of the development and utilization of the budgetary process in government administration, with special attention given to the budget in relation to its role in policy formulation. Prerequisite: Department consent. 535. Seminar in International Relations. (3). Analysis of special problems in, and approaches to, the study of international relations. Prerequisite: Depart- ment consent. 537. Seminar in Soviet Government. (3). An analvsis and evaluation of approaches to the study of the Soviet political system, including in-depth examination of selected facets of the system. Prerequisite: Department con- sent. 541. Seminar in Urban Politics. (3). An intensive analysis of urban politics with emphasis on individual research projects. Prerequisite: Department con- sent. 544. Seminar in Political Theory. (3). Emphasizes topics selected for their significance in the development and content of political theory. Prerequisite: Department consent. 545. Seminar in Political Theory. (3). Detailed study of the relevant works of a major political philosopher and his contribution to contemporary thought. Prerequisite: Department consent. 551. Seminar in Public Law and Judicial Behavior. (3). Analysis of special prohlems in and approaches to the study of legal systems. Emphasis will be given to developing the student's awareness of research in the field. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 556. Seminar in American Politics and Institutions. (3). Analytical study, with emphasis on individual research. of selected topics in American political behavior. Prerequisit~: Department consent. 574. Internship. (1-6). An intensive applied learning experience supervised by a University tlcpartmcnt or committep. To receive credit, a student must secure approval of a written report from his own department. Prerequisite: Consent of department. 575 & 576. Thesis. (3-3). FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 153 PSYCHOLOGY MAJOR:The major consists of a minimum of 26 hours and a maxi- mum of 36 hours. Psych. 111 is a prerequisite for all other courses. All majors are required to take Psych. 111, 112, 211, and 212. Students who expect to enter graduate work in psychology should take Psych. 342 and 3-13. Other courses should be selected with the aid of the adviser. MINOR: The minor consists of 15hours and should be fitted to the individual needs with the help of the student's adviser. Lower Division Courses 111. General Psychology. (3). An introduction to the general principles and areas of psychology. 112. General Psychology Laboratory. (2). 4L. Introduction to scientific method in psychology. Prerequisite: Psych. 111; concurrent enrollment pre- ferred. 211 & 212. Advanced General Psychology. (3-3). A more intensive treatment of the topics of General Psychology. Prerequisite: Psych. 111. 215. Indushial Psychology. (3). An introduction to the psychological aspects of industry. Prerequisite: Psych. 111. 246. Social Psychology. (3). A sychological study of the individual in the social situation. Prerequisite: psycPh. 111. 260. Child Psychology. (3). The infant and child with special reference to their behavioral development. Prerequisite: Psych. 11 1. 275. Psychology of Personality. (3). Theoretical concepts, factors in develop- ment, and methods of assessing personality. Prerequisite: Psych. 111. Upper Division Courses 342." Psychological Statistics. (3). Emphasizes basic quantitative techniques in rneasuremcnt and evaluation ot behavior. Prerequisite: Psych. 112, Math. 121 & 122 or Math. 141. 343.' Experimental Psychology. (3). Laboratory study of behavior stressin experimental design and research techniques. Prerequisite: Psych. 112 an$ 342. 345." Psycholinguistics. (3). Survey of psychological, linguistic and informa- tional analyses of language. Prerequisite: Psych. 211. 346. Advanced Social Psychology. (3). An intensive review of a selected contemporary issue in social psychology. Prerequisite: Psych. 246 and consent of instructor. 350." Physiological Psychology. (3). Physiological factors in behavior. Pre- requisite: Psych. 211. 351." Physiological Psychology Lahoratory. (3). Instruction in laboratory methods. Each student must early out his own research project. Prerequisite: Psych. 350. 360. Psychology Tutorial. (3). Selected topics in psychology. (May be re- peated for a ~naxi~numof six hours credit.) Prerequisite: Average of B in psychology courses which must include Psych. 211 and 212 and consent of instructor. " With sufficient reason a student may apply for consent of instructor to waive course prerequisite. 154 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 370.' Comparative Psychology. (3). Behavioral research and principles at difFerent phylogenetic lcvrls. l'rerecluisite: Psych. 112 and 211. 401.' Introduction to Clinical Psychology. (3). Application of sychological principles to the firld of prohlem Ilehavior. Prerequisite: ~syc%. 275, 444, and 465. 410.' History of Psychology. (3). Psychological theory and experimentation from ancient to modern times. Prerequisite: 10 hours of psychology. 443.' Operant Conditioning Laboratory. (3). Experimental laboratory stress- ing analysis of behavior by operant techniques. Prerequisite: Psych. 112 and 211. 444.' Introduction to Psychopathology. (3). Individual differences and their relation to "normal" behavior. Prerequisite: Psych. 275. 454.' Psychological Testing ancl Measurement. (3). A survey of the psy- chological foundation of tests and the interpretation and evaluation of test finding. Prerequisite: Psych. 112, 212 and 342. 456. Special Investigation. (1-3). Upon consultation with the instructor con- cerned, advanced students with adequate preparation may undertake original research in psychological problems. (%lay be repeated for a maximum of six hours credit.) Prerequisite: 10 hours of psychology and consent of department. 460.' Developmental Psychology. (3). Survey of theories of child develop- ment and applications to special aspects of the developmental process. Pre- requisite: Psych. 260. 465.' Psychology of Learning. (3). A survey of research and theory in learn- ing. Prerequisite: Psych. 211 ant1 212. 468.' Human Factors. (3). Explores the impact of modern machines on man and the prol,lems of trfonnance, training, perception, and error resulting from man-machine congontations. Surveys current literature and experimenta- tion with some attention to industrial design criteria. Prerequisite: Psych. 342 and 343. 469.' Human Factors Labnrntory. (3). Applications of human factors princi- ples ancl guidelines. Experimentation, measurement, equipment design, field studies and analysis of complex machines and equipment. Prerequisite: Psych. 468. 473.' Motivation. (3). Current and classical problems concerning theory and research in motivation. Prrrequisite: Psych. 211 and 212. 475.' Advanced Psychology of Personality. (3). More intensive treatment of the topics of Psychology of Personality. Prerequisite: Psych. 275 ancl 342. 485." Psychology of Perception. (3). Theory and research in sensing and perceiving processes. Prerequisite: Psych. 211 and 350. 498.' Introduction to Psychoanalytic Theory. (3). A consideration of the theory and practice of Freud's system, its variants and derivatives. Pre- requisite: Psych. 444. Graduate Courses 500. Research Design in Psychology. (3). Scientific methods, techniques, and designs of psychological research applical~le to la1)oratory. clinical, and field settings. Prerequisite: Consent of instr~~ctor. 502. Seminar in Clinical Psychology. (2). Intensive study of clinical theory, research and practice. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 0 With sufficient reason n student may apply for consent of instructor to waive course prerequisite. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 155 503. Clinical Pvychology Laboratory. (2). 4L. Practical experience in the applied aspects of clinical psychology. Includes observation, recording, and interpretation of a wide ranqe of Ilehavior, and communication of findings. Prerequisite: Psych. 502 or concurrent enrollment in 502 and consent of instructor. 511. Cognitive Assessment. (2). Rationale and methods of intellectual assess- ment, critical review of research. Prerequisite: Psych. 502 and consent of instructor. 512. Cognitive Assessment Laboratory. (2). 4L. Practical experience in administration and scoring of different tools. ancl in the utilization of data in evaluatinq 1:ehavior. Prerequisite: Psych. 503 and 511 or concurrent enroll- mcnt in 511. 515. Clinical Research and Practice. (2). Designed to give the student further experirncc in clinical skills and cliniral research. Enrollment optional durinq first year for students concentrating in the clinical area I>ut required both semesters of second year. (hlay be repeated for a maximum of four credit hours.) Prercquisite: Consent of instructor. 517. Assessment of Personality and Human Interaction. (2). Rationale and methods of assessing personality as manifested in patterned regularities of interactive behavior: particular reference to hehavior disorder and psycho- therapeutic relationships. Prerequisite: Psych. 502 and consent of instructor. 518. Personality and Human Interaction Laboratory. (2). 4L. Research and practicum evpcricnce in the mcasl~rrmcnt and con t~o l csf human interaction patterns. Prerequisite: Psych. 503 ancl 517 or concurrent enrollment in 517, and consent of instructor. 520. Graduate Research Scminar. (3). Advanced experimental procedures. Required of all graduate majors in psychology. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 525. Seminar in Psychotherapy. (3). A critical survey of theory and research in psychotherapy. Prerequisite: Consent of instn~ctor. 526. Techniques of Behavior Modification. (2). A critical review of theory, research, and practice in hehavior modification. Prerequisite: Psych. 465 or equivalent, 503, and consent of instructor. 527. Techniques of Behavior Modification Laboratory. (2). 4L. Practical experience with a variety of techniques. Prercquisite: Psych. 526 or concurrent enrollment in 526, and consent of instructor. 530. Seminar in Community Psychology. (3). Comprehensive overview of thfory. research and practice in thc emrrqing field of community psychology from the perspective of gcneral systems theory. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 531. Research in Community Psychology. (3). Special topics ant! group field research projects in community psychology. Prrrequisite: Consent of in- structor. 532. Practicum in Community Psychology. (3). Supervised practice in such areas as psycholoeical consultation, program evaluation, program development, paraprofessional training, and preventative programs in community agencies and organizations. (htay h t repcattcl for a maximum of siu credit hours.) Prerequisite: Psych. 530, 531, and consent of instructor. 542. Advanced Psychological Statistics. (3). Design, analysis, and evaluation of I-chavioral research data. Required of all majors. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 156 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 544. Seminar in Personality and Psychosocial Disorders. (3). Relationship of normal behavior development and malndiustmcnt: a critical review of throry and research. Prerequisite: Psych. 414 and consent of instructor. 551. Seminar in Physiological Psychology. (3) Intensive study of theory and research in physioloeical factors in Ilel~avior. Prercqi~isite: Psych. 350 or equivalent and consent of instructor. 560. Systematic Psychology. (3). A critical survey of systems of psychology. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 565. Seminar in Psychology of Learning. (3). Intensive stutly of theory and research in learninq processes. Pr~requisite: Psych. 46-5 or equivalent and consent of instructor. 570. Seminar in Current Developments. (3). Intensive study of current issues, techniques, research and application. Mav l ) r repeated for different topics. Maximum credit six hours. Prrrequisitc: Consent of instructor. 572. Seminar in Comparative Behavior. (3). Intensive study of theories, methodology and rrsearch in lahorntory ant1 ficld investigations of l~ehaviors of different species. Prerequisite: Psych. 370 and consent of instructor. 573. Seminar in hlotivation and Emotion. (3). Intensive study of theory and rescarch in motivational ancl emotional processes. Prerequisite: Psych. 473 or equivalent and consent of instructor. 575-576. Thesis. (2-2). Prerequisite: Enrollment only with written consent of the graduate student committee. 585. Seminar in Perception. (3). Intensive study in theory and research in perceptual processes. Prerequisite: Psych. 485 or equivalent and consent of instructor. RELIGION The Department of Religion offers a wide range of courses, in order to enable the undergraduate major to acquire familiarity with the broad phenomena of the \vorltl's religions and to become aware of the methods for studying religion. ~ ~ A J O R :The major consists of a minimum of 30 hours, 15of which must be upper division. A maximum of six hours from cross- referenced courses ~vill be acccpted. Three hours must be com- pleted from each of the follo\iring groups. 1. Biblical Studies (3 ) 230, 240. 2. History of Religion ( 3 ) 336, 337. 3. hlethoc!ological and Phenomcnalogical Studies (3 ) 301, 345, 480. 4. Constructive Sti~dies ( 3 ) 342, 373. 383, 421, 480. MINOR: The minor consists of 15 hours in religion, selected in consultatioll with the department. Lower Division Courses 111. Religion in America. (3). A survey of the beliefs, practices, and issues current in major American religious hotlies with some attention to minor re- ligious denominations such as the Black Church, Christian Science, and the Latter Day Saints. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 157 125. Life and Teachings of Jesus. (2) . A review of early New Testament history, stressing the incidents in the life of Christ. 130. Introduction to Religion. (3). Designed to acquaint the introductory student with some major varieties of religious history, belief, practice and prohlems, Eastern and Western, with emphasis on the West. 201. Current Religious Issues. (3). A critical study of contemporary issues in the West with some attention to non-Western religions. The relationship of religion to such topics as race. war, secularism, population explosion, and politics will be considered. 230. Historical Studies: Old Testament. (3). An introduction to the literature, history and religion of the Old Testament in the light of modern scholarship. 240. Historical Studies: New Testament. (3). An introduction to the literature, history and religion of the Kew Testament in the light of modem scholarship. 260. Western Religious Thought. (3). An historical and critical study of the main currents of thor~ght in the West. Emphasis will be on primary forces and personalities which gave backgrollnd shape and development to the Hebrew- Christian tradition. 270. Historical Studies: Post-Biblical Judaism. (3). An historic-literary study of Jewish t h o u ~ h t from the canonization of the Bible to the present time. Texts, historic settings, personalities ancl development of ideas and values will be emphasized. Upper Division Courses 301. Phenomenology of Religion. (3). An observation and analysis of the patterns found in the characteristic religious phenomena (e . g., myths, symbols, rites, institutions), with a view to a systematic understanding of man's religious life as it has expressed itself throughout his history. 305. New Testament Greek I. (3). The essentials of Greek grammar, ele- mentary reading exercises and selected readings in Gospels and Epistles. Com- pletion of two semesters required for credit, 306. New Testament Greek 11. (3). A continuation of 305. 321. Sociology of Religion. (3). (Same as Soc. 321.) 322. Historical Studies: New Testament Backgrounds. (3). A study of selected material from the Dead Sea Scrolls, the Apocrypha and the Psei~depigrapha as well as a consideration of Gnosticism and the mystery religions. 327. Primitive Religion. (3). (Same as Anthro. 327.) 336. Eastern Religions. (3). An examination of the major religious traditions of the East by means of an analysis of their classical writings-e. g., the Upanishadic literature ancl the Bhagacad Gita (Hinduism); the Dliommapada ( Buddhism ) ; the Analects ( Confucianism ) ; the Tao Te Ching (Taoism ) ; others. 337. Islam. (3). The religion in its geographical, social, political and cul- tural context, hoth Arab and non-Arab. 342. Modern Religious Thought. (3). A critical study of Western religious thought in the 19th and 20th cent~uries including selections from such theolo- gians as Schleiermacher, Kierkegaard, Barth, Buher, Rahner, and Tillich. 345. Modern Critiques of Religion. (3). An examination and evaluation of the seminal critiques of religion ( e .g., l larx, Feuerbach, Freud, Straus, Darwin, Nietzsche) produced IIJJ modern Western man. 373. Religion and the Future. (3). An examination of the ways world religions are responding to current technological, cultural and social trends and an 158 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE indication of future issues which will call for a response. The relationship behveen religion and future clrvelopnients in automation. population explosion, biological engineering, and arms control will receive special attention. 383. Religious Thought and Human Conflict. (3). A critical examination of the relationship hetwecn religion and human conflict as expressed in war, revolution, civil strife and interpersonal rrlationships. Special attention will be given to the ways \Vestern ant1 Eastern religions have justified, tried to limit, or ameliorate human conflict. 421. A Study of Religious Experience. (3). An interdisciplinary study of forms of religious experience such as conversion, mysticism, prayer, worship, and vision. Readings from such representative thinkers as James, Freud, Marx, Otto, Allport, and h4aslow will I x inclrtded. 424. The Reformation. (3). (Same as Historv 424.) 425. The Problem of Salvation. (3). A comparative analysis of the various answers mankind has ziven tn the prolllen~ of the nature of evil and of man's salvation from it, utilizing selections from 1~0th East and West, and from both within and outside the specifically religiolis traditions. 446. Philosophy of Religion. (3). (Same as Phil. 446.) 475. Independent Work. (1-3). Designed for the student capable of doing independent study in a special area of interest. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 480. Special Studies. (3). A concentrated study of a contemporary theologian, theological movement or rraligious issuc announced I?!: the instructor when the course is scheduled. hfay he repented for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor. ROMANCE LANGUAGES French h l ~ j o nA: A major in French consists of 21 semester hours beyond French 112 or its ~quivalent and must include French 220,333, 334, 336, and an additional upper division French literature course, exclusive of llajor Topics. In addition, it is strongly recommended that French majors: (1) Choose a minor in some other foreign language, and ( 2 ) elect, n,hcre possible, complementary courses in English, history, philosophy, and art history. MINOR: The French minor consists of a minimum of 11 hours beyond the l i 2 level and must inc111de French 220, 221, 225 and one upper division French course, esclusive of Major Topics. MAJORB: The teaching major in French in either Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences or in the College of Education consists of at least 50 semester hours chosen from the following categories: At least 24 hours in the lanpunqe beyond the 111-112 level, as listed under Major A, and ( A ) At least 21 hours in a sec:)nd language as listed under Minor, or ( B ) At least 1.7 hours from one or more of the following related fields: English. history. linguistics, philosophy, political science FAIRMOUN'T COLLEGE 159 (these \vill he chosen in consultation \ilith the teacher education adviser ) ,or ( C ) ,4 totally separate second major as prescribed by the Catalog. NOTE: I t is strongly recommended that maiors who plan to teach French shoulcl qualify to teach at least one other foreign language. They must have a 2.75 a\lerazc, in Frcnch ancl departmental ap- proval in order to he admitted to thc 1,rofessional semester. I t is further recommel~ded that majors who arc planning to teach take French 303 and 330. Sc:ondar!. Educaticm ?42F and 447 are re- quired of all majors ant1 minors seeking a high school teaching certificate. llajors interc~ted in teachins French in the elementary schools will consult the dcpnrtmcntal professor in charge of teacher education. Lower Division Courses 60. French for Graduate Reading Examination. (3). Open to upper division and graduate students onl!.. A rradinc colirsc* tlesi,qned to prepare students to fulfill dcpart!nrnt rc.quirc.mcnts of a reading kno~vlecl~c of French for the MA or hlS degrees. S o previous knowledge of French required. Will not count toward a degree. 111-112. Elementary French. (5-5). Speaking, rending. writing, including grammar rssentials. Daily cln~sroom and In!)oratorv work rcquired. (In spe- cial cases where students with prc~vious credit in high school French feel in- competent to continue with thc nest sequence course for reasons of a long lapse of time or poor preparation those \vith one year of high school French may rcquest pcrmission frnm the clepartme!~t to take 111 for credit and those with two years of high school French to take 112 for credit.) 205. Basic French Phonetics and Pronunciation. (2). Introductory, practical voursc to iniprovc indi\,idu;~l pro~~rlncintion: intcnsi~cB drill of vowc.ls. c,crnco- nants, and sperch patterns. Prerequisite: Frcnch 112 or equivalent. 210. Intermediate Frcnch. (5). \\Triting, cultural readings, and speaking, in- cluding a general review of Frcnch grnlnniar using the oral method. Not open to students with prior credit in French 200, 220 or 221. Prerequisite: Two units of high school Frcwch, French 112 with a maximum grade of "C" or credit or department consent. This course is designed primarily for students working to fulfill the liheral arts I a n ~ ~ ~ a g r requirement. 220. Intermcdiatc French Grammar and Composition. (3). Prerequisite: French 112 or department consent. 221-222. Intermediate French Readings I and 11. (3-3). Intensive reading of French literary works. Prrrcquisitr: Frcnch 112 or equivalent for French 221, French 221 or equivalent for 2 0 2 .in>- be ~lsed to meet the foreign literature requirrment. 225. Intermediate Frcnch Conversation. (2). Oral assimments will involve some regular work in the 1;inguaqe Iaborator!~. Prerequisite: French 112 or equivalent. 232. French Civilization. (3). The I~ackqrouncl of history, art, and institutions. Prerequisite: 221 or department consent. Upper Division Courses Upper division courscs are given on a rotating basis. French 222 is prerequisite for all upper division literature courses. 160 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 303. Advanccd Phonetics and Diction. (2). Scientific analysis of French sounds ant1 intonation. Phonetic transcriptions and intensive drill of speech patterns. Not open to students with credit in French 310. Prerequisite: French 905. 315 & 316. hiajor Topics. (1-2, 1-2). Directed studies in any field or period agreed upon. Total credit not to exceed four hours. Prerequisite: French 221 or dcpartment consent. 325. Advanced Conversation. (3). A course designed to increase fluency in slwaking t'rrnch, a~cisnments to include oral reports, dialogues, and work in thc lan,:i~age lal~oratory. Prerequisite: 225 or department consent. 330. Euplicntion (2). S c r ~ ~ t i n yde textes. of poetry and prose passaqes, with a careful study of thc contents, style, author, and background. Prerequisite: French 292. 333 & 334. Survey of French Literature. (3-3). First semester: Through th r 18th cent~~r!. Scconc! scmcstrr: 19th c,entr~ry throrlgh prcsent-day writers. 336. Advanced Composition and Grammar. (3). Emphasis on theme writing, original con~positions, and detailed study of modem French grammar. Pre- requisite: French 220. 310. Jlasterpieces of French Literature in English Translation I. (3). A study of French literature from the &fiddle Ages through the 17th century. Such se!ected readings as the Song of Roland; medieval romances and legends; the Farce of ,\,faitre Pnthelin; the poetry of Fmncois Villon; the poetry of the Pl6iade: R~~hel:iis; Xlontaigne; Racine; Corneille; MoliBre; Descartes; Pascal; La Br111.Pre. Frmch is not a prerequisite. Does not count toward a French major or minor. 341. Masterpieces of French Literature in English Translation .II. (3). A study of French literature of the 18th and 19th centuries. Such selected read- ings as Ilnrivaux; hlontesquieu; Voltaire; L'Ahbh Prkvost; Jean-Jacques Rolls- srau; Diclerot; Beaumarchais; Stendhal; Balzac; Hugo; Lamartine; Vigny; Xlusset; Baudelaire; Flaubert; Zola; Mallarm&; Verlaine; Maupassant; Rimbaud. French is not a prerequisite. Does not count toward a French major or minor. 312. Masterpieces of French Literature in English Translation 111. (3). A study of French literature of the 20th century up to the present time. Such sclected rrnclinizs as Bergson: Gide; Proust; ValGry; Apollinaire; Giraudoux: Bernanos; Saint-Exupdry; Malraux; Sartre; Anouilh; Camus; PrGvert; Teilhard tle Chnrdin: Ionrsco; Robl~e-Grillet; Butor; Pagnol; Sarraute. French is not a prer~qr~is i te . Does not count toward a French major or minor. 423. Seminar in French. (1-5). Special studies in (1) French language, (2) French literature, (3) French culture and civilization, or (4) methods of teaching French in the elementary and secondary schools. May be repeated for credit. Prrrequisite: Department consent. 430. Medieval and Renaissance French Literature. (3). 431. 17th Century French Literature. (3). 432. 18th Century French Literature. (3). 433. 19th Century French Literature. (3). 431. Contemporary French Literature. (3). 435. Introduction to Romance Linguistics. (3). An introduction primarily to the historical pl~onolngy ant1 l n o r p h o l o ~ of the romance languages, with par- ticular emphasis on FI-ench and Spanish. Prerequisite: French 305 or Spanish 3334 or department consent. (Same as Spanish 435). 136. Introduction to Literary Criticism. (3). An introductory course present- ing the history ant1 the methods of literary criticism in France. Analysis and FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 161 discussir~n of important trends in French literary criticism. Prerequisite: 330, 333 and 334, or department consent. Italian There is no major in Italian. A minor in Italian will consist of 12 hours beyond the 112 level and must include Italian 331. 11 1-1 12. Elementary Italian. (5-5). Fundamentals of pronunciation; practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and writing. 223-2". Selected Italian Readings. (3-3). Intensive reading of Italian literary works. Discussion in Italian, oral and written summaries. Prerequisite: Italian 112 or two units of high school Italian for 223; 223 or three high school units for 224. 225. Intermediate Conversation. (2). Prerequisite: Italian 112 or department consent. 230. Intermediate Italian Grammar and Composition. (3). Prerequisite: Ital- ian 112 or equivalent. 331. Introduction to Italian Literature. (3). Prerequisite: Italian 224 or de- partment consent. 340. Masterpieces of Italian Literature in Translation. (3). Representative selections in English translation from Italian Medieval and Renaissance litera- ture: The works of Dante and other writers in their Medieval context: Boccaccio and the "Waning of the Middle Ages"; Petrarch and the forma- tion of a new, humanistic civilization-reflections and divergences in the 14th, lSth, awl 16th centur i~s . A knqwledge of Italian is not a prerequisite. Does not count toward an Italian minor. LATIN AND GREEK ~ I A J O R The major in Latin consists of a minimum of 24 hours A: beyond Latin 112 or its equiv:llent, to include at least nine hours of upper division courses. It is recommended that Latin majors take his tor!^ 307, 308, 323. and 324. A minor in Latin consists of a minimum of 11hours beyond the 112 level, to include at least one 300-level course. MAJORB: The teaching major in Latin in either Fairmount Col- lege of Liberal Arts and Sciences or in the College of Education consists of at least 50 semester hours to include: At least 24 hours in the language beyond the 111-112 level, as listed under 34ajor A and ( A ) At least 21 hours in a second language as listed under Ifinor. or ( B ) At least 15 hours from one or more of the following related fields: English, history, linguistics, philosophy, political science. (These will be chosen in consultation with the teacher education adviser), or. ( C ) A totally separate second major as prescribed by the Catalog. It is strongly recommended that majors who plan to teach Latin qualify in at least one other foreign language. They must have a 2.7.5 average in Latin anc! departmental approval in order to be 162 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE admitted to the professional semester. Secondary Education 442F and 447 are required of all majors and minors seeking a high school teaching certificate. Latin Lower Division Courses 111-112. Elementary Latin. (5-5). Grammar, composition, and translation. 221. Basic Latin Review. (3). Prerequisite: Two units of high school Latin or equivalent. 223. Intermediate Latin. (3). Cicero's orations, essays, and letters. Prerequi- site: Latin 111-112 or two years of high school Latin or department consent. 224. Intermediate Latin. (3). Sallust's Catiline and Livy's invasion of Hanni- bal. Prerequisite: Latin 223 or department consent. Upper Division Courses Latin 224 or consent are prerequisites to all upper division Latin literature courses, unless otherwise specified. 331. Advanced Latin. (3). Introduction to Latin verse. Prerequisite: Latin 223-224 or department consent. 332. Advanced Latin. (3). Vergil's Aeneid. Prerequisite: Latin 331 or de- partment consent. 333. Roman Comedy. (3). 334. Roman Elegy. (3). 335. Roman Novel. (3). 336. Selected Latin Readings. (3). (a) Golden Age (I)) Silver Age. 443. Medieval Latin and St. Jerome. (3). Prerequisite: two 300-level courses or depnrtnient consent. 444. Latin Prose Composition. (3). 445. Advanced Selected Latin Rending. (3). (a) Golden Age (b) Silver Axe. 446. Seminar in Latin. (3). (a) Colclen Age, (1)) Silver Age. Greek Lower Division Courses 111-112. Elementary Greek. (5-5). Grammar, composition, and translation. 223. Intcrrnediate Greek. (3) . Plato and Herotlotus. Prerequisite: Greek 111-112. 224. Intermediate Greek. (3) . Homer's Iliad. Prerequisite: Greek 223. Upper Division Courses 331. Advanced Creek. (3). Sophocles and Euripides. Prerequisite: 224. 332. Advanced Creek. (3). Thr~cytlides. Prereqr~isite: Greek 331. Portuguese 60. Reading Portuguese. (2). Open to Latin American Studies majors and to upper division or graduate students who need to fulfill departmental require- FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 163 ments of a reading knowledge of a foreign language for the MA or MS de- grees. No previous knowledge of Portuguese required. Will not coc~nttoward a degree. Spanlsh MAJOR A: A major in Spanish consists of a minimum of 24 hours beyond Spanish 112 or its equivalent and must include Spanish 224, 226, 326 2nd at least nine hours of upper division Hispanic litera- tures, to include two Survey of Literature courses. Courses in Spanish or Spanish-American history. economics, or art are strongly recommended for all maiors. A11 courses offered in the Spanish cle- partment count toward the major in Spanish. With department ap- proval, a maximum of four hours in courses in related fields taken in the MTSU Summer Program in hlexico may count toward the Spanish major. NOTE: Native speakers of Spanish normally will not be permitted to take courses a t the 100-200 level and must take a minimum of 12 hours of Hispanic literatures in order to complete a major in Spanish. Students who have completed more than two units of high school Spanish and students who have spoken Spanish natively will con- sult with a Spanish department counselor before enrolling in Spanish courses. A minor in Spanish consists of a minimum of 11 hours beyond the 112 level, and must includc 223, 226, 230, and one upper division course exclusive of 315. Native speakers normally will not be permitted to take courses at the 100-200 level and must take n minimum of six hours of His- panic literatures in order to complete a minor in Spanish. MAJORB: The teaching major in Spanish in either Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Scienccs or in the College of Education consists of a t least 50 semester hours to inchlde: At least 24 hours in the language be).ond the 111-112 level, as listed under Major A, and ( A ) At least 21 hours in a second language as listed under Yfinor or ( B ) At least 1.5 hours from one or more of the following related fields: English, history, linguistics, philosophy, political science. (These will be chosen i n consultatio~l with the teacher education adviser) or (C) A totally separate second major as prescribed by the Catalog. Students who wish to enter the student teaching program must have a 2.75 average in Spanish and department approval in order to be admitted to the professional semester. It is strongly recom- mended that majors who are planning to teach take Spanish 335 or 426. Secondary Education 442F and 447 are required of all majors and minors seeking a high school teaching certificate. Majors in- 164 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE terested in teachin2 Spanish in the elementary schools will consult the departmental professor in charge of teacher education. Lower Division Courses 111-112. Elementary Spanish. (5-5). Emphasis on the four fundamental skills in language learning: Understanding, speaking, reading, and writing. ( I n special cases where students with previous credit in high school Spanish feel incompetent to continue with the next sequence course for reasons of a long lapse of time or poor preparation, those with one year of high school Spanish may request permission to take 111 for credit and those with two years of high school Spanish to take 112 for credit. 210. Intermediate Spanish. (5). Spanish review with emphasis on conversation and cultural readings. Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or two units of high school Spanish or department consent. Kot open to students with prior credit in Spanish 221. NOTE: This course is designed primarily for students wishing to fulfill the liberal arts language requirement. I t is recommended that pro- spective majors and minors go directly into Spanish 223, 226, or 230. 223-224. Selected Spanish Readings. I & 11. (3-3). Intensive reading of Latin-American and Spanish literary works. Outside readings and reports. Pre- requisite: Spanish 112 or two high school units of Spanish for 223; Spanish 223 or three high school units of Spanish for 224. 226. Intermediate Conversation. (2). Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or two units of high school Spanish. Should be taken with Spanish 230. 230. Intermediate Spanish Grammar and Composition. (3). Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or two units of high school Spanish. Upper Division Courses Spanish 224 is a prerequisite for all upper division literature and civilization couryes unless otherwise specified. 315. Major Topics. (1-4). Special studies in (a) language; (b) literary reports; (c) commercial Spanish; (d) the language lal~oratory; (e) music; (f) composition; (g) problems in teaching Spanish. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Department consent. 324. Advanced Conversation. (3). Prerequisite: 226 or department consent. 326. Advanced Grammar and Composition. (3). Prerequisite: Spanish 230 or department consent. 331. Survey of Spanish Literature. (3). Main currents of Spanish literature from 1700 to the present. 332. Survey of Spanish Literature. (3). Spanish literature from the beginning to 1700. Prerequisite: Spanish 331 or department consent. 334. Contemporary Spanish Theatre. (3). 335. Spanish Phonetics. (2). Prerequisite: Any 200-level course or depart- ment consent. 336. Contemporary Spanish Novel. (3). Not open to students with prior credit in 424. 340. Masterpieces of Spanish Literature Through the Golden Age in Trans- lation. (3). A critical study of great literary works such as The Poem of the Cid, The Celestina, Don Quiiote, Lazarillo, and the theater of the Golden Age. Knowledge of Spanish is not a prerequisite. Doe< not count toward a Spanish major or minor. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 165 341. Spanish Literature Since 1870 in Translation. (3). Reading in English of selected works of important Spanish novelists, poets, and dramatists since 1870 to include Galdbs, Unamuno, Benavente, Sender, Antonio Machado, Juan Ram6n JimCnez, and Lorca. Spanish is not a prerequisite. Does not count toward a Spanish maior or minor. 342. The Contemporary Latin American Novel in Translation. (3). Selected major novelists of Spanish America and Brazil such as Rulfo, Fuentes, Asturias, Garcia MBrquez, Carpentier, Mallea, SBbato, Cortizar, and Amado. Does not count to t~ard a Spanish major or minor. A knowledge of Spanish is not a prerequisite. 343. Contemporary Chicano Literature. (3). A study of modem and con- temporary Chicano writers in the U. S. to include such writers as Allurista, Corky GonzAlez, and Octavio Romano. Extensive use of Chicano magazines and newspapers will be made. 420. Great Themes of Spanish Literature. (2). Prerequisite: Any 300-level Hispanic literature course. Not open to students with prior credit in 333. 421. Main Currents of Spanish-American Literature. (3). Prerequisite: Any 300-level Hispanic literature course. 423. Seminar in Spanish. Special studies in (a) Language; (b) Spanish and Spanish-American literature; (c) Spanish and Spanish-American culture and civilization; (d) methods of teaching Spanish in the elementary and secondary schools. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Departmental consent. 425. Contemporary Spanish-American Novel. (3). Prerequisite: Any 300-level Hispanic literature course. 426. Spanish Civilization. (3). Intensive study of Spanish culture, including historical and geographical factors in its development, and its contributions to world civilization. Portuguese civilization will also he considered. 427. Ibero-American Civilization. (3). Intensive study of Ibero-American culture, including the historical and geographical factors in its development and its contributions to world civilization. 435. Introduction to Romance Linguistics. (3). An introduction primarily to the historical phonology and morphology of the Romance languages, with par- ticular emphasis on French and Spanish. Prerequisite: French 305 or Spanish 335 or department consent. (Same as French 435.) Graduate Courses 500. Introduction to Research. (1). A course designed to give graduate stu- dents basic tools for writing research papers. Includes the preparation of bib- liographies, footnoting and basic techniques of literary interpretation. 501. Spanish Linguistics. (3). Historical and structural study of the Spanish language. 505. Directed Readings. (1-4). Readings vary according to the student's prepa- ration. Preparation of reports, literary critiques, special projects in linguistics. 526. Grammar and Stylisties. (3). Intensive study of advanced grammar and stylistic usage. 531. Seminar in Spanish Literature. (3). (a) Middle Ages; (b) Renaissance; (c) Golden Age theater; (d) Cervantes; (c)modern novel; (f) Generation of '98; (g) Contemporary Novel; (h) 20th century theater; (i) Spanish Romanticism; (j) 20th century poetry. 532. Seminar in Spanish-American Literature. (3). (a) Colonial period; (b) contemporary novel; (c) short story; (d) poetry; (e) modernism; (f) essay; (g) theater. 166 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE SOCIOLOGY MAJOR: A major consists of at least 30 hours including Soc. 211, Soc. 310 and Soc. 445 or Soc. 446. Certain courses in related de- partments not to exceed six hours, when they meet the particular needs of the student and are approved by his adviser, may be counted on the major. Socioloey 120 does not count for major credit. With the exception of SFV 214-215, social work courses do not count toward the major. INOR OR: At least 15 hours of sociology, including Soc. 211, and a minimum of six hours of upper division courses. No social work courses may be counted on the minor. Sociology 120 does not count for minor credit. Lower Division Courses 120. American Society. (3). An analysis of contemporary American society with emphasis on the problems of an urban society. Does not count for major or minor credit. 211. Introduction to Sociology. (3). Introduction to basic concepts, ro osi- tions and theoretical approaches of sociology including elementary me%oBs of studying social phenomena. Serves as the hasic course for students who intend to take additional courses in sociology. 226. Race Relations. (3). 'The nature of race; ethnic grou s confused with races; interrelations of ethnic groups in the United States an: other countries; processes of change; action programs. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. Upper Division Courses 310.' Sociological Statistics. (4). Statistical application to sociological prob- lems. Parametric measures including significance of differences and correla- tion. Nonparametric measures such as binomial expansion and chi-square. Prerequisite: Soc. 211; Math. 121-122 or 141. 314.O Comparative Family Systems. (3). Ethnographic and historical studies of family systems; range of variation; vestiges of older systems in contemporary United States. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 315. The American Family. (3). Analysis of American family behavior in- cluding the selection of marriage partners, the husband-wife, parent-child re- lationships, and the relation of those patterns of behavior to other aspects of American society. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 320. The Normative Order and Social Control. (3). Analysis of the develo ment of the normative system, the concept of social control and the breai: down of social order in collective and deviant behavior. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 321. Sociology of Religion. (3). The function and role of religious belief and religious or anization in human societies with special reference to American society. Fiefation of religious belief and organization to other aspects of the social structure and to social change. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 322. Deviant Behavior. (3). The structure, dynamics, and etiology of those behavior systems which are integrated around systematic violations of the control norms. Competing theories are presented and evaluated within the con- text of the assumption that man is a social product. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 323. Sociology of Law. (3) . The study of law and legal institutions within their social context. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 167 325. Formal Organizations. (3). Characteristics of complex organizations and factors related to their effectiveness. Emphasis on research methods and find- ings. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 326. Political Sociology. (3). Social bases and consequences of political be- havior; the study of power and authority; problems in the development and maintenance of vial~le democratic ~olitical structures; bureaucratic organization and power. Prerequisite: Soc. 21 1. 327. Violence and Social Change. (3). The analysis of the causal processes and functions of extreme and violent political behavior, i . e., revolutionary, in- surrectionary and protest movements; includes analysis of consequences for social change. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 330. Social Stratification. (3). An analysis of status, class, and caste in various societies, especially American society. The relationship of stratification to the various social institutions. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 331. Population. (3). The size, composition, distribution, and recent trends in the population of the world and the United States, and the relation of popt~lation to world problems. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 334. Urban Sociology. (3). Urban population, urban organization, urban in- stitutions, and programs of city planning. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 335. Industrial Sociology. (3). The work group as a social group, social orga- nization of the work plant, and social factors affecting the worker. Prerequisite: soc. 211. 338. Medical Sociology. (3). An analysis of social and cultural factors related to physical and mental illness; the dynamics of communication and role rela- tionships among patients and medical personnel, and social research and theory relevant to the health professions. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 339.O Juvenile Delinquency. (3). The factors related to juvenile delinquency and the measures of treatment and prevention. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 340.' Criminology. (3). The extent and nature of criminal behavior and societal reactions to it. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 341.' Contemporary Corrections. (3). Historical and contemporary rograms for the treatment of offenders. viewed as societal reactions to criminal eehavior. Prerequisite: Soc. 339 or 340. 400. Selected Topics in Sociology. (3). Study in a specialized area of sociology with emphasis on student research projects. Areas covered will include deviant behavior, political sociology, the family, and others. May be repeated for a maximum of six hours credit. Prerequisite: Soc. 21 1, consent of instructor and substantive area course. 410. Introduction to Scientific Method in Sociology. (3). The development of the problem, techniques of data collection. analysis and presentation. Lab- oratory work in the form of a completed project required. Prerequisite: Soc. 310. 428. Social Interaction. (3). Group effects on the individual. Symbolic in- teratction theory in sociology with special emphasis on research and findings. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. 445. History of Soci~logical Theory. (3). Analysis of the emergence of sociological theory. Prerequisite: Eight hours of sociology. 446." Principles and Concepts of Sociology. (3). Critical evaluation of major principles and concepts, their derivation and relationship to systematic theory. Prerequisite: Eight hours of sociology. a Prerequisite may be waived by department consent. 168 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 470. Independent Reading. (2-3). Designed for the advanced student capable of doing independent work in an area of special interest. Prerequisite: 15 hours of sociology and instructor's consent. 477. Introduction to Urban Affairs. (3). An introduction to the study of the metropolis as a social, political and economic system. Cross listed as Pol. Sci. 477 and Econ. 477. Prerequisite: Econ. 221 and Soc. 211 or a course in political science. Graduate Courses 500. Research Methods in Sociology. (3). The application of research methods to sociological data. Includes research design, collection of data, develo ment of questionnaires, schedules and scales, interviewing methods, analysis ofdata, and summary. Prerequisite: Soc. 410 and department consent. 515. Seminar on the Family. (2). Review of recent research on the family and the theoretical implication thereof. Prerequisite: Soc. 315, 410, and de- partment consent. 520. Seminar in Social Movements. (2). Anaylsis of the elements in social movements as factors in social and cultural change. Prerequisite: Soc. 320, 410, and department consent. 525. Seminar in Orgnnizational Analysis. (2).Exploration of selected problems in organizational theory hased on major theoretical and empirical a proaches, both classical and contemporary. Prerequisite: Soc. 325, 410 or Apartment consent. 534. Seminar in Urban Sociology. (3). Independent research projects in urban sociology. Prerequisite: Soc. 3-34 and/or 477, 410 and department consent. 541. Advanced Seminar on Theories of Correctional Treabnent. (3). Evalua- tion of the range of contemporary theories of individual and group techniques of correctional treatment with special emphasis upon the literature related to process research and outcome research. Prerequisite: Soc. 341 and 410. 547. Recent Developments in Sociology. (2). Major issues, new theories, new techniques of research, new areas of research, new applications. Prerequisite: 15 hours of sociology including Soc. 110 and department consent. May be repeated for credit not to exceed four hours. 570. Independent Reading. (2). Advanced systematic reading in a topical area under the tutorship of a memher of the graduate faculty. May be re- peated for credit not to esceecl a total of four hours. Prerequisite: Consent of department. 575-576. Thesis. (2-2). SOCIAL WORK MAJOR:A minimum of 33 hours consisting of the following: SW 214-215, 314, 320, 420, 321.-422; Soc. 120 and 315; and Psych. 444. MINOR:A minimum of 16 hours consisting of the following: SW 214-215, 314, 320 and 421. Lower Division Courses 214. The Social Welfare Institution. (3). Analysis of social welfare as a social institution including t l ~ e social, cultural, political, and economic factors affecting policies and programs, with special emphasis on public income maintenance systems. Prerequisite: Soc. 211. Prereqi~isitemay he waived by rlrp~rtmrnlca )~~ \cn t . FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 169 215. The Social Welfare Institution. (3). Functional approach to social welfare based on social welfare values and objectives, the helping process and relation- ship, with special emphasis on selected social problem areas along with com- munity programs designed to resolve them. Prerequisite: SW 214. Upper Division Courses 314. The Social Work Profession. (3). The development of a theory of prac- tice for social work by use of description and analysis of the objectives, values, roles, settings. and knowledge base of the profession in the provision of services. Prerequisite: Soc. 120, Psych. 111, and SW 214-215'. (Not open to students with credit in S\V 311 or SW 312.) 320. Basic Practice Skills in Social Work. (3). An introduction to basic skills intrinsic to all social work practice with concentration on provision of services at the level of interaction between social worker and client, emphasizing the interpersonal modes of influencing individuals and groups in their social situa- tions. Prerequisite: SW 215 and 314. 420. Methods of Social Work. (3). Exploration of the primary and secondary problem-solving methods in social work emphasizing casework, group work and community organization. Prerequisite: S W 314 and 320. 421. Social Welfare Field Experience. (4). Placement in community social welfare agencies for supervisrd periods of observation and direct service assign- ments, with special emphasis on performance of basic practice skills and under- standing of the social welfare agency and its role in the community service network. Prerequisite: S\Y 320, or SW 320 concurrent with SW 421. 422. Social Welfare Field Experience. (5). Placement in community social welfare agencies for supervised direct service assignments, with emphasis on formulation of appropriate goals; selection of various social work roles; and in-depth development of techniques and skills common to practice in the social welfare field. Prerequisite: SW 320, 420, 421 or 420 concurrent with SW 422. * May be waived by department consent. SPANISH (See Romance Languages) SPEECH MAJOR:A minimum of 30 hours including Speech 111, 221, plus specialization in area ( 1) . ( 2 ). ( 3 ) , or ( 4 ) below: ( 1) (Public Address ) : Speech 212,213,228,335,432,three hours from theater area, three hours from radio-television area, and five to six hours to be elected wit11 consent of the area adviser from 412, 413, 415, 436, 437, 461. ( 2 ) (Theater) : Speech 243. 244, 253, 259, 423, 424, plus at least seven hours of electives to be chosen with consent of area adviser from otller theater conrscs. .411 theater majors will be expected to participate in some area in the production of the University Theater plays, in consultation with the staff. ( 3 ) ( Radio-Television) : Speech 114. 214, 215, 224, 232, 314, 315, 403, 404. 405, 407, 437. ( 4 ) (General Speech) : Speech 212, 213, 143 or 228, 243, 244, 259, 461, 465, and three hours to be elected with consent of the area a6viser. 170 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE Stur'ents completing option ( I ) must participate in intercollegiate forensics for a minimum of t n o semesters prior to the senior year. Students completing option ( 4 ) must complete three semesters of cocurricular activities. These ma17 consist of two semesters of intercollegiate foren~ics an:' two semesters of theater. Option ( 4 ) is structured primarily for those planning to teach at the secondary school level. However, a student who wishes to teach may also choose option ( 1 ) or ( 2 ) . Students not planning to seek qualification for teaching may substitute within option ( 4 ) with the consent of the departm~nt . Students planning to teach shouId also check state cetrtification requirements. BROADCAST-JOURN ~ I A T O R :ALISLI COMBINED Speech 111, 114, 214, 215, 224, 314 or .31*5, 322, 403, 105, 407, 437, and Journalism 115, 226, 330, 360. h l m o ~ :A minimum of 15 hours selected with the approval of the Department of Speech. Lower Division Courses 101 & 102, 201 and 202. Debate. (1-1). Research for debates, participation in 30 or more full length delmtes per year (15 of which must be intercollegiate competition), and debate squad meetings. Prerequisite: Department consent. Maximum credit in debate four hours; not counted toward major. 111. Extemporaneous Speaking. (2). Analysis of audience, selection of sub- ject, choice of ideas, finding and testing supporting materials, organization, and delivery. 114. Broadcasting and the Citizen. (3). Organization, structure, history, social implications of the broadcasting industry. 143. The Art of the Theater. (3). An introduction to the theater as an art form, with emphasis on critical appreciation from the viewpoint of the audi- ence. (Not counted toward theater major.) 212. Persuasive Speaking. (2). Training in influencing human behavior in socially acceptable ways via the spoken word. Prerequisite: Speech 111. 213. Argumentation and Debate. (3). The principles of reasoned discourse. The practices of scholastic forensics for prospective secondary teachers. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 214 & 215. Radio Workshop. (1-1). Relation of theory to application at KMUW-FM. 221. Oral Interpretation. (3). The development of the mental, vocal, and analytical techniques essential to the interpretation of literature. 223. Phonetics. (2). The physical properties of speech; the formation of sounds, combination of sounds into word patterns, dialectical variety and transcribing of sounds of American English by 11se of International Phonetic Alphabet. 224. Radio and T\' Production. (3). Production and direction of radio and TV programs, lahoratory work, KMU\$'-Fhf. 225. Business and Professional Speaking. (2). Prerequisite: Speech 111 or department consent. (Offered only at night.) FAIRMOUN'T COLLEGE 171 226. Parliamentary Law and Procedure. (1). Thv parliamentary rules govern- ing the order ant1 concluct of inertinps, mr~thotls of keeping ant1 the writing of minutes and resolutions. 228. Principles of Group Discussion. (3). Development of reflective thinking, group leadership, and effective group participation. Prerequisite: Speech 111 or department consent. 232. Radio-Television Writing. (3). Writing formats, commercials, continuity, and drama for radio and television. 243. Acting I. (3). Emphasis on the internal techniques of acting, on charac- terization, and on the actor's analysis of the play and the role. 244. Stagecraft. (3). R; L am. Theory and practice of making, painting, and using scenery for the stage. Practical work on University Theater productions. 253. Costuming for the Stage. (3). R; L am. Basic principles of costume design and construction. Pattern making, material selection, wardrobe manage- ment and organization. Practical experience with University Theater and Experimental 'Theater productions. 259. Directing I. (3). R; L am. Basic theories and principles of stage direct- ing; problems of producing the play with practical experience gained by use of the project methods. Prerequisite: 243 or consent. 275. Directed Projects in Theater. (1-4). Independent research or practical and crcativr p~.ojects in thc vnrior~s arc.:is of thcatrr, including performance, design. tecl~nical thrater, manngcmcnt, ant1 tlrsmt~tic literature. Prerequisite: Depart- ment consent. hla)- bc rcpentecl for crcltlit to a maximum of four hours. Upper Division Courses 301 & 302, 401 and 402. Debate. (1-1). Research for debates, participation in 30 or more full length debates per year (15 of which must be intercollegiate competition), and debate squad meetings. Prerequisite: Department consent. Maximum credit in debate, 4 hours; not counted toward major. 314 & 315. Radio Workship. (1-1). Relation of theory to application at KXIUW-FM. 316 & 317. Playwriting I & 11. (3-3). The writing of scripts for performance. Emphasis on both verbal and visual aspects of playwriting. If possible, the scripts will be performed. Prerequisites: Engl. 324 and Speech 243 and 259; or consent of instructor. (Same as Engl. 316 & 317.) 320. Cinematography. (3). Theory and technique of motion picture making. Use of motion picture camera with emphasis on documentary film concepts. 322. Radio and Television News. (3). (See Journ. 322.) 335. Survey of Rhetorical Theory. (3). From the Greeks to the Moderns, 313. Acting 11. (2). Utilization in scenes of the method gained in 243, with emphasis on styles of acting and on comedy technique. Prerequisite: Acting 243. 344. Advanced Stagecraft. (3). R; L am. Theory and practice of translating set designs and drawings to the physical stage. Practical experiencc with Uni- versity Theatre productions. Prerequisite: Speech 244 with a grade of C or better. 359. Directing 11. (2). R; L am. Staging and rehearsal techniques, with emphasis on the problems of the period and stylized play. Prerequisite: Speech 259 or department consent. 172 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 403-404. Television Workshop. (2-2). R; L arr. The theories, tools, and techniques of television production; studio work as a member of a TV pro- duction crew. 405. Radio and TV Station Management. (3). The organization and manage- ment of radio and television station; administrative, programming, technical and sales problems, physical facilities. Prerequisite: Department consent. 407. Radio and TV Programming. (3). Planning, developing, scheduling, based upon audience and market analysis, program ratings, principles of evaluation and criticism. 412. Contemporary Theories of Oral Communication. (3). Conceptual models useful in the scientific study of speech and application from selected areas of psychology, sociology, anthropology, and other related fields. 413. Advanced Theories of Argumentation. (3). Intensive examination of the principles and problems of reasoned cliscourse. 415. Language and Symbolic Processes. (3). Application of the theoretical framework of general semantics, linguistics, and psycholinguistics to the analysis of oral languace hehaviol. Anal!rsis usage which leads to conflict, of lang~~age confusion, and misdirection, and development of methods of accuracy and precision in language usage. 421. Advanced Oral Interpretation. (3). Intensive study and analysis of various forms of literature, the techniques of effective oral communication, and the building of the individual or group concert recital. Prerequisite: Speech 221. 423. Development of the Theater I. (3). The history of theatrical activity as a social institution and an art form, from the beginning to the 17th century. Representative plays, methods of staging, and theatrical architecture of various periods. 424. Development of the Theater 11. (3). From the 17th century to the present. 425. Dramatic Theory. (3). Critical examination of selected esthetic theories of the theatrical arts; relationship of the theories to major dramatic works and theatrical periods. Prerequisite: Speech 423 or 424 or consent. 432. American Public Address. (3). A detailed study of notable American speakers and their public utterances; their impact on the political, economic, and social history of this nation from Colonial times to the present. 436. Advanced Public Speaking. (3). Theory and practice in the various forms of platform speaking for the academically mature student. Includes such spe- cial forms as the after dinner speech, speeches of goodwill, tribute, keynote, and courtesy. Prerequisite: Speech 212. 437. Theory of Mass Persuasion. (2). An analysis of the techniques used in the mass media with special emphasis on the use of spoken language. 444. Scene Design. (3). R; L am. Fundamentals of scene design. Practical work on University Theater productions. Prerequisite: 244 with grade of C or better; also Engr. Graphic 250, or consent. 445. Stage Lighting. (3). R; L arr. Lighting equipment; light design and its relation to scenery design; emphasis upon the problems in the high school, college, church, etc. Practical work on IJniversity Theater productions. Pre- requisite: Speech 244 with a grade of C or better. 450. Workshops in Speech. (2-4). (See Sec. Ed. 450.) 153. History of Costume. (3). R; L arr. Historical survey and individual re- search of dress from ancient Egypt to present day period. Theory and practice FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 173 of adapting period styles to the stage. Practical experience on University and Experimental Theatrr productions. Prerequisite: Speech 253 or consent. 461. Directing the Forensics Program. (2). A study of the problems and tech- niques of administering secondary school and college forensics activities. 465. Communication Disorders. (3). Problems of the speech defective rela- tive to emotional handicaps, pedagogical retardation, etc. Methods for class- room teacher. Also listed as Logopedics 421. 470. The Audience. (3). Analyses of speech audiences, including those of radio, television, public address, and theater. Demographic and psychosocio- logical tlimrnsions ant1 characteristics. Quantitative ant1 qualitative techniques of audience measurement and evaluations thereof. 472. Practicum in Audience Measurement. (3). Application of research tech- niques to practical problems in audience measurement. Identification of spe- cific problems. Construction of measuring instruments ( e .g., questionnaires), sampling trchniqucs. collcction of clata, tal:ulation, analysis, and reports of findings. Prerequisite: Speech 470 or department consent. 475. Directed Study. (1-4). Individual study or projects. Prerequisite: De- partment consent. May be repeated for credit with department consent. Graduate Courses 500. Introduction to Graduate Study in Speech. (3). Major emphasis is place6 upon the principles of research, biblio raphical data, and historical, descrip- tive, and experimental research methofs useful in speech, broadcasting, and drama. This course should be taken at the beginning of the graduate program. 503. Educational and Instructional Broadcasting. (3). Investigation of the methods of producing and using educational and in-school instructional radio and television programs. 506. Regulation and Responsibility in Broadcasting. (3). Government and broadcasting relations; review of basic radio and television law; emphasis on responsibilities of broadcast licensee. 520. Investigation and Conference. (1-3, 1-3). Directed research and experi- mentation for graduate students in some phase of (a) ublic address, (b) theater history and production, (c) radio-television or teaching of(x)the speech. May be repeated for credit up to a total of six hours. 523. History of Dramatic Criticism. (3). A survey and analysis of major critical theories from Aristotle to the present. 524. Development of Modem Theater Styles. (3). An examination of the major movements in the modern theater since 1850. Emphasis is on both literary and physical elements of styles. 530. Theories of Rhetoric: Classical. (3). An intensive study of the rhetorical theories of classical writers from 466 B. c . to the decline of Roman oratory. Principal emphais n,ill Ire on Isoc:ratcs, Plltto, Aristotle, Quintilian, Cicero, and Longinus. 531. Theories of Rhetoric: Medieval, Renaissance, and Modern. (3). A study of the emerging patterns of rhetoric from the Second Sophistic to modern times. Analysis of the rhetorical systems associated with such figures as Augustine, Fenelon, Bulwer, Sheridan, Steale, Rush, John Quincy Adams, Blair, Campbell, and Whately. 535. Methods of Rhetorical Criticism. (2). A development study of the critical techniques of Plato, Aristotle, and Cicero to the modern approaches in the criticisms of I. A. Richard and Kenneth Burke. 174 FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 560. Seminars in Speech. (2-3). Special seminars designed to treat problems in: (a) public address, (b) drama, (c) radio-television or (d) speech edu- cation. May be repeated for credit. 567. Trends in Speech Education. (3). To provide advanced speech sh~dents with a background for a philosophy of speech education. Readings and seminar discussions of the philosophical rationales which underlie speech and drama as academic disciplines. History of speech education. Analysis of theories and methods. A comparative study of speech curricula today and proiectives to thr future. FAIRMOUNT COLLEGE 175 Nni11ctl for. n pr.onzino~t Wichita oilmcln, R. P. Clinton Hall hor1.w~ the College of ~ ? I I . F ~ ) I ~ s . ~ A~lii7ii~i.~tt.ati0)1. 176 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION LAWRENCE EDWlN McKIBBIN, PhD, Dean The College of Business Admini~tration has as its primary objective the preparation of young men and women for active, intelligent, and responsible participation in business and community life. Such participation requires that the graduate have an understanding of the world and society in which we live, an understanding of our business and industrial community, and an understanding of the role of the business administrator. The objectives of the College of Business Administration are, then : (1) To provide the student with some understanding of our world and society, to develop the student's intellectual capacities, and to develop an understanding of his rights and responsibilities as an active member of society. ( 2 ) To encourage in the student the habit of orderly thinking and to foster creativity. ( 3 ) To equip the student with the fundamental business skills and to develop his understanding of the business process. ( 4 ) To prepare the student to make valid business decisions and to increase his ability to communicate with others in the execution of those decisions. (5) To provide the student with a degree of specialized skill or knowledge in a selected area of business. (6) To develop within the student an understanding of and an appreciation for research methodologies. Undergraduate Programs The undergraduate curriculum of the college leads to the degree of Bachelor of Business Administration. A two-year program in secre- tarial training leads to a Certificate of Applied Science in secretarial training. The college is divided into the departments of accounting, ad- ministration, business education, and economics. Graduate Programs In recent years additional resources have been devoted to the var- ious graduate propams of the College of Business, paralleling the widening scope and changing characteristics of the research efforts of both graduate students and faculty. The college continually COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 177 attempts to expand and improve its research effort and to provide a climate for effective graduate study. The College of Business Administration offers a course of study leading to a hla?ter of Business Administration degree. This pro- gram is designed primarily for students with undersraduate degrees other than the baccalaureate d e ~ r e ein business administration. In addition, the departments of accounting and administration each offer a course of study leading to the hlaster of Science degree. The economics department offers courses of study leading to the Master of Science degree and to the blaster of Arts degree. For graduate program?, see the Graduate School Bulletin. Other Programs The College of Business recognizes that its urban environment offers many advantages to students interested in the research and study of business problems. The college is also aware that this urban setting imposes many responsibilities. The accelerating techno- logical changes in industry in recent years have been accompanied by social demands which, in part, are a reflection of these changes. The college feels a responsibility for adding to the total body of knowledge about business and economics. Further, as an urban, state-supported institution, the college feels a responsibility to pro- vide educational programs and specialized services for members of the community and the state who are not full-time students. In response to community needs, the college maintains an active program of continuing education. Through the Center for Man- agement Development, seminars and other programs are developed to enable businessmen to keep abreast of current developments in specialized areas of the business environment. Other activities under the auspices or joint sponsorship of the college include the Center for Business and Economic Research, the Center for Economic Education, and the Center for Human Ap- praisal. In addition, the college publishes a newsletter which periodically reports current developments of interest to the business community. Accreditation The college is a member of the American Association of Collegiate Schools of Business and its undergraduate program is accredited by the organization. REGULATIONS ADMISSION Entering freshmen interested in business administration are ad- mitted to the University College and must meet the general entrance 178 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION requirements of the University, elsewhere in the Catalog. The program of high school preparation recommended for entering stu- dents is given in the Universitv Collece section of the Catalog. Students may enter the College of Business Administration from the University College, other degree-granting collecres within the University, or other universities and colleges, provided they have completed 24 semester credit hours and have earned a credit point index as follows: 24-63 hours, 1.70; 64 or more hours, 2.00, and are not on academic probation. PROBATION A student will be placed on probation at the end of any semester in which he does not have a cumulative grade point index of 1.70 for 24-63 credit hours and 2.00 for 64 or more credit hours. A student on probation may not enroll for more than 12 semester hours. Pro- bation is removed when the cumulative grade point index reaches the required level. The student remains on probation if he earns at least a 2.00 index in the term during which he is on probation and his cumulative grade point index does not yet meet the minimum standards. No student \\rho enrolls in fewer than seven hours shall be dismissed for failure to raise the cumulative GP.4 to the required level; however, if the student has earned seven or more hours in hvo or more terms, he must achieve a GPA for the semesters of 2.00 to be continued on probation. A student on probation shall be dismissed from the College of Business Administration if he fails to meet either of the require- ments of his probationary status. When dismissed, students must apply to the College of Business Administration Exceptions Com- mittee to be considered for readmittance on a final probationary status. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS In addition to fulfilling the general requirements of the University for graduation, each student shall elect at least six hours from the departments represented in Groups I through IV of the prescribed fields of study exclusive of courses in economics. Candidates for the baccalaureate degree offered by the college shall complete at least 56 semester hours of courses offered out- side the college. (Econ. 221 and 222 may count as courses out- side the college. Hist. 336, 337, 338 and Pol. Sci. 353 may not count as courses outside the college.) In addition, such students shall complete at least 50 semester hours of courses offered by the college. A grade point index of 2.00 or better must be earned: (1)on all college work; ( 2 ) on all work taken at this University; ( 3 ) on all business and economics courses, and ( 4 ) on all business and econ- COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 179 nomics courses taken at this University which could be applied to the degree sought. Not more than six hours of the last 30 nor 10 hours of the total number of hours required for graduation may be extension or corre- spondence courses. Permission of the dean must be secured before taking such courses. No extension or correspondence courses will be allowed that duplicate courses required for any degree granted by the college, courses required for any emphasis within the col- lege, or any junior or senior level courses offered in the college. A student whose college program has not been interrupted by more than two consecutive calendar years may graduate under the requirements in effect in the college on the date he first entered Wichita State University or the requirements of any subsequent Catalog. If his college program has been interrupted by more than two consecutive years, a student will be subject to the Catalog re- quirements in effect when he reenters, or if he elects, the require- ments of a later Catalog. RESTRICTIONS A. Creclitlno credit. The following restrictions pertaining to courses taken for credit/no credit shall apply to students enrolled in the College of Business Administration: (1) No more than six hours of courses taken in the College of Business core may be taken for creditlno credit. ( 2 ) No more than 12 hours of courses offered in the College of Business may be taken for creditlno credit. ( 3 ) No more than six hours may be taken for creditlno credit in any department in the College of Business. B. A4aximtrm hours in any one department. No student may take more than 48 hours of the 124 required for graduation in any one department, including any courses that may be cross-listed with any other department. BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE All students in the College of Business Administration will design their own course of study from the courses listed in the four major areas below: (1) Environment of Business. Choose A or B below. ( A ) 9-12 hours in at least three of the four subdivisions. of which a mlnimum of nine hours must be in economics and .of the nine hours, three must be Econ. 221. ( 1 ) General macro: Econ. 221, 424. ( 2 ) General micro: Econ. 222, 320, 421. ( 3 ) Special fields: Econ. 340, 360, 402, 425, 440, 453, 470, 471, 475, 490. If a student elects the "A" option in one or two of the four major areas, he must take the maximum number of hours required in those areas. If he also elects to take the "A" option in a third and/or fourth area(s), he may take the minimum number of hours in those areas. 180 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ( 4 ) Legal, political, social: Adm. 332, 334, Econ. 414, 462. ( B ) BA 211-212. (3-3) . BA 317. ( 3 ) . ( I1) Business Functions. Choose A or B below. ( A ) 6-9 hours 'in a t least two of the three subdivisions. ( 1 ) Production: Adm. 351, 455. ( 2 ) Marketing: Adm. 300, 303, 305, 404, 406, 407, 408, 409. ( 3 ) Finance: Adm. 343, 441,442, 443. ( B ) BA 321. ( 5 ) . (111) Quantative Studies. Math. 140 and 245. ( 3 & 3 ) . Required of all students. ( \ la th. 142 will be accepted in lieu of hlath. 243.) Choose A or B below. ( A ) 9-12 hours,' with at least three hours in each subdivision (three hours of which must be Accte. 213). ( 1 ) Statistics: Econ. 238, 438, ~ d k .370, 376. Operations research: Adm. 371, 456. ( 2 ) Accounting: Acctg. 213. 214, 335, 345. Information svstems: Adm. 375. 471. Accte. 433. , , -( B ) BA 231-232. (3-3) . BA 233. ( 3 ) . ( IV) Administrative Processes. Choose A or B below. ( A ) 9-12 hours ' in at least three of four subdivisions and of this, three hours must be Adm. 260. ( 1 ) General behavioral concepts: Adm. 260. ( 2 ) General organizational behavior: Adm. 362, 363, 364, 365, 367. ( 3 ) Special fields: Adm. 361, 462, 464, 466; Econ. 461. ( 4 ) Policy: Adm. 481-2. ( B ) BA 341-342. (4-4) . Each candidate for the BRA degree shall satisfy the additionar specific requirements of one of the following curricular emphasis: ACCOUNTING Course Hrs. Acctg. 214, Introduction to Managerial Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Acctg. 315-316, Intermediate Financial Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Acctg. 335, Cost Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Acctg. 345, Income Tax and Managerial Decisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Acctg. Electives " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Adm. 334, Law and Business . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ADMINISTRATION Students must elect an additional 21 hours beyond the college core from upper division courses (300 and 400 level) in the College of Business Administration. A minimum of 15 upper division hours must be taken within the administration department, and the re- maining six hours may be clected from upper division courses in accounting. administration, or economics. 0 If a student elects the "A" option in one or two of the four major areas, he must take the maximum number of hours required in those areas. If he also elects to take the A" ontion in a third and/or foruih arm(s ) . lie may take the minimum number of hours in those areas. Elective courses shorrld be selected on the hssis of the student's career objective in gmfessional accounting. Consultation with a faculty adviser in the Department of ccounting is strongly recornmmd~d. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 181 ECONOMICS Within the 124 hours required fcr graduation, a minimum of 30 hours in economics is required and a maximum of 40 hours in economics is allowed. Course Hrs . Econ. 414, Gov't Regulation of Economic Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electives in economics (12 hours upper division courses, including not more than six hours from among Econ. 305, 307, and 406) . . . 12-22 BUSINESS EDUCATION The maximum lower division credit from the Department of Busi- ness Education shall be 28 horns. Required courses for the secre- tarial emphasis are: Course Hrs . Bus. Ed. 133, 138, 237, Typewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Bus. Ed. 201, Secretarial Office Machines . . . . . . . . . . 3 Bus. Ed. 202, Calculating Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Bus. Ed. 231, 234, 240, Shorthand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Bus. Ed. 136, 203, Records Management and Office Procedures . . . . . . . 4 Bus. Ed. 248, Written Business Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Bus. Ed. 345, Transcription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 CERTIFICATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN SECRETARIAL TRAINING The Certificate of Applied Science in secretarial training nrovides an opportunity for secretarial preparation of a high quality in a college atmosphere with a view to attaining the Certified Profes- sional Secretary status. The requirements for the certificate are as follows: Engl. 111; Econ. 221, 222: Acctg. 213. 214; Aclm. 120, or 2W, or 332; Bus. Ed. 136, 138. 201, 202. 203. 231. 231, 237, 240 or 345 (138, 231, and 234 may be taken in hiqh schoo!), and 248; science or Math. 121; six hours of humanities; nine hours of general University require- ments outlinecl elsewhere in this Catalog, plus sufficient free elec- tives to equal 64 hours. Thirty hours and 60 credit points shall be earned in resiclcnce. Trirelve of the last 15 hours must be taken in residence. Of the required 64 hours, not more than one fourth of D nlork will count on the Certificittr of Applied Science in secre- tarial training. If taken in high school, 110 credit is given for Bus. Ed. 133 or Bus. Ed. 231; business electives shall be substituted for these courses. BUSINESS TEACHER EDUCATION DEGREE Students intert.stet1 in preparing to teach business subjects in high school enroll the first ycar in University College and then transfer to the College of Ediicntion. All students in the University who 182 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION receive a certificate to teach must meet the requirements as outlined in the College of Education section of the Catalog. Integrative Core Courses The following descriptions represent the courses that students may take if they select the "B" option for any of the areas in the College of Business requirement. BA 211-212. Economics I-II (3-3). Study and analysis of the environment of business, labor, government, banking, and other economic institutions. Pre- requisite: Closed to students with credit in Econ. 221-222. BA 231-232. Quantitative Methods I-II (3-3). Emphasis on development of a strong conceptual understanding of statistical methodology and a survey of model building and techniques of operations research. Prerequisite: Math. 245. Closed to students with credit in Econ. 238 or Adm. 370. BA 233. Concepts and Uses of Accounting Information. (3). Underlying con- cepts, processing and utilization of financial accounting information as a part of a managerial information system. Emphasis is on revenue and expense recognition and measurement, asset valuation, and measurement of manage- ment's profitability performance. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. Closed to students with credit in Acctg. 213 or 113 and 114. BA 317. Social Environment of Business (3). Analysis of the social environ- ment of business in its hroadest context, including the legal-political system, the social and cultural setting, and the responsibilities of businessmen within this setting. Prerequisite: Closed to students with credit in Aclm. 332. BA 321. Business Functions (5). Description, analysis, and integration of all the processes involved in the internal operation of a business, including manu- facturing, marketing, and finance. Prerequisite: Closed to students with credit in Aclm. 300, 343, or 351. BA 341-342. Administrative Behavior I-II (4-4). Analysis of behavioral con- cepts from the standpoint of thc individual, intra- and intergroup processes, organizations (including strategies For selecting and implementing goals), and the relationships of organizations to cultural systems. Prerequisite: Closed to students with credit in Adm. 260 or 261. ACCOUNTING An emphasis in accounting may be taken only in the College of Business Administration. The requirements for an emphasis in accounting are listed under the Bachelor of Business Administration degree information. INOR OR: A minor in accounting may be taken in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. A minimum of 15 hours must be taken, including Acctg. 213-214, and 315-316. CERTIFICATE OF CERTIFIED PUBLIC ACCOUNTANT The designation "Certified Public Acocuntant" is available to those individuals who are able to demonstrate basic competence of professional quality in the discipline of accounting. This basic competence is demonstrated by acquiring the body of knowledge common to the professional and passing the CPA examination. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 183 Eligibility requirements for candidates who wish to take the CPA examination are established by Kansas law as follows: ( 1 ) Beginning in August 1970, new candidates must possess a bacca- laureate or higher degree with a major or concentration in ac- counting, or what the State Board of Accountancy determines to be substantially the equivalent thereof. After August 1976, this requirement will apply to all candidates who wish to sit for the CPA examination. ( 2 ) Candidates who were eligible to take the CPA examination prior to the enactment of the educational re- quirement in ( 1) above have until August 1976 to do so. The prior Kansas law specified any one of three admission requirements: ( a ) proof of college degree, including 30 or more semester hours of accounting, business law, economics, business, and finance, of which at least 20 semester hours must be in accounting; ( b ) proof of college degree and completion of three years of public account- ing experience; or ( c ) proof of graduation from high school, or an equivalent education and completion of three years of public accounting experience. The CPA certificate is issued upon ( 1 ) successful completion of the CPA examination and ( 2 ) completion of two years of public accounting experience. The experience requirement is waived for those candidates \i;ho possess a master's or higher degree with a major or concentration in accounting. Graduates with an accounting emphasis qualify to sit for the Kansas CPA examination; however, the department strongly rec- ommends graduate work leading to the MS degree in accounting to best prepare the student to enter the profession as well as to pass the examination. Lower Division Courses 213. Introduction to Financial Accounting. (3). The study of accounting as a means of communicating financial information about the activities of business enterprises. Emphasis is on concepts and p c i p l e s underlying the measure rnent of income and financial position, and ow this information may be used to evaluate the progress of a firm. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing or de- partment consent. 114. In?roduction to )Managerial Accounting. (3). The study of accounting in terms of mcnagement's information requirements. Emphasis is on the use of accounting in planning and controlling a firm's activities. Prerequisite: Acctg. 213 and sophomore standing. Upper Division Courses 315-316. Intermediate Financial Accounting I, 11. (3-3). A thorough, in-depth, study of conceptual and technical aspects of financial accounting. Emphasis is nn valuation and measurement problems of income determination and balance sheet presentation. Prerequisite: Acctg. 213. 335. Cost Accounting. (3). The study of accounting for manufacturing opera- tions, with emphasis on the processing, analysis, and interpretation of cost data 184 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION for income determination, inventory valuation, and internal management use. Prerequisite: Acctg. 214. 315. Income tax and Managerial Decisions. (3). An examination of the federal income tax law relating to business income taxation. Primary emphasis is upon the income tax results of alternative courses of action taken in a business. Prerequisite: Acctg. 213. 403. Advanced Financial Accounting. (3). Accounting concepts and techniques related to partnerships, branches, consolidated statements, and foreign exchange. Governmental accounting. Prerequ~site: Acctg. 316. 413. Principles of Auditing. (3). A study of the accountant's attest function. Emphasis is on the role of the independent auditor, his legal responsibilities, his code of ethical conduct, and auditing standards, together with technical aspects of attesting to the reliability of financial and other data. Prerequisite: Acctg. 316. 423. Selected Topics in Financial Accounting. (3). Accounting topics associ- ated with revenue recognition under specialized sales situations, financial statement presentation on a nonhistorical cost basis, financial statement prep- aration from incomplete records, and businesses in distress. Course content will change as financial accounting problems facing the accounting profession evolve. Prerequisite: Acctg. 316. 433. Electronic Data Processing and Accounting Systems. (3). A study of the format and content of accounting systems, reflecting the application of elec- tronic computers to the processing of business data. Includes basic computer programming. Prerequisite: Acctg. 214 or department consent. 445. Advanced Income Tax. (3). Study of the federal income tax law and its relation to individuals and other entities. Designed primarily for those stu- dents who wish to work with income tax as part of a career objective. Pre- requisite: Acctg. 345 or department consent. 453. Advanced Managerial Accounting. (3). Advanced study of the use of accountine information in financial ~ o l i c v decisions. ~rof i t ~ l a n n i n e and control. quantitati(e analysis of financial data,' and capitat budieting. -1nc1udes the application of selected quantitative methods in accounting. Prerequisite: &tg. 214 or equivalent. - Graduate Courses (courses have been changed. please refer to Graduate Bulletin) 501. Financial Accounting. (3). The basic structure of accounting, income determination, asset valuation, liability recognition, accounting for ownership equity, and the interpretation and analysis of financial statements. Prerequisitt.: Open only to students without previous credit in accounting or by department consent. 502. Managerial Accounting. (3). Use of accounting data to analyze manage- ment problems; concepts of cost analysis, return on investment analysis, op- erations and capital budgeting. Prerequisite: Acctg. 501 or its equivalent. 510. Accounting Evolution and the Social Environment. (3). Study and dis- cussion of accounting concepts from an evolutionary point of view, emphasiz- in^ the interrelationship betwcen accounting ant1 socioecono~nic factors. Prc- requisite: Undergraduate emphasis in accounting or consent of instructor. Closed to students with credit in Acctg. 511. 515. Theoretical Foundations of Accounting. (3). A systematic treatment of the basic concepts and methodology of accounting theory, and their application to problems of income determination and asset/liability valuation. Prerequisite: Undergraduate emphasis in accounting or consent of instructor. Closed to students with credit in Acctg. 512. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 185 520. Contemporary Issues in Accounting. (3). A study of current issues in accounting, with emphasis on the releases of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and of other rofessional organizations and governmental agencies. Prerequisite: emphasis in accounting or consent of ~ n d e r ~ r a f u a t e instructor. 525. Accounting Information Systems. (3). A study of the concepts of in- formation systems, their design and operation, and the relationship of these concepts to the economic information requirements, information flows, decision criteria, and control mechanisms in the business organization. Prerequisite: Undergraduate emphasis in accounting or consent of instructor. 530. Advanced Cost Accounting Theory. (3). An advanced study of theoreti- cal concepts underlying cost accounting, with emphasis on the nature of business costs, establishing a conceptual framework for cost and managerial accounting, and selected problem areas in cost determination and analysis. Prerequisite: Undergraduate emphasis in accounting or consent of instructor. 535. Analytical Methods in Accounting. (3). A study of applied mathematical models in accounting. Emphasis is on the mathematical representation of cost and management accounting models. Prerequisite: Math 245 and either an undergraduate emphasis in accounting or consent of instructor. 540. Advanced Principles of Auditing. (3.) An advanced study of auditing theory and problems relating to the accountant's attest function. Prerequisite: Acctg. 413 or consent of instructor. Closed to students with credit in Acctg. 533. 545. Seminar in Income Tax Research. (3). A research course emphasizing the utilization of various income tax research materials in the preparation of written reports on tax problems. Includes a review and discussion of current problems in taxation and tax practice. Prerequisite: Acctg. 445 or consent of instructor. Closed to students with credit in Acctg. 563. 591. Directed Study in Accounting. (1-3). Prerequisite: Department consent. Closed to students with credit in Acctg. 503. 595. Research Seminar in Accounting. (3). An advanced seminar offering opportunity for oral discussion and written reports on matters of current inter- est in diverse areas of accounting. A major course objective is to develo the ability for independent research and the presentation and defense of finfings. Prerequisite: Undergraduate emphasis in accounting or consent of instructor. Closed to students with credit in Acctg. 550. 599. Thesis Research. (3). ADMINISTRATION The requirements for an emphasis in administration on a Bachelor of Business Administration degree are listed earlier in this section of the Catalog. Lower Division Courses 120. Introduction to Business. (3). The concept and function of business management in the capitalistic economic system. Includes the development of concepts of management analysis and action. Not open to upper division stu- dents in the College of Business Administration. 161. Decision Making and Society. (3). Deals with the decision making process in our society, both at a theoretical level and as applied in various social institutions. 186 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 170. Introduction to Computers. (3). The development, present applications and future uses of computers in business, education, government, and science. Analysis of the social, ~olitical, and economic significance of computers. 260. Behavioral Concepts in Business. (3). Emphasizes the application of behavioral concepts to business including: learning, coyitive processes, needs and need satisfaction, attitudes and values, language anc communication, group dynamics, social structure, and culture. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. Upper Division Courses 300. Marketing. (3). A description and analysis of our marketing system and an investigation of the factors affecting management of the major olicy areas of marketing in the firm. Prerequisite: Closed to students wi& credit in BA 321. 303. Marketing Research. (3). Design of marketing information systems and marketing research procedures. Prerequisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321 and Econ. 238 or BA 331. (Formerly Adm. 403.) 305. Consumer Behavior. (3). Study of variety of concepts in the behavioral sciences related to specific topics in consumer behavior, e, g., mass communica- tions. reference groups, and sociological, psychological and economics aspects of consumer behavior. Prerequisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321. (Formerly Adm. 405.) 332. Law and Society. (3). An analysis of our legal system in operation. Includes legal philosophy and the ends of law, the basic characteristics and subiect matter of law, and le a1 reasoning and process. The role of the legal system in society is examines through study of the concept of freedom of contract. Prerequisite: Closed to students with credit in BA 317. 334. Law and Business. (5). The framework of private and ublic law within which business operates, including contract law, the LJnArrn Commercial Code, corporation law, regulatory aspects, and special topics. (Formerly Adm. 434.) 343. Finance. (3). Corporate organization, types of securities, obtaining short and long term capital. Includes financial planning and control, forecasting and budgeting. Prerequisite: Acctg. 213 or BA 233. Closed to students with credit in BA 321. 351. Industrial Management. (3). The concepts and procedures involved in industrial management. Prerequisite: Closed to students with credit in BA 321. 361. Administrative Process. (3). An analysis of the administrator and the environment in which he operates. Prerequisite: Adm. 260. Closed to stu- dents with credit in BA 341. 362. Authority and Leadership in Organizations. (3). Concepts of authority and authority delegation. Relationships between organizational power, author- ity, responsibility, and leadership. Analysis of leadership styles. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341. 363. Organizational Motivation. (3). Theories of human motivation and adap- tation of these theories to programs of motivation for complex organizations. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341. 364. Organizational Communication. (3).. Design of organizational communi- cation systems. Introduction of communication models, and analysis of the interpersonal communication process. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341. 365. Organizational Conflict and Change. (3). Explores conflicts in organiza- tions and management's task of stimulating innovation and implementing change. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 187 367. Organizational Design. (3). Includes interrelationships of organization goals, structure hierarchies, and roles. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341. 370. Quantitative Methods and Research. (4). A combination of quantitative tools of analysis and research methods in business. Concerned with elementary research procedures, statistics, and modem quantitative methods from the point of view of the management's direction and use of these methods. Prerequisite: Econ. 238. Closed to students with credit in BA 231. 371. Operations Research and Systems Analysis. . (3). Operations research and systems analysis as management science. Examination of the theoretical basis of quantitative models of operating systems. Emphasis on the logic of tech- niques of analysis. Prerequisite: Econ. 238 or BA 231. 375. Computer Concepts and Programming. (3). An analysis of digital com- puter programming systems. Flowcharting and programming of business ap- plications and statistical procedures. 376. Administrative Decision Making. (3). Analysis of decision making under conditions of uncertainty with particular emphasis on Bayesian decision proc- esses. Prerequisite: BA 231 or Econ. 238. 401. International Marketing. (3). Problems and procedures of marketing in foreign countries, including effects of foreign cultures and marketing systems on the design of marketing programs. Prerequisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321. 404. Distribution Management. (3). Study of retailin and wholesaling as elements of a distribution system, management of channevs of distribution, and physicial distribution. Prerequisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321. 406. Creative Marketing Strategy. (3). In conjunction with local firms, grou s of class members work as consulting teams to he1 a particular company stufy and develop an operable plan or program to han$e a specific marketing prob- lem. Prerequisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321. 407. Promotional Management and Market Communication. (3). Establishing objectives and budgets for sales promotion activities. Advertising and sales strategy. Advertiser-agency relationships. Measuring the effectiveness of sales promotional activities. Social and ethical im lications of sales romotion, mass communication techniques, and rcsearch stu&es from the sociarsciences, Pre- requisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321. 408. Selling and Sales Force Management. (3). An analysis of current be- havioral concepts of personal selling and the problems and policies involved in managing a sales force. Prerequisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321. 409. Pn'ce Problems and Policies. (3). An examination of the pricing problems confronting a marketer and an analysis of the policies and decision processes used by manufacturers and middleman in pricing. Prerequisite: Adm. 300 or BA 321 and Econ. 222 or BA 212. 410. Marketing Programs. (3). A n integration of all the aspects of the market- in mix into an effective and coordinated marketin program. Prerequisite: ~ t m .300 or BA 321 and three additional hours of marfeting. 441. Investments. (3). Analysis of investment risks, financial information, and industry characteristics. Examination of corporate, government, municipal, and financial institution securities and of other investment twes. Personal ~ortfol io conbtruction, supervision, and management. ~rereqt~isitc! Atlm. 340 orb^ :321. 442. Financial Management. (3). The problems and operations for which the financial officer is responsible, emphasizing conboversial aspects of financial analysis. Prerequisite: Adm. 343 or BA 321 and six hours of accounting or department consent. 443. Capital Markets and Financial Institutions. (3). Introduction to the capital markets system. The management and operations of financial institu- 188 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION tions. Each major type of financial instrution is viewed in the context of its competitive environment with respect to both asset and liability management. Prerequisite: Adm. 343 or BA 321. 444. Commercial Bank Management. (3). Bank asset and liability manage- ment; internal organization of commercial banks; current problems and recent innovations in commercial banking. Prerequisite: Adm. 443. 445. Security Analysis and Valuation. (3). Comprehensive study of methods of analyzing major types of securities. Market behavior analysis. The formula- tion of investment objectives and the design of portfolios for classes of insti- tutional and individual investors. Portfolio theory. Prerequisite: Adm. 441. 446. Financing International Operations. (3). Aspects of financial plannin for corporations with overseas operations; analysis of sources and uses o? corporate funds abroad; effects on international financial administration of the characteristics of foreign money and capital markets and foreign financial insti- tutions. Prerequisite: Adm. 343 or BA 321. 450. Workshop in Administration. (1-6). 455. Materials Management. (3). A consideration of the factors of procure- ment, inventory control and materials handline - in the factory environment. prerequisite: ~ d m .351 or BA 321. 456. Production Analysis. (3). Applications of probabili theory and simula- tion to problems of inventory control, queuing, schedukg, and allocation. Prerequisite: Adm. 371. 457. Quality Analysis and Control. (3). Applications of reliability and main- tainability theory to quality planning and control. Implications of life cycle costs for production. Quantitative approach is emphasized. Prereqiusite: Adm. 371. 462. Personnel Management. (3). Analysis of the functions of personnel man- agement including selection procedures, evaluation of personnel, training, motivation, job evaluation, discipline, and personnel research. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341 or concurrent enrollment. 463. Small Group Processes. (3). Effects of small group processes on indi- viduals and organizations. Interaction of work group processes and organiza- tional performance. Leadership and follower roles. Conflict and cooperation within and between groups. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341 or concurrent enrollment. 464. Labor Relations. (3). Designed to present the philosophy underlvinc labor legislation, and the function of collective bargaining in labor-management relationships. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341 or concurrent enrollment. 466. Selection, Training, and Placement. (3). Analysis of advanced programs of employee selection, training, and placement. Includes testing, interviewing, counseling, appraisal, job analysis, joh design. Prerequisite: Adm. 260 or BA 341 or concurrent enrollment. 471. Computer Data Processing. (3). Use of electronic computers in business and industry. Analysis of computer s)-stems design, including input and output devices, storage media, and data representation. Programming and operation of computers. Prerequisite: Adm. 375. 481-482. Administrative Policy 1-11, (3-3). An integration of all aspects of business administration in the analysis of and making decisions for policy development. Prerequisites: BA 321 or any two of the following: Adm. 300, 343, 351. 490. Seminar in Selected Topics. (1-5). May be repeated by department consent. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 189 491. Independent Study. (1-5). 2.75 GPA in department, For credit/no credit onlv. Closed to graduate credit. Graduate Courses 500. Marketing Systems. (3). All intensive analytical introduction to the combination of institutions which comprise the overall marketing system and to the marketing function as a major subsystem within the individual business firms. 501. Marketing Management. (3). The development of marketing programs or "mixes" to obtain sales and profits under a variety of operating conditions. Concerned with the management of specific problem areas such as product, channels, promotion and pricing. 502. Marketing Strategy. (3). Integration of long-range marketing and cor- porate policies. Budgetary control and evaluation of the eflectiveness of marketing systems. Organization of the marketing department and its relation to the total organization. Prerequisite: Adm. 501 or consent. 503. Marketing Analysis. (3). Application of the scientific method to the solution of marketing problems. Prerequisite: Adm. 501 or consent. 505. Consumer Decision Processes. (3). An examination of different aspects of the behavior of consumers and of the factors that help explain that behavior. Includes an analysis of current concepts and models. Prerequisite: Adm. 501 or consent. 509. Marketing Theory. (3). Utilization of marketing research findings to analyze current marketing theory. Development of conceptual and theoretical frameworks for marketing analysis. Prerequisite: Six hours of marketing including Adm. 501. 532. Law and Society. (3). An analysis of our legal system in operation. Includes legal philosophy and the ends of law, the basic characteristics and subject matter of law, and legal reasoning and process. The role of the legal system in society is examined throuph study of the concept of freedom of contract. Prerequisite: Consent. 533. Political and Social Environment of Business. (3). An examination of the political and social environment within which business operates. A considera- tion of how business interacts with society, including the role of governmental and legal constraints, changing social patterns and forces, and competing ideas and values. Prerequisite: Adm. 5.32 or consent. 536. International Business Administration. (3). An introduction to inter- national business administration with particular attention being given to the development of multinational business strategies in light of the diverse eco- nomic, political, social, and culh~ral dimensions of the environments which exist in both "developed" and "developing" areas of the world. 540. Financial Systems. (3). An intensive analytical introduction to finance from a management viewpoint, including theory of financial management, the Ennncial institutional structure, and an analysis of a variety of practical problems of business finance. Prerequisite: Consent. 541. Financial Management. (3). An integrated treatment of basic business finance, financial management, financial statement analysis, and financial institutions. Prerequisites: Consent. 542. Structure and Policies of Financial Institutions. (3). The development, management, and impact of policies of financial institutions including planning, measuring, and achieving financial goals. Prerequisite: Adm. 541 or consent. 544. Theory of Financial Analysis. (3). An integration of the theory of business finance and security valuation theory. Critique of stock valuation 190 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION models. Intensive study of models encompassing interaction of growth rate of firms. rate of return, uncertainty, dividend payout, leverage, and the cost of capital. Prerequisite: Adm. 941 or Adm. 442. 545. Security Analysis. (3). Analysis and valuation of investment securities issued by corporations and governmental agencies. Prerequisites: Adm. 441 or consent. 546. Capital Budgeting. (3). Organization and operation of the capital budget- ing system; problems in partial decentralization ancl in comparability of estimates of funds flow. Contemporary methods of treating uncertainties and constraints; application of propamming techniques. Determination of appro- priate discount rates. Prerequisite: Consent. 550. Production Management. (3). Investigation and analysis of concepts and procedures involved in the production function. Prerequisite: Consent. 560. Behavioral Science in Business. (3). Analysis of concepts and tools of psychology, social psychology, sociology, and anthropology that have greatest relevance for business administration. 562. Organizational Behavior. (3). Study in individual behavior in an orga- nizational setting. Analysis of the human variables in business from the stand- point of job placement, performance, and individual development. Topics covered include behavioral development, motivation, and learning in human relations. Prerequisite: Adm. 560 or consent. 565. Communication. (3). Analysis of communication models with emphasis on their applications to communication problems in organizations. Social- psychological processes underlying persuasion in interpersonal relations and through the mass media. Critical analysis of communication systems and techniques within formal organizations. Prerequisite: Adm. 560 or consent. 566. Organizational Conflict and Stress. Studies in flexibility and rigidity. Review of research and thinking in the areas of innovation, conflict, resolution, stress, and anxiety as relevant to organizational structures and behaviors. Prerequisite: Adm. 560 or consent. 569. Research in Behavioral Science. (3). Analysis of some of the concepts and tools in behavioral science that are relevant to research in organizations. May take one or two areas such ns motivation, cognitive processes, attitudes and values, etc., and analyze in depth. Prerequisite: Adm. 562 or consent. 570. Survey of Statistical Methods. Intensive examination of statistical methodology applicable to research and decision making. 571. Statistical Analysis and Decision Theory. (3). Probability concepts used in modem decision theory. Topics treated will include: Probabilities as decision data; preposteriori analysis; estimation theory; and statistical signs- cance tests. 572. Advanced Statistical Analysis. (3). Topics such as sample design, chi- square, variance analysis, ancl correlation and regression analysis are approached from conceptual and decision-making points of view. Prerequisite: Adm. 571. 574. Computer Systems and Procedures. (3). Planning, development, and operation of llusiness computer systems. Emphasis given to information han- dling and development of real-time management information systems. Study of computer applications in the areas of marketing, production and finance. Consitl~ration of human factors in a ~nan!machine communication system. Prerequisite: Adm 471 and consent. 575. Management Science. (3). Provides quantitative bases from which the student may develop his analytical abilities for use as a decision maker. Areas of study include: mathematical programming, game theory, forecasting, queu- ing theory and simulation. Prerequisite: Adm. 571 or consent. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 191 580. Analysis of Behavioral Systems. (3). Concentration on theoretical and methodological contributions to the understanding of behavioral systems. Critical analysis of models and research methodology on individual behavior, small group processes, and organizations. Prerequisite: Consent. 581. The Philosophy of Management. (3). Concentrated readings and research to define the rrlation of management leatlership to our society. Prerequisite: Consent. 585. Business Policies. (3). An analysis of business problems from the per- spective of top management. Prerequisite: Consent. 586. Seminar in Research Methodology. (3). Study of concepts and procedures in the design and performance of research. 590. Seminar in Special Topics. (1-3). hlay be repeated by consent. 591. Directed Studies. (1-5). Prerequisite: Consent. 593. Special Pro'ect in Administration. (1-4). May include original case re- search, supervised internships, or field research. Prerequisite: Approval of the MS Committee. 595-596. Thesis. (2-2). BUSINESS EDUCATION MAJOR: The department offers courses of study leading to a major in business teacher education. This degree is granted by the College of Education. (See College of Education section of the Catalog.) The department also offers courses in business education that count on a major for the secretarial emphasis in the College of Business Administration. STUDENTS TOINOR OR FOR PL~NSIXC. TEACH BUSINESS EDUCATION AS A SUBJECTIN SCHOOL: The teaching-minor SECOND SECONDARY requirement is 24 hours. including the follo~ving: Acctg. 213, 315; Econ. 221; Bus. Ed. 138, 237: and nine hours from accounting, administration, economics, or shorthand, of which one course must be upper division. Trco-Year Program: A two-year secretarial program leading to a Certificate cf Applied Science in secretarial training is offered b\. this department. (See information listed earlier in this section.) Students who are enrolled for less than nine hours may not enroll in business education courses until the last day of final registration. However, business education courses are open to all University students upon the approval of the business education department. A college graduate is permitted to enroll for shorthand and type- writing with the consent of the department and the dean. For exception to these rules. a lvritten application must be made to the chairman of the department for con~ideration with the dean of the college concerned. The facilities available determine the enroll- ment. The decision as to the availabilitv of equipment is made by the chairman of the department and the dean of the College of Business Administration. 192 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Although students may audit corirses in btrsiness education, auail- able space in the classroonz.~ is a major factor in the number of auditors. No credit is given totcard graduation for repetition of first- year slzot-thand or typezcriting taken in high school even though a grade is recorded in the course. Lower Division Courses 133. Beginning Typewriting. (2). 3R. Correct fingering, mechanical opera- tion of a typewriter, and introtluction to business forms. No credit is given to students with a unit in high school typewriting. (Credit earned in this course does not apply on the Bachelor of Business Administration degree or the Certificate of Applied Science in secretarial training.) In enrollinq for this course, preference is given to students specializing in business or pursuing a teacher-preparation program. 136. Records Management. (2). All basic filing systems. Prerequisite: Bus. Ed. 133 or one year high school typewriting, or department consent. 138. Advanced Typewriting. (3). Stress is placed on business, letter, and manuscript forms; tabulation; and timed production problems. Prerequisite: Bus. Ed. 133 or one year of high school typewriting, or department consent. 201. Secretarial Office Machines. (3). 3L. Designed to familiarize students with office machines, including transcribing machines, executive typewriters, duplicating machines, copying machines, and other secretarial office equipment. Some part-time office esperience. Prerequisite: Bus. Ed. 237, or department consent. 202. Calculating Machines. (1). 2L. Designed to familiarize students with adding machines, rotary, printing, and electronic calculators. Prerequisite: Department consent. 203. Office Procedures and Organization. (2). A study of the various secre- tarial procedures in a modem office. Preparation: Sophomore standing or department consent. 231. Elementary Shorthand. (3). 5RDL. Theory of Gregg Diamond Jubilee Shorthand. No credit given to student with one unit of high school shorthand. Prerequisite: Bus. Ed. 133, or one unit of high school typewriting, or depart- ment consent. 234. Advanced Shorthand. (3). 2L; 3R. Review of Gregg Diamond Jubilee Theory. Em hasis on advanced dictation and mailable transcripts. Prerequi- site: Bus. EX 231 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 237. Technical Typewriting. (3). Letter forms used in business, difficult tabu- lating projects, legal typewriting, and advanced timed roduction problems. Emphasis is placed on accuracy at a high rate of speeBto meet office stan- dards. Prerequisite: Bus. Ed. 138 or two units secretarial training in high school, or department consent. 240. Technical Shorthand. (3). 3R; 1L. Advanced dictation with emphasis on technical vocabularies. Prerequisite: Bus. Ed. 234 with a grade of C or better, and Bus. Ed. 237, or department consent. 248. Written Business Communications. (3). Principles and techniques of effective written business communication. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing, Engl. 111, Typing 1.38, and department consent. Upper Division Courses 300. Office Practice. (3). 2R; 1L. Advanced office duties, techniques, and procedures. Also includes various methods of teaching office machines and the COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 193 functional use of selected machines as well as a survey of available equipment. Prerequisite: Bus Ed. major or minor with credit in Bus. Ed. 237. 345. Transcription. (3). 2R; 2L. Emphasis on transcribing advanced short- hand notes with speed, accuracy, and correct form. Prerequisite: Bus. Ed. 240 with a grade of C or hetter, or department consent. 450. Workshops in Business Education. (1-4). Selection of one major area of business education for study in terms of methods, materials, research, and curricular problems. Instructor assisted by guest lecturers. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Teacher certification or department consent. 460. Directed Studies. (1-5). ECONOMICS Lower Division Courses 100. Business, Economics, and Society. (3). Study of basic factors of business and economic changes, the role of business leaders, the relationship to the social environment; emphasis on United States development. Not open to upper division students in the College of Business Administration. 175. Economics of Environmental Quality. (3). An introduction to the scien- tific. engineering, and economic principles needed for the enhancement of the quality of man's total environment. Discussion of air and water pollution, solid waste disposal, water resources and conservation. Course will emphasize vari- ous principles of economics such as marginal analysis, benefit-cost analysis, systems approach, externalities as appropriate. 190. Consumer Economics. (3). Consumers role in the economy; market or- ganization and its impact on consumers; discussion of information sources for consumers; analysis of the programs for consumer protection. Not open to upper division students in the College of Business Administration. 211-212. Economics 1-11. (3-3). Study and analysis of the environment of business, labor, government, banking, and other economic institutions. Closed to students with credit in Econ. 221-222. 221. Principles of Economics I. (3). An introduction to determinants of na- tional income, employment, and economic growth. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. Closed to students with credit in BA 211-212. 222. Principles of Economics II. (3). An introduction to price and distribution analysis; market structure and performance, contemporary issues and public policy. Prerequisite: Econ. 221. Closed to students with credit in BA 211-212. 238. Introductory Business Statistics. (3). An introduction to the use of sta- tistical methods in economics and business including measures of distribution, elements of statistical inference, simple regression and correlation, index num- bers, and time series analysis. Prerequisites: Math. 122, 140, or 141. Upper Division Courses 305. Economic History of Europe. (3). (History 337.) An analysis of the development of economic institutions; the rise of capitalism and its influence on overseas ex ansion, technology, precious metals, politics and war; changes in economic i$eologies; cultural effects of economic change. Prerequisite: Econ. 221 or BA 221. 307. Economic History of the United States. (3). (History 338). An analysis of the basic factors in economic growth; agriculture, trade and commerce, in- dustrial development, and the changing role of government in economic activ- ity. Prerequisite: Econ. 221 or BA 211. 194 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 320. Managerial Economics. (3). Applications of microeconomic theory to the solution of business problen~s. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 340. Moaey and Banking. (3). Principles of money and credit. Evolution of modern money systems. The commercial banking system and the structure and role of the Federal Reserve System. Nonbank financial institutions. Prerequi- site: Econ. 221 or BA 211. 360. Labor Economics. (3). Survey of the field of labor economics; labor markets, trade unionism, collective bargaining; wage determination, employ- ment, unemployment, and labor legislation. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 364. Economic Poverty. (3). Sources, costs, methods of combatting. An ex- amination of the problem of economic poverty in the United States. The extent of poverty, its causes, problems created and methods of attacking poverty. Prerequisite: Econ. 221 or consent. 370. International Economics. (3). A study of the foundations of international trade, tariffs, and other barriers to trade, customs, unions, balance of payments, problems and policies, the foreign exchange market, and the functioning of the international monetary system. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 400. Seminar in Social Sciences. (3). An interdisciplinary course participated in by staff representatives of the departments of economics, political science, psychology, and sociolo . Following a study of the development of the social sciences, an interdisci ynary analysis of a contemporary social problem or institution will be unjertaken. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 402. Comparative Economic Systems. (3). Comparative analysis of the evo- lutionary structure of capitalism, socialism, and communism. Emphasis on differences in pricing, resource allocation, distribution of income, and economic planning. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 406. Age of Enterprise and Economic Consolidation. (3). (History 436). Eco- nomic development of the United States from the Civil War to the present. Prerequisite: Econ. 221 or BA 211. 414. Government Regulation of Economic Activity. (3). A critical appraisal of the objectives and results of government policy and practice in controlling economic activity. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 415. Economics of Transportation. (3). Study of economic characteristics of transportation modes, problems and policies. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 416. Economics of Air Transportation. (3). Study of economic characteristics of air transportation. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 417. Economics of Public Utilities. (3). Study of general economic character- istics and regulation of water, gas, electric, communications, and related indus- tries, including atomic power. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 421. Production, Price and Distribution Analysis. (3). Analysis of production and pricing by firms and industries and distribution of income to factors of production. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 424. National Income Analysis. (3). Aggregate economic analysis and exami- nation of policies affecting the level of income and employment. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 425. History of Economic Thought. (3). A critical analysis of economic thou ht, the factors which influence this thought, and its impact upon the sociaf and economic development of the modern world. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 427. Readings in Current Economic Literature. (3). Reading, study, and dis- cussion of contemporary, nontechnical economic literature. Student participa- tion in classroom discussion will be emphasized. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 195 438. Intermediate Business Statistics I. (3). Statistical inference, problems of estimation and tests of hypotheses, linear correlation and regression and index numbers to be used as tools of analysis in economics and business. Prerequisite: Econ. 238 or BA 232. 440. Monetary Problems and Policy. (3). Analysis of monetary problems and policy. Debt management policies and the structure of interest rates. Pre- requisite: Econ. 222 and 340. 450. Workshop in Economics. (1-6). 453. Public Finance. (3). Analysis of fiscal institutions and decision making in the public sector of the American economy; budget planning and execution; taxation, debt, and fiscal policy. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 454. Fiscal Policy. (3). The economics of overnment spendin and taxation; analysis of the fiscal role and instruments of government and tfeir effects on the economy. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212, and 453. 460. Labor Market and Manpower. (3). An examination of the sources of Labor supply and the marketing, {lacement, and utilization of labor. Changing com osition and trends in the la or force. Training and retraining programs. ~ u b f i cpolicy toward manpower problems. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 461. Collective Bargaining and Wage Determination. (3). Economic and legal aspects of collective bargaining, emphasizing the techniques and proce- dures used, and the major issues andfroblems inherent in the bargainin process. Manner in which wages are etermined under various institution3 relationships. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 462. Public Policy Toward Labor. (3). An examination of federal and state legislation, judicial action and administrative ractice directed toward con- trolling or mitigating problems arising from the fabor-management relationship. Regulations in the private sector and employment practices in the public sector will be studied. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 463. Economic Insecurity and Social Insurance. (3). An examination of the impact of social insecurity and of alternative policies related thereto. Costs and benefits of security programs for the aged, unemployment compensation, work- men's compensation, nonindustrial disability compensation, and other relevant public policy. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 470. International Trade. (3). Study of the theory of international trade and its empirical foundations. An analysis of private and public barriers to trade, within the context of theory and contemporary events. Prerequisite: Econ. 421 or consent of instructor. 471. Economic Growth and Development. (3). Survey of leading yw!theories with an emphasis on the rocesses of development and capital orma tion in developed and underdevefoped economies. Determinants of real in- come, resource allocation, investment criteria, balance of payment problems, national policies, and related topics analyzed within this framework. Pre- requisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 472. International Finance. (3). Concepts and theories of balance of pay- ments equilibrium, foreign exchange rate determination, and capital move- ments; current problems and policies related to balance of payments disequi- librium, international liquidity, and the functioning of the international mone- tary system. Prerequisite: Econ. 421 or consent of instructor. 475. Natural Resources and Regional Planning. (3). A study of the ap- proaches to the optimal allocation of natural resources. Criteria for olicy de- cisions; evaluation of the social and economic benefits and costs of %e use of resources through time. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 477. Introduction to Urban Affairs. (3). An introduction to the study of the metropolis as a social, political and economic system. Prerequisites: Econ. 222 or BA 212 and a course in sociology or political science. 196 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 480. Risk and Insurance. (3). Economic theory of risk, its significance and treatment; theory and practice of property, liability, life and health insurance. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212. 490. Business Forecasting and Demand Theory. (3). An examination of the factors affecting demand with emphasis on changes over time. Prerequisite: Econ. 236 and 222 or BA 232 and BA 212. 491. Directed Study. (1-3). Individual and group study of various aspects and problems of economics. Repeatable. Prerequisite: Department consent. 2.75 CPA in department. For credit:no credit only. Closed to graduate credit. 492. Group Studies in Economics. (1-3). Repeatable. Graduate Courses 514. Seminar in Industrial Organization and Public Policy. (3). A study of business and economic organization and structure, market operation and per- formance and public policy with special reference to the U. S. economy. Pre- requisite: Econ. 414. (Repeatable with department consent.) 515. Seminar in the Regulated Industries. (3). An intensive analysis of the economic characteristics ot the regulated intlustries: i. e., transportation and public utilities, with emphasis on problems, issues and public policy in these industries. Prerequisite: Econ. 415, 416, or 417. 521. Microeconomic Analysis. (3). An intensive analysis of contemporary literature and problems in the area of production, pricing and distribution. Prerequisite: Econ. 421 or 520 and one course in calculus. (Repeatable with department consent.) 522. Macroeconomic Analysis. (3). An intensive analysis of contemporary literature and problems of national income analysis. Prerequisite: Econ. 424 and one course in calculus. (Repeatable with department consent.) 530. Analysis of Economic Theory. (3). An intensive analysis of micro- and macroeconomic principles. Prerequisite: Department consent. 531. Analysis of Business Conditions. (3). Economic forecasting and its relationship to macroeconomic analysis. Prerequisite: Econ. 530 or equivalent. 534. Managerial Economics. (3). A survey of theoretical and analytical tools of economics which are useful in decision making by managers. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 or BA 212 or Econ. 530. 535. Business and Public Policy. (3). The effects of government regulation, monetary and fiscal policy on business. The social responsibility of business. Prerequisite: Department consent. 536. Methodology of Economics. (3). A study of what constitutes the basis of knowledge in economics. The manner in which the principles of abstract reasoning, deduction and induction, can be applied to produce knowledge in econonlics. Prerequisite: Econ. 421 and 438. 539. Introduction to Econometrics. (3). Analysis of time series, multiple regression, multiple and partial correlation, analysis of variance and introduc- tion to econometric techniques. Prerequisite: Econ. 438 and one course in calculus. 540. Seminar in Monetary Theory. (3). An examination of neoclassical and contemporary monetary theories. An analysis and evaluation of current mone- tary problems. Prerequisite: Econ. 222 and 340. (Repeatable with department consent.) 554. Seminar in Public Finance. (3). Analysis of theoretical and a plied aspects of public finance in the American and foreign economies. ~efected COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 197 topics of current and permanent importance. Prerequisite: Econ. 454 or 453. (Repeatable with department consent.) 561. Seminar in Contemporary Issues. (3). Intensive analysis of contem- porary problems in the field of lahor. The specific nature of the problems will be determined by the interest of those enrolled in the course. Prerequisite: Econ. 360. (Repeatable with department consent.) 570. Seminar in International Economics. (3). An intensive study of the pure theory of international trade, resource allocation, balance of payments adjust- ments, and economic integration. Considerable analysis is devoted to recent publications on selected topics. Prerequisite: Econ. 470 or 472. (Repeatable with department consent.) 571. Seminar in Economic Growth and Development. (3). Theories of eco- nomic growth and development. Selected topics relating to economic growth and development such as national planning, allocation of resources, selection and evaluation of investment projects, and other current issues. Prerequisite: Econ. 471 or 421 and 424. 575. Seminar in Environmental Quality Control. (3). Examination of actual problems, projects, and/or current approaches to environment quality control. Critical look at current happenings and trends. Prerequisite: Econ. 475. 591. Directed Study. (1-3). Individual and group study of various aspects and problems of economics. Prerequisite: Graduate standing and department con- sent. (Repeatable with department consent.) 592. Group Studies in Economics. (1-3). (Repeatable. Prerequisite: Depart- ment consent.) 595. Thesis Research. (2). 596. Thesis. (2). 198 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Ablnll Librar!~o t l tllr Ti'ichita State earnpus offers ilze perfect .setting for. stlid!/ and research. COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 199 Sel~eii~ccr-.~t!/le Edzrcationcl(r.vscs in the C n l l e c of ~~roc i t l c1nnsi1)zrrnz oppor f1111 ity for participation. 200 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION LEONARD M. CHAFFEE, PhD, Dean The principal purpose of the College of Education is to provide professional programs appropriate for the development of compe- tent teachers, administrators. supervisors, and munselors for schools. In addition to preparing broadly educated professionals, the college faculty provicles leac'ership in professional service and research designed to contribute to the improvement of both the schools and teacher education at local, state, and national levels. The curricula listccl in the sections that follo~ir offer an organiza- tion of courses which gives opportunit\- for systematic study. They are oriented from the notion that understanding of self and one's world are necessary bases for professional growth and are arranged to permit the development of ( a ) understanding of the culture characteristic of a democratic society and education's place within it; ( b ) a philosophy cf education consistent with living within this society ( c ) an adequate professional preparation and the oppor- tunity to relate content to the problems of living; ( d ) knowledge of human growth and development, and ( e )skills in the application of principles of human learning and adjustment. ACCREDITATION AND CERTIFICATION The College of Education is accredited by all the pertinent agencies which accredit the Universitv. Its accreditation by the State Board of Education permits it to recommend to that body the awarding of appropriate teachers' certificates without examination. Within the college, programs are available leading to the bacca- laureate degree and to state teachers' certificates at either the ele- mentary or seconclarji level. Through the departments within the school of graduate studies, there are course sequences leading to the >laster of Arts in education, the Itaster of Education, the 3Iaster of Science Education degrees. and the Specialist in Educa- tion degree. Through the Department of Logopedics, the Master of Arts and Doctorate of Philosophy can be earned. Included in these graduate programs are the requirements for certification for e l e m e n t a ~ principals, secontlan principals, supervisory personnel, educational administrators, school counselors and other specialists. (For specific graduate programs, see the Gradtmte Bulletin.) The State Board of Education regulates the standards for all teaching certificates. As the minimum requirements change, the curricula provided in this Catalog change accordingly. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 201 REQUIREMENTS ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE Candidates for ac'mission to the College of Education must have met the grneral entrance rccluircmcnts of the University and have fulfillecl conditions for transferring from the University College: ( 1 ) The completion of 24 hours. ( 2 ) A cumulative grade point index of 2.00. ( 3 ) A grade of C or higher in Eng. 111 or a statement of pro- ficiency from the Department of English. Probation and Dismissal Standards It is expected that students will make satisfactory progress in their studies. A student \vho fails to do 50 may be placed on probation at any time , ~ n dultimately dismissed from the University. Students in the Collegc of Eclucation, not on probation, \\rho fail to earn a grade point average ( GPA ) of 2.00 in a semester will be placed on probation for the following semester. At the end of the semester in which the student has been on probation, he will be continued on probation if his GP.4 for the seme~ter is at least 2.00 and until he reaches a cumulative GPA of 2.00. If he fails to earn at least a 2.00 for any semester on probation, he will be dismissed for poor scholarship." Students on probation may enroll in 13 hours. A student who has been dismissed for poor scholarship may enroll only with special permission of the committee on admissions and exce~tional IJrograms. ADMISSION TO THE TEACHER EDUCATION PROGRAMS Admission to this college, however, is tentative, and is not to be construed as approval for one of the teacher education programs. T o be admitted as a candidate for (I state teacher's certificate ap- proval blj the odmi~siotzs comnlittcc of t114 College of Education mtL~t be gained. Application to this committee and qualification by it must be accomplished during enrollment in the course Fd. Ed. 232, Introduction to the Study of Education. Eligibility to enroll in subsequent courses of the professional sequences is determined in this course. TIzc.~e prouisions and the requirements below appltj as well to teacher candidates enrolled in any other college of the Irniuersity. BACCALAUREATE REQUIREMENTS There are several sets of requirements that must be met to achieve graduation. These apply not only to undergraduates in the College a NOTE: NO student on probation who enrolls in fewer than seven hours shall be placed on academic dismissal for failure to raise the cumulative grade point index to the required level; however, if such a student has earned seven or more hours in two or more terms, he must achieve a GPA of 2.00 or better in those terms to he continued on probation. 202 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION of Education who are seeking the degree Bachelor of Arts in edu- cation but to all who seek the institution's recommendation for a teaching certificate. There are certain differences planned for those who would teach the fine arts and these differences are described in the fine arts section of this Catalog. A student enrolled in the College of Education must maintain at least a 2.00 grade average. Admission into the student teaching semester reqrrircs n grade point average of 2.25 and a 2.50 average in the major field as well as a grade of C or higher in Speech 111 or its equica?ent a l ~ d recommendation of the major department. The requirements for admission to student teaching for logopedics students are listed in the department's program description. Prospective teachers in the specialized fields of art, music, and special education are subject to certain departmental requirements. Majors in these curricula must also complete general and profes- sional education requirements listed under secondary education. School psychology requires five years. ELEMENTARY EDUCATION I. The following general program is required of all elementary education candidates: General Education ( 66 +4 hours minimum. ) ( Must meet minimum requirements in first five areas.) Area I. SCLENCE-MATHEMATICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 hours (Two or more divisions-four hour lab. required) ( a ) Chemistry, Geology, Biology, Physics ( b ) Mathematics 373-374 ( six hours required ) ( c ) Engineering 300 (d) Geography (Physical) ( e ) Other Area 11. C o ~ ~ m n c a n o ~ s 8-12 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( a ) English Composition (six hours ) ( b ) Speech 111 ( c ) Other Area 111. H w a ~ r r ~ ~ s 15-27 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Four or more divisions-12 hours other than Modem Languages) ( a ) Literature (six hours required) ( b ) History (all) ( c ) Art-Music (No skill courses) (d) Philosophy-Religion ( e ) Modem Languages ( f ) American Studies (g ) Humanities 102 ( h ) Other Area IV. SOCIAL SCIENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27 hours ( Four or more divisions) ( a ) Psychology 111, 112, 211, 212, 246, 260, 275 (six hours re- quired ) ( b ) Sociology (c ) Anthropology THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 203 ( d ) Economics ( e ) Political Science ( f ) Geography ( Human) ( ) Logopedics 421(a , Other Area V. P ~ ~ s 1 c . aACTMTIES(Elective) . . ( a ) Air or Military Science ( b ) Physical Activities ( 101 series) ( c ) Marching Band Area VI. ELECTIVES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (As approved by adviser) . . 4 hours 1-13 hours 11. The following professional program is required of all elemen- tag7 education candidates: PROFESSIONAL EDUCATION Area I. Fovh.~ano?JsOF EDUCATIOX ' ( a ) Introduction to Education 232 '( b ) Educational Psychology 233 Area 11. MAJORLV ELEMENTARYEDUCATION ' (a ) Reading 320a or 320B * ( b ) Science in Elem. School 321 '( c ) Social Studies in Elem. School 406 '( d ) Math in Elem. School 344A or 344B ' ( e ) Language Arts in Elem. School 319 ( f ) Teaching the Kindergarten Child 318 *( ) Student Teaching 447 ' ( a ) Seminar in Student Teaching 448 8 hours 28 hours . . - Area 111. ALLIEDFIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 hours (Hours used here cannot be used to meet requirements in General Education.) (Student must have three divisions from a, b, c, d , e. Two divisions from f, g, h, i, j, k, I , m,n.) ( a ) Art 240 ( b ) Children's Literature 216 ( c j hfusic 251 and/or 2521305 (d English 215 ( e Physical Education 115, 11'7, 210, 225 ( f ) Individual Studies 322 ( ) Anthropology 124, 202(f)Economics 221,222,203, 307, 310 ( i ) Geography 125,210,342,364,402,422 ( i ) Kansas Histom 441 (k) Political science 121, 211, 219 ( 2 ) Sociology 111, 210, 226, 315, 320, 322, 334 (m)U. S. Historv 131. 132. 314. 432. 433. 444 . , , . . (n) Logopedics *421 RELATEDFIELDSOF STUDYIN EDUCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 hours (Not required on elementary major.) May be used in lieu of elec- tives in Area VI. Area I. Phvsical Education Area 11. ~ i b r a r ~Science Area 111. Early Childhood Education TOTAL Horns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 hours UPPERDIVISION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 hours SECONDARY EDUCATION All prospective secondary education graduates must satisfy the general recp~iremcntscf the Uni\lersity as they are distributed in Specific requirements. 204 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION section I below; must complete one of the professional sequences as set out in sections I1 and I11 below, and must fulfill the teaching specialty emphasis of a program as specified in the teaching field section which follows: Only those specialties listed among the combined curricula and departmental majors and minors in that section may be counted. I. The following general program is required of all secondary education candidates: Area I. M a n m m n c s AND NATURALSCIENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 hours A minimum of four hours must be a laboratory science. Must in- clude courses from two of the four areas of biological science, physi- cal science, mathematics and Engineering 127, 225, or 300. Area 11. COMMUNICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . 8 hours ( a ) English 111,211,225,311,312,313,314 (six hours) ( b ) Speech 111 (two hours) Area 111. HUMANITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 hours ( a ) Literature (English or Foreign) (six hours) ( b ) Options (Two divisions) 1. History 101, 102, 103, 104, 113, 114, 131, 132, all upper division courses except 300 and 498 2. Art-All Art History courses except 407g and 463; Music-113, 114, 161, 315, 316, 331 332, 493; ensembles and applied music where background justifies; Speech 143 3. Philosophy all courses; Religion all courses 4. Humanities 102 5. American Stuclies-all courses except 498 and 499 Area IV. SOCIAL SCIENCE 12 hours [Courses must be taken in at least three of the five divisions. Psych. 111 is required.) ( a ) Psychology 11 1, all other courses ( b ) BA 211, 212; Economics 211, 212, 221, 222 and any upper division economics course ( c ) Political Science; all 100 and 200 level courses except 150 and mn d ) ~&iology111; all others after first course t e ) Anthropology; all courses ( f ) ( History may be added for three hours credit) Area V. ELECTIVES . . . . . . . . (may include courses in the major) 6 hours Area VI. Four hours of electives in courses offered by any department except the student's major department. (Exception: Music ma'ors may take marching band, and physical education majors may take physi- cal education in the 101-108 series under this section.) These electives may include courses in aerospace studies, military science, physical education, and marching band. TI. The following program is required of all who plan to qualify for the standard secondary teaching certificate, except those enroll- ing - in 3 below: (-4) Study in a major field normally taught in secondary schools. ( B ) Study in at least one minor field. In no case will the minor consist of less than 15 semester hours. No minor is required if an area major of 50 hours is elected. ( C ) Complete the following sequence in professional education: Area I. EDVCA~ONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSYCHOLOGY 6 hours Ed. Psych. 333 and 433 " O Taken in the professional semester. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 205 Area 11. FOWNDA~ONSOF EDUCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 hours Fd. Ed. 232 and 428 f Area 111. SECOND~RYEDUCATION Sec. Ed. 442 O and 447 11 hours ( D ) Electives to comp'ete the minimum program of 124 hours. (See University regulations concerning upper division courses.) 111. Those planning to teach in the junior high school will qualify for the standard secondary teaching certificate as follows: ( A ) Study in the "junior high school core" in lieu of a major field and ( B) of Area 11, above. The American Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . ... . 40 hours ( Including 10 upper division hours.) Engl. 215, 251, 252. 262: Speech 221 and 228: History 102; Soc. 111; Art 165 or 303; Pol. Sci. 121; History 131-132 or 313- 314, or 431-432; and elect from Phil. 356; Eng. 301, 302, 303, 461; History 433, 436, 437, 444, 447, 448; Anthro. 309, 310, 323, 336, 337; Pol. Sci. 458, 459. GROUP 2 The Physical World . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 hours Intermediate algebra, and geometry completed on high school or college level; Xfath. 121 and 122, or h4ath. 373 and 374; Sci. Sur. 101 and Biol. 100; one laboratory science course of no fewer than four hours, though the total shall be 15 hours-from the sci- ences; PE 212 or 225, and 210 or 400. (These may overlap I above.) IV. TEACHING FIELDS The major is generally made up of not fewer than 30 semester hours. (For specific exceptions see mathematics, language, and the combined curricula programs.) The student may elect one of the majors listed under Departmental Majors and Minors later in this section, which are offered in the Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, College of Fine Arts, College of Business Administration. or the College of Education. The student must meet the specific course requirements of the department in which the major is offered. For example: A student may elect to major in history because he wishes to become a high school history teacher. To do so he must complete the history major as prescribed by the history department in Fairmount College of Liberal Arts, and Sciences. In addition he will complete University core curriculum requirements (the same courses may be used both to develop a major and to satisfy core requirements), the professional education sequence, and other requirements for the teacher's certificate prior to graduation. Each student should work closely with a College Taken in the professional semester t May be taken during the professional semester or student may elect Fd. Ed. 427 out- side the professional semester. 206 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION of Education advisor to be sure that he meets certification require- ments. A check sheet of all requirements is availab!e from thc College of Education in the dean's office. COMBINED CURRICULA The teaching assignment after graduation often involves a com- bination of subjects more or less closely related. For this reason intensive study in the combined disciplin~s listed be!.sl:.: is offered in lieu of a departmental major and minor. Students should work closely with advisers to insure proper ccurse se!ection for certifica- tion. BUSINESS EDUCATION MAJOR:Teachers of the business subjects in high school of Kansas are required to have 2 l scrnester hours in the field with the equiv- alent of six semester hours in each subject taught, of which at least two semester hours must be resident college credit in other than the beginning course. Business Education (College of Business) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 hours Accounting 213 and 315 f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Behavioral Concepts in Business 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Marketing 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Law and Society 332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 eEconomics 221-222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Business Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Typewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 f Shorthand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Office Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Business Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Office Machines 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Calculating h,fachines 202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Records Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electives: Two upper division business courses in any area . 6 124 hours Mrnro~:Accounting 213, 315; Econcmics 25'1, Business Education 138, 237; and nine hours from accounting, administration, economics or shorthand, of which one course must be upper division. NATURAL SCIENCES-BIOLOGICAL Teachers in Kansas schools are required to have 24 hours in the field of science with 12 hours in each subject taught. A teacher qualifying under this provision may a!so teach general science. Requirements for the major listed below include the general graduation requirements ! and 5 of the Col'ege of Education. MAJOR:Required-Biol. 111, 112, 201, 309, or 310, 329 or 330, plus seven hours of upper division biology. Chem. 111, 112, 231. 'Economics 221 and 222 fulfill six hours of the Social Science requirement and the business requirement as well. f A total of 15 hours in accounting may be substituted for shorthand. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 207 232 or the equivalent, and either a physics or geology option (Physics 123 and 124 or Geol. 111 and 112). MINOR: Biol. 111, 112, 201, and at least four hours of upper division biology; and five hours of chemistry or physics. Students should not elect this minor if they are majoring in one of the sciences. Those who do may use the same course for both major and minor requirements only if they select additional hours equal to those taken to satisfy both the major and minor requirements. NATURAL SCIENCES-PHYSICAL The teaching requirement set forth in the biological science field applies to the physical sciences as well. Requirements for the major listed below include also the general graduation require- ments 1 and 5 of the College of Education. MAJOR:Required-Biol. 111, 112; Chem. 111, 112; Geol. 111; Phys. 123, 124; and 10 hours from the following, including at least five hours from one department (specific course prerequisites must be met): Chem. 231, 232, 302, 304, 323, 324, 411, 412; Geol. 331, 335, 336, 337, 446; physics, any of the upper division courses. MINOR:The minor shall consist of at least 15 hours beyond the general graduation requirements, including three hours of upper division credit from chemistry, geology, or physics. Students should not elect this minor if they are majoring in one of the sciences. Those who do may use the same course for both major and minor requirements only if they select additional hours equal to those taken to satisfy both the major and minor requirements. SOCIAL STUDIES To teach any of the social sciences, 36 hours in the field of social studies are required for certification with a minimum of six hours preparation in each specific subject taught, with the exception of American history, political science and other courses in history which require a minimum of 12 hours in the specific field taught. Requirements for the major may overlap general graduation re- quirements 3, 4, and requirement 5 of the College of Education. ~ I A J O R :Required-Econ. 221 and 222, and three hrs. upper divi- sion economics; Hist. 101, 102, 131, 132 or Hist. 311, 312, 313 and 314; Pol. Sci. 100, 121, 211 and 336; Soc. 111; Anthro. 124 or 202; Psych. 246 or Soc. 320; Geog. 125 and 201 or 210. In addition to these courses a minimum of nine semester hours shall be selected from one of the four options: Options ( A ) Hist. 432, 433, 438, 448. ( B ) Hist. 331, 333, 431, 437. 208 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION ( C ) Pol. Sci. 227, 315, 316, 335, 345, 420, 441, 444, 451. ( D ) Courses listed in the minority studies section of the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences portion of the Catalog. INOR OR: Econ. 221, and three hours upper division economics; Hist. 131, 132; Pol. Sci. 100, 121; Soc. 111; Anthro. 124 or 202, and one course from Option ( A ) , ( B ), or ( C ) above. Students mqinri~g in history or political science should not elect this minor. Those who do may use the same courses for both major and minor re- quirements only if they select additional hours equal to those taken to satisfy both the major and minor requirements. V. DEPARTMENTAL MAJORS AND MINORS Selection of teaching fields for the junior or senior high school must be made with an academic counselor representing the College of Education. The teaching field or major should be dec!ared not later than the beginning of the junior year. The student who wishes to become a secondary teacher may elect his major and minor from the following fields. Only those marked with an asterisk (') will be accepted as a major by the College of Education. Any of the following fields is suitable as a supporting minor. The specific course requirements of the depart- ment from which the major work is taken will prevail: Accounting Journalism 'American Studies 'Logopedics Anthropology 'Mathematics f 'Art f 'Music 'Biology teNatural Sciences-Biological f 'Business Education f 'Natural Sciences-Physical *Chemistry Philosophy *Classical Languages 'Physical Education f 'Economics 'Physics t *English Language and Litel rature 'Political Science )'French Psychology Geology $Religion and Philosophy Geography tOSocial Studies toGerman 4 t 'Sociology 'History toSpanish t8Industrial Education 'Speech AEROSPACE STUDIES AIR FORCE ROTC The purpose of Air Force ROTC is to select and prepare qualified University students for careers as commissioned officers in the United States Air Force. The objective of all courses in aerospace - f Nee* no m.inor if a 50 hour field major is outlined in consultation with a College of Educahon advlser. t Teaching preparation for a modem language requires 24 semester houn in the language to be taught or 1.5 semecter houn if the prospective teacher has 24 semester hours in another modern language. $ Religion must be combined with Philosophy on minor-no more than eight hours religion will count towards degree. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 209 studies is to strengthen the ceneral education base of students who are to become junior commissioned officers. Following conferral of a degree and successful compl~tion of prescribed AFROTC re- quirements, a cadet is commissioned a second lieutenant in the United States Air Force. Uniform? and aerospace studies texts are provided at no expense to members enrolled in aerospace studies courses. The Deparment of Aerospace Studies is staffed by active duty officers and noncommissioned officers to conduct the two-year and four-year AFROTC programs. FOUR-YEAR PROGRAM The four-year program consists of the general military course (GMC) for freshmen and sophomores and professional officer course (POC) for qualified students with two years of academic work remaining. (1) General Alilitay Course: The two-year GMC consists of one lecture hour and one corps training hour per week. ( 2 ) Profe.ssiona1 Opcer Course: The POC consists of three lec- ture hours and one corps training hour per week. POC students in the four-year program must attend a four-week field training course (summer camp) at an Air Force Base, normally between the second and third years of the AFROTC program. To qualify for acceptance into the POC a student must: ( a ) Have four semesters of study remainin at undergraduate or graduate level or a combination of both as a full-time stufent. ( b ) Complete the GMC or have been granted equivalent credit. ( c ) Pass the Air Force Officer Qualifying Test ( AFOQT ). (d ) Have a scholastic GPA of 2.0 or above. ( e ) Be physically qualified. ( f ) Complete required processing. ( g ) Be selected by a board of officers. TWO-YEAR PROGRAM The two-year program consists of only the professional officer course. Students participating in this program must successfully complete a six-week field training course (summer camp) at an Air Force base prior to acceptance into the POC. Two-year POC students do not attend the four-week field training course required of four-year students. Additional requirements for enrollment are identical to those listed for the four-year program except that com- pletion of the GMC is not required. FLIGHT INSTRUCTION PROGRAM Qualifying male POC students may participate in the flight in- struction program (FIP) during the second year of the POC. Ap- proximately 72 hours of specialized instruction is provided. Thirty- six hours of ground training and approximately 36 hours of flying instruction by an approved FAA school provide the student an oportunity to qualify for a private pilot's license. 210 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION PAY AND ALLOWANCES POC students are entitled to receive $100 per month for a maximum of 20 months. A student in the four-year program re- ceives aproximately 5250 for the four-week field training course (summer camp) attendance plus a travel allowance of six cents per mile to and from the encampment. A two-year applicant re- ceives approximately $400 for the six-week field training course attendance plus a similar travel allowance to and from camp. Upon entering active duty the new officer receives a $300 uniform allow- ance. Total pay and allowances for students completing AFROTC will normally exceed $2,000. AFROTC COLLEGE SCHOLARSHIP PROGRAM Students enrolled in the four-year program may be eligible for scholarships which provide full coverage of general academic fees, laboratory expenses, incidental fees, book allowances, and $100 per month. Applicants are selected on the basis of scores on a qualifying test, quality of academic work, and rating by an interview board. Applications from AFROTC freshmen, sophomores, and juniors are normally submitted near the end of the fall semester. Additional scholarships desirrned for AFROTC cadets are listed under "Finan- cial Aids and Awards" of this Catalog. EXTRACURRICULAR ACTIVITIES Field trips to various Air Force installations and activities are scheduled throughout the year for members of AFROTC. A flight orientation program is conducted to provide flight experience for interested cadets. Arnold Air Society, an honorary cadet organiza- tion, pledges AFROTC students for membership each semester. Additional activities with the Color Guard and cadet newspaper are also available for interested students. Lower Division Courses 113 & 114. U. S. Military Forces in the Contemporary World. (1-1). 1R, IR/L. The first year general military course (GMC) is a study of the doctrine, mission, and organization of the United States Air Force; strategic offensive and defensive forces; aerospace and missile defense, and general purpose and aerospace support forces. Corps training provides practical leadership experience in basic military and officer-type activities, including drill and ceremonies, customs and courtesies, Air Force as a career, and officer environ- ment. Prerequisite: Department consent. 223 & 224. U. S. Military Forces in the Contemporary World. (1-1). 1R, lR/L. The second year general military course (GMC) studies U. S. national defense ~ol icies and the role of alliances: ~olicies and strategies of the Soviet Union aAd China; Department of ~ e f e n s e organization and'hecision making, and the role of the military in United States national policies. Corps training provides practical leadership experience in basic d t a r y and officer-type activities, including drill and ceremonies, customs and courtesies, Air Force as a career, and officer environment. Prerequisite: Department consent. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 211 Upper Dlvision Courses 335 & 354. Growth and Development of Aerospace Power. (3-3). 3R, lR/L. The first year professional officer course (POC) is a seminar study of the development of airpower; aerospace power today; the future of manned air- craft; the U. S, space program; the spatial environment; space orbits, trajec- tories, vehicle systems, operations, and future developments. Corps training provides practical leadership experience in basic military and officer type activities, including drill ancl ceremonies, customs and courtesies, Air Force as a career, and officer environment. Prerequisite: Department consent. 453 & 451. The Professional Officer. (3-3). 3R, l R , l R / L . The second year profesisonal officer course (POC) is a seminar study of professionalism, leader- ship, and management as applical~le to the Air Force officer. It includes the meaning of professionalism; officer responsibilities; the military justice system; leaders hi^ theorv. functions and ~ractices: management ~ r i n c i ~ l e s and func- tions, a i d pro61em solving proie.f.tl,lres. 'corps''trainini protides practical I~adershio euperience in I)asic militan anti officer tvpe activities. including drill andcerehonies, customs and courtesies, Air ~orck-as a career, and office; environment. Prerequisite: Department consent. 455. Flight Instruction Program (FIP). (3). This course provides the student an opportunity to learn and experience the basic techniques of flying, naviga- tion, and air traffic control. It consists of 36 hours of classroom study (mound school) and 36;: hours of flight training to prepare the student for the FAA flight examination and a private pilot's license. The FIP is limited to senior AFROTC cadets qualified for pilot training and department consent. ART EDUCATION Art Minor for Students Majoring in Elementary Education Students will com~lete18 art hours. These hours will be distributed as follows: 16.5, 240, 343, one elected studio course and six hours of art history: 101, 102. Lower Dlvision Courses 240. Art Fundamentals for the Classroom Teacher. (3). For students without previous art background who plan to teach in the elementary school classroom. Study of fundamental methods, materials, and concepts used to develop art knowledge and skills in the elementary age levels. 343. Fiber and Fabric Process. (3). Fiber processing and structuring in tra- ditional and experimental processes in woven forms and other structural tech- niques using natural and man-made fibers. Prerequisite: Art 241 or consent of instructor. Upper Division Courses 406. Art Curricular and Supervision Methods. (4). The construction of an art program of study outline for elementary grades and junior and senior high school; techniques in the supervision of an art education program. 442. Art Education in the Secondary School. (3). The study of philosophy, objectives, and classroom procedures directed toward the development of informational and studio skills at the secondary level. 450. Art Workshop. (1-3). May be repeated for credit. (The area to be covered will be inserted at the time the course is offered.) 212 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION EAS Graduate Courses 501. Introduction to Administration and Supervision. (3). An examination of the major theories of administration and their application to specific problems. Emphasis upon an overview of administration of the school district, especially problems involving the community and the staff. Includes data gathering for self-evaluation of supervisory potential. Open to all College of Education graduate majors. (Summer; fall; spring.) 503. The Sociology of Administration. (3). An examination of the interaction of society and the school as it relates to the administrative processes. Systems of control, social class, power stn~cture, human relations and group dynamics. (Summer, odd numbered years; fall, even numbered years.) 504. Supervision and the Improvement of Instruction. (3). The application of curricular theories, psychology and methods of supervision to the problerns of improving classroom instruction and teaching methods. Open to all College of Education graduate majors. (Summer; fall; spring.) 506. Elementary School Organization and Administration. (3). Alternate methods of organizinq the elementary school and its classrooms, problems of administration of staff, curriculum, pupils and facilities, community relations. Prerequisite: EAS 501. (Summer, even numbered years; fall.) 509. School-Community Relations. (3). Knowledge about and experience with the unique nature of the community school. The student will study the actions of community persons within the school community, formulate cooperative plans for community development, develop ways in which the personnel and facilities can be better utilizecl and promote the school-community concept to the benefit of the school and the community. (Summer, even numbered years; spring.) 510. Secondary School Student Activities. (3). The role of extracurricular activities in secondary school programs. Problems of organizing and administer- ing the program. (Summer, even numbered years; fall, odd numbered years.) 512. The Middle School. (3). A middle school offering children an education appropriate for present times, built upon human development in late childhood through the early stages of adolescence. This school evolves as an organic whole with development of program, administrative pattern and teaching requirements creating grouping practices with focus on transescence. Vertical and horizontal organization patterns include taking the child from where he is educationally. (Fall.) 515. The Community Junior College. (3). Considers educational services to a community as the basic thrust of the organization; surveys the history and philosophy of the community junior college movement; emphasizes the cur- ricula provided appropriate to the community and studies the administrative organization, legal control, and methods of financing. (Spring.) 518. Group Dynamics for Teachers. (2). A laboratory course in human rela- tions and group dynamics based upon involvement in various group activities. Applications for the use of group dynamics in classroom teaching utilizing knowledge gained in personal experience in group work. (Prerequisite: Teach- cr's certification.) (Offered summer: fall; spring.) 522. Financial Support of Education. (3). Concepts of the financial support of education at local, state and national levels. Emphasis upon methods of taxation, budget preparation, and efficient expenditures. Prerequisite: EAS 501. (Summer; spring.) THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 213 523. School Law. (3). General concepts of law, interpretations of statutes and court decisions affecting education, legal responsibilities of school personnel. Kansas school law. (Summer; fall.) 521. The School Plant. (3). Planning new school facilities based upon educa- tional programs. Evaluation of existing schools, remodelin , operation and maintenance of present school plant. Prerequisite: Master's fegree or consent of instructor. (Summer; spring.) 526. Curriculum Development. (3). Curriculum philosophies and theories. An examination of recent programs and proposals. The local school building and individual teacher as units of curriculum development. System-wide cur- riculum development and evaluation with kindergarten through grade 12 articulation. Prerequisite: EAS 504. (Summer; fall.) 527. The Ungraded School. (3). Understanding the rationale of nongraded- ness. Organiz~ng and teaching the nongraded concepts centered upon indi- vidualization of instruction, continuous pupil progress. Operation of viable flexible program. Prerequisites: One course in curriculum or consent of in- structor. (Spring.) 531. Organization and Administration of the Secondary School. (3). Or ani zational plans for junior and senior highs, present trends. Problems o f ad: ministration of staff, upil, curriculum, facilities and community relationships in the modern secongry school. Prerequisite: EAS 501. (Summer, odd num- bered years; spring.) 536. Problems of Staff Personnel. (3). Advanced study of staff problems- selection and recruitment, certification, orientation, in-service training, evalua- tion. transfer and dismissal, and retirement. Prerequiste: Master's degree or consent of instructor. (Summer, even numbered years; spring, odd numbered years.) 537. School Business Management. (3). School budgeting processes, salary scheduling, cost accounting and purchasing rocedures, IBM programming of record systems. Prerequisites: EAS 522 ancfconsent of instructor. (Summer, odd numbered years; fall, even numbered years.) 538. Advanced Group Dynamics. (2). A laboratory course in theories of group dynamics, with emphasis upon their application to uses in education, especially in the classroom and in faculty-administrator relationships. Prerequi- site: EAS 460 or EAS 518 and consent of the instructor. (Summer, odd num- bered years; spring, even numbered years.) 546-547-548-519. The Internship. (2-3-4-5). Administrative assignment in etluc~ational institutions. Prerequisite: Nine semester hours ot postmaster's graduate courses in educational administration and supervision and 3.10 graduate GPA. (Arranged on individual basis.) 550. Special Problems in Administration. (1-4). Directed reading in research under supervision of a graduate instructor. Prerequisite: Approval of the department. 560. Seminar in the Process of Administration. (1-3). Concurrent enrollment in the internship is required. (Arranged on an individual basis.) 562. Presentation of Research. (1-2). A project submitted in thesis manuscript form. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 560. May he repeated for a maximum total of two hours credit. 566. Frontiers of Knowledge and the Future of Education. (3). Key concepts and discoveries in the sciences and humanities presented by experts in each field and investigation of their possible implications in education. (Fall, odd numbered years.) 575-576. Master's Thesis. (2). Required for Master of Arts degree. Pre- requisite: Ed. Psych. 560. 214 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY Lower Division Courses 219. Introduction to Child Growth and Development. (3). Designed to pro- vide a systematic study of the processes involved in how children grow and develop. The interrelatedness of various aspects of growth (physical, social, emotional, intellectual) and their implications will be given attention. 220. Psychological Problems of Young Children. (3). The course will intro- duce students to (1)the ty es and nature of emotional and behavioral problems encountered in your chilgen, (2) the identification of these problems (3) the factors determining the problems (developmental, experiential, social), (4) methods of intervention to modify the roblems, and (5) the community re- sources available to assist in dealing w i g the problems and how to use these resources. Prerequisite: Consent of department. 221. Interviewing and Recording for Social Service Aides. (3). To develop skills and understandin s of the basic methods of interviewing and recording as related to headstart families. Prerequisite: Consent of department. 233. The Elementary School Child. (4). His sociocultural context, develop- m-ntal characterestics, with stress upon application to instruction. Prerequisite: Psych. 111, Ed. Ed. 232 (or department consent) and sophomore standing. Upper Division Courses 333. The Secondary School Student. (3). Development during early and middle adolescent years and relation of theory and research to instruction. Prerequisite: Psych. 111, Ed. Ed. 232 or department consent. 361. Educational Measurements. (3). Fundamental statistical methods ap- lied to educational problems; construction, administration, and analysis of teacher made examinations. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 233 or 333. 401. Introduction to Exceptional Children. (3). Emphasis on recognition and education of children with mental and physical handicaps. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 233 or 333. 402. Introduction to the Gifted Child. (3). Emphasis on recognition and education of the gifted child. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 233 or 333. 404. Understanding of the Mentally Retarded Child. (3). The current re- search and historical ap roaches to the education of the mentally retarded will be examined. The Eterature in this field will be surveyed. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 401 or consent. 419. Growth and Development I. (3). Biosocial foundations of human growth and development related to the development of behavior from birth to eight years. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 233 or 333 or consent. 420. Growth and Development 11. (3). Biosocial foundations of human growth and development related to the development of behavior from middle childhood to maturity. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 419 or consent. 421. Mental Hygiene. (3). Principles of mental hygiene in relationship to the development of wholesome ersonality. There are examined the inter- relationships of teacher, school, Kome, and community as they affect mental health. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 233 or 333. 433. Psychological Aspects of the Teaching Process. (3). A study of the learning process and principles related to learnin in the classroom; considera- tion and study of evaluation of the products 08learning. Not open to Ed. Psych. 434. Prerequisite: See Secondary Student Teaching. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 215 434. Principles of Learning and Evaluation for Teachers. For description of course see Ed. Psych. 433. This course is intended for those students not tak- in 433 in the secondary student teaching block. It may be substituted for ~ f . Pre-Psych. 433; not open to students with credit in Ed. Psych. 433. requisite: Ed. Psych. 333. 443. Progammed Instruction. (3). Study of approaches to programming. techniques of programming. Students will constuct and develop a programmed unit in their own area of interest. Prerequisite: Psych. 111, Ed. Psych. 233 or 333, or consent of instructor. 444. Curriculum for the Mentally Retarded Child. (3). Adaptations of the standard curriculum and innovations which have proven to be beneficial for the teaching of the mentally retarded child. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 401 or consent. 450. Workshop in Educational Psychology. (1-3). 451. Institute in Educational Psychology. (1-4). Designed to study physical, social, emotional and psychological development of humans. Specific emphasis will be on growth and development of school age children and adolescents. Graduate Courses 501. Introduction to Educational Research. (3). An introduction to research in education. Included in the course content: (1)a survey of current educa- tional research; (2) the nature of research methodology; (3) the preparation of research reports, and (4) criticisms of current research. 504. Introduction to Educational Statistics. (3). An introduction to statistics including measures of central tendency, variability, correlation, chi-s uare, "t" test, F test and analysis of variance. (Not open to students with crejit in Ed. Psych. 500.) 511. Evaluating Pupil Progress. (3). Evaluation in the cognitive, affective, and psychomotor domains. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 501 or 504. 519. Human Growth and Development. (3). The study of human develop- ment (physical, mental, social, emotional) from birth to maturity. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 233 or 333 or consent. 520. Learning Theory for Teachers. (3). Major learning theories and their effectiveness and application. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 233 or 333, 501 or consent. 521. Advanced Educational Psychology. (3). Review of recent research in the areas of personality and social psychology. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 520 or consent. 530. Educating the Adolescent. (3). A study of the nature of the adolescent with emphasis on the relation of development to the secondary school. Pre- requisite: Six hours of Ed. Psych. 540. Program Development in Mental Retardation. (3). Examination of the social and sychological factors in classroom organization and management. Focus will !e on the mentally retarded classroom as a model of the factors affecting the establishment and operation of programs for the handicapped. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 541. Psychology of Exceptional Childen. (3). A study of the conceptual and theoretical formulations, empirical evidence, and research concerning be- havioral characteristics of exceptional children with an emphasis on the men- tally retarded child. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 544. Occupational Aspects in Mental Retardation (3). Desi ed to study in depth occupational information, curriculum, and methods emp%yed by teach- 216 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION ers of the mentally retarded in secondary school. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 404 or consent. 547. Practicum and Internship in Special Education: Mental Retardation. (3-6). Full-time participation in a special education class under immediate supervision of a master teacher and a college supervisor. (A) A minimum of two years experience in the specific special education field is required. (B) A f r ~ i lcourse sequence has been followetl leading to this stage ot prepnr;ltion. For master's level students without teacher credentials and experience. Pre- requisite: Ed. Psych. 540, Ed. Psych. 544 or consent. 550. Special Problems in Educational Psychology. (1-4).Directed reading and research under supervision of a graduate instructor. Prerequisite: Department consent. 558. Experimental Design in Educational Research. (3). A consideration of sampling theory; design for testing hypotheses about populations from samples; testing correlation coefficients; means and difference between means; simple factorial designs; designs in\~olving matched groups; designs involving repeated measure of the same group; analysis of covariance. (Not open to students with credit in Ed. Psych. 559.) Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 504. 560. Seminar on Research Problems. (1). Development and presentation of research proposals. Required of students enrolled in MA or 32 hour MEd programs. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 558 or concurrent enrollment. 562. Presentation of Research. (1-2).A project submitted in thesis manu- script form. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 560. hlay be repeated for a maximum total of two hours credit. 575-576. Master's Thesis. (2-2).Required for a hlaster of Arts degree. Pre- requisite: Ed. Psych. 560. ELEMENTARY EDUCATION Lower Division Courses 216. Children's Literature. (3). Reading and discussion of stories, poems, and factual materials for children; a 1)ackground of a preciation essential to the setting up of standards of selection. Authors, ilrustrators, poets, and their contributions to children's literature are studied; also the children's library and booklist. 222. Directed Study in Elementary Education. (1-6). 246. Introduction to Methods and Materials in Preschool Education. (3). In- troduction to the study of teaching methods for the teacher of the preschool child and the preparation of materials to enhance the learning experiences of these children. 252. Introduction to Educating the Disadvantage. (3). An investigation into the cultural backgrounds, the economic problems and the educational issues presented by the disadvantaged. Laboraton experiences in various school and community programs are included. Upper Division Courses 318. Methods for the Kindergarten Teacher. (3).To acquaint students with all aspects of the kindergarten program and introduce the wide variety of materials available and in use. Prerequisites: Fd. Ed. 232 and Ed. Psych. 233. 319. Language Arts in the Elementary School. (3). Objectives, methods and materials of teaching the language arts including listening, oral and written communications, spelling and handwriting. Students will be given an oppor- tunity to acquire skill in man~~script writing. Prerequisite: and c~~rs ive Fd. Ed. 232 and Ed. Psych. 233. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 217 330. IZeading in the Elementary School. (3). 2R; 2L. A survey of methods of teaching the language arts, principles of curriculum development, ant1 organization of learning esperiences. A two-hour laboratory practicum is re- quired. Prerequisite: Fd. Ed. 232 and Ed. Psych. 233. 321. Science in Elementary Education. (3). This course will encompass the areas of: Develop~nent of scientific concc ts in children, strategy, tactics and audiovisual aids in teaching elementary s&ool science, stating objectives, off- campus observation and participation, and introduction to experimental science. Prerequisite: Fd. Ed. 22 and Ed. Psych. 233. 322. Individual Studies in Education. (1-2). 3 i4. Mathematics in the Elementary School. (3). A study of the basic methods r)f instruction with emphasis given to relating mathematical concepts to cognitive development and learning. Specific attention will be given to current curriculum practices, materials and evaluation technique. Prerequisite: Math 373 and 374 may be taken concurrently. 405. Developmental Reading. (3). To acquaint students and teachers with all of the aspects of current reading theory and pertinent readin research. Also to point out the possibilities of applying this theory and researca to actual teaching of children in the classroom. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 320. 406. Social Studies in the Elementary School. (3). Objectives, methods of teaching, equipment and resources, and evaluation and measurement in the social studies in the elementary school. The unit method of construction is stressed. Prerequisite: Fd. Ed. 232 and Ed. Psych. 233. 443. Parent Education for Preschool Teachers. (3). A n introduction to ways of working with parents of preschool children; analysis of formal and informal approaches with emphasis on the teacher's role in developing these procedures. Prerequisites: El. Ed. 444 or consent of instructor. 444. Early Childhood Education. (3). An introduction to the problems and philosophy of educating children in the preschool years. 445. Guidance of the Preschool Child. (3). Study of the dynamics of be- havior of the preschool child in his relations with peers and adults; in his methods of coping with developmental aspects of growth, and the teacher's role in guiding such behavior. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 444 or consent. 446. Methods and Materials in Preschool Education. (3) The study of teaching methods for the teacher of the preschool child and the preparation of materials to enhance the learning experiences of these children. Pre- requisite: El. Ed. 444 or consent of the instructor. 447E." Student Teaching in the Elcmentary School. (3-10). The student teaching program provides full-time participation in the public schools under guidance of a master teacher and a college supenrisor. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 319, 320, 321, 344, 406. The student teaching semester is required of all students who are working toward a degree certificate in elementary education. Every student wishing to receive the above certificate must file an application with the coordinator of elementary student teaching. Application for the fall semester must be filed by Anril 13: spring semester hy Nov. 15. Applications 1nav be securetl in Koom 117, CEC. (The only exception ever granted to the requirement of 13 semester hours is to the transfer student that has taken student teaching elsewhere or may have taught a numher of years.) Any deviations from established grade point averages and other regulations must be approved by the elementary education department. 447L. Student Teaching for Logopedics Majors. (4). These students will be assigned to a self-contained classroom in the elementary school for the first nine weeks and then assigned to the Department of Logopedics for the second nine weeks of the semester. Prerequisite: Senior standing. Fd. Ed. 232, Ed. Psych. 233, El. Ed. 320, 321, 344, and 406. 218 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 447M. Student Teaching in the Elementary School. (3). Prerequisite: Music majors. 447P. Student Teaching in the Elementary School. (3). Prere uisite physical education majors. Application for student teaching must be male to the direc- tor of student teaching prior to the semester in which the student intends to enroll. The assi ment for student teaching begins with the o ening of the ublic school any the student is expected to follow the public sc%ool calendar For a semester. The student will receive 13hours credit. 448. Seminar in Student Teaching. (3). Taken concurrently with Student Teaching. Concerned with evaluation of experience and planning for the next experience in the classroom. 450. Workshop in Education. ( I to 6). 451. Institute in Elementary Education. (1-6). (a) Math., (b) science. Course designed for elementary teachers, who will be institute participants. One or a combination of preselected areas will be emphasized during a semester. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. 452. Special Studies in Education. (1-3). (a) Mathematics, (b) health and physical education, (c) language arts, (d) reading, (e) recent innovations, (f) science, (g) social studies, (h) instructional media, (i) other areas. Course designed for elementary school teachers. Only one preselected area will be emphasized during a semester. (Prerequisite: Teacher certification and con- sent.) This course may be repeated with adviser's consent. Prerequisites may be waived for equivalent experience by department consent. Graduate Courses 528. Elementary School Cumculum. (3). An intensive study of the field of curriculum in the elementary school. Who should mabe the curriculum; bases for making curriculum decisions diversity within a school and school system; participation in curriculum development and revision; the future in elementary school curriculum. 530. Language Development in the Reading Process. (3). Emphasis will be placed upon the relationship of the child's language and the reading process. A review of the influence of environmental and intellectual abilities will be made to examine how the speech-to-print correspondence may be made. 540. Diagnostic Procedures in Reading. (3). Emphasis upon diagnosis; use of standardized instruments, teacher-made instruments and corrective treatment of reading difficulties. Diagnostic practicum included. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 320 or equivalent. 542. Clinical Procedures in Reading. (3). Emphasis upon diagnosis and cor- rective treatment of reading difficulties. A laboratory practicum in corrective teaching required. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 540 or equivalent. 549. Seminar in Reading. (3). The Reading seminar is designed to examine the organization and administration of reading programs. Additional time will be spent investigating pertinent research in the area of reading instruction. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 405 or equivalent. 550. Special Problems in Education. (1to 4). Directed reading and research under supervision of a graduate instructor. Prerequisite: Approval of the department. 552. Improvement of Instruction in Language Arts. (3). This course is de- signed to aid the student in developing an understanding of the communicative arts in the elementary school by focusing on the past, present and future. It is hoped that this experience will present a balanced, realistic picture of the lan- guage arts cumculum and deal with materials and related experiences in the area. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 219 554. Improvement of Instruction in Social Studies. (3). A study of recent changes in social studies curriculum and instruction. Emphasis is placed on the teachins of concepts, values, and independent learning skills. The inquiry- centered learning environment is stressed a7 behavioral objectives, innovative teaching strategies, and complementary evaluative techniques are studied and practiced. 556. Tmprovemcnt of Instruction in Mathematics. (3). For teachers in service. Consideration of recent trends in suhject matter content and teaching guides to improve understanding of meanings, vocabulary, and mathematical concepts. Instructional methods and materials. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 344 or consent. 558. Improvement of Instruction in Science. (3). To identify and explorp the principles of science that teachers should recognize and understand; to give consideration to their development from kinderrarten through grade eight. To experience these concepts through demonstration or experimentation for teach- ers in service. Prerequisite: El. Ed. 321 or consent. 559. Seminar in Elementary Education. (3). 562. Presentation of Research. (1-2). A project submitted in thesis manu- script form. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 560. May be repeated for a maximum total of two hours credit. 563. Trends in Theories of Instruction. (3). Uses materials from public school work groups and from research journals to examine development of modem practices in elementary education. 575-576. Master's Thesis. (2-2). Required for Master of Arts demee. Pre- requisite: Ed. Psych. 560. INDUSTRIAL EDUCATION Industrial education includes the follon~ingareas of specializa- tion: Industrial arts education and vocational-industrial education. Industrial arts education prepares young men to become'indus- trial arts teachers at the junior high and senior high level. The person selecting this field will teach young people about the tools. materials, processes, and products of industry. Industrial arts in- structors teach such general courses as metals, electricity-electronics, woods, plastics, drafting, auto mechanics, or a combination of some of these in a comprehensive general shop. Work experience in his specialty is not demanded of the industrial arts teacher, but it is highly desirable. Vocational-industrial education is for persons who wish to become certified vocational-industrial instructors. The vocational-industrial educator, like the industrial arts educator, deals with tools, mate- rials, and processes of industry, but stresses skill development more than is possible in the industrial arts program. Instructors in this field teach vocational subjects in such fields as drafting and clesign, machine shop practice, electronics, auto mechanics, industrial plas- tics, and the like. Certification for vocational teaching does require a minimum of 2,000 clock hours of occupational experience in the field taught. Prerequisites may be waived for equivalent experience by department consent. 220 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION COMBINED Ed. 111, 120, 124, MAJORAND MINOR: Required-Ind. 13.5, 155, 180, 260, 319, 401, and Sec. Ed. 443. An additional 21 hours of industrial education will be selected in consultation with the student's major adviser, completing the combined curricula with a minimum of 50 semester hours. Lower Division Courses 111. Introduction to Industrial Education. (2). Industrial education as n career; an introduction to present day programs and the opportunities avail- able; a survey of materials and processes used in industry; recommended as a first course in the department. 120. Drafting I. (3). 2R; 3L. An introduction to orthographic projection, pictorial representations, with emphasis placed on auxiliary view, sectional views, sketching, revolutions, dimensioning, lettering, care and use of draftinq instruments. 121.' Drafting 11. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of the relationship of views in draft- ing with emphasis on rotation, projection of solids, planes, and lines using standard drafting techniques and procedures. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 120. 124. Woodwork I. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of the use and care of hand and power tools, methods of finishing, wood technology, and an overall view of the woods industry. 125.' Woodwork 11. (3). 2R; 3L. A study in design, construction, and finish- ing of woodworking projects, with special emphasis on woodworking machine tools, including methods and processes used by industry. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 1". 135. Metalwork. (3). 2R; 3L. A basic course dealing with the processes. equipment, materials and products of the metal-working industry; lab experi- ence in sheetmetal, benchmetals, forging, founding, welding, and machine tools. 154.. Power Mechanics 1. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of energy sources and the machines that convert energy into useful work. Emphasis is given to a board overview of the entire field of power and its importance to technolo~y. 180. Electricity I. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of basic principles of electricity and electronics as related to home and industry. Emphasis on electrical theory, transmission, and utilization. Laboratorv activities include experimentation and fabrication of elcctrial componcnts. 181.' Electricity 11. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of basic concepts of alternating current electricity with emphasis on reactance and impedance of resonant and nonresistant circuits. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 180. 225.' Drnfting 111. (3). 2R; 3L. Development of working drawings in ma- chine, aircraft, steel structural, electrical, architectural details, patent drawings-all conforming to industrial and prescribed stanf%.. %El requisite: Ind. Ed. 121. 236.' Metals 11. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of materials, machines and handtools used by the sheetmetal industry and an introduction to basic machine tool operations. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 135. 255. Power Mechanics 11. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of the operation of motor vehicles, including chassis and drive line components. Lab experiences include repair techniques and procedures. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 151. 260. Plastics I. (3). 2R; 3L. Study of plastic materials being used in in- dustry; fundamental operations including molding, casting, thermoforming. fabrication, and finishing. 'Prerequisite may be waived for equivalent experience by department consent. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 221 261.' Plastics 11. (3). 2R; 3L. Technical information and product develop- ment; construction of molds and forms for molding, casting, laminating, and thermoforming. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 260. 282.O Electronics I. (3). 2R; 3L. A basic study of electronics including the function of components, dc and ac theory, vacuum tube characteristics and applications and power supplies. Experimentation and project construction. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 180. 283.' Electronics 11. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of basic electronic circuits and systems, including an introduction to radio circuits and systems, with proper circuit analysis techniques receiving major emphasis. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 282. Upper Division Courses 319. Shop Planning and Organization. (3). Selection, purchase, and organiza- tion of shop equipment and supplies; developing and maintaining necessary records and reports; planning of shop facilities. 325.' Woodwork 111. (3). 2R; 3L. For advanced woodworking students, with special emphasis on tools, materials, and construction practices as they relate to the building trades. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 124. 326.' Woodwork IV. (3). 2R; 3L. Advanced work for specialists in the wood- working field with emphasis placed on problems growing from the needs of the student. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 125. 327.' Drafting IV. (3). 2R; 3L. Advanced study for drafting students with emphasis on problems growing from the needs of students based on past performances and progress. Complete dwelling and machine problems. Special emphasis on industrial practices and procedures. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 225. 337.' Metals 111. (3). 2R; 3L. A study of the structure, physical and mechan- ical properties of metals and the effect of heat treatment on these characteris- tics; the methods of hot working metals including forging, foundry, and arc, acetylene and tungsten inert gas welding. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 135. 350.' Metalwork IV. (3). 2R; 3L. Fundamentals of benchwork and basic operations on lathes, mills, grinders, shapers, and drills. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 236. 351.' Metalwork V. (3). 2R; 3L. Emphasis on advanced machine tool operations; new techniques of industry and the making of basic tools and dies. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 350. 356. Power Mechanics 111. (3). 2R; 3L. A continuation of the study of motor vehicles, including tune-up, electrical systems, fuel systems, and engine service. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 154. 362.' Plastics 111. (3). 2R; 3L. Advanced problems in production techniques. compression and injection molding; recent developments and experimentai work. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 135 and Ind. Ed. 260. 363.' Plastics IV. (3). 3R; 3L. Advanced problems in production techniques; extrusion, rotational casting and foaming. Recent developments and experi- mental work. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 362. 384.' Electronics 111. (3). 2R; 3L. Course includes the theory, instrumenta- tion, and application of semiconductors in electronic circuitry. Emphasis will be placed on the utilization of transistors and newly developed semiconductors. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 282. 385.' Electronics IV. (3). 2R; 3L. Motors and generators; synchros and synchro control systems; servo control devices and systems; industrial measure- 0 Prerequisites may be waived for equivalent experience by department consent. 222 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION - - ment and control systems; introduction to microwaves and microwave oscil- lators; microwave transmitters, microwave duplexers and antennas; amplifiers and microwave miuers; microwave receivers; multiplexing; radar detection and navigation systems. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 384. 401. Preparation of Instructional Materials. (3). The selection, development, and organization of instructional materials for effective teaching of industrial education. 450. Workshop in Education. (1-4). This course will be,offered from time to time on various aspects of industrial education. 457. Power Mechanics IV. (3). 2R; 3L. Advanced study in the power me- chanics field with emphasis placed on problems growing from the needs of the student. Prerequisite: Department consent. Graduate Courses 520. Foundations for Curriculum Development in Industrial Education. (3). A study of the theory and practice of curriculum development as determined by social, cultural, and industrial changes, including current industrial education curriculum designs, problems and trends. 521. Curriculum Construction in Industrial Education. (3). Selection and con- struction of curriculum content for general and specialized areas of study in industrial education. Prerequisite: Ind. Ed. 520. 560. Seminar in Indushial Education. (1-3). (May be repeated.) Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. LIBRARY SCIENCE Students wishing to become school librarians in Kansas must have valid teaching certificates plus specific courses in library science which may be taken either at the upper division or graduate level. Effective July 1,1967, requirements are as follows: Elementary School Librarian: A valid certificate for teaching in the elementary school and a minimum of 15semester hours of library science and audiovisual courses. Junior ntid Senior High School of fewer than 500 pupils: A valid certificate for teaching in the secondary schools and a minimum of 15 semester hours of library science and audiovisual courses. Junior and Senior High Schools of more than 500 pupils: A valid certificate for teaching in the secondary schools and a minimum of 24 semester hours of library science and audiovisual courses. Upper Division Courses 400. Introduction to the School Library Program. (3). The introductory course in the library science program with emphasis on planning and implementing an effective school library program. Objectives and standards are explored and all phases of instruction and service, including media, through which the school library conkibutes to the instructional program are introduced. (Not open to those with credit in Libr. Sci. 405.) 501. School Library Cataloging and Classification. (3). The fundamentals of the Dewey Decimal Classification system and the basic cataloging techniques necessary for organizing a school library collection. * Prerequisites may be waived for equivalent experience by department consent. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 223 402. The School Library Book Collection. (3). The principles and methods involved in book selection for the school library, techniques of reference service, and the literature of school subjects. 403. School Library Administration. (2). The activities and functions of the school library, the relationships of the librarian to the teaching staff, the orga- nization of technical and mechanical processes such as circulation and order routines, the repair of books, and teaching the use of the library to students. 404. Library Reference Materials. (3). Study and problems in the use of reference books, indexes, bibliographies and nonbook reference materials. Includes the fundamentals of reference service in libraries. LOGOPEDICS (Speech, Language and Hearing Disorders) The Department of Logopedics provides academic and clinical training for University students who wish to become professionally qualified to work with communicatively handicapped children and adults. The undergraduate program constitutes a broad and com- prehensive preprofessional preparation for specialized training which is offered on the graduate level. A graduate program, culminating in a master's degree, is required to obtain professional certification to work as a speech or hearing clinician in the public schools, hospital clinics, rehabilitation centers, or to engage in private practice. With an undergraduate, preprofessional major, a student can normally complete the graduate program in one calendar year and be eligible for certification by the American Speech and Hearing Association ancl the State of Kansas public schools. MAJOR: A preprofessional, undergraduate major may be ob- tained with emphasis in speech pathology, audiology, or deaf edu- cation. Logopedics 317 and 326 are observation courses required of all students. Supervised practicum courses are also required: Either Logopedics 417 or 441 is required on the undergraduate level for students majoring in speech pathology; in addition, Logopedics 447 and 448 are required for those planning to qualify as speech clinicians in the public schools; Logopedics 441 is required for those majoring in audiology, while Logopedics 440 is required for those majoring in deaf education. All of these clinical courses are desig- nated by the symbols ( R ) and ( L ) which stipulate the number of clock hours of recitation or laboratory required per week. Other courses are designated with the symbols ( R ) and ( D ) which in- dicate the number of clock hours of recitation and demonstration offered each week. Undergraduate students may major in logopedics in either the College of Education or the Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. Most students normally take the program in the College of Education. Those wishing to prepare themselves exclusively for employment in community speech and hearing clinics or hospitals 224 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION may wish to pursue the program in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. The major with emphasis in speech pathology consists of 30 hours and includes the following courses: Required-Logopedics 111,212,214, 216, 218,315, 317, 324, 326, 431, and either 417 or 441. Students planning to qualify as speech clinicians in the public school are required to complete, in addition, Logopedics 327, 447 and 448. Optional-Logopedics 132, 415, 432, 435, 436, 437, 455, 461, 462 and 470. The major with emphasis in audiology consists of 30 hours and includes the following courses: Required-Logopedics 111, 212, 214,216, 218, 315, 431, 436, 437, and 441 and 455. OptionuGLogopedics 132, 317, 324, 326, 327, 432 and 435. Undergraduate preparation for emphasis in deaf education con- sists of 30 hours and includes the following courses: Required-Logopedics 111, 212, 214, 216, 218, 315, 317, 326, 431, 432 and 436. Logopedics 441 is required, but may be taken in the first semester of graduate work. TEACHER One full semester of student teaching isEDUCATION: required for all who are working toward certification as a public school speech clinician. In order to complete this requirement, students must take Logopedics 417 and 441 in a clinical setting and 447 and 448 in a public schqol setting for a total of 13 hours credit. The assignment for student teaching begins with the opening of the public school and the student is expected to follow the public school calendar, on a half-day basis, for a semester. Admission into the student teaching semester requires a grade point average of 2.5, a 2.5 average in the major field, a grade of C or higher in Speech 111 or its equivalent, and recommendation of the major department. By arrangement with the Department of Elementary Education, any of these emphases in logopedics may be combined in a dual major with elementary education. The logopedics undergraduate preprofessional major may be applied toward certification by the American Speech and Hearing Association. This certification requires a master's degree (or equivalent) with major emphasis in speech pathology or audiology. MINOR: A minor in logopedics consists of 15 hours and may be utilized in either the College of Education or the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. Arrangements for the minor should be made in consultation with the Department of Logopedics. Logopedics 421 "Speech Defective Child in the Public School" (also cross-listed as Speech 465) is a general survey course; hence, THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 225 it may not be used as part of either a major or minor in logopedics at the undergraduate or graduate level. Corrective training for regularly enrolled University students with speech or hearing disorders may be arranged with the Department of Logopedics. A minimal fee is charged. SPEECH PATHOLOGY Lower Division Courses 111. Introduction to Speech Pathology. (3). 3R; ID. General orientation, history of the field, the place of logopedics among the rofessions, speech and language disorders commonly found, and application o f t h e border sciences to these conditions. 132. Introduction to Clinical Procedures. (2). 2R; 3D. Observation of clinical procedures with handicapped children. 212. The Development of Language. (3). 3R; ID. The study of the acquisi- tion of language in the child from birth to six years of a e. Various acquisi- tion theories are evaluated in the light of current psychofogical and linguistic thought. S ecial emphasis is given to the development of phonology, mor- phology, an! syntax. Prerequisite: Logopedics 111, or concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 111, or department consent. (Offered spring semesters.) 214. Anatomy and Physiology of the Speech and Hearing Mechanisms. (3). A study of the renatal development and basic anatomy of the systems nec- essary for speecK and hearing. The respiratory, phonatory, articulatory and auditory mechanisms will be discussed from a functional point of view. Pre- requisites: Sophomore standing; Logopedics 111, or concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 111, or department consent. (Offered fall semesters.) 216. Introduction to Speech and Hearing Sciences. (2). 2R; ID. Examination of elements in the chain of events that lead to human communication. Speech y d u c t i o n and speech reception will be studied at physiologic and acoustic evels, with primary emphasis on acoustics. Prerequisites: Sophomore stand- ing; Logopedics 111, or concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 111, or depart- ment consent. (Offered spring semesters.) 218. Phonetics: Theory and Application (3) 3R; 1L. The study of physio- logic, acoustic and erceptual specification of speech sounds; a survey of cur- rent phonological tfeory and applications to speech improvement; extensive practice in transcription of speech. Prerequisites: Sophomore standing; Logopedics 111, or concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 111, or department consent. (Offered spring semesters.) Upper Division Courses 315. Clinical Phonetics. (3). 3R; ID. Anatomy of the face, tongue, and mandible. Applied honetics as it relates to articulatory defects. Prerequisite: Logopedics 111 a n k 2 1 8 with grades of C or better, or department consent. 317. Techniques of Speech Pathology. (2). 1R; 3L. Observation of cases in the speech clinic, with emphasis on sim ler types of defects. Routine of record taking, interview and counseling tectniques with parents and professional workers. The use of graphic equipment. Prerequisite: Logopedics 315 with a grade C or better, concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 315, or department consent. 324. Anatomy of Voice. (3). 3R; ID. Anatomy of the pharynx, nose, larynx, and thorax. Disorders from organic and functional changes in the organs of phonation. The normal voice. Prererquisite: Logopedics 315 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 226 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 326. Application of Techniques. (2). 1R; 3L. Supervised application of techniques to cases with simpler problems. Observation of more difficult communicative disorders. Introduction to techniques used with stutterers and aphasics. Prerequisite: Logopedics 324 with a grade of C or better, concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 324, or department consent. 327. Speech Therapy in the Public School: Methods and Procedures. (3). Organization, administration, and professional relationships in ublic school s eech therapy programs on the elementary and secondary schooflevels. Em- Rasis given to procedures and materials for surveyin scheduling, therapy resson planning and record keeping, and utilization o f various instructional media. Prerequisite: 315 and 324 with grades of C or better or consent. (May be taken concurrently with 324.) 415. Organic Anomalies of Speech. (3). 3R; ID. Specific congenital and postnatal anomalies that ~ r o d u c e s eech disorders, including cleft palate and mongolism. Prerequisite: 324 with grade of C or better, con-~ o ~ o ~ e i c s a current enrollment in Logopedics 324, or department consent. 417. Supervised Practicum in Speech Pathology. (3). 2R; 4L. Supervised practice teaching including application of advanced techniques to problems of an organic or neurological etiology. Prerequisite: Logopedics 415 with a grade of C or better, concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 415, or department consent. 421. Speech Defective Child in the Public School. (3). Problems of the speech defective child in the schools relative to emotional handicaps, peda- gogical retardation, etc. Methods for classroom teachers. Also listed as Speech 46.5. 442. Infancy: Pre- and Postnatal Behavior. (2). Development of behavior from the ontogenetic viewpoint in both subhuman and human infants. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 447. Student Teaching in Public School Speech Therapy. (4). One half-time participation in a public school speech therapy program under the guidance of a certified clinician and a college supervisor. Prerequisite: Senior standing, Logopedics 327, and permission of the department. 448. Seminar in Public School Speech Therapy. (3). Taken concurrently with Logopedics 447. Discussion and evaluation of the student teachin experience in the puhlic school speech therapy program on the elementary an2 secondary school levels. 450. Workshop in Logopedics. (1-4). This course will be offered from time to time on various aspects of speech and hearing habilitation. 461. The Neurology of Speech and Language. (4). A consideration of basic neuroanatomy and neurophysiology necessary for an understanding of the representation of language in the human central nervous system and of condi- tions resulting from neurological impairment, such as cerebral palsy and aphasia. Senior standing or department consent. (Offered fall semesters.) 462. Cerebral Palsy. (4). 3R; ID. Problems and training procedures con- cerned with cerebral palsy. Prerequisite: Logopedics 461 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 470. Laboratory Instrumentation. (3). 2R; 3D. Application of and limita- tions of research and clinical instruments employed in the field of logopedics. Prerequisite: 18 hours of logopedics or department consent. 490. Advanced Logopedics. (1-2). Individual study and research on specific problems. (May be repeated.) 491. Selected Topics in Logopedics. (1-3). Individual and group study in a specialized area of communicative sciences and disorders. May be repeated for credit with permission of department. Prerequisite: Department consent. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 227 Graduate Courses 505. Introduction to Graduate Study. (3). Survey of research in the fields of speech pathology, audiology, and voice science. Principles of research pro- cedure. 507. Early Speech Development. (2). Mastery during infancy of elementary speech sounds, patterning of sounds, appearance of words, sentences and mean- ings. Prerequisite: Department consent. 524. Aphasia. (3). 3R; 1D. Various contemporary theories in regard to the cause and neurophysiology of aphasia; modem techniques. Prerequisite: Logopedics 461 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 531. Basic Communicative Sciences I. (3). 3R; 2D. A critical review of pertinent research concerning the physiological bases of speech-respiratory, laryngeal, resonatory and articulatory functions. Prerequisite: Logopedics 470 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 532. Basic Communicative Sciences 11. (3). 3R; 2D. A critical review of research dealing with the perception of speech. Emphasis is also given to techniques of speech synthesis and analysis. Prerequisite: Logopedics 470 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 535. Stuttering. (3); 3R; 1D. Organismal and functional approaches to the problem. 541. Neumphysiology of Communication. (2). Special lectures, seminars, clinical demonstrations, and independent stucly. Prerequisite: Logopedics 461 with a grade of C or better or department consent. 552. Examination Methods in Speech Pathology. (4). 3R; 4D. The differen- tiation of logopedics disorders on an objective basis. Prerequisite: Logopedics 461 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 560. Seminar in Rehabilitation of Speech and Hearing Handicaps. (3). Re- habilitation of adults with various types of organic problems including cerebral palsy, aphasia, hearing loss or other handicaps resulting from organic impair- ments. Prerequisite: Department consent. 562. Presentation of Research. (1-2).A project submitted in thesis manuscript form. Prerequisite: Logopedics 505. May be repeated for a maximum total of two hours credit. 568. Seminar in Clinical Research. (3). Emphasis is given to a review of recently published research which reflects applicability in the clinical setting. Techniques of experimental design are discussed. Prerequisite: Logopedics 505 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 575. Thesis Research. (2). 576. Thesis. (2). 676. Doctoral Dissertation. (1-24). AUDIOLOGY Upper Division Courses 431. Introduction to Audiology. (3). 3R; 1D. History and scope of the field. Elementary anatomy of the ear, auditory testing. Rehabilitation and training of the deaf and hard of hearing. Prerequisite: Logopedics 315 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 435. Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathology of the Ear. (3). 3R; ID.Detailed study of the ear. Prerequisite: Logopedics 431 with a grade of C or hetter, or department consent. 228 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 436. Introduction to Audiometrics. (3). 3R; ID. Techniques and interpreta- tion of hearing tests. Prerequisite: Logopedics 431 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 437. Speech Reading and Auditory Training. (3). 3R; ID. Methods of teaching speech reading. Techniques used in auditory training. Prerequisite: Logopedics 431 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 441. Supervised F'racticum in Speech for the Deaf. (3). 2R; 4L. Supervised application of techniques involving the teaching of speech, speech reading and auditory training to the deaf and hard of hearing child. Prerequisite: Logo- pedics 431 with a gracle of C or better, concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 431, or department consent. 455. Practicum in Audiometrics. (3). 1R; 9L. Application of audiometric techniques u r clinical situations. Prerrquisite: Logopedics 436 with a grade of C or better, concurrent enrollment in Logopedics 436, or department consent. Graduate Courses 510. Auditory Evaluation of Infants and Children. (3). 3R; 1D. Demonstra- tion and practice in assessing auditory functioning of infants and children through 48 months of age; report writing and parent counseling; appropriate instruments and procedures are included. Prerequisite: Logopedics 436 or department consent. (Offered spring semesters.) 514. Hearing Aids. (3). 2R; 6D. Speech audiometry; assessing the useful- ness of residual hearing; the construction and function of hearing aids, prin- ciples and procedures in selecting a hearing aid, and adjustments to a wearable instrument. Prerequisite: Logopedics 436 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. 516. Advanced Clinical Audiology. (3). 2R; 6D. Diagnostic procedures in an audioloeical clinic. Techniaues for administration and interoretation of advanced audiometric tests. prerequisite: Logopedics 436 with a-grade of C or better, or department consent. (Offered in alternate years.) 518. Seminar in Audiology. (3). Principles of the psychophysical dimensions of hearing, functions of the normal ear; problems in industrial noise. Pre- requisite: Logopedics 436 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. (Offered in altemate years.) DEAF EDUCATION Upper Division Courses 432. Introduction to Deaf Education. (3). 3R; ID. Comparison and contrast of the deaf child with the normal child in the areas of physical, mental, social and personality development. Evolution of educational programs and methods used with the deaf. Special aspects of curriculum development in schools and classes for the deaf. Agencies, professional organizations, and journals con- cerned rimarily with education and rehabilitation of the deaf. Prerequisite: ~ o ~ o ~ e i i c s a grade of C or better, or department consent. 431 with 434. Teaching Language to the Deaf. (3). 3R; ID. Evolution of methods. Analysis of language problems and teaching techniques. Prerequisite: Logo- pedics 432 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. (Offered in alternate years.) 438. Teaching Speech to the Deaf. (3). 3R; ID. Current methods. Evalua- tion techniques. Prerequisite: Logopedics 432 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. (Offered in alternate years.) THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 229 439. Teaching School Subjects to the Deaf. (3). 3R; ID. A study of the principles, techniques and methods for teachin school subjects to deaf chil- dren. The development of reading readiness anfreading ability from the point of view of acquiring language facility or achievement in other basic subjects. Prerequisite: Logopedics 432 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. (Offered in alternate years.) 440. Supervised Practicum in Teaching the Deaf. (2). 1R; 6L. Supervised application of techniques involving the teaching of academic material and the development of language for the deaf child. Prerequisite: Logopedics 439 with a grade of C or better, or department consent. (Offered in alternate years.) MILITARY SCIENCE U. S. ARMY ROTC The Army Reserve Officers' Training Corps exists to develop citizen officers for the United States Army. It enables a student to prepare for a position of leadership in either a civilian or military career by earning a reserve Army commission while acquiring his bacca- laureate degree. Outstanding students are designated as Distin- guished hlilitary Students with an opportunity to acquire a regular Army commission. Completion of the ROTC program, coupled with courses in a prescribed field of study enables the college grad- uate to fulfill his military obligation as an officer. Information of Army ROTC scholarships is listed under "Finan- cial Aids and Awards," in this Catalog. Students enrolled at nearby colleges not offering Army ROTC may enroll in the ROTC program at Wichita State University as special students and thereby qualify for a commission. Currently a University graduate who is commissioned through Army ROTC is placed on active duty in the U. S. Army for a max- imum period of two years. Commissionees may apply for active duty for training and serve on active duty for a period of three to six months. Students may be permitted to delay entry upon active duty for a period up to four years in order to pursue graduate level studies. Wichita State University offers two elective ROTC programs. They are designated as the four-year and two-year programs. Four-year Program The four-year program consists of a basic course for freshmen and sophomores and an advanced course for juniors and seniors. Fresh- men and sophomores attend one conference hour each week, plus an additional leadership laboratory hour each week. Enrollment in the basic course does not obligate a student to enter the advanced course. The advanced course requires juniors to attend two conference hours per week in the fall and three conference hours per week in the spring; seniors attend three hours per week in the fall and two 230 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION conference hours per week in the spring. Juniors and seniors must also attend one leadership laboratory hour each week. Advanced course students attend a six-week summer camp between their junior and senior years. Prerequisites for enrollment in the advanced course are as fol- lows : 1. Completion of the basic course or Armed Forces active duty service credit. 2. Physically qualified. 3. Scholastic grade point average of 2.00 or above. 4. Successfullv complete survey and general screening tests. 5. Pass the Officer Qualification Test. The testing and physical examinations are scheduled and arranged by the military science department. Advanced course students receive $100 per month for approxi- mately 20 months. Attendance at summer camp is reimbursed by approximately $500; plus six cents a mile for travel to and from summer camp. Total pay allowances received by an advanced course student is approximately $2,500. The commissioned officer is presented with a uniform, and upon entering active duty, a $300 uniform allowance. During all courses each student is furnished a uniform and rnili- tarv science texts. Extracurricular activities that students may voluntarily participate in are the Pershing Rifles Drill Team, the Scabbard and Blade fraternal organization, and the ROTC Rifle Team. Two-year Program Although designed basically for transfer students from junior col- leges and colleges and universities not offering ROTC, any student who has four semesters of school remaining before qualifying for a degree may enroll in a basic six-week summer camp between his sophomore and junior years. This camp is designed to educate the student in the basic military skills which he would have acquired during the first two years of the four-year program. Pay for this camp is approximately $500. Upon beginning the junior year the two-year program students will then complete the same advanced course as the four-year program student. Prerequisites are the same as those for entry into the four-year advanced course. Army Aviation Training Qualifying ROTC seniors mav participate in an on-campus pilot training program. Thirty-five hours of ground training and 36 hours of flying instruction by an approved FAA school leads to the opportunity to aualify for a private pilot's license. Upon gradu- ation and commissioning, the students are given Army aviation assignments, upon completion of Army aviation training. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 231 Lower Division Courses El13 & S114. First year basic. (1-1). 1C; 1Leadership Laboratory. Historical growth and development of the Army; The United States Army and national security. F223 & S224. Second Year Basic. (1-1). 1C; 1 Leadership Laboratory. Introduction to tactics; map reading; cadet noncommissioner officer training. Prerequisite: Completion of hfS 113 and X,IS 114 or department consent. Upper Division Courses F333 & S334. First Year Advanced. (2-3). 2C-3C; 1 Leadership Laboratory. Branches of the Army; military teaching ~ r i n c i ~ l e s ; Small unit leadership: tactics and communications. Prerequisite for 333: \IS 223 and 224 or basic summer camp. F443 & S444. Second Year Advance. (3-2). 3C-2C; 1Leadership Laboratory. Theory and dynamics of the military team; seminar in leadership and manage- ment; military law; service orientation. MUSIC EDUCATION Lower Division Courses 135. Methods of Teaching Orchestral Instmnlents (violin and viola). Pro- cedures and materials for class and private teaching. Performance and funda- mentals in first position. Theory and reading knowledge of positions two through five. Band and orchestra laboratory. 136. Methods of Teaching Orchestral Instruments (cello and string bass). (1). Procedures and materials for class and private teaching. Application of funda- mental techniques. Knowledge of more difficult positions and special .tech- niques. Band and orchestra laboratory. 137. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instruments (clarinet and saxo- phone). (1). Procedures and materials for class and private teaching. hfajor emphasis on clarinet tone quality, embouchure, and technique. Band ant1 orchestra laboratory. 138. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instruments (flute and double reeds). (1). Procedure and materials for class and private teaching. Reed making. Application of fundamental techniques and study of more advanced techniques. Band and orchestra laboratory. 139. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instruments (brass). (1). Pro- cedures and materials for class and private teaching of all brass instn~ments, emphasizing tone qualities, difference in embouchure, and necessary technique for performance. Band and orchestra laboratory. 140. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instruments (percussion). (1). Procedures and materials for class and private instruction. Application of snare drum fundamentals. Study of basic techniques for all percussion. Band and orchestra laboratory. 142. Survey of Choral Techniques and Literature. (1). A study of basic tech- niques of singing and examination of literature for solo voice, large and small ensembles. Prerequisite: One hour of applied voice. 201. Fundamentals of Vocal Music for Elementary School. (2). The teaching of music in the elementary school, consideration of objectives, examination of materials. For students primarily interested in teachinq music in elemen- tary schools. Includes observation In public schools. Prerequisite: hlusic education major or consent of instructor. 202. Fundamentals of Instrumental Music for Elementary School. (2). Ilate- rials and techniques focused on teaching instrnmenta'l music in the elementary 232 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION schools. Includes observation in the public schools. For students primarily interested in teaching instrumental music in the elementary schools. Prerequi- site: Music education major or consent of instructor. 203. Fundamentals of Vocal Music for Secondary Schools. (2). The teaching of music in the secondary school, consideration of objectives, examination ot materials. For students primarily interested in teaching music in secondary schools. Includes observation in public schools. Prerequisite: Music education major or consent of instructor. 204. Fundamentals of Instrumental Music for Secondary Schools. (2). Tech- niques and materials focused on teaching instrumental music in junior and senior high schools. Emph~s:s on instrumental organi7ntion and administra- tion, pedagogical practices, laboratory experiences, guiding student behavior, evaluation, and professional responsibilities. For students primarily intcrcstcd in teaching instrumental music in the secondary schools. Prerequisite: 1,lusic education major or consent of instructor. 251. Music Fundamentals for the Classroom Teacher. (3). For students plan- ning to teach in the elementary school classroom. Basic fundam-ntals of music with emphasis upon development of student's musical ability in singing, playing piano and classroom instruments. 252. Music Methods for the Classroom Teacher. (3). For the elementary classroom teacher. Development of children's musical growth through singing, listening, rhythmic and creative activities. Prerequisite: Music 251 or consent of instructor. Upper Division Courses 301. Suwey of Vocal Music for Secondary School. (3). An overview of activities in secondary vocal and general music programs. Includes study of objectives for secondary classes, consideration of materials and methods. For students primarily interested in teaching music in the elementary schools. Pry- requisite: X.lusic 201. 302. Suwey of Secondary School Music. (3). Methods and materials used in teaching instrumental music in thv secondary schools. Includps an overview of vocal and general music problems in junior high school. Includes observa- tion in public schools. For studcnts rimarily interested in teaching instru- mental music in the elementary sc l ioo~ . Prerequisite: 1Iusic 202. 303. Survey of Vocal Music for Elementary Schools. (3). An overview of activities in the elementary general music program. Includes study of objectives for elementary classes, consideration of material and methods. For students primarily interested in teaching music in the secondary schools. Prerequisite: Music 203. 304. Survey of Elementary School Music. (3). A survey of activities in th r elementary scliool, including consideration of the general music program and instrumental instruction. For students primarily interested in teaching instru- mental music in the secondary schools. Prerequisite: 204. 306. Music Methods for Early Childhood Education. (3). Methods and material for teaching music in the preschool and kindergarten classroom. Devel- opment of the child's musical growth through singing, listening, rhythmic and creative activities; survey of available materials, and continuation of playing, singing and conducting skills. Prerequisite: Music 251 or consent of instructor. 337. Advanced Techniques in Woodwind Methods. (1). (See Music 337.) 339. Advanced Techniques in Brass Methods. (1). (See Music 339.) 340. Advanced Techniques in Percussion Methods. (1). (See Music 340.) THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 233 401.' Advanced Techniques of Vocal Music for Elementary School. (2). Con- sideration of special problems related to preparation for student teaching: Development of lesson plans, examination of materials, consideration of activities appropriate at each grade level. Includes audiovisual instruction and materials. Prerequisite: hlusic 201 and 301. 402.O Advanced Techniques of Elementary School Music. (2). Emphasis on special problems related to preparation for student teaching; consideration of the instrumental and the general music programs at the elementary level. In- cludes audiovisual instruction and materials. Prerequisite: Music 202 and 302. 403.' Advanced Techniques of Vocal Music for Secondary Schools. (2). Con- sideration of special problems related to preparation for student teaching: Development of plans, examination of materials, consideration of activities appropriate in junior and senior high school music classes. Includes audio- visual instruction and materials. Prerequisite: Music 203 and 303. 404.' Advanced Techniques of Secondary School Music. (2). Consideration of special problems related to preparation for student teaching. Consideration of instrumental ond general musiE programs at the secondary level. Includes audiovisual instruction and materials. Prerequisite: Music 204 and 304. O(Requirement5 for admission to the student teaching semester.) Senior standing. Overall grade average 2.25. Major field grade average 2.50. English 111with C or better or equivalent. Speech 111with C or better. Fd. Ed. 232. Ed. Psych. 333. (Elementary major may elect Ed. Psych. 233.) Physical examination. Students who have taken education courses at other institutions must have such courses validated and a ~ ~ r o v e d . . . Music methods completed: Elementary vocal 201,301. Elementary instrumental 202, 302 (plus Methods 135 through 14GMusic 142.) secondary vocal 203,303. Secondary instrumental 204, 304 (plus Methods 135 through 140-Music 142.) ~ecommendation of department. Application for student teacher semester must be on file with the music education supervisor. Piano proficiency passed. Conducting (217 or 218), (451 or 491.) 406. Comparative Arts for Teachers. (3). Emphasis on the related arts of music, visual art and literature from two approaches; an approach that shows the elements the arts have in common, with an emphasis on creativity; an approach that examines the relationships of the three areas according to basic philosophies. Attention will be given to materials and activities suitable for use in the classroom at various levels. 432. Teaching of Music Literature. (2). (See Music 432.) 450. Music Education Workshop. (1-4). Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 484. String Teaching Seminar. (2). Historical development of string instru- ment teaching. Problems involving traditional and recent techniques. Private study versus class study. School class methods, studio methods, etc. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. 234 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION Graduate Courses 521. Elementary Music Supervision. (3). Trends in elementary music educa- tion; evaluation of various materials and techniques; special projects in planning and executing a modem program of music supervision. Prerequisite: Music Ed. 531. 530. Seminar in Music Theory. (3). (See Music 530.) 531. Developing the Child's Musical Understanding. (3). (See Music 531.) 532. Music in the Junior High School. (3). Elective for MME program. Suggested for credit toward administrative certification. To include admini- trative structures, the curriculum, adolescent development, teaching as be- havior, and competencies needed for successful teaching. 535. Teaching in Music Education Materials (Vocal). (2). (See Music 535.) 541-542. Special Project in Music. (1-3; 1-3). (See Music 511-542.) 545. Seminar in Music Education Materials (Instrumental). (2). (See Music 545.) 551. Psychology of Music. (2). (See Music 551.) (Prerequisite: 552.) 552. Introduction to Graduate Study. (3). (See Music 552.) 554. Research Seminar in Music Education. (3). (See Music 554.) 571. Philosophy of Contemporary Music Education. (2). A study of historical trends and contemporary philosophies of music education, behavioral objectives and curriculum planning. Prerequisite: Music 551. 575. Thesis Research. (2). (See Music 575.) 576. Thesis. (2). (See Music 576.) 584. Instrumental Music in the Elementary and Junior High School. (2). An examination of recent developments in instrumental music education and their implications for methods of teaching. 585. Instrumental Music Organization and Administration. (3). Problems of developing secondary school instrumental music programs. 591-592. Seminar in Music History. (3-3). (See Music 591-592.) 593. Music of Antiquity Through the Renaissance. (3). (See Music 593.) 594. Music of the Baroque Era. (3). (See Music 594.) 595. Music of the 18th Century. (3). (See Music 595.) 596. Music of the 19th Century. (3). (See Music 596.) 597. hfusic of the 20th Century. (3). (See Music 597.) PHYSICAL EDUCATION, HEALTH, AND RECREATION SERVICE PROGRAM All PE 101 activity courses will meet two class periods each week and will carry one hour credit. Such courses will count toward graduation requirements, but will not replace any required aca- demic hours. Juniors and seniors may enroll for three hours of physical educa- THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 235 tion per week for one hour of elective credit, not to replace any academic requirements for graduation. When enrolling in PE 101 activity courses, the course numbers are to be followed in sequence to designate the semesters of activity courses already completed. Physical Education for Men 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108 (1 hour each). Two hours per week to be elected each semester from the following activities: Group Activfties: Basketball, soccer, softball, touch football, speedball, volleyball, and varsity activities. Indiuidual Acti1;ities: Tennis, badminton, golf, bowling, swimming, weight training, adapted physical education. Gymnastics: Tumbling, trampoline, and apparatus. Combatiues: Wrestling, karate. Physical Education for Women 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108 (1 hour each). Two hours per week to be elected each semester from the following activities on the advise of the adviser and in specific instances, the physician. Team Sports: Basketball, field hockey, soccer, speed-a-way, softball, volley- ball. Individrral Sports: Badminton, bowling, tennis, golf, swimming, lifesaving, water safety, gymnastics, track and field events. Dance: Folk dance, square dance, modern dance I, 11, 111, theater dance, social dance, ballet I, 11, 111, and orchesis. Miscellaneous: Outing activities, recreational games, and special restricted activities. Coeducational Physical Education 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108 (1 hour each). Two hours per week to he elected each semester from the Following activities: Group Activities: Volleyball. lndicidual Activities: Tennis, badminton, bowling, swimming, fencing, ice skating, archery, bicycling, mountaineering, canoeing, jogging. Dance: Folk dance, square dance, modem dance, theater dance, social dance, ballet orchesis. Combatiues: Karate. PROFESSIONAL PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS Teachers in Kansas schools in the field of physical education are required to have 24 hours preparation, including a minimum of five hours of health, physiolog!~, first aid, or hygiene, and a minimum of 10 hours in physical education, including teaching methods in physical education. MAJOR: Required-PE 111, 115, 117, 212, 225, 329, 330, 433, and 444. Also PE 101, 102, 103, and 104 (service courses) will be required of all majors. Women majors must enroll in specScally designated sections. In addition to these courses one of the following options must be completed. Options In addition to the professional core requirements, the following options are offered: 236 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION ( A ) (Secondary Physical Education) ( Women) PE 203W, 204 W, 324, 350W, 351W and electives chosen from the professional course offering to complete 40 hours. ( B ) ( Dance) (Women) PE 204W, 212,223,324,350W or 351W, 446 and electives chosen from the following to complete 40 hours: PE 202,203W, 400,424, and .%I. ( C ) (Men) PE 204M1 218M, 311M, 312M, 331, 335M, 336M, and 337M. Men physical education majors must pass a sports skills proficiency examination before being permitted to enroll in PE 31131 or PE 312M. MINOR:The following courses are required in order to complete a minor in physical education: PE 111, 115, 329, and 330. In ad- dition one of the following options must be completed. options ( A ) (Physical Education) (Women) PE 212, 225,203W, 204W, 350W or 351W. Prerequisite for 203W and 204W: Sports in specific areas. Prerequisite for 350W and 351W: Service courses in sports included in each course. ( B ) (Dance) (Women) PE 212, 223, 324, 412, 424, 446. Pre- requisite for professional courses are listed in the Catalog. Dance 101 courses are recommended. ( C ) (Men) PE 204M, 218M, 225, 311M, 312M, 331 and three hotlrs of electives. Men physical education minors must pass a sports skills proficiency examination before being permitted to en- roll in PE 331M or PE 312M. ( D ) (Men and women-Recreation) 202, 212, 225, 226, and 426. Minors with this option may be elected in the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences in accordance with transfer regulations. PROFESSIONAL COURSES Professional courses for physical education, health, and recreation are offered in the College of Education and, unless otherwise indi- cated, are open to both men and women. Course numbers followed by M are for men only; by W for women only. Lower Division Courses 111. Introduction to Physical Education. (2). Prerequisite for professional sequence-A survey study of health, physical education, and recreation as to their identification, purpose, and interrelationship in the total field of education. 115. Personal and Community Health. (3) 117. First Aid. (2). Standard and/or advanced first aid with certification by the American Red Cross. 202. Camp Leadership. (2). 3R. General camping standards and skills. 203W. Officiating Techniques for Women's Sgrts . (3). Includes the study of the philosophies and standards of DGWS, o clating techniques, basic skills, THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 237 testing procedures, and laboratory work. Prerequisite: PE 101 Basketball and Volleyball or consent of department. 204M. Body Mechanics and Gymnastics. (2). A fundamental skills and con- tent laboratory course in gymnastics, desi ed to aid the physical education major in his ability to teach and coach %s activity. Prerequisite: PE 101 Gymnastics or consent of department. 201W. Body Mechanics and Gymnastics. (3). 2R; 3L. Principles of body mechanics and application to gymnastics including free exercise, tumbling, apparatus, and trampoline. Prerequisite: PE 101 gymnastics, or consent. 210. Safety Education. (2). A general survey of the field of safety education. Emphasis on the selection and organization of instructional materials for class- room use. 212. Folk and Square Dance. (2). 1R; 2L. Materials from different countries and teaching methods for high school and recreational groups. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing or department consent. 218M. Fundamentals of Major Sports. (3). The elementary fundamentals of major sports. Emphasis on materials, techniques, theory, and coaching methods. Prerequisite: PE 111. 220M. Rules and Mechanics of Officiating. (2). 2R; 1L. Theory, rules, and mechanics of officiating major sports common to the high school and college athletic program. 223. Introduction to Dance. (2). 2R; 2L. History, philosophy, and basic background work in the field of dance. Prerequisite: One activity course in modern dance. 225. Methods in Elementary School Physical Education. (3). 2R; 2L. A study of the curriculum and methods of teaching physical activities to ele- mentary children. Includes practice in playing and teaching games in the normal progression used in elementary physical education; and field work with children of elementary school age. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. 226. Introduction to Community Recreation. (2). A study of the philosophy, origin and development of modem recreation programs. Upper Division Courses 300. Basic Driver Education and Training I. (3). 301. Advanced Driver Training 11. (3). 311M. Techniques in Physical Education I. (3). 2R; 3L. Emphasis upon development of skill and assimilation of teaching techniques. Activities covered are soccer, golf, bowling, and badminton. Prerequisites: Pass the sports skills proficiency examination in the above activities. 312M. Techniques in Physical Education 11. (3). 2R; 3L. Emphasis upon development of skill and assimilation of teaching techniques. Activities covered are wrestling, tennis, and volleyball. Prerequisite: Pass the sports skills profi- ciency examination in the above activities. 324. Methods in Modern Dance. (2). Teaching techniques and compilation of materials for teaching dance in educational programs. Prerequisite: One semester modem dance or equivalent. 329. Applied Human Anatomy. (3). 3R; 1L .A study of the structure and function of the skeletal and muscular systems of the human body with direct application to body movements in physical activities. Prerequisite: C or better in Biol. 100 or consent of department. 238 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 330. Kinesiology. (3). 3R; 1L. The study of human motion by means of muscular and mechanical analysis. Prerequisite: PE 329 with a grade of C or better or department consent. 331. Athletic Injuries and Training Techniques. (2). 2R; 1L. Injuries com- mon to athletic activities, emphasizing prevention, first aid, treatment and care as prescribed by the team physician. 335M. Football Theory and Organization. (2). Advanced theory of team play, organization and management of competition, etc. Prerequisite: PE 218 or concurrent enrollment. 336M. Basketball Theory and Organization. (2). Theory of basketball, includ- ing methods of teaching fundamentals, individual and team offense and defense, various styles of play, and methods of coaching. Prerequisite: PE 218 or con- current enrollment. 337M. Theory and Organization of Track and Field Athletics. (2). Selection of personnel, conditioning, training, and techniques. Prerequisite: PE 218 or concurrent enrollment. 350W. Methods in Team Sports. (3). 3R; 2L. Techniques and teaching pro- gressions in basketball, softball, hockey, volleybal, and soccer. Organization of classes and contests, practical experience in officiating. Prerequisite: Satis- factory complction of 101 courses in the above sports or consent of instructor. 351W. Methods in Individual Sports. (3). 3R; 2L. Techniques and teaching progressions in golf, tennis, badminton, and archery. Organization of classes and contests, practical experience in officiating. Prerequisite: Satisfactory completion of 101 courses in the above sports or consent of instructor. 400. Health Education. (3 or 3). Health problems and organization of mate- rials for health instruction. Individual projects for graduate students. 412. Methods and Materials in Folk and Square Dance. (2). 2R. Materials selected from American and European countries and teaching methods for school and recreational groups. Will include outside preparation dealing with source materials and methods. Prerequisite: PE 212 or consent of department. 424. Creative Dance in the Schools. (2). Discussion and laboratory work with emphasis on appropriate and sincere expression. Class work, reading, and observation of selected groups. Prerequisite: Modem Dance I or PE 223 or consent of department. 426. Community Recreation. (2). The organization and administration of con~munity recreation. Prerequisite: PE 226. 433. Tests and Measurements in Physical Education. (3). Methods of test construction, critical analysis of published devices, utilization of tests. 436. Camp Administration. (3). Modem practice in cam organization, pro- gram building, business practices, staff training and p i iance . Problems in camping administration. 444. History, Philosophy, Curriculum, and Administration. (4). History, phi- losophy and objectives of physical education. The organizational and adminis- trative problems of the health and physical education programs, and the management of the physical plant and curriculum. 446. Dance Composition and Production. (2). Prerequisite: Modem Dance I or PE 223 or PE 424 or consent of department. 450. Workshop in Education. (1-4). 455. Perspectives on Human Design and Behavior. (3). Survey of concepts from anatomy. medicine, biology, anthropology, neuropsychology-concerned with human form and behavior. Discussion of individual differences. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. (Also Anthro. 455.) THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 239 495. Applied Health I. (2). Introduction to puhlic health problems and practices. Field excursions arranged. Prerequisite: Department consent. 496. Applied Health II. (2). Intensive study of selected health problems with regard to illness prevention and the present state of world health. Prerequisite: PE 495 or department consent. Graduate Courses 500. Recent Literature in Health, Physical Education, and Recreation. (3). Survey and critical analysis of research and other pertinent materials in the field. 510. Adapted Physical Education. (3). Philosophy, principles, and methods of adapting physical education and recreation activities to the needs of the handicapped and the exceptional individual; laboratory experience. Pre- requisite: PE 330 or consent of department. 512. Advanced Techniques in PE. (3). Comprehensive coverage of selected physical activities with special emphasis on class procedures. Laboratory experiences. 515. Problems in Health, Physical Education, and Recreation. (1-4). Directed reading and research under supervision of a graduate instructor. Prerequisite: Department consent. 520. Foundations of Physical Education. (3). Examination of the philosophi- cal and biological basis for physical education. 525. Physical Education in Elementary Schools. (2). New concepts, recent trends, methodology, programming, and supervision. For the elementary teacher and physical education specialist. 540. Seminar in Advanced Methods. (2). Practical solutions for special prob- lems in grading, discipline, programming administration, and motor learning. 550. Analysis of Motor Skills. (3). Techniques of analyzing fundamental motor skills. Selected mechanical principles; fundamental motor skills analyzed in terms of the stated mechanical principles. Prerequisite: PE 330. 557. Seminar in Physical Education Problems. (3). Seminar in major prob- lems in health, physical education, and recreation. Prerequisite: PE 500. 562. Presentation of Research. (1-2). A project submitted in thesis manuscript form. Prerequisite: PE 557. May be repeated for a maximum total of two hours credit. 575-576. Thesis. (2-2). SECONDARY EDUCATION Upper Divlsion Courses 322. Individual Studies in Education. (2-3). (Each semester.) 442. Special Methods in Teaching. (4). Cannot be counted for graduate credit. Prerequisite: Fd. Ed. 232 and Ed. Psych. 333. (Each semester.) A-Art Education in the Secondary Schools. (Same as Art Ed. 442.) B-Field and Laboratory Methods in Biology. D-Methods of Teaching Speech and Dramatic Art. E-The Teaching of English. Preparation for student teaching of English composition, grammar, and literature. Required of all English majors expecting 240 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION to teach in junior and/or senior high schools, and strongly recommended for all English minors expecting to teach English in junior and/or senior high schools. Prerequisite: Completion of the requirements of the English department for English majors and minors planning to teach English in junior and/or senior high schools. F G T h e Teaching of Foreign Langrrages. Methods of teaching foreign languages, based on the audiolingual approach and applied linguistics con- trasted with traditional methods. Lahoratory techniques, transition into reading and writing, planning, evaluation of student progress. Required of all foreign language majors expecting to teach in junior and senior high schools; strongly recommended for all minors expecting to teach. H-Methods of Teaching the Social Studies in Secondary Schools. Prepara- tion for student teaching in history, political science, economics, sociology and psychology. hleaning and content of the broad field of the social studies, materials for instruction, preparation of teaching units, and evaluating instruc- tion and student progress in the social studies. I-Methods of Teaching lndirstrial Education. Selection and arrangement of teaching content, methods of teaching, lesson planning, courses of study, testing and grading shop work, evaluating pupil progress, securing industrial education positions, and professional responsibility of the shop teacher. P-Afethods in Physical Education. Presentation and participation in methods of teaching vhvsical education. Emvhasis on techniaues. skills. orna- -A , , nization of activities, and classroom procedure. R-Methods in Teaching Science and Mathematics. Preparation of the student for teaching in hiological science, physical science, or mathematics. Materials for instruction, preparation of teaching units and evaluating instruc- tion and student progress in the sciences or in mathematics. S-Special Alethods of Business Education. Prerequisite: Sec. Tr. 234 or Data Processing, Sec. Tr. 237, Acctg. 113 and 114. 443. Methods of Teaching in the Comprehensive General Shop. (3). 2R; 3L. Preparation for teaching industrial arts in the comprehensive general shop. Emphasis is placed upon theory. organization, and operation of a compre- hensive general shop program. Prerequisite: Department consent. (Spring.) 447. Student Teaching. (Each semester.) The student teaching semester is required of all those who are working toward a secondary certificate, and is a full-time assign- ment. Applications for approval to enroll in this program must be made to the coordinator of student teaching by March 1 of the semester prior to the year in which the student intends to enroll. In addition, students must obtain approval from the representative of the subject area in which they wish to student teach before placement will be considered. It is expected that students will student teach in their field of major interest. However, individuals who are well prepared in more than one field may apply to student teach in a second field. Those desiring to student teach in two fields must take the special methods course in the seconcl field before entering the student teaching semester. The assignment for student teaching begins with the opening of the public school semester, and enrollees must arrange to meet from 8 a.m. to 5 p. m. daily and to be available for selected evening programs throughout the semester. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 241 Credit for the student teaching semester will be entered on the transcript according to the following distribution: Fd. Ed. 428." Social Aspects of the Teaching Process. (2 or 3). Ed. Psych. 433. Psychological Aspects of the Teaching Process (2 or 3). Sec. Ed. 442. Methods in Teaching (4). Sec. Ed. 447. Student Teaching. (7). Prerequisite: Senior standing, Fd. Ed. 232, Ed. Psych. 333, and department consent. Total-16 or 17 semester hours. 450. Workshops in Education. (1 to 4). 452. Special Studies in Education. (1-5). (a) Mathematics, (b) health and physical education, (c) language arts, (d) reading, (c) recent innovation, ( f ) science, (g) sociil studies, (h) other areas. Courses designed for secondary school teachers. Only one preselected area will be eniphasized during a semester. (Prerequisite: Teacher certification or consent of instructor.) This course may be repeated with adviser's consent. 455. Aerospace-Aviation Education. (3). For those who have an interest in aviation education and particularly for those who plan to teach aviation in the secondary schools. There are two parts: (1)Aeronautical knowledge of thc airplane and of flight and (2) general knowledge about aviation and aerospace. Part I will include the basic ground school subjects of aerodynamics, structures and propulsion, meteorology, navigation, communication and federal aviation regulations. Part I1 will present information concerning occupational op- portunities and the influence of powered flight on modem society. Graduate Courses 529. Secondary School Curriculum. (3). Basic curriculum concepts neces- sary to meet the needs of high school youth are studied. Major emphasis upon the conversion and improvement of high school curriculum to comprehensive designs, college preparatory and vocational, with studies of methods of cur- riculum evaluation. 530. Trends and Innovations in Secondary Education. (3). Emphasis is placed upon the factors bearing upon the development of a qualitative learning en- vironment in the secondary school and the evaluation of current trends in the secondary school. X4odular scheduling, team teaching, educational t e l ~ \ . i ~ i o n ,ind interaction analysis are indicati\e of topics presented. 535. Problems in Teaching at the Secondary Level. (3). A course designed to study in depth new curricular designs and emphases in specific disciplines at the secondary level. Particular attention will be devoted to examining the latest curricular developments, new techniques in teaching, research in second- ary education and new materials available in secondary disciplines. Students will be encouraged to place emphasis in their study upon the disciplines in which they teach. 536. Problems in Teaching Social Studies at the Secondary Level. (3). A course designed to study in depth new curricular designs and emphases in secondary social studies. Particular attention will bc devoted to examinin:! the latest social studies curriculun~ developn~ents, new techniques for teaching the social studies, research in social studies education, and new ~naterials avail- able to the secondary social studies teacher. 537. Problems in Teaching Science at the Secondary Level. (3). A course designed to study in depth new c~~rr icular designs and emphases in srcondary school science. Particular attention will be devoted to examining the latest science curriculum developments, new techniques for teachinfi the sciences, 'Fd. Ed. 427 may be selected in lieu of Fd. Ed. 428 in order to reduce the load in the student teaching semester. 242 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION methods of conducting research in sciencc education, and new materials avail. able to the seconclary science teachcr. (Summer.) 538. The Core Cumculum. (3). The study of the theory and philosophv of the core curriculum with ~ractical application of aspects of this curricul;~~. organization to various fields of study. (Spring, summer.) 548. Teaching Reading in the Secondary School. (3). Emphasis upon th:: teaching of reading in the content areas. Secondary teaching experience or consent. (Spring, summer.) 550. Special Problen~s in Education. (1 to 4). Directed reading and researcl~ under supenision of a graduate instructor. Prerequisite: Department consent. (Each semester.) 557. Seminar in Secondary Education. (3). (Each semester.) 562. Presentation of Research. (1-2). A project submitted in thesis manu- script form. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 560. May be repeated far maximum of two hours credit. (aach semester.) 575-576. Master's Thesis. (2-2). Required for hlaster of Arts degree. Pre- requisite: Ed. Psych. 360. (Each semester.) FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION Lower Division Courses 232. Introduction to the Study of Teaching. (4). Public education in the United States: History, trends, organization and finance, curricululi~, and purpose. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. Grade of "C" or better in Engl. 111. (Each semester.) Upper Division Courses 425. History of Education. (3). Education's career in relation to othrr in\titu- tions (political, rcligious, etc.) in promotin2 and inhibiting social change. Pre- requisite: Fd. Ed. 232. (Summer.) 426. Comparative Education. (3). Education systems of selected nations in terms of their unique structures and pervasive problems. 427.' Educational Sociology. (3). Attention is given to the contributions o l sociology and anthropology to the understanding of the scl~ool and it\ position in relation to contemporary social problems. Prerequisite: Fcl. Ed. 230. hlny be substituted for 428 in student teaching semester. (Sot open to those who have had Fd. Ed. 428.) (Each semester.) 428. Social Aspects of Education. (3). Part of the secondary student t-ach- ing block. For description, see Fd. Ed. 427 above. (Fall, spring.) 429.' Philosophy of Education. (3). Introduction to the analysis of concepts such as mind. experience and knowledge in their relationship to educational problems and practices and to pllilosophical systems. Prerequibite: Fd. Ed. 232 or Phil. 121. (Spring.) 449. Education Anthropology. (3). A course dealing with the basic concepts of anthropology and their ~~pplicationto social science units in elementary and secondary school. Explores the nature of subcultures in American society and the problems they pose for the classroom teacher. A course for education majors and graduate students. (Also listed as Anthro. 449.) (Fall.) O Prerequisites may be waived for equivalent experience by department consent. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 243 486' Education and Cultural Change. (3). The role of education in tlie developing nations of Africa, Asia and Latin America. Prerequisite: Fd. Ed. 426. 489.' Theories of Knowledge and the Curriculum. (3). What does it mean to "know" in the various curriculum areas, and what methods and measure- ments are implied? Prerequisite: Fd. Ed. 429 or consent. Graduate Courses 526. Humanistic Foundations of Education. (3). The philosophic, historic and literary foundations of modern education. Emphasis will be on recent scholarship in these areas. (Fall, Summer.) 529.' Educational Classics. (3). Depth study of master works, ancient and modem, in education. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Prerequisite: Six hours of Fd. Ed. 534.' Basic Concepts of Citizenship. (3). Basic principles of citizenship as found in great treatises are discussed in the context of the democratic American tradition. Prerequisite: Six hours of Fd. Ed. STUDENT PERSONNEL AND GUIDANCE Upper Division Courses 450. Workshop in Education. (1-4). 452. Special Studies in Education. (1-5). (e) recent innovations, (h)other areas. Course designed for students with personnel and guidance interests. Different preselected areas may be emphasized during a semester. This course may be repeated with adviser's consent. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Graduate Courses 501.' Principles and Philosophy of Guidance. (3). The development of a guidance philosophy and a survey and study of the several guidance services that are part of the modern elementary and secondary school guidance pro- gram. Not open to students with credit in SPG 423. 502. Introduction to Interaction Processes. (1). A laboratory approach to an examination of the counselor's role in the counseling rocess. Designed to aid the prospective counselor increase ersonal understanXing of self as a variable in the counseling process. (~ i rn i tegto SPG majors. To be taken concurrently with SPG 501. Not open to students with credit in SPG 424. May not be taken concurrently with SPG 525.) 503.' Counseling Theory. (2). A study of selected theories of counseling. Prerequisite: SPC 501 or concurrent enrollment. 505. Educating the Poorly Adjusted Individual. (3). Perceptual approach to the problems of emotionally disturbed and/or delinquent children and youth in both elementary and secondary schools. 506. Children of Poverty. (3). A perceptual approach to children and outh whose adjustment problems appear to be related to poverty in the a&uent society. 510. Guidance Services for the Elementary School. (2). Examination of the role of the guidance counselor and techniques appropriate to guidance services in an el~mentary school setting. Prerequisite: SPG 501. Recommended: SPG 505 or SPG 506. Prerequisites may be waived for equivalent experience by deparbnmt consent. 244 THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 520." Occupational Information. (2). The classification, collection, evalua- tion, and use of information materials in a guidance program. Study of cur- rent occupational trends and developments, and theories of occupational choice. Prerequis~te: SPG 501 or concurrent enrollment. 523." Psychometric Procedures in Counseling. (3). Survey and study of standardized tests and their application in counseling with an emphasis on their selection, use, and interpretation. Study of the basic concepts ertaining to the interpretation of psychological tests and inventories incluing basic measurement theory and the factors involved in the selection of tests. Pre- requisite: SPG 501, Ed. Psych. 504 or concurrent enrollment. 524. Techniques of Counseling. (3). Through simulated counseling situations and extensive examination of counseling case studies, techniques of counseling are examined and practiced. Prerequisite: SPG 503. 525. Group Techniques in Guidance. (2). Laboratory a proach to the study of group formation, process, and communication as a tool for guidance services. Prerequisite: SPG 501 or concurrent enrollment. 533. Administration of Guidance Services. (3). Administration theory with emphasis for the SPG major on relating theory to the problem of administration of guidance services. Prerequisite: 15hours SPG. 550. Special Problems in Guidance. (1-4). Directed reading and research under supervision of a graduate instructor. Prerequisite: Department consent. 555. Individual Intelligence Testing in the Public School. (3). Use of individ- ual tests for appraisal of intelligence. Prerequisite: SPG 523 or concurrent enrollment and consent of department. 556. Practicum in Individual Counseling. (3). (May be repeated.) Supervised practice in individual counseling. Prerequisite: SPG 524 and consent of instructor. 557. Seminar in Guidance. (2). Prerequisite: 15 hours in SPG sequence. 558. Diagnostic Testing. (3). Practice in the interpretation and evaluation of commonly used test results and student records to develop an educational diagnosis and a remediation program for individual students in the public schools. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 501, SPG 555 and consent of instructor. 562. Presentation of Research. (1-2). A project submitted in thesis manuscript form. Prerequisite: Ed. Psych. 560. May be repeated for a maximum of two hours credit. 566. Practicum in Guidance Services. (3). Supervised work in administration, test interpretation, group counseling, and other activities of the guidance coun- selor. Prerequisite: SPG 533 and consent of instructor. 567. Practicum in Group Guidance and Counseling Methods. (3). Supervised practice in group @dance and group counseling. Prerequisite: SPG 525 and SPG 556 and consent of instructor. 575-576. Master's Thesis. (2-2). Required for a Master of Arts degree. Pre- requisite: Ed. Psych. 560. 0 Prerequisites may be waived for equivalent experience by department consent. THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 245 _ _ E ~ l p i n c e ~ . i r ~ ~ inclrrde holograph!/ and laser facilities pl~otogr.nph!j, a plasmn tunnel and minicomprrter systcms. - m _ . 246 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING CHARLES V. JAKOWATZ, PhD, Dean The many recent technological developments in engineering have resulted in considerable modification of engineering curricula. TO meet such technological needs, the College of Engineering is dedi- cated to providing a vigorous and challenging experience to all students admitted to engineering. In particular, the curriculum includes a great breadth of subject material covering a broad spec- trum of fundamental technical knowledge. In addition to such technical material, the engineering programs contain a sufficient number of courses in humanities. social sciences. communications. mathematics and physical sciencks. A proper balance in the cur: riculum prepares the students to hold professional positions in the scientific-industrial community after the BS degree, or prepares him by means of additional graduate offerings for a more active participation in research and advanced study.- The faculty provides the student with a basic core of knowledge including a large portion of scientific and analytical tools which will be required for the complex problems he is likely to face as an engineering leader. Thus, the student is being prepared for real- world problems which he will continually encounter throughout his profesional career. Because of the diverse nature of engineering subject material, the College of Engineering is organized into several degree granting departments. Curricula offerings in aeronautical, electrical, indus- trial and mechanical engineering are available at the Bachelor of Science level. The Master of Science degree is offered in aeronauti- cal, electrical, engineering mechanics and mechanical engineering. A cooperative PhD program with the University of Kansas in the field of aeronautical engineerin? is available for graduate work bevond the master's level. See Graduate Bulletin for greater detail. L, The curricula of the various de~artments at the under~raduate - level contain a large portion of common courses (two years being common) with provisions for specialized departmental offerings in the following years. The student is allowed ample flexibility within a chosen major field to study select areas outside the "engineering core subjects." Detailed program requirements for the majors in the various engineering fields are given under depart- mental offerings. The programs in engineering are offered in daytime and evening classes. The courses are the same whether they are taught in the daytime or at night. The curricula on the following pages are ar- COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 247 ranged for full-time sequences and contain all the requirements for the various undergraduate degrees. The curricula of the departments of aeronautical engineering, electrical engineering and mechanical engineerins are accredited by the Engineers' Council for Professional Development. Programs leading to the h4aster of Science degree are offered in the departments of aeronautical, electrical and mechanical engineer- ing. The Doctor of Philosophy degree in aeronautical engineering is offered in cooperation with the University of Kansas. ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS Students may enter the College of Engineering from University College, other degree granting colleges within the University, or other universities and colleges, provided they have completed 24 semester credit hours with a 2.00 grade point index. A student with less than 72 credit hours with less than a 2.00 but more than a 1.70 grade point index will be admitted to the College of Engineering on probation provided he has not been academically dismissed from the entering institution. A student with more than 72 credit hours with less than a 2.00 grade point index will be admitted on probation provided he has not been academically dismissed from the entering institution and subject to the approval of the Engineering Exceptions Committee. Particular attention is called to Mathematics 142 as a first semester offering in the engineering sequence of courses. A pre- requisite for Math 142 is Math 141 or equivalent. Mathematics 141. Algebra and Trigonometry. (5). Functions, theory of equations and inequalities, complex numbers. the trigonometric functions, ex- ponential and logarithmic functions, and other standard topics prerequisite to a beginning study of analysis. Prerequisite: One and one-half units of high school algebra or Math 52, and one unit of high school geometry or Math 60. (For those shldents who doubt the adequacy of their mathematical preparation, a placement examination is available for advisory purposes.) Mathematics 142. Introductory Analysis I. (5). Analytic geometry and the Calculus in an interrelated form. Prerequisite: Math 141 with a C or better or two units of high school alqebra, one unit of high school geometry, and one- half unit of high school triqonometry. (For those shldents who doubt the adequacy of the~r high school preparation. a placement examination is available for advisory purposes.) Engineering students who do not have high school physics will be permitted to register for Physics 123. These students will then normally be required to take Physics 244E when they have fulfilled the prerequisites for this course. (Prerequisite to Physics 244E: Math 243 with a grade of C or better and Physics 123 with consent of the department, or Physics 243E). Students who have had high 248 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING school physics should prepare themselves with the proper mathe- matics prerequisites and enter the Physics 243E-244E sequence. PROBATION AND DISMISSAL STANDARDS PROBATION A student will be placed on probation for the next term in which he enrolls if his cumulative grade point index falls below 2.00. The student remains on probation if he earns at least a 2.00 grade point index in the term during which he is on probation and his cumulative grade point index does not yet meet 2.00. Probation is removed when the cumulative grade point index reaches the reauired level. A student also will be placed on probation for the next term in which he enrolls if his engineering major grade point index falls below 2.00 (the engineering major consists of the 43 hours of engi- neering core courses and the courses required by the student's engi- neering department). A student will not be placed on probation until he has completed 12 or more hours in his major at Wichita State University. The student remains on probation if he earns at least a 2.00 engineering major grade point index in the term during which he is on probation and his cumulative engineering major grade point index does not yet meet the minimum standards. Probation is removed when the engineering major grade point index reaches the required level. A student on probation for not meeting either the required cumu- lative or the required engineering major grade point index may not enroll for more than 12 semester hours in an 18-week term, or six semester hours in a summer term, plus one hour of military or air science, physical education, or marching band. Exceptions to this limitation may be made on recommenclation of the student's adviser with the approval of his dean. Such exception is to be recorded by the Committee on Admission. Advanced Standing, and Exceptional Programs. ACADEMIC DISMISSAL A student is subject to academic dismissal from the College of Engi- neering if he fails to satisfy the following criteria: (1) if he is on probation because of his cumulative grade point index and if his grade point index for the term during which he is on probation falls below 2.00.' * h'o student on probation h e c a i i r ~of a drficirnt cr~mulativr grade point index shall be placed on academic dismissal for failure to raise this index until he accumulates 12 or more hours. When such a student has accumulated 12 or more hours, the comulative grade point index including the-sc hours shall he uscd to rletern3ine whether he shall be acadernicallv dismissed. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 249 ( 2 ) if he is on probation because of his cumulative engineering major grade point index and if his engineering major grade point index for the term during which he is on probation falls below 2.00.f READMISSION A student who h a s failed to m ~ e t the necessary scholastic require- ments and has been academically dismissed my apply to the Col- lege of Engineering Exceptions Committee for readmission consid- eration. It is the student's responsibility to supply the committee with suficient reason for readmission consideration. Students are expected to maintain a "C" average in all work for which they are registered for credit during any semester. Failure to maintain this standard implies the advisability of limiting the student's program. No student shall be allowed credit toward graduation for D grade work in excess of one-quarter of total hours. At the end of the first eight weeks in each semester, reports of unsatisfactory grades are set to the student. CORE CURRICULUM The curriculum in engineering is common for the first two years. For administrative purposes, the student is requested to choose a departmental curriculum in which to study. Change to another curriculum may be made during this period without loss of credit toward graduation. Each of the curricula consists of three parts: ( 1 ) The general requirements of the University, ( 2 ) an "engineering core" program, and ( 3 ) specialized department courses. As a portion of the general requirements of the University, the student must elect four hours of University core electives, as speci- fied elsewhere in the Catalog. Every engineering student is required to complete a total of 43 hours of courses from the following "engineering core courses." Some of these courses are required as departmental prerequisites for the departmental offerings; the remainder of courses should be selected in consultation with a faculty adviser. 43 Hours Engineering Core Required Engr. 100, Engr. Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 IE 110, Graphics I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Engr. 125, Intro. to Engr. Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 IE 213, Graphics I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 IE 254, Engr. Probability and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 AE 223,Engr. Mech.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 f No student on probation because of a deficient engineering major grade point index shall he placed on academic dismissal for failwe to raise this index until he accumulates three or more engineering major courses. When such a student has accr~mulated three or more engineering major cowses, the cumulative engineering major grade point index, in- cluding the hours for the last thrce or more courses, shall be used to determine whether he shall he academically dismissed. 250 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AE 227, Engr. Dig. Comp. . . . ME 298, Thermodynamics I . . . . EE 382. Elec. Dvnamics . . . . . . . AE 373: Ennr. ~ e c h . I1- - ~- EE 392; EI;.~ Circuits . . . . . . . . . Engr. 361, Fluid and Head Flow AE 398. Svstems Dvnamics . . . . . Engr. 363,'E. M. ~ i e l d. . . . . . . . ME 369, Energy Conversion . . . AE 333, Mech. of Matls. . . . . . . . AE 347, Sci. Engr. Matls. . . . . . . Engr. 464, Field Analysis . . . . . . . AE 399, Exp. Mech. Lab. . . . . . The recommended sequence of courses for all engineering stu- dents is outlined below. This sequence has been planned for com- pletion of the program in the minimum time and to satisfy all University course requirements and prerequisites for engineering students. Anv deviation from this srauence should be discussed with the engineering faculty adviser. A student may elect to take courses outside his major under the creditino credit option. Under the option the grade for the course is recorded as "credit" if the student performs at a C or better level, and. "no credit" if class performance is below the C level. A course major is defined as follows: "All courses in the Catalog Sequence of Courses (courses required for graduation designated by a course number) are considered as required courses for a student's major. In technical elective courses, a course will be considered a major if taken in the department in which the student is majoring." Credit/no credit-courses are allowed up to a 24 hour maximum and not more than two courses per semester. SEQUENCE OF COURSES AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING Rapid progress in the development of airplanes, missiles, and space vehicles presents challenging opportunities for engineers interested in research, development, design, and teaching. A strong funda- mental knowledge in mathematics, physics, and the engineering sciences is required of those persons n7ho will contribute to future developments in aeronautical and astronautical engineering. The curriculum in this field offers students an opportunity to develop this foundation and acquire competence in professional fields such as aerodynamics, flight and orbital mechanics, propul- sion, contro! systems, and structural mechanics. Emphasis is placed on the fundamental principles involved in aeronautical engineering so that graduates will be prepared to contribute to this rapidly changing and gro\ving field \vith its wide variety of engineering applications. Engineers trained in this field also may find challeng- COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 251 ing careers in other industries which are making use of many ad- vanced concepts similar to those developed in the aeronautical field. The program requires the completion of 132 semester hours for graduation, less hours commensurate with honors and advanced placement credit. FRESHMAN Course F ~ S TSEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. Engl. 111 College English . . . . . . . . . . 3 Communications Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Math. 14d, Intro. Analysis I . . . . . . . . 5 Math. 243, Intro. Analysis II . . . . . . . . 5 IE 110 Engr. Graphics I . . . . . . . . . .. 2 IE 213, Engr. Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chern. '111, General Chemistry . . . . . . 5 Physics 243E. Gen. College Physics . . . 4 University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 2 Universiay Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SOPHOMORE Course Fmsr SEMESTER Hrs. Course S ~ c o mSEMESTER Hrs. Speech 111. Extern. Speaking . . . . . . . 2 Math. 346. Differential Equation . . . . . 3 Math. 244 Intm. Analysis 111 . . . . . . . . 3 IE 254, Engr. Prob. and Statistics . . . . 3 Physics 2443, Gen. College Physics.. . . 4 AE 373, Engr. Mechanics I1 . . . . . . . . 3 AE 223. Engr. Mechanics I . . . . . . . . . 3 ME 298, Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . 3 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 4 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 3 University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . - 1 University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . - 1 17 18 JUNIOR Course Fmsr SEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. -IF .3?3. 'i~rhnnics of Matrls. . . . . . . 3 AE 347 Sci. of Engr. Matrls. . . . . . . . . 3 Engr. 361, Fluid and Heat Flow . . . . 4 AE 324: Aerodynamics Theory . . . . . . . 3 EE 382, Electrical Dynamics . . . . . . . . 4 Physics 311, Modern Physics . . . . . . . . 3 Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 3 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . - 3 - 17 16 SENIOR Course F m s ~ SEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. AE 425, Flight Struc. I . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 AE 426, Flight Struc. Lab. . . . . . . . . . . 1 AE 412 Exper. Methods in AE . . . . . . 2 AE 417. Projects in A E . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 AE 414: Flight Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . 3 AE Technical Electives t . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 AE 416, Super. Aerody. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Engr. Core Electives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Engr. Core Elective 4 . . . . . . . . . . 3 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 6 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 3 Course HTS. Course Hrs. AE 227, Ener. Digital Camp. . . . . . . . 2 AE 399. Exper. Mechanics Lab. . . . . . . 1 Engr. 363, Elecbomag. Fields . . . . . . . 2 EE 392, Electronic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . 4 Engr. 464, Field Analysis . . . . . . . . . . 3 Engr. 100, Engr. Perspectives . . . . . . . . 1 ME 369, Energy Conversion . . . . . . . . . 3 Enpr. 125, Intro. to E n s . Concepts . . . 2 AE 398, System Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . 3 Engineering core electives totaling at least 13 hours must be chosen from the fol- lowing courses: t, Trchnical electives may be chosen from any course numbered 300 or above in engi- neennc, math., or any of the physical sciences, with the exception of BSAE required courses. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Jn the electrical engineering department emphasis is placed on the intensive study of physical laws as appropriate to the study of moJern electrical devices, inc l~~dina The lawselectrical machines. governing the individual behavior as well as behavior in the inter- connection of rlevices is particularly emphasized. Analysis and 252 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING synthesis of electrical networks, or systems, is of particular concern in specialized courses. The undergraduate program in electrical engineering is sufficiently flexible so that a student may choose a program particularly appropriate to communication systems, modern control theory, computers, energv conversion, network and system theory, biomedical engineering, and general electronics. Students in this curricula are reauired to have a strong - interest in mathematics and physics. As a part of the curriculum, students at the senior level are required to take a senior project of their own choosing under the supervision of a faculty member. The choice of subject material is varied, and represents a challenge to the student to exercise judgment ant1 creitivity in analysis or design. This program r e q u i r e ? the completion of 133 semester hours for g r a d u a t i o n , less hours commensurate with honors and advanced placement credit. The specific requirements and suggested semester breakdown for the electrical engineering program is as follows: FRESHMAN Course F ~ S TSEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. Engl. 111 CbUege English . . . . . . . . . . 3 Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Math. 14d, Intro. Analysis . . . . . . . . . . 5 Communications Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Chem. 111, General Chemistry . . . . . . . 5 Math. 243, Intro. Analysis I . . . . . . . 5 Speech 111. Ext. Speaking . . . . . . . . . . 2 Physics 243E. Gen. College Physics . . . 4 - Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . - 3 1 5 17 SOPHOMORE Course F ~ S TSEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. AE 227. Engr. Digital Comp. . . . . . . . 2 AE 373 Engr. Mech. II . . . . . . . . . . . 3 AE 223, Engr. Mech. I . . . . . . . . . . . 3 EE 382: Electrical Dynamics . . . . . . . . 4 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 2 ME 298,Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . 3 IE 254. Engr. Prob. and Statistics . . . 3 Math. 346, Diffrrmtial Eq. . . . . . . . . . . 3 Math. 244. intro. Analysis III . . . . . . . 3 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 3 Physics 244E. Gen. College Physics . . . 4 JUNIOR Course Fmsr SEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. ~ ~ g r .381, Fluid and Heat Flow . . . 4 Env . 363, E. M. Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 E ~ core ~ l . ~ ~ t i ~ ~ 3 Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3~ ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . EE 392 Electronic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . 4 EE 480. Trans. and Freq. Anal. . . . . . . 4 physics '311,Topics in Mod. Physics . . 3 ME 369. Energy Convenion . . . . . . . . . 3 ~ ~ and social ~ i t . . . . . . .~ 3~ Technical Electives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ~ science i Humanities and Social Science . . . . . . . 3 SENIOR Course FIRST SEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs.- - - ~~ Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 EE 495, Elec. Design h j . 11 . . . . . EE 485. Elec. Design Pmj. I . . . . . . . . 1 Technical Electives . . . . . . . . . . . . EE 486. Information Roc. . . . . . . .. . . 4 Humanities and Social Science . . . . Technicd Electives . . . . . . . . . . . 2 University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . Humanities and Social Science . . . 4 University Core Elective . . . . . . . 2 - 17 -. Technical electives may be chosen from ( a ) any 300 or 400 level EE course which was not required (a t least six hours of technical electives must be selected from EE courses) ( b ) any 300 or 400 level engineering core course over and above the basic core requirement. ( c ) selected courses in mathematics and engineering outside the EE depart- ment with the approval of the student's advisor. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 253 - - INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING The Department of Industrial Engineering is concerned with instruction and research in the design, analysis, and operation of integrated systems of men, material, equipment, and money. In addition to a strong interest in the solution of current, real prob- lems found in indt~strv, the curricula is devoted to the preparation of students \\rho can examine ancl analyze problem areas that are amenable to a systcm's engineering approach. Sixteen hours of inrlustrial engineering electives allows the student to tailor his prnTran1 in one of the following primary options: ( 1) Operations research, ( 2 ) manufacturing systems, and ( 3 ) information systems. This scheme is completely flexible so that a student mav specialize in a specific aspect of industrial eneineering. A student's program is determined by his own special interests and in consultation with his major adviser. A modern. well equipped laboratorv is also available to supple- ment classroom theory in human factors engineering, manufactur- ing processes, work measurement, and factory planning. In addition, the industrial engineering department has the responsibility for teaching all engineering graphics courses. To accomplish this end, the department maintains modern drafting rooms and drafting facilities. Also, the clepnrtment is seeking to develop a modem sequence of engineering graphics courses oriented toward digital computer applications. The industrial engineerinq program requires the completion of 133 semester hours for grac'u-rtion, less hours commensurate with honors and advanced placement credit. FRESHMAN Course FIRSTSEMESTER Hrs. Course SEMESTERS E C O N ~ Hrs. Engl. Ill College English . . . . . . . . . 3 Communications Elective . . . . . . . . 3Math. 1 4 5 Intro. Analysis I . . 5 S eech 111. Extempt. Speaking . . . 2Chem. 111. General Chemisby . . . 5 d t h . 249, Intro. Analysis I . . . . . . . . . 5 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . 3 IE 110, Engr. Graphics I . . . . . . . . . 2 University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Phys. 243E. Gen. College Physics . . 4 - University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . - 1 17 17 SOPHOMORE Course Fmsr SEMESTER Hrs. Course SECONDSEMESTER Hrs. AE 227, Engr. Dig. Comp. . . . . . . . . . 2 IE 254,Engr. Prob. and Statistics . . . . 3 AE 223,Engr. Mechanics I . . . . . . 3 Math. 346. Diff. Equations . . . . . . . . . . 3 Physics 244E,Gen. College Physics . . 4 ME 298, Thermodynamics I . . . . . . . . . 3 IE 213. Engr. Gra hics I1 . . . . . . . . . 2 AE 333. Mech. of Materials . . . . . . . . 3 Math. 244, Intro. xnalysis III . . . 3 AE 373, Engr, Mechanics II . . . . . . . . 3 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . 2 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . 2 University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 17 18 JUNIOR Course Fmsr SEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. Engr. 361 Fluid and Heat Flow . . . . . 4 IE 355. Engineering Economy . . . . . . . 3 EE 382, Blectrical Dynamics . . . . . . . . 4 Physics 311, Topics in Mod. Physics . 3 IE 352. Work Measurement . . . . . . . . . 3 IE Electives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . 2 Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . . 2 254 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING - - SENIOR Course FIRST SEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. IE Electives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 IE Electives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . . 5 Humanities or Social Sciencw . . . . . . . . 8 Engr. Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 14 16 Engineeeg core electives may be selected from the following courses in consultation with the malor adv~ser, Engr. 363, E. M. Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 2 AE 399, Exp. Mechanics Lab. . . . . . . . . 1 AE 347, Science of Engr. Matrls. . . . . 3 Engr. 464 Field Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ME 369, Energy Conversion . . . . 3 Enm. 100: Engr. Perspectives . . . . . . . . 1 EE 392. Electronics Circuits . . . . . . . 4 Enqr. 125, Intro. to Engr. Concepts . . . 2 AE 398. System Dynamics . . . . . . . . . 3 Indudrial engineering electives may selected from the following courses with the approval of the student's major adviser. IE 257 Tool Design I . . . . . . . . . . . IE 452 Factory Planning . . . . . . . . . . . 3 IE 356 Intro. to Num. Control . . . IE 453 Production Control . . . . . . . . . . 3 IE 357 Safety Engineering . . . . . . . . . IE 4.54 Statistical Quality Control . . . 3 IE 401 hobabilistic Methods in I F < 1 - 5 \'.3,11. C:ontrol and Parts Operations Research . . . . . . . . . . . Prog. I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 IE 435 Project Engineering . . . . . . . . . . IE 456 Intro. to Information Systems. . 3 IE 449 The Human Factor in Ener. IE 458 Production Design . . . . . . . . . 3 Design IE 465 Management Inform. IE $50 Applied Operations Research Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IE 490 Senior Projects in Ind. IE 451 Applied Operations Research Engr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1-3) I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electives taken in other departments be selected with the approval of the student's major adviser. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING The curriculum in mechanical enginerring is based upon three central parts of an integrated program of study. The first part pro- vides the student with a basic series of courses in physics, mathe- matics, and appropriate humanities. This is followed by a core of enqineering science subjects embracing the concepts and techniques which are judged to be fundamental to the requirements of the modem mechanical engineer. The third part of the program per- mits the student to choose from a series of s~ecialized mechanical engineering department electives in addition to choosing from a series of engineering core courses which best suit the needs and desires of the stltdent. Study in all three of these fields is ,distributed throughout the entire curriculum in order to ~ r o v i d e a fullv inte- grate:< program. The undergraduate programLin mechanicai engi- neering is sufficiently flexible so that a student may choose a pro- gram which is appropriate to the fields of design, heat transfer, systems, thermodynamics, instrumentation, and experimentation. The objective of this program is to provide a modem engineering education and a strong stimulus for continued learning which will enable the student to take an active and meaningful part in the technical and social community of today and tomorrow. The program includes the technical and conceptual fundamentals which are necessarv to uennit the student to contribute to the technical or scientific community andlor continue his education at the grac?u?te level. At the same time. the program is broad enough to help the student find an appreciation and concern for the social COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 255 - - - - problems which he will encounter in his professional and personal life. The technical portion of the program will provide the back- ground for a career in design, research, development, production and technical management in a wide variety of industries and fields. The course of study will equip the student for the development of systems and processes involving mechanical, thermal, and electrical energy, including the generation, conversion, metering, control, and utilization of these energy sources. The student will be prepared to accept the challenges from al- most the entire range of industry including electrical and heat energy generation, transportation by all modes, consumer products, manufacturing, environmental control and health engineering equipment. In fact, many employers seek the mechanical engineer because of his versatility. The faculty and laboratory facilities of the department provide the elements for a well-balanced, coherent program. In the senior year, the program provides for a selection of specialized electives, where the student may emphasize the study of design, fluid flow, heat transfer, instrumentation, or systems and controls. The student is urged to work out a suitable program of study with consultation of the faculty. The program requires the completion of 135semester hours for graduation, less hours commensurate with honors and advanced placement credit. FRESHMAN Course FIRSTSEMESTER Hrs. C w s e SECOND SEMESTER Hrs. Engl. 111, College English . . . . . . . . . 3 Communications Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Math. 142, Intro. Analysis I . . . . . . . . . 5 Math. 243. Intro. Analysis I1 . . . . . . . . 5 IE 110, Engr. Graphics I . . . . . . . . . . 2 IE 213, Engr. Graphics I1 . . . . . . . 2 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 6 Physics 243E. Gen. College Physics . . . 4 Humanities or Social Science . . . . . . . . 3 16 17 SOPHOMORE Course FIRSTSEMESTER Hrs. Course SECONDSEMESTER HIS. Speech 111. Ext. Speaking . . . . . . . . 2 ME 298, Thermodynamics I . . . . . . . . 3 Math. 244, Intro. Analysis 111 . . . . . . 3 Chem. 111, General Chemistry . . . . . . . 5 Physics 244E, Gen. College Physics . . . 4 Math. 346, Diff. Equations . . . . . . . . 3 AE 223, Engr. Mechanics I . . . . . . . . . . 3 IE 254, Engr. Proh. and Stat. . . . . . . . 3 AE 227, Dig. Computation . . . . . . . . . . 2 A E 373, Engr. XIechanics I1 . . . . . . . . 3 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . 3 17 17 JUNIOR Course F m s ~SEWESTER Hrs. Course SECONDSEMESTER Hrs. EE 382, Electrical Dynamics . . . . . . . . 4 Physics 311, Topics in Mod. Physics . . 3 A E 333, Mech. of Materials . . . . . . . . 3 A E 398, Systems Dynamics . . . . . . . . . 3Engr. 361, Fluid and Heat Flow . . . . . 4 ME 301, Mech. Engr. Meas. . . . . . . . . 3 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . 6 ME 439, Mech. Engr. Design 1 . . . . . . 3 En=. Core Elective f . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - University Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . - 2 17 18 256 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING SENIOR Course FIRSTSEMESTER Hrs. Course SECOND SEMESTER Hrs.~- ~ ME 402, Thermodynamics II . . . . . . . 3 hlE Electives . . . 6 ME 441, Mech. Engr. Des. 11 . . . . . . . 4 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . 3 ME Elective . . . . . . . . . . . 3 LIE 448 Mech. Engr. Pmj. . . . . . . . . . 1 Humanities or Social Sciences . . . . . . . 3 Engr. Core Elective f . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ME 448.0 Mech. Enm. Proi. . . . . . . 1 Universitv Core Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Enqr. Core Elective+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 3 - 16 17 Mechanical engineering electives may be selected from the following: ME 404. 405, 421. 422. 443, 4.56. 4%. \.lath. 33.5. 447. Appropriate courses from other eneineering depart- ments may be selected if they suit the academic needs of the student. Electives must have the approval of the student's departmental adviser. OTHER ENGINEERING FIELDS Students desiring to specialize in other fields of engineerinc may complete two years at Wichita before transferring. It is suggested that the student planning to transfer at the end of two years make the selection of his school as soon as possible in order to permit his program to be planned to meet the requirements of that school. GRADUATE WORK The departments of aeronautical engineering, electrical engineering, and mechanical engineering supervise graduate programs leading to the degree of Master of Science as offered by the Graduate School. A notation on the diploma identifies the department of study. Various specializations are available in each of the depart- ments. The Doctor of Philosophy degree in aeronautical engineering is offered in cooperation with the University of Kansas. Students must be accepted for graduate standing before any graduate work can be scheduled. Prospective students should ob- tain a Gradriatc Btilletin and the engineering graduate regulations prior to application for graduate standing. GENERAL ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Majors and specialized curricula. See appropriate departmental offerings. Lower Division Courses 100. Engineering Perspectives. (1). Introductory course for freshman students with an interest in scicnce ancl engineering. Lectures, tours, demonstration of laboratories and computing equipment. Small group sessions. Grade for the course will be credit/no credit. Prerequisite: Not open for enrollment to st~r- dents with more than 32 hours or credit in Engr. 123. 125. Introduction to Engineering Concepts. (2). 4L. An introduction to thr orderly approach to prohlrm solvinq used in engineering by guiding the st11- dent through a comprehensive design project. Emphasis on problem formula- e Total of hvo h o u ~ reauired for nraduation. - f Engineering core electives must be selected from the following list: AE 347, Engr. 10?, 125, 363, ME 369, EE 392, ,AE 399, Engr. 464. A minimum of 11 hours of these engineering core electives are requlred for graduation, and must have the approval of the student's departmental adviser. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 257 tion and solution techniques as they are required in the design project. Pre- requisites: Freshman standing with one and one-half units high school algebra. Not open for enrollment to students with more than 48 hours credit. 127. Introduction to Digital Computing. (3). 3R. Programming, operation and utilization of the dig~tril computing facilitics. Not open to englneerin:: students. 199. Introduction to Computer Science. (3). (Same as Computer Science 199). Survey of digital computer development, organization, and application. Design of computational algorithms. Flow charting. Implementation of algorithms in the Fortran I\' programming language. Prerequisite: Math. 140 or 141. 228. Computer Organization and Programming. (3). (Same as Computer Sci- ence 228.) Introduction to the basic concepts of computer organization and operation. Study of machine and asscmbly language programming concepts which illustrate basic principles and techniques. Prerequisite: CS or Engr. 199. Upper Division Courses 300. Engineering Science in Society. (3). A course to den~onstrate and ex- plain-in depth but without technical jargon--developments in engineering science in the past century which have inHuenced large portions of society. Emphasis will be placed upon conceptual understanding of scientific phenom- ena and devices. Guest lecturers and den~onstrations will be used extensively. Prerequisite: Upper division standing. 361. Fluid and Heat Flow. (4). 3R; 3L. Pressure and velocity fields, kin?- matics of perfect and real fluids; similarity; temperature fields and heat transfer. conduction, convection, radiation; ~ntroduction to gas dynamics. Prerequisites: Physics 244E, h'lath. 346, and LIE 298. 363. Electromagnetic Fields. (2). 2R. A vector development of electric and ma netic fields including experimental laws, polarization phenomena and hlas- wefl's equations. Prerequisites: Physics 244E and Math 046. 400. System Modeling. (3). Interdisciplinary subjects are considered to ana- lytically develop simple models of real systems. These models are then fully exploited, to show similarities between systems performance and analysis tech- niques. Esamples are taken from anthropology, sociology, economics, ancl technology. Senior or graduate standing recommended. Prerequisite: Consent of instn~ctor. 464. Field Analysis. (3). 3R. Potential theory: applications of the equations of Poisson and Fielmholtz and of the diffusions and wave equations to variouq field and flow phenomena; ailalysis of representative problems. Prerequisites: Engr. 361 and 363. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING Lower Division Courses 223. Engineering .Mechanics I. (3). 3R. Composition and resolution of vector quantities, conditions of ~quilibriuin, friction, and the statics of lumped and distributed systems including internal force systems. Prerequisite: Slath. 23:3 and Phys. 243E or concurrent. 227. Engineering Digital Computation. (2). 2R. Fortran programming arrd utilization of the Digital Computing Center facilities. Selected numrrical methods inchlding functional approximation, matrix algebra and systems of equations. Prcrccluisitc: LIath. 243 or concurrent. Upper Division Courses 324. Aerodynamic Theory. (3). Dynamics of comprcssiblc and incompressiblr flow. Two- and three-dimensional airfoil thcory. Viscous flow and drag. Intro- duction to performance. Prerequisite: 5,lath. 3/16, Engr. 361 and A E 373. 258 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 327. Numerical Methods in Engineering. (2). 2R. Error analysis. Polynomial approximations and po\ver scric,s, iterative solr~tions of equations, mntricc.~ .~n t l systems of linear equations, numerica'l differentiation and integration. nppro~i- mate solution of differential equations by dividcd diffcrcnccs. Prerequisites: AE 227 and Slat11 :3-16 or concurrrnt. 333. Mechanics of Materials. (3). 3R. Theories of stress and strain. Analysis of structural elements. Selrcted laboratory demonstrations. Prerrquisite:.: AE: 023 with C or brtter ancl Slath. 244 or concurrent. 347. Science of Engineering Materials. (3). RR. Theory and structure of materials with reference to engineering properties. Selected laboratory demon- strations. Prcrequisites: Chem. 111, AE 223 with C or better, and hlath. 244 or concurrent. 373. Engint-ring Mechanics 11. (3). 3R. The laws of motion and the dy- namics of particles and systems of particles. Prerequisites: AE 223 with C or better and hlath. 244. 398. Systems Dynamics. (3). 3R. Mathematical modeling and analogies of electrical, mechanical, fluid and other lumped parameter systems. Classical and transform methods of solution. Theory and use of analog computers. Pre- requisites: AE 373, E E 382 and Math. 346 or concurrent. 399. Experimental Mechanics Laboratory. (I). 3L. Selected experiments in mechanics of material and materials science. Experiment design, measurement and data interpretation. Prerequisite: AE 333. AE 347 or concurrent. 412. Experimental Methods in Aerodynamics Engineering. (2). 4L. Experi- mental methods and test planning, error analysis and propagation, model de- sign, instrumentation, flow visualization. Use of subsonic and supersonic wind tunnels, shock-tube, etc. Prerequisite: AE 324 or concurrent. 414. Flight Mechanics. (3). Fundamentals of analysis of flight vehicle trajec- tories, performance, stability, and control. Prerequisite: AE 324. 416. Supersonic Aerodynamics. (2). 2R. One-dimensional flow of a perfect gas, shock and expansion waves; applications to nozzlcs, wind tunnels, and air- foils in two-dimensional supersonic flow. Hypersonic flow. Prerequisite: AE 324. 417. Projects in Aeronautical Engineering. (1-2). Design, analysis, or research problems under supervision of faculty adviser. May be taken for one hour credit in each of two consecutive semesters. Department consent. 418. Missile and Space Dynamics. (2). Fundamentals of space vehicle trajec- tory and performance analysis. Prerequisite: AE 373. 425. Flight Structures I. (4). Stress analysis and strength analysis of flight vehicle components. Prerequisite: b lah . 346 or concurrent, AE 333. 426. Flight Structures Laboratory. (1). 3L. Special projects in the design and analysis of flight vehicle structures. Prerequisite: AE 425. 427. Computer Solution of Engineering Equations. (2). Numerical solution of ordinary and partial differential equations utilizing computer methods and machinery. Prerequisite: Math. 346. 428. Airplane Design. (2). 6L. Preliminary design procedure. Systems analysis. Prerequisite: AE 414. 429. Flight Structures 11. (2). Ener3. methods in structural analysis with emphasis on the unit load method. Prerequisites: Math. 346, AE 333. 432. Aerodynamics of Propulsion. (2). Theory and performance of propellers; reciprocating, turbojet turl~oshaft, ramjet and rocket engines. Prerequisites: AE 324. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 259 433. Advanced Strength of >iaterials. (3). Limitations and ~~sefulness of basic concepts of resistance of matcrials. Atlvanccd concepts, including theories of failure and stresse\ and clefomlation in thin plates, cylinders, nonsymmetrical and curved flexural memlwrs, noncircular bars in torsion, etc. Stress concen- trations. Energy methodr. Prerequisite: AE 33.3. 474. Physical Metallurgy. (3). Properties of pure metals. Constitution and properties of alloys. Slcchanical and thermal treatment of metals and alloys. Physical metallurgy principles and reference to specific alloy systems. Pre- requisite: AE 347. 475. Selected Topics in Aeronautical Ensincering. (1-3). Prerequisite: De- p a r b e n t consent. 476. Selected Topics in Engineering hlechanics. (1-3). Prerequisite: Depart- ment consent. 477. Vibrations Analysis. (3). Free, forced, damped and undamped vibrations for one and two degrees of freetlom. Classical, numerical and energy solutions for multidegree freedom systems. Introdr~ction to continuous systems. Pre- requisite: AE 398. 498. Computer Aided Design. (3). An introduction to the concept of man- computer ctoupling in an active environmcnt and its relationship to the analysis, design and synthesis of cngincering problems. Prcreq~~isites:Department con- sent. Graduate Courses in Aeronautical Engineering There are two separate programs leading to the hlaster of Science degree- one in aeronautical engineering and the other in engineering mechanics. For details, see the Graduate School Btllletin. Prerequisite for all graduate courses is department consent. 500. Structural Dynamics I. (3). 3Iatrix methods for the analysis of the free and forced vihrations of mtlltiple degrre of freedom structures. Prerequisite: AE 477. 501. Structural Dynamics 11. (3). I'ibration of strings and membranes. Longi- tudinal. torsional and lateral vilxation of liars. Latrral vibration of plates and shells. Classical, numerical, and cnerfi) solutions. Introduction to problems in aeroelasticih. Prerequisite: AE 477. 502. Jet Propulsion. (3). Analysis of jet propulsion devices, study of cycles, effect of operating variables, prollle~ns of installation. operation, and instru- mentation. Prerequisite: AE 432 or equivalent. 505. System Optimization. (3). Anal!,tical and numerical techniques for mini- mizing or maximizing functions and the functionals occ~lrring in engineering problems. 506. Analysis of Nonlinear Systems. (3). Perturbation techniques. Describing function methocls. Liapunov stability. Phase plane analysis. Other mathe- matical methods. 507. Random Processes in Engineering. (3). Concepts from probability theory. Statistical description of random processes. Variance and power spectral analy- sis for stationary and nonstationary linear systems. Analog and digital computer techniques. 509. Flight Stability and Control. (3). 3R. Comprehensive analysis of flight dynamic stability and control. Introduction to the analysis of closed-loop flight systems. 511. Aerodynamics of Nonviscous Fluids. (3). Equations of motion; potential flow, conformal transfonations; finitc wing theory; nonsteacly airfoil theory. 260 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 512. Aerodynamics of Viscous Fluids. (3). \'iscous fluid flow theory and boundary layers. 516. Aerodynamics of Compressible Fluids I. (3). Analysis of compressible fluid flow for one- and two-dimrnsional cnsrs. h,lovin~ shock waves. One- dimensional flow with friction and heat addition, linearized otential function. Stethod of characteristics. Conical shocks. Subsonic simiyarity laws. Pre- requisite: AE 416 or equivalent. 520. Theory of Elastic Stability. (3). Buckling and bending of columns, beams, plates, and shells. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 521. Finite Element Analysis of Structures I. (3). Development of basic stiff- ness matrices from elastic consideration. Analysis of statically indeterminate structures by force and displacement methods. 522. Finite Element Analysis of Structures 11. (3). Analysis of structures by the direct stiffness method. Comparison of methods and selected topics in finite element analysis. Prerequisite: AE 521. 524. Theory of Thermal Stresses. (3). Thermal stress analysis of elastic systems. Prerequisite: AE 530. 530. Theory of Elasticity. (3). Elements of the common theory of elasticity with emphasis on hvo-dimensional problems in strain and stress. 532. Theory of Plates (3). Small deflections of thin elastic lates Classical solutions for rectangular and circular plates. Approximate sokt ion~ for plates of various shapes. Introduction to vibration and stability of plates. Prerequi- site: Consent of instructor. 533. Continuum Mechanics. (3). A unified development of the basic theories and equations of solids and fluids in invariant tensor notation. Formulation of problems of elasticity, plasticity and fluid mechanics. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 535. Experimental Stress Analysis. (3). The theoretical bases and techniques of the common method of experimentally determining stress and strain in structural and machine parts. Selected laboratory demonstrations. 537. Advanced Engineering Dynamics. (3). Kinematics and kinetics of par- ticles and rigid bodies for two and three dimensional motion. Introduction to vibratory motion. Lagrange's equations. 538. Random Vibration. (3). Characterization, transmission and failure of mechanical systems subjected to random vibration. Analysis and measurement methods for random data. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 539. Energy Methods in Mechanics. (3). The principles of virtual work, potential ener and potential coenergy applied to static equilibrium of rigid and deformabF discrete, and distributed mass bodies. Also, energy methods extended to the dynamics of discrete mass systems. 541. Transform Methods in Mechanics. (3). The LaPlace, Hankel, Legendre, Fourier, and Jacobi transform solutions of differential equations arising in engineering mechanics. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 543. Advanced Materials Science. (3). Interaction and motion of dislocations of metal properties in terms of dislocation theory. Point and surface defects and radiation damage in solids. Nucleation and growth in solid state reactions. Corrosion and oxidation. Prerequisite: 347 or equivalent. 560. Selected Topics in Engineering Mechanics. (13). New or special courses are presented under this listing, on sufficient demand. (May he re- peated for credit when subiect material warrants). Prerequisite: Department consent. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 261 561. Selected Topics in Aerodynamics and Fluid Mechanics. (1-3). New or special courses are presented under this listing on sufficient demand. (May be repeated for credit when subject material warrants.) Prerequisite: De- partment consent. 562. Selected topics in Propulsion. (1-3). New or special courses are pre- sented under this listing on sufficient demand. (May be repeated for credit when subject material warrants.) Prerequisite: Department consent. 563. Selected Topics in Guidance and Conhol. (1-3). New or special courses are presented under this listing on sufficient demand. (May be repeated for credit when subject material warrants). Prerequisite: Department consent. 576. Thesis. (1-4). 613. Aerodynamics of Aeroelasticity. (3). Thin airfols and finite wings in steady flow. Thin airfoils oscillating in incompressible flow. Extension to compressible and three-dimensional airfoils. Modem methods for low aspect ratio lifting surfaces. Prerequisite: AE 511. 616. Aerodynamics of Compressible Fluids 11. (3). Perfect gas flows past bodies of revolution. Axisymmetric method of characteristics. Hypersonic and transonic similarity; Newtonian theory. High temperature gases in equilibrium and frozen flows. One- and two-dimensional moving shock waves. Introduc- tion to separated flows and jet mixing. Prerequisite: AE 516. 636. Theory of Plasticity. (3). Criteria of yielding. Plastic stress-strain rela- tionships. Stress and deformation in thick-walled shells, rotating discs and cylinders, bending and torsion of prismatic bars for ideally plastic and strain hardening materials. Two dimension and axially symmetric problems of finite deformation. Variational and extremum principles. Prerequisite: AE 530. 676. Thesis. (1-16). May be repeated to a maximum of 36 hours. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Upper Division Courses 382. Electrical Dynamics. (4). 3R; 3L. Electric circuit analysis with em- phasis on the time varying case: sinusoidal excitation, frequency response, net- work theorems, coupled circuits, polyphase circuits. Prerequisite: Math. 244, Physics 244E. 388. Electromechanical Energy Convertors. (4). 3R; 3L. Theory and analysis of electromechanical energy conversion devices. Prerequisite: EE 382 or department consent. 392. Elechonic Circuits. (4). 3R; 3L. Physical electronics, electron beams; semiconductor, vacuum, and gaseous devices and their equivalent circuits; application to the field of information processing, power modulation, and simulation. Prerequisite: E E 382, Math. 346. 394. Logic Design and Switching Theory. (3). 2R; 3L. (Same as Computer Science 394.) An introduction to the theory and application of switching devices with particular emphasis on computer applications. Combinatorial, sequential, and threshold logic concepts and realizations; network minirniza- tion methods, hazards, codes, computerized logic design. Prerequisite: CS 311 and Physics 124 or equivalent or department consent. 477. Special Topics in Elechical Engineering. (1-4). New or special courses are presented under this listing on sufficient demand. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Department consent. 480. Transient and Frequency Analysis. (4). 3R; 3L. Review of classical transient analysis and Fourier Series. Introduction to LaPlace and Fourier 262 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING Transforms with emphasis on network response; complex frequency concepts; signal spectra. Prerequisite: EE 392 or concurrent. 481. Pulse Electronics. (4). 3R; 3L. An investigation of active and passive circuits, including integrated circuits, for the generating and processing of pulse waveforms. Topics covering other nonlinear electronic circuits will be included. ( e .g. class C amplifiers; nonlinear feedback; adaptive selection of linear circuits.) Prerequisite: EE 480 or department consent. 482. Energy and Information Transmission. (4). 3R; 3L. Transmission line parameters power, signal and high frequency transmission lines; wave propa- gation in tree space and bounded media; wave guides and antennas. Pre- requisite: Engr. 464, EE 486 or concurrent enrollment. 483. Network Theory. (3). Matrix algebra, generalized theory and analysis of lumped parameter networks; introduction to network synthesis; symmetrical components. Prerequisite: EE 480. ..I881 Introductory Control System Concepts. (4). 3R; 3L. System modeling and simulation, tlynamic response, feedback theory, stability criteria, compen- sation design. Prerequisite: EE 480, AE 398. 485. Electrical Design Project I. (1). 3L. A design project under faculty supervision chosen according to the student's interest. Prerequisite: Depart- ment consent. 486. Information Processing. (4). 3R; 3L. Properties of signals and noise: introdi~ction to information theory; AM, FM, and pulse modulation and detec- tion. Principles of sampling, coding and multiplexing, organization of analog nncl digital systems for information processing. Prerequisite: EE 480. 488. Advanced Electromechanical Energy Convertors. (4). 3R; 3L. A con- tinuation of EE 388 including solid-state control. Computer applications will I)e stressecl. Prerequisite: EE 392 and EE 388. ,194. Digital Computer Design Fundamentals. (3). 3R. An introductory but reasonably detailed study of stored program digital computers from an inte- grated hardware-software approach. Consideration of computer logical design. arithmetic units and operation, large capacity storage systems, input-output units, and system integration. Prerequisite: CS or EE 394, EE 392 or depart- ment consent. 495. Electrical Design Project 11. (1). 3L. Prerequisite: EE 485 or depart- ment consent. 496. Electron Dynamics. (3). Electron ballistics in static and dynamic fields, rlectron optics, beam deflection devices, space charge effects, velocity modu- lation ~rinciples and applications. Prerequisite: Physics 311 and Engr. 363. 497. Theory of Semiconductor Devices. (3). Principles of operation of semi- condr~ctor devices with emphasis on underlying physical phenomena. Some treatmcnt of integrated circuit geometries and associated problems. Prerequi- site: Physics 311 and EE 392. 398. Electric Energy Systems. (4). 3R; 3L. Concepts of electric energy sys- tcms; system model representation; high-energy transmission lines and load flow analysis with computer applications stressed. Prerequisite: EE 388 or h4E 369. Graduate Courses 573. Pulse, Digital and Switching Circuits. (3). Investigation of active and passive circrlits used for the generation and processing of pulse, digital and switching waveforms. Such circuits are required in computers, control systems, counting and timing, data processing, instrumentation, communications, radar telemetry and television. Prerequisite: EE 481 or department consent. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 263 576. Thesis. (1-3). This course may be repeated for credit toward a thesis option up to six hours. Prerequisite: Prior consent of thesis adviser. 577. Special Topics in Electrical Engineering. (3). New or special courses are prescntetl under this listing on sufficient demand. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisitc: Department consent. 578. Directed Studies in Electrical Engineering. (2-4). This course may be repeated toward the directed studies option up to four hours. The student n111st writc a paper and give an oral presentation on the study made. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 582. kfc!hods of Systems Analysis. (3). Methods of analysis of both linear ant1 nonl in~ar systems. Time-domain techniques; singularity functions, resolu- tion of signals from elementary functions, solution of differential and difference equations. Transform techniques, LaPlace, Fourier and Z transforms, frequency spectra, complex frcquency, complex integration, significance of sineularities. Slatrices and vector spaces as used in systems work. Prerequisite: E E 480 or dcpartment consent. 583. Electromagnetic Field Theory I. (3). Introduction to advanced mathe- matical treatment of electric and magnetic fields; boundary value problems; Maxwell's equations and applications to waveguide and cavity resonators. Prerequisite: Engr. 36.3 or dcpartment consent. 584. Electromagnetic Field Theory 11. (3). Special topics in static and electro- dynamic fields: Special solution techniques; moving reference frames, radia- tion. Prerequisite: E E 583. 587. Communication Theory. (3). Theory of information and noise; com- munication of information in presence of noise, channel capacity; modulation and multiplexing, sampling and coding; detection theory including effects of noise and nonlinear circuits, correlation methods. Prerequisite: E E 582. 588. Selected Topics in Antennas and Propagation. (3). Determination of characteristics of practical antenna systems; radiation patterns and antenna impedance; diffraction, horns, slots, etc.; wave propa ation in the earth's en- vironment, including tropospheric and innospheric pfenomena. Prerequisite: E E 583. 589. Advanced Electrical Laboratory. (2). 6L. in fundamental ex- perimental technology in some field of electrica::$bn:yization. This course will consist of selected experiments in various areas of electrical engineering. The general subject area will be announced each semester the course is offered. May be taken more than once for credit. Prerequisite: Department consent. 590. Topics in Control Systems. (3). A study of various concepts such as multiloop systems, mu1tivarial;le systems and decoupling, nonlinear systems and sampled-data systems. Prerequisite: E E 481 or department consent. 592. State-Variable Techniques in Systems I. (3). Review of mathematics fundamental to state-space concepts. Formulation of state-variahle models for linear and nonlinear continuous and discrete systems, Liapunov and Lagrange stability, computational approximation techniques. Prerequisite: E E 582 or department consent. 593. State-Variable Techniques in Systems 11. (3). A continuation of the study of state-space concepts in the areas of nonlinear systems, optimal and sub- optimal control of systems with wide classes of performance measures. Pre- requisite: E E 592 or department consent. 596. Passive Network Synthesis. (3). A detailrd study of the direct approach to network synthesis from the functional description. Topics include realiz- ability conditions for passive networks, synthesis of LC, RL, RC and RLC driving point impedances, synthesis of LC transfer impedances. Butterworth and Chebyshev filters and time domain synthesis. Prerequisite: E E 582 or consent of instructor. 264 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 597. Special Topics in Physical Electronics. (3). 3R. Special studies selected from the general topics: Electron optics, space-charge waves, plasmas, quan- tum electronics. Prerequisites: EE 496 ancl 497. 598. Advanced Energy Systems. 3R. Energy systems in steady-state opti- mum operating strategies; system steady-state control; surge phenomena; sys- tem faults ancl transient stability analysis. Computer applications are stressed. Prerequisite: E E 498 or department consent. INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING Lower Division Courses The following courses are c'evoted to concepts in engineering graphics: 110, 115,213. 250, 257, and 260. 110. Enaineering Graphics 1. (2). 4L. Basic spacial relationships involving lines and planes, auxiliary views of solids, and problems in intersections. Prerequisite: Math. 141 with a C or better. 115. Architectural Drawing. (3). 9L. The study of materials and construction details pertaining to the design of simple l~uildings including preparation of working drawings and specifications. Prerequisite: IE 110 or department consent. 132. Industrid Fire Safety. (3). A study of the causes and effects of inrlustrial fires with special emphasis on: (1) proper housekeeping procedures as a means of fire prevention, (2) criteria related to the handling and storage of flammable materials, (3) the role of fire fighting training in the industrial environment, (4) the analysis of the fire hazards associated with specific manufacturing processes, (5) the organizational concepts related to the development of an industrial fire fighting team, and (6) the control of and reaction to catastrophies. Prerequisite: Department consent. 133. Construction Methods and Materials. (3). The analysis of various build- ing materials relative to their physical properties and their reaction to fire. Includes the sturly of various builtling configurations and their applicability to specific hazardous industrial operations. Concepts of fire-resistive enclosures, partitions, fire walls, or cutoffs will he discussetl as they pertain to the degrec- of the lire hazards present. Possible sources of ignition as related to the vul- nerability of the structure will also he treated in some detail. Prerequisite: Department consent. 203. Fire Protcction Systems. (3). A study of the mechanical ant1 proc-dnr:\l systems of fire protection. Incluclcs an exposure to: (1) fire hydrant operating desiqn criteria as well as lncation concepts, (2) the hasic configuration and design of standpipes, (3) romlr~~st i l~levapor tlctectors, (4) automatic sprinkler systems, ( 5 ) flame arrestors, (6) flamc-fai!ure controls for oil- and gas-fired equipment, (7) explosion venting and pressure relief devices, and (8) automatic fire-resistive donr ant1 shutter design ant1 operational concepts. Also includes an analysis of automated cornpute>r controlled fire detection systems as well as automated emergency fire clisp~tch systems. Prerequisite: IE 132. 213. Engineering Graphics 11. (2). 4L. The application of descriptive geom- etry, standards in graphical communications and conventions to engineering design ant1 analysis. Prerequisite: 1E 110 with a C or hetter. 250. Topics in Engineering Graphics. (2). 4L. The application of engineering graphics to the stud!. of special pro1)lems and to mcthods of conveying infor- mation. Prerequisite: Speech 244 or department consent. 254. Engineering Probability and Statistics. (3). Basic theory of probability and statistics with emphasis on applic;ltions to engineering. Prerequisite: Math 244 or concurrent. COLLEGE OF ENGINEEqING 265 257. Tool Design I. (3). 2R; 4L. Design of workholding devices for locating and holding workpieces for metal removal by machining processes, the design of small assembly jigs, and the dcsign for pressworking tools. Prerequisite: Department consent. 260. Production Illustration. (2). 6L. The study of the graphical methods of prrsenting engineering information in the form of rendered pictorial (three dimensional) drawings. Prerequisite: I E 110 or dcpartment consent. Upper Division Courses 352. Work Measurement. (3). 2R; 3L. Work measurement, motion and time study, biomechanics, work samplina, predetermined time standards and time formula derivation. Prerequisite: Dcpartment consent. 355. Engineering Economy. (3). Economic comparisons of engineering alter- natives. Limiting factors of econoniic return. Prerequisite: Department consent. 356. Introduction to Numerical Control. (2). An introduction to the concepts and techniques of the operation of machine tools from numerical data; includ- ing open and closed loop systems, point to point and continuous path process- ing, and a discussion of the various mcans of data representation. Prerequisite: Department consent. 357. Safety Engineering. (2). Design for safety. Environmental aspects of accident prevention. Industrial compensation and safety legislation. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 401. Probabilistic Methods in Operations Research. (3). A development of the probabilistic techniques necessary for the study of the following topics: queues, inventory systems with stochastic demand, forecasting, semi-Markov and Markov processes. Prerequisite: I E 254. 435. Project Engineering. (2). Principles and practices of critical path methodology under conditions of certainty and uncertainty. Prerequisite: IE 254. 449. The Human Factor in Engineering Design. (2). The synthesis of human physiological, psychological. socitrlogical and legal limitations and influence on design of consumer, public and experimental products. Prerequisite: Depart- ment consent. 450. Applied Operations Research I. (3). Linear, dynamic, geometric, and parametric programming. The uses of schematic models. Prerequisites: I E 254, 355, if applied toward major. Dcpartment consent for others. 451. Applied Operations Research 11. (3). A continuation of I E 450. In- dustrial experimentation, dynamic programming. hlonte Carlo analysis, use of random numbers, queuing theory. Prerequisite: IE 450. 452. Factory Planning. (3). 2R; 3L. Determination of methods and capacities to meet production requirements economically. Principles and techniques of plant layout. Prerequisites: I E 332, 355, 458. 453. Production Control. (3). Techniques of production planning, scheduling, and dispatching. Applications to ;lutomation and computer control. Prerequi- site: Department consent. 454. Statistical Quality Control. (3). A continuation of I E 254 with special cnlphasis on quality and process control. Prerequisite: I E 254. 455. Numerical Control and Parts Programming I. (3). The study and appli- cation of the various parts programming languages with particular emphasis on the APT language. Prerequsitc: I E 336 or department consent. 266 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 456. Introduction to Information Systems. (3). An introduction to the concepts and techniques of information systems; including open and closed loop systems, conventional control components and a discussion of the various means of data representation. Prerequisite: AE 227. 458. Production Design. (3). A general survey of the manufacturing and fabricating methods employed in industry. Special emphasis is placed on the latest manufacturing techniques. 465. Management Information Systems. (3). The design of systems to collect and display data for use in managerial decision models, production standards, engineering evalutions and relial~ility predictions, and real time systems. Pre- requisite: IE 456 or department consent. 490. Senior Projects in Industrial Engineering. (1-3). Selection and research of a specific industrial engineerinq topic. Graduate Courses 530. Advanccd Linear Programming. (3). This course covers stochastic pro- gramming, integer programming, sensitivity analysis and the application of these techniques to specific prohle~n areas. Nunierical technique or geometric programming may also be included. Prerequisite: IE 450 and I E 451 or department consent. 531. Classical Optimization Techniques. (3). An extensive treatment of those opti~nization techniques which do not require the use of Linear Programming. A development of variational methods, direct search and numerically based techniques will be given. Prerequisite: Dcparhnent consent. 533. Queuing and Inventory Theory. (3). An analytical analysis of the transient and steady-stntc behavior of queues and queuing systems. The relationship between queuing and inventory systems will be developed. Opti- mum inventory policies and optimum queuing system configurations will be discussed. Prerequisite: IE 450 ancl I E 451 or department consent. 535. Forecasting and Scheduling. (3). Analysis of prediction techniques in forecasting and scheduling by time series and probability models, smoothing techniques, error analysis. Prerequisite: Department consent. 540. Analysis of Decision Processes. (3). Time value of money; economics of equipment selection and replacement; engineering estimates; evaluation of proposals; computer analysis ancl solution of economic problems. Prerequisite: IE 355 or department consent. 542. System Simulation with Digital Computers. (3). Develops the methods and techniques for simulating large-scale systems with digital computers using Fortran and Gasp programming languages. Prerequisites: AE 227, I E 254, or department consent. 543. Operations Research. (0). 4 stutly of the theory and application of model I~uilding techniques for the problelns found in industry. Linear and dynamic programming; queuing throry; allocation processes, inventory theory; experi- mental designs; utilization of digital computers. Prerequisite: IE 450 or de- partment consent. 515. Production Engineering. (2). The organization, design and control of production and associated staff functions; formr~lation of manufacturing pol- icies; case studies in production design. 549. Industrial Engineering Problems. (1-3). Analysis, research and sol~ltion of a selected problem. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 267 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING Lower Division Courses 298. Thermodynamics I. (3). The first and second laws. Thermodynamic analysis as applied to thermal, mechanical and fluid systems. Prerequisites: Math 244, Physics 243E. Upper Division Courses 301. Mechanical Engineering Measurements. (3). 2R; 3L. An introduction to modern measr~remcnt techniques in mechanical engineering. Prerequisites: Math 346, Physics 244E. 369. Energy Conversion. (3). Energy conversion principles and their imple- mentation in engineering devices; consideration of all main areas of converting energy from one form to another. Prerequisites: ME 298, Engr. 351, E E 382. 402. Thermodynamics 11. (3). Continuation of ME 298 with emphasis on availability, irreversibility, Maxwell's equations, and thermodynamics property relations. Prerequisite: LIE 298. 404. Instrumentation. (3). 2R; 3L. A more complete treatment of the mea- surement prol~lern. Careful examination of modern instrumentation systems including dynamic behavior and nonlinearities. Criteria for design, synthesis and selection of instrlimentation systems. Prereqnisites: ME 301. 405. Design of Engineering Experiments. (3). Study of theoretical, analytic and statistical aspects of Insic engineering experimentation. Theories of test p!anning, data checking, analysis and synthesis, and evaluation are considered. Prerequisite: Department consent. 42I. Intermediate Fluicl Mechanics. (3). Stcady and transient flow of ideal ant1 real fluids. Includes study of non-Newtonian fluids and an introduction to l~oundary layer theory. Prerequisite: Engr. 361. 422. Intermediate Iieat Transfer. (3). A rigorous treatment of heat transfer including transient and multidirncnsional conduction, free and forced con- vection, radiation and cornhined heat transfer. Various analogies, numerical methods and approximate solutions are considered. Prerequisite: Engr. 361. 439. Mechanical Engineering Design I. (3). Application of strength of ma- terials, dynamics, materials science, statistics. and optimization techniques to the design of machine elements. Prerequisites: AE 333, AE 373, Xlath 316. I E 254. 441. Mechanical Engineering Design 11. (4). 3R; 3L. Continuation of ME 439. with emphasis on kinematic analysis, design of mechanical elements and other advanced topics in mechanical design. Prerequisite: b1E 439. 443. Mechanical Engineering Design 111. (3). Kinematic synthesis and dy- namic analysis as applied to machine design. Introduction to mechanical con- trol theory. Prcrequisite: ME 441. 438. Jicchanical Engineering Projects. (1 or 2). 3L or 6L. A design, analysis, or research project under faculty supervision. Problems are selected according to the student's interest. Departmental consent is required for students wishinc to take both required hours in a single semester. Prerequisites: ME 301 and senior standing. ,150. Topics in Mechanical Engineering. (1-3). Investigation of selected phases of mechanical engineering. Prercquisite: Department consent. 456. Analysis in Engineering. (3). Analytical techniques applied to engineering problems. Prerequisite: Math. 346. 268 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 459. hlechnnical Control I.(3). Theory and analysis of the dynamic behavior of mechanical, themial, fluid and electro mechanical control systems as based cm the laws of physics and linear mathematics. Prerequisite: AE 398 or de- partment consent. Graduate Courses 501. Boundary Layer Theory. (3). Development of the Navier-Stokes Equa- tion, laminar houndary layers, transition to turbulence, turbulent boundary layers, introcluction to homogeneous turbulence. Prerequisites: ME 557 and Math. 4.47, or department consent. 530. Cryogenic Enginerring I. (3). Stutlv of cryogenic problems in mechanical engineering involving production of low temperatures; properties of solids ant1 liquids; fluid flow; heat transfer; insulation and applications a t low tem- pcratures. Prcrcquisites: Xiath. 447, XIE 555, or department consent. 516. Fatigue and Wear. (3). A study of the phenomena or fatigue and wear chanical engineering design problems which involve high speed, vibrations and design. Prerequisite: Depctrtment consent. 519. Advanced 3iechanical Engineerincr Design. (3). Studies of current me- chanical engineering design problems which involve high speed, vibrations and tlynamic loatling. Prerequisites: Math. 447, or department consent. 551. Heat Transfer-Conduction. (2). Theory and measurement. Fourier's Equation. Steady and unsteady state with and without heat sources and sinks. Numerical methods. Prerequisites: ME 422, Math. 447, or department consent. 552. I!eat Transfer-Convection. (2). Free ant1 forced convection in laminar and turbulent flow. Analysis and synthesis of heat transfer equipment. Pre- requisites: ME 422 or department consent. 553. IIeat Transfer-Radiation. (2). Analysis and synthesis of radiant heat transmission systems and components, analogous and approximate method of solutions. Prerequisites: ME 322 or department consent. 555 & 556. Advanced Thermodynamics. (3-9. Laws of thermodynamics, stcacly and unsteady flow, availability, X4axwell s relations, kinetic theory, sta- tistical concepts of thermodynamics, introduction to ionized gas theory, Boltz- mann statistics, and other selected topics of interest. Neither course is pre- requisite for the other. Prerequisites: M E 402 or department consent. 557. Advanced Fluid Dynamics. (2). Steady and transient flow of ideal, real and heterogeneous liquids and gases in simple and complex passages. Pre- requisites: ME 421 or department consent. 559. Siechanical Cantrol 11. (3). Application of feedback methods to mechan- ical and coml~ined control systems. Prerequisites: ME 459 or equivalent. 560. Electromechanical Control Systems. (3). Description, analysis, and d e s i q of electromechanical control systems with an emphasis on actual devices. Prerequisite: XIE 459 or department consent. 561. Similitude in Engineering. (2). Critical analysis of models and analogies as aids to engineerin3 design. Prerequisite: Department consent. 563. Advanced Transport Phcnomena. (2). Combination of heat transfer, dif- fusion, and fluid tlynan~ics theories in the determination of transport of mass. momentum, and energy. Prerequisite: Xlath. 447 or department consent. 567. Theory of Rational Design. (3). Desi~gn decision techniques including: frequency, asiomati~ and Bxysian formulation, statistical inference techniques. Jaynes' m a ~ i r n u n ~ entropy principle, error analysis. Prerequisite: Department consent. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 269 568. Rational Design Methods. (3). The principles of creativity, decision theory, modeling. optimi~~ction and reliability as applied to problems of engi- neering design. Prerequisite: Department consent. 570. Special Topics in Mechanical Engineering. (3). New or special courses are presented under this listing on sufficient demand. Prerequisite: Department co~~scn t .hlay 11e repeated for credit when subject material warrants. 576. Thesis. (1-4). 270 COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING COLLEGE OF FlNE ARTS CHARLES L. SPOHN, PhD, Dean The College of Fine Arts is rcsponsible for the instruction and education, scholarly study and inquiry? performance and practice. in music ancl the visual arts. The College of Fine Arts is receptivtl to new and challenging concepts and experimental ideas to keep the arts in the forefront of contemporary socicty. Intcrdisciplinar~. cooperation lvithin the 17arious units of the college is cncourngecl. The College of Fice Arts seeks ways of expanding the overall con- cept of art in our society and hopes to serve as a laboratory for new artistic ideas, experiences, and philosophies in all art mcclia and in all areas of artistic thought nncl expression. Students nre afforded the opportunity c)f n complete spectrum of artistic endeavor whether they are interested in professional activities, t exh ing careers, graeuate study, or increased knowledge about the arts. The Collcgc of Finc Arts providcs for students the opportunit!. to understand various art forms \i'ith an open mind in order tho[ these students will be able to respond to changes, developments. and challenges within the art \vorId of the future. Nc\v techniques and historical research and information are necessary to these ends. The College of Fine Arts provides opportunities in orcler that stu- dents be active nrith the arts of the present time. The College r:f Fine Arts seeks to make the arts an integral part of the lives of ali students and expand the role nf the arts in the various communities that are served. ADMISSION All entering freshmen \\.ill he enrolled in the University Collcgr . Upon completing 2.1 semester hours of specified courses lvith : I minimum grade point average of 2.00 the student is eligible to enroll in the Division of Art or the Division of Music. Transfer students ma!. enroll in the College of Fine Arts if tran- script indicates that thc student has c o ~ n p l ~ t c d n minimum of 24 semester hours with a minimum grnclc point average of 2.00 ( C ) . Students with a grade n\?crage of at least !.YO, but less than 2.00. may petition for admittance. 'I'ransfer studcnts who do !lot meet this minimum rcciuiremcnt ni!l 1~ enrolled in the University Collegta until this requirement is met. Freshmen planning to major ill art or music should inclicatc this on the Application for Admissio~l form by placing a mark oppositc the words, "College of Fine Arts" and hy writing the \vorcl ''A~L'' or "hlusic" directly below. COLLEGE OF FlNE ARTS 271 PROBATION AND DISMISSAL It is expected that students ~irill make satisfactory progrcss in their studies. t\ student who fai!s to do .;:I may he placed on probation at anv time and ultimatel~~ dismissed from the Universitv. ~ tuhen t snrill be rquirc; to earn a gracle point average o f at least 2.00 each semester. Stuclents enrolled in either the music education or art education programs must have a cumulative grade point average cf 2.25 prior to enrolling in student teaching. Studcnts n.110 do not achieve the requirc~d grade point average of 2.00 will be placcd on prohation for the following semester. Students on probation are limited to a maximum of 12 credit hours per semester while on probation. A student must maintain an aver- age. of 2.00 each srniester while on probation. If the student fails to maintain this average each semester while on probation he will be tlismissed from the Universitv. Students on probation who enroll in fenrcr thnn seven hours \\rill not be dismissed for failure to raise the grade point average to the required level; however, if s11ch a student has earned 12 oi- more hours in t\i70 or more tcrms, thc gi-acle point average of thcsc hours shall Fe used to determine fvhether he is subiect to dismissa!. To be removed from probation the accumulative gradc point average \vill be 2.00. A student who has heen dismissed for poor scholarship may h c . readmitted by permission of his major division curriculum tom- mittee in the College of Fine Arts and the Universit)~ Committee on Admissions, Advanced Standin:, ancl Esceptional Programs. DEGREE REQUIREMENTS The College of Fine :lrts offers four undergraduate degrees: Bachelor of Fine Arts, Bache!or of Art Education, Bachelor of Afusic, Bachelor of llusic Education. Graduation requirements for each degree are listed in the descriptions of thp appropriate division programs. DIVISION OF ART The Division of Art forms a portion of the College of Fine Arts. It is divided into four departments: Studio arts with four areas-- dralving-painting, printmaking, ceramics, and sculpture: graphic design; art history: and art education. The departments pride them- selves in their professional nttninment as productive researchers creative and eshibiting artists. The departments offer professional cnurses designed to trai.1 and educate art students v~ho arc planning careers in the arls ant1 to allow sruclents in other colleges to gain an understandi~lg ant1 appreciation of art. 272 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS Two v.ndergraduatc degrees are offered by thc Division of Art: The Bachelor of Fine .4rt-s with m:ijor study in the following area5: Painting, printmaking, ceramics, sculpture. graphic design, and nr: history. Xlinor study is available in dr:tn.iug or fashion illustratio:!; and the Bachelor of Art Education \i.hich meets state requirement.; for teacher certification. REQUIREMENTS No student shall he allon~ecl crcdit toward graduation for D grade work in excess of one-quarter c ~ fthe total hours. A grade average of 2.00 or better must hc earned on all ivork taken at this University which could bc applied to the degrce sought. The division ~vill accept the transfer of only one credit hour per semester of studio work totaling not more than six hours of the last 30 or 10 hours of the total number of hours required for graduation in nonresident work. such as extension or correspon- dence couryes, provided these are from accredited institutions. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The art courses which will fulfill the core curriculum requirements for graduation are: All art history courses except 463. The divisinn controls all art work or essays submitted for credit by the student and reserves the right to select certain pieces for its permanent collection. All art materials, with the exccxption of certain nonexpendable equipment, are furnished h!. the individual student. GRADUATE ART STUDIES The Graduate School offers a program leading to a Master of Finc Arts, or a Master of '4rts in art education, in art history, and in graphic design. For information concerning requirements for entrance and curriculum see art section in the Graduate School Bulletin. ART COLLECTIONS OF THE UNIVERSITY The Division of Art manases four collections of paintings, draw- ings, and prints. The art division collection to date, includes works by Albers, Friedlander. Gottlieb, Levinc, Piza, Roualt, Trova, as well as ~ radua te awl undergraduate student work. The Uni- versity Collection of Amrrican Printo and Drawings, to which acquisitions nre ac!de:l every year, contains a wide range of works of the 19th ancl 20th century; a fc\v of the artists represented are Calder, Cassatt. Lichtenstein, \lotheri~rell, Reinhart, Sloan, and Whistler. The Vermillioi~ Collection, to date, includes a Krushenick, COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 273 Rayo, Summers, Tobey, and a Vasarely. The Bloomfielcl Collectic!-1 comprises an important group of paintings from such matters as Sir William Beechy, Thomas Cole, Sir Peter Lely, and examples from the schools of Hubert Robert and Jacob Van Ruisdail. ART MAJOR OR MINOR FOR STUDENTS IN THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL. ARTS AND SCIENCES STUDIO-MAJOR: Students will complete 39 art hours. These hours will be distributed as follows: 101, 102, and nine hours elected from art history courses; and 21 hours elected from studio courses. MINOR: Students will complete 21 art hours. These hours will be distributed as follows: 101, 102, and 15 hours of electives. ART HISTORY-MAJOR: Students will complete 30 art history hours. These hours mill be distributted as follows: 101, 102, 463. A minimum of 13 hours jn one language is required (German, French, or Italian). MINOR: Students will complete 15 art history hours. These hours will be distributed as follows: 101, 102, and nine hours elected from other art history offerings. ART MINOR FOR STUDENTS IN THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION Students will complete 18 art hours. These hours will be distributed as follows: 165, 240, 343, and one elected studio course and six hours of art history: 101, 102. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS BACHELOR OF FlNE ARTS DEGREE In addition to the scholastic ancl residence requirements for gradu- ation from this University, candidates for this degree in painting, printmaking, ceramics, sculpture. or graphic design will complete a total of 126 semester hours. These hours \\,ill be distributed as follows: 45 core curriculum hours and 81 art curriculum hours. The student majoring in art history will complete a total of 124 semester hours. These hours will be distributed as follows: 45 core curricul~~m " and 79 art history ancl elective curriculum hours hours. Specific programs for each of these areas of the degree arc listed on the pages \vhich follo\v. Electives will be selectecl in con- sultation with adviser. 'CORE CURRICULUM (45 hours recommended for the BFA degree) I. Natural Sciences: 9 hours required Elect one course from each area. A minimum of four hours must be a laboratory science. Physical ( 1) Geology 111 ( 5 hours with lab). ( 2 ) Physical Science 101 (5hours without lab). 274 COLLEGE OF FlNE ARTS Biological: ( 1) Biology 100 ( 4 hours with lab). ( 2 ) Biological Science 102 ( 5 hours without lab). 11. Communications: 8 hours required. English 111 ( 3 hours). English 211 or 225 ( 3 hours). Speech 111 ( 2 hours). 111. Humanities: 15 hours required. Required: Ilistory of World Art I 101 ( 3hours). Historv of World Art I1 102 ( 3 hours ). Elect onecourse in each of the following areas: History ( 3 or 4 hours). Literature ( 3 hours). Philosophy or Religion ( 3 hours). IV. Social Sciences: 9 hours required. Elect one course in three of the following areas: Anthropology, all courses ( 3 hours). Economics ( 3 hours ) . Political Science: ( 3 hours). Psychology 111 ( 3 hours). Sociology ( 3 hours ) . V. Electives: 4 hours required. Credit courses offered by any department except the student's major department. STUDIO ARTS DEPARTMENT-DRAWING AND PAINTING Based on a thorough preparation in drawing and painting, the major prozresses through a structurecl procram leading to the development of a personal style. h,luseums, galleries, and traveling shows form the basis of environmental exposure. Requirements: 81 Art curriculum hours 9 Art history hours 21 Painting hours 21 Drawing hours (iPrintmaking hours 24 Art elective hours 45 Core curriculum hours hiodel Program FRESHMAN FIRST SEMESTER SECOXD SEMESTER 165 ( 3 ) Drawing I 175 ( 3 ) Printmaking I 11.1 1 1 FT F o..\.of \VorlcI Art 1 * 102 ( 3 ) History of World Art I1 O 111 ( 3 ) Englisho ( 3 ) English, 211 or 225 * ( 3 ) Humanities " ( 3 ) Hun~anities' - ( 3 ) Social Science a - ( 3 ) Social Science O 15 Total hours 15 Total hours SOPH0510RE FIRST SEX~ESTER SECOND SEMESTER 271 ( 3 ) Painting I 272 ( 3 ) Painting I1 267 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I 268 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I1 275 3 ) Prlntrnnking I1 ( 3 ) Art elective 13) Humanities 0 ( 3 ) Social Science 111 ( 2 ) SpeechD ( 5 ) Physical Science a ( 2 ) Humanities - 17 Total hours 16 Total hours ' Satisfies core curriculum requirements. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 275 JUNIOR SECOND SEMESTER 371 (3) Painting Studio Painting Studio 367 ( 3 ) Life Drawing Studio Life Drawing Studio 3 ) Art elective Art elective l 3 ) Art Hjstoxy elective Art elective ( 4 ) Biolog~cal Science * Art History elective Humanities 16 Total hours 17 Total hours SENIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER ( 3 ) Advanced Painting Studio 471 ( 3 ) Advanced Painting Studio ( 3 ) Advanced Drawing Studio 367 ( 3 ) Advanced Drawing Studio ( 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elcctive ( 3 ) Art electwe ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 3 ) Art History elective - ( 3 ) Art elective 15 Total hours 15 Total hours DRAWING Lower Division Courses 165. Drawing I. (3). Instroduction to the principles of drawing; theory and practice for beginning art students in various drawing media. \Vork dealing in still life, landscape and human figure. Problems in composition, projects and sketch books. 267 and 268. Life Drawing I & 11. (3-3). Drawing from life with emphasis on figure construction. Anatonly sketchhonks ant1 portfolios required. Pre- requisite: Art 165. Upper Division Courses 367. Life Drnwing Studio. (3). Empllasis nn individual development, figura- tive observation and interpretation. A4ay be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 267 and 268. 467. Advanced Drawing Studio. (3). Drawing with a varie of media. Graphic problems relative to individual technical and aesthetic ~evelopment. Group critiquw. Jla!. be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Three semesters of Life Drawing. Graduate Courses 501i. Seminar in Art. (3). Supervised study and research in the following art I . . ; I \ : IIr:~c.ing. \Veckl? consultation ant1 reports. Indivi;!~~altircns inn! not be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 521 & 522. Special Problems in Drawing. (1or 3, 1or 3). Advanced drawing in various media with emphasis on independent work and development of per- sonal expression. May be repeated for credit. 567. Special Problems in Life Drawing. (1or 3). Drawing from life. Sketch- books and portfolio required. h4ay be repeated for credit. 577-578. Terminal Project. (3or 5,3-5). PAINTING Lower Division Courses 229. Introduction to methods and Media of Painting. (3). Survey of painting methods from the 12th to 20th century. History and nature of materials. In- cludes encaustic, tempera, oil, oil-resin, synthetic media, groups, supports, and surface protection. Prerequisite: Prior or concurrent enrollment in painting, or art history major. " Satisfies core curriculum requirements. 276 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 271. Painting I. (3). An introduction to ail paintina. Emphasizing studio practices, fundamental principles, and techniques. Prerequisite: Art 165. 272. Painting 11. (3). An introduction to watercolor painting in 110th trans- parent and opaque media. Prerequsisite: Art 165. Upper Division Courses 371. Painting Studio. (3). Emphasis on individual development, personal interpretation and creativity. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 271 and 272. 471. Advanced Painting Studio. (3). For the oriented student. Emphasis on indcpendent achievement and preparation for graduate study. h4ay be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 371 and consent of the painting ' drawing faculty. Graduate Courses 501a. Seminar in Art. (3). Supervised study and research in the following art area: Painting. Weekly consultation and reports. Individual areas may not be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 50.5 & 506. Spccinl Prohlems in Painting. (3 or 5, 3 or 5) . Prc~fe~sionnland experimental painting with emphasis on the development of maturity, ideas, independent thinking, and personal expression. Mediums: oil, watercolor, 5 ) ~~th~.!ic.nletlia. 31a!. 11t. I-cpcate:l for crrtlit. 561. Methods and Media of Painting. (3). Painting methods from the 12th to 20th century. History and nature of materials. Includes encaustic, tempera. oil, oil-resin, synthetic media, grounds, supports, and surface protection. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. 577-578. Terminal Project. (3 or 5, 3 or 5). STUDIO ARTS DEPARTMENT-PRINTMAKING Exploitation oE the etching proccss and exposure to tools and tech- niques of the ~1.ap11icarts. llmphasis is placed on creativity plus encouragement to investigatr IICW and traditional craftsman like techniques and methods. Requirements: 81 Art curriculum llours 9 .Irt history hours 1 1 I'rin tmaking hours 3 Design hours 1.5 Drawing hours 6 Painting hours 27 Art elective hours 45 Core curriculum hours ' Model Program FRESHMAN F m s r SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 165 3 ) Drawing I 175 (3) Printmaking I 171 13) Basic two-Dimensional Design 102 ( 3 ) Historv of \Vorld Art I1 ' 101 ( 3 ) History of World Art I ( 3 ) English. 211 or 225 111 ( 3 ) Englisha 3 ) Humanities O - ( 3 ) Humanities * - 3 ) Social Science * 15 Total hours 15 Total hours 'Satisfies core curriculum requirements. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 277 SOPHOMORE FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 275 ( 3 ) Printmaking I1 268 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I1 267 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I 272 ( 3 ) Painting I1 271 ( 3 ) Painting I ( 2 ) Humanities * ( 3 ) Humanities O ( 3) Social Science O 3 ) Social Science O (5) Physical Science 111 12) Speech0 - - 16 Total hours 17 Total hours JUNIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 375 ( 3 ) Printmaking Studio 375 ( 3 ) Printmaking Studio 367 3 ) Life Drawing Studio ( 3 ) Art Histo~y electwe 13) Art History elective ( 3 ) Art elective 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art electivet 4 ) Biological Science O ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 2 ) Humanities 18 Total hours - 17 Total hours SENIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOSD SEMESTER 475 3 ) Advanced Printmaking Studio 475 3 ) Advanced Printmaking Studio 467 { 3 ) Advanced Drawing Studio 475 13) ~d vanced Prinhnaking Studio 3 ) Art History elective ( 3 ) Art electiveI 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 3 ) Art elective 15 Total hours 15 Total hours Lower Division Courses 175. Prinhnaking I. (3). An introduction to printrnaking. Exploratory work in woodcut, relief, mixed techniques, and college intaglio. 275. Prinimaking I. (3). Basic intaglio methods (etching, engraving, soft ground, aquatint, and mixed techniques). Prerequisite: Art 165. Upper Division Courses 375. Printmaking 111. (3). Introduction to lithography, printing from the stone in black and white. Prererll~isite: Art 175 or 275. 475. Advanced Printmaking Studio. (3). For the student interested in pro- fessional printmaking. Printmaking from the individual viewpoint with options in technique. Specialization in combined methods in color printing or black and white. hlay be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 375. Graduate Courses 501b. Seminar in Art. (3). Supervisecl study and research in the following art area: Printmaking. \f'erkly consultation and reports. Individual areas may not he repeated For credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 507 & 508. Special Problems in Printmaking. (3 or 5, 3 or 5). Advanced printmaking on an individual basis; encouragement given to investigation and an experimental attituclc comhineJ with a crafsmanlikc approach. Techniques inclule all intaglio methods, lithography and relief, I~lack and white, and color. May be repeated for credit. 577-578. Terminal Project. (3 or 5, 3 or 5). STUDIO ARTS DEPARTMENT-CERAMICS The ceramics m+jor is exposed t.1 hi$ materials: building, throwing, c l a y s , and glazes. Students investigate problems of glaze formula- tioc, firing the kiln, and characteristics of clays and production. 'Satisfies core curriculum requirements. 278 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS Requirements: 81 Art curriculum hours 3 i?rt history hours 24 Cerainic hours 6 Sculpture hours 12 Drawing hoiirs 3 Painting hours 3 Printmaking hours .3O Art elective hours 45 Core curriculum hours a Model Program FRESHMAN 165 3 ) Drawing I ( 3 ) Printmaking ( 175 or 275) 181 13) Ceramics I 185 3 ) Sculpture 1 101 ( 3 ) History tf World Art 1 102 [ 3 ) History of World A 5 11 a 111 3 ) English ( 3 ) English, 211 or 225 - 13) Humanities - ( 3 . . ) Social . . Science ' 1 5 Total hours 15 Total hours SOPHOMORE FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 281 ( 3 ) Ceramics I1 282 ( 3 ) Ceramics I11 267 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I 268 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I1 ( 3 ) Paintingo (271 or 272) 285 13) Sculuture I1 111 ( 2 ) Speech 3 j Social Science a ( 3 ) Humanities 0 i 5) Physical Science a - ( 3 ) Social Science a 17 Total hours 1 7 Total hours JUNIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 381 ( 3 ) Ceramics Studio 381 ( 3 ) Ceramics Studio ( 3 ) Study of Ceramics Materials ( 3 ) Art History elective (284 or 484) ( 3 ) Art elective 367 ( 3 ) Life Drawing Studio ( 3 ) Art elective 3 ) Art elective ( 2 ) Humanities aI 4 ) Biological Science a ( 2 ) Humanities ( 2 ) Humanities ' 17 Total hours 18 Total hours SENIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 481 (3)Advanced Ceramics Studio 481 ( 3 ) Advanced Ceramics Studio l 33 ) Art elective 3 ) Art elective Art elective elective 3 Art elective 3 ) Art elective Art elective - - 12 Total hours 15 Total hours Lower Division Courses 181. Ceramics I. (3). Introdr~ction to hand building, wheel throwing, and glazing methods. Basic knowledqe involving the physical characteristics of clay and glazes. Reading assicnments. 281. Ceramics 11. (3). Experience in hand building, wheel throwing, glazing methods. Lecture ~eriocls involving p n ~ r a l knowledge of clays, glazes, kilns, historical and contemporary potter!,. 282. Ceramics 111. (3). Esperiencc. i r ~hand Imilding, wheel throwing, glazing methods and firing procedi~res. Lt-c t~~re periods involving special studies of glazes and glaze materials, historical and contemporary pottery. Prerequisite: Art 181 or 281. * Satisfies core curriculum requirements. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 279 9 . 4 . Stud\. of Ccrnmic hlnterials I. (3). Lecturrs 2nd resrnrch co\,cxrinc cln!.s. glazes, refactory materials. Reading assignments concerning physical and chemical characteristics of pottery matrrials. Upper Division Courses 381. Ceramics Studio. (3). Advanced studio prol,len~s involving forming methods. Experience in glaze forrnr~lation and kiln firing. Lecture periods of advanced studies of ceramic materials, historical and contemporary pottery. May he repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 282. 481. Advanced Ceramics Studio. (3). Advanced stuclio prol~lems involving forming methods, gla7e formulation. and firing procedures. Lecture periods involving advanced sh~dies of ceramic matrrials and glaze formulation. May he repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 381. 484. Study of Ceramic Materials 11. (3). Lectures and research covering clays, glazes, and refactory materials. Reading assignments concerning physical and chemical characteristics of potter!. materials. Graduate Courses 501c. Seminar in Art. (3). Supervised study and research in the following art area: Ceramics. Ll'eekly consultation and reports. Inclividual areas may not be repeated for crrdit. Prrreqr~isite: Conscnt of instructor. 511 & 512. Special Prohlems in Ceramics. (3or 5 , 3 or 5). Research in ad- vanced problems in ceramics. May l>e repeatrd for credit. 548. Advanced Research of Ceramic kfaterials. (3). Lectures and advanced research covering clays, glazes, ancl refactory materials. Heading assignments concerning physical and chemical characteristics of pottery materials. Note- 1)ook and outside lah work required. 577-578. Terminal Projcct. (3 or 5, 3 or 5). STUDIO ARTS DEPARTMENT-SCULPTURE The program is designed to provide a solid grounding in basic tech- niques and materials and to expose students to the past and present directions in sculpture. A professional attitude is emphasized with the exploration of traditional and experimental methods and media. Requirements: 81 Art curriculum hours 9 Art history hol~rs 21 Sculptr~re hours 3 Ceramic hours 15 Drawing hours ,3 Painting hours 3 Printninking hours 24 Art rlectivr hours 45 Core curriculum hours * Model Program FRESHMAN SECOND SEMESTER 165 ( 3 ) Drawing I ( 3 ) Art elective 185 ( 3 ) Sculpture I ( 3 ) Printmaking ( 175 or 2752 101 ( 3 ) History zf World Art 1 102 ( 3 ) History of World Art I1 111 ( 3 ) English ( 3 ) English, 211 or 2!5 O ( 3 j Humanities ( 4 ) Biological Science 15 Total hours 16 Total hours " Satisfies core curriculum requirements. 280 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS SOPHOMORE Fmsr SEMESTER 285 ( 3 Sculpture I1 268 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I1 267 ( 3 1 Life Drawing I ( 3 ) Paintrng (271 or 272)( 3 ) Ceramics (181 or 281 ) ( 3 ) Art elective ( 5 ) Physical Science ' ( 3 ) Humanities * ( 2 ) Humanities O ( 3 ) Social Science O - ( 2 ) Humanities 16 Total hours - 17 Total hours JUNIOR FIRST SEMESTER 385 ( 3 ) Sculpture Studio 385 ( 3 ) Sculpture Studio 367 ( 3 ) Life Drawing Studio 386 3 ) Sculpture Studio ( 3 ) Art elective 1 3 ) Art History elective ( 3 ) Humanities 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Social Science a I 3 ) Social Science 111 - ( 2 ) Speech* -. . 15 Total hours 17 Total hours SENIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEUESTER 485 ( 3 ) Advanced Sculpture Studio 485 ( 3 ) Advanced Sculpture Studio 467 ( 3 ) Advanced Drawing Studio ( 3 ) Art History electwe ( 3 ) Art History elective ( 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 3 ) Art elective 15 Total hours 15 Total hours Lower Division Courses 185. Sculpture I. (3). An introduction to basic sculpture techniques and materials. Direct work in plaster, clay, wood and metal; casting in plaster and concrete. 285. Sculpture 11. (3). An introduction to sculptural techniqr~es in welded steel, assemblage, and vacuum formed plastic. Prerequisite: Art 185. Upper Division Courses 385. Sculpture Studio. (3). Special en~phasis on the main approaches to sculphlre. Stres4 is placed on the form, concrpt and construction of sculpture. Carving techniques in wood, stone, and/or plastic. Construction and assem- blage techniques selected from wood, plastic, metal (welded, brazed, rivited, etc.) and/or combined materials. \la). I,e repcatetl once for credit. Prerequi- site: Art 285. 386. Sculpture Studio. (3). Plaster investment, sand, and vitrified shell cast- ing techniques for sculpture in bronze and aluminr~m. Prerequisite: Art 285. 485. Advanced Sculpture Studio. (3). Sc~llpture in any medium with an emphasis on personal development and creativity. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 385. Graduate Courses 501d. Seminar in Art. (3). Supervised study and research in the following art area: Sculpture. Weekly consultation and reports. Jndividunl areas may not be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Conrent of instructor. 509 & 510. Special Problems in Sculpture. (3 or 5, 3 or 5). Advanced sculp- ture with emphasis on esperimentation ;mtl high quality work on an incliviclual basis. Special projects in casting, architect~lral sculpture, mixed media, or new materials and techniq~~es hiay Ile rrpeatetl for credit. will hv stressed. 577-578. Terminal Project. (3 or 5, 3 or 5). a Satisfies core curriculum requirements. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 281 GRAPHIC DESIGN DEPARTMENT-COMMERCIAL ART Professional program for students interested in a career in the field of visual communication. Conceptual and practical problem-solving in various media: photography, typography, design, and drawing directed toward the development of design skills for communication purposes. Requirements: 81 Art curriculum hours 3 Philosophy of Art horirs 36 Graphic Design holrrs 13 Drawing hours 3 Bn~ic Design hours 3 Color horlrs 3 Painting hours 20 Art elcctive hoilrs (Graphic Design and related areas) 45 Core curriculum hours * blodel Program FRESHMAN FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 165 ( 3 ) Drawing I 193 ( 3 ) Color 171 ( 3 I Illsic Two-dimensional Design 102 ( 3 ) History of World A? I1 101 3 ) History of World Art I ( 3 ) English. 211 or 225 111 1 3 ) Englisho ( 3 ) Humanities ' ( 3 ) Humanities O - ( 3 ) Social Science 15 Total hours 15 Total hours SOPHOMORE Basic Typography Life Drawing I Design Media I Drawing for Commercial Art L "LL.LL..C, I. Humanities Physical Science Social Science ' 17 Total hours 17 Total hours JUNIOR F m s ~ SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER Graphic Design I-Theory 394 ( 3 ) Graphic Design I1 Fashion Illustration I 388 ( 3 ) Fashion Illustration I1 Drawing for Commercial Art 397 ( 3 ) Advertising Illustration Speech a Social Science * Humanities 15 Total hours SENIOR (Select one ( 3 ) Art elective ( 4 ) Biological Science ( 2 ) Humanities 18 Total hours area---Graphic DE:sign or Fashion Illustration) 493 487 493 I ( 3 ) Graphic Design 3 ) Art 497 or 487 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 3 ) Art elective 15 Total hours 111-Media 494 ( 3 ) Graphic Design 1; 462 ( 3 ) Philosophy of Art ( 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 4 ) Art elective 16 Total hours SECONDS E M E S T E R - F ~ S ~ ~ O ~Illustration 487 ( 3 ) Advanced Fashion Illustration 462 ( 3 ) Philosophy of Art ( 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 4 ) Art elective 16 Total hours ( 3 ) Advanced Fashion Illustration ( 3 ) Graphic Design 111-Media ( 3 ) Art elective ( 3 ) Art elective - ( 3 ) Art elective . . 15 Total hours Satisfies core curriculum requirements. 282 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS Lower Division Courses 171. Design I. (3). Introduction to the principles of design and practice in various media. A study of the hvo-dimensional surface in relation to the formal elements of space, form, color and consequent structure. (Formerly Art 142.) 172. Design 11. (3). Introduction to the principles of three-dimensional design. A study of relationships of mass and space using diverse media. 193. Color. (3). A study of the qualities of color in design and art expression. 238. Desien Media I. (3). Introcluctory course in photography and related materials (color-key, ortho film for process and plate-making). Prerequisite: Art 171 ancl consent of instructor. 239. Design Media 11. (3). Introtluctory course in motion picture photography and television. Prerequisite: Art 2338 ancl consent of instructor. 295. Basic Typography. (3). Lettering as related to type families and applied to advertisements. A study of type ant1 its use. Prerequisite: Art 165 and 171. 297. Layout and Production Techniques. (3). Introduction to advertising theory and visual communication. Funtlamentals of respective functions of copy, art, plans and media in advertisinp. A study of studio practices and art production prol~lems. Prerequisite: Art 295. 299. Drawing for Commercial Art. (3). Directed practice in drawing in various media with emphasis on its application to comniercial art. Prerequisite: Graphic design major or consent of instrr~ctor. Upper Division Courses 338. Design Media Studio. (3). Advanced study of photography. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 238 and consent of instructor. 387. Fashion Illusti-ation I. (3). Development of the fashion figure for use in fashion illustrating. Prerequisite: Art 267. 388. Fashion Illustration 11. (3). Development of the fashion figure. Inter- pretation of varied texturcs of furs, fabrics, leathers, etc. Problems in layout peculiar to fashion advertising. \Vork in media for newspaper ancl magazine reproduction. Prereqrrisitc: Art 387. 393. Graphic Design I-Theory. (3). Experimentations with visual phenom- ena and its use in the communication of ideas through visual means. Studio practice coordinatctl with discussion of art theory, philosophy, and history of design. Prerequisite: Art 297. 394. Graphic Design 11. (3). Introduction to printing processes; letterpress, offset printing, and photo-silk screen. Prerequisite: Art 239 and 393. 397. Advertisirrg Illustration. (3). Development of skills in pictorial graphics. Their application to the needs of editorial and advertising illustration. Black and white media. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 267, 272 ancl 299. 399. Advanced Drawing for Commercial Art. (1). Directed practice in draw- ing for conimrrcial art. Or~tsitle assignments with weekly critique. Maximum cretlit four hours by reenro!lment. Prerequisite: Conscmt of instructor. 455. Color and Design. (3). The psychology ancl optics of color perception and expression in design. Application of color theory to film making, exhibition design, and advertising. 462. Seminar: Philosophy of Art. (3). Survey of the field of aesthetics and philosophy of art. A critical examination of ideas. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 283 487. Advanced Fashion Illustration. (3).Fashion drawinas of costumed models for newsp:lper and magazine layouts. klerchanclising ancl fashion elements annlyzcd in black ancl white and color. Consideration of reproduction require- ments. Xlny he repeated for credit. Prerequisitc: Art :388. 493. Graphic Design 111-Media. (3). Application of design media in the applied arts. hlay 1)e repc.atc.tl for c,retlit. Prerequisite: Art 394. 494. Graphic Design IV. (3).A comprehensive study of the corporate image. Development, coordination, anrl rxc,cr~tion of n corporate design program. This course emphasizes concrptual aspects of graphic design, hlay he repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Art 394. 197. Advanced Advertising Illustration. (3).Continuation of Art 397. Color mcdia. &,lay be repcatetl for credit. Prrrrqr~isite: Art 397. 5013. Seminar in Art. (3).Supervised stritly ant1 research in the following art area: Graphic design. \Veekly consultation ant1 reports. Intlividual areas may not reprated for crrtlit. Prereclr~isite: Consent of instructor. 551. Graphic Design Mcdia. (3).Application of design media in the applied arts. hlay 11e repeated for creclit. 553. Typography. (3). The study of tjpography in visual communication and its use in graphic design. Lal~oratory work in designing, setting, printing ant1 bindins original design. 555. Graphic Design Theory. (3).Esprrimentation in visual phenomena and its used in the communication of ideas through visual means. Studio practice coordinatecl with tliscussion on design theory, philosophy and history of de- sign. May he repented for creclit. 557. Production Techniques. (3). Lal)oratory problems in planning and executing design work for the various graphic media. A study of office practices related to the operation of 3 studio and the production of art. 577-578. Terminal Project. (3-3). ART HISTORY DEPARTMENT The program is clesignccl to prepare stuclents for the \vhole range of activities relatecl to the art of the past: Criticism. both college anrl secondary lwei teaching, and conser~~ation. Students are esposcd to a view of art from rnrlirst times to the present. The 1ai1~;uagr of art as wcl!! as the historical frnmc.n.ol.l; is emphasiztrd. Requirements: 79 Art curriculum hours 30 Art history hours 13 Foreign language hours 36 Elective hours 45 Core curriculum hours ' Model Program FRESHMAN FIRSTSEMESTER -- - 101 ( 3 ) History of World Art I 102 ( 3 ) Histoly of World Art I1 111 3 ) English " ( 3 ) English 211.0~ 225 O 13 ) Humanities a ( 3 ) Humanities ( 3 ) Social Science ( 3 ) Soc~alScience a - ( 3 ) Elective - 15 Total hours 15 Total houn * Satisfies core curriculum requirements. 284 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS SOPHO\IORE FIRST S E ~ ~ E S T E R SECOND SEMESTER ( 3 ) Art History elective ( 3 ) Art History elective ( 5 ) llajor Forersn Lanquage ( 3 ) Art History elective ( 3 ) Humanities O ( 5 ) Major Foreign Language ( 4 ) B~ological Science ' ( 5 ) Physical Science ' 111 - (2)Speech9 - 16 Total hours 17 Total hours JUNIOR FIRST SEDIESTER SECOND SEMESTER ( 3 ) Art History elective ( 3 ) Art History elective ( 3) Slajor Foreign Language 3 ) Humanities ( 3 ) Social Science * I3 ) Humanities a ( 2 ) Humanities O 2 ) Humanities ( 3 ) Elective ( 3 ) Elective ( 3 ) Elective - - 14 Total hours 17 Total hours SENIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER ( 3 ) Art History elective 3 Art History elective ( 3 ) E1ect1r.e 463 { 3 ] Seminar: Techniques of ( 3 ) Elcctivr Art History ( 3 ) Elective ( 3 ) Elective - ( 3 ) Elective ( 3 ) Elcctivr 15 Total hours - ( 3 ) El~ct lvr 15 Total hours Lower Division Courses 101. FIistory of \Vorld Art 1. (3). .\ survey of \vorltl art from ~lrchistoric originc to tlic 14th ccntur?,. 102. History of World Art 11. (3). A surl-ev of world art from the 14th ccLntllry to t h r mid-19tl1 ccntt~ry. 161. Introduction to the Vis11:rl Arts. (3). An introclrlction to t h ~ uncl(.rstand in:: of irnacc,s and materials in the \~isu;ll nrtc in relation to the, gcogrnpl~ic:~l. I1istorira1, religious? social. and i,c,c:nonlic conditions of thr \I'est,brn \i.orltl. Designed for tlw nonart mnjor. 211. Greek Art. (:3). . in introdr~ctory st~lt ly of Crcck art fr:m the .\I-chair t o I Ie l le~~is t icperiods. Thc course \\fill c.ovc.r ;rrchitcctt~re, x . l ~ i p t l ~ r ~ \-;I>:and pxinting. \\lit11 ernpl~:~sis on thcx art of I'cricles' Athens. 212. Roman .4rt. (3). .4n introductinn to tilt. art of Ilome from the, asc i:< :?t:gr~siur to t!le nfic of Const:!~~tinta. 221. Italian Rennissancc. (3). .A study of tlic architcctnrc, s c ~ ~ l l > t ~ l r ~ ,;ui,l paintin:: from the 1:3th ccwtury to the 16th. Emphasis will he givt'n to early devclopmcnts in Florcxnce :ind Sicna and lntc d(:vc~lopmcnts in Ronic.. 222. Italian Brrocluc. (3). A st11dy of B:~roclr~c painting. scdlpture, nrld arc!li- tccture in Rome. \.(.nice and Bologna from 1600 to 1730, \\,it11 c~~i!)husis (711 ihc Carracci, Ucrnini ;11ic! 'Titpolo. Upper Division Courses 302. 18th and 19th Century European Ark. (3). .A history of E~~ro l i enn:art From I\ ' ; l t tea~~ throagll pos t - l~npress ioni ,~~:~ . :303. 18th and 19th Century Arncrican Art. (S). .\ history nf : ~ r :i \ ~ ~ ~ c r i c a n from the colonial prriod t h r o r ~ ~ h tllc 1!)t11 cc. Prcrcquisitr: Consrnt of instructor. Graduate Courses 501g. Seminar in Art. (3). Supcrl.isc.d study and resrnrch in the follon,in.i art area:. .4rt history. IVeekly consultation and reports. Indiviclu;~l areas m:l.y not bc repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 531. Seminar: .4rt of the 18th and 19th Centuries. (3). Selected readin?. and problems in 18th and 19th rcntur). art, emphasizing aesthetic theory and the history of iclcns. Prcrrquisil!.: Consent of instructor. 532. Seminar: Art since 1945. (3).Selected rradings and problems in con- temporary art. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 565. hluseum Techniques I. (3). Primarily for the graduate student intcr- ested in museum w:ork. Sprcialized rtsearcll related to adnlinistrntivc rc,sponsi- bilities of a museum: collection, exhibition, recording, preservation, and finan- cial acti\.ities. 575-576. Thesis. (2-2). BACHELOR OF ART EDUCATION DEGREE In addition to the scholastic and residence requirements for grad- uation from this University, candidates for this degree will com- plete a minimum of 131 semester hours. These hours will be clis- tributctl as follows: 51 core curriculum hours,' 39 studio art curriculum hours, six art history hours, 16 art education hours, and 19 education hours. EIectives will be selected in consultation with adviser. The following program fulfills both the University general re- quirements for graduation and the Kansas certification require- ments for teaching art at the seconclary and elementary levels. 286 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS - - - CORE CURRICULUM (51 hours recommended for the BAE degree) I. Natural Sciences: 12 hours required. Elect in at least two areas. A minimum of four hours must be a lal~oratory science Physical: ( 1 ) Geology 111 ( 5 hours with lab). ( 2 ) Physical Science 101 (;5 ho~rrs without lab). Biological: ( 1) Biology 100 ( 4 hours with lab). -~ ( 2 ) Biological Sciencr 102 ( 5 hours without lab). Engineering: ( 1) Engineering Science in Society 300 ( 3 hours). 11. Communications: 8 hours required. English 111 ( 3 hours). English 211 or 225 ( 3 hours). Speech 111 ( 2 hours). 111. Humanities: 15 hours reauired. Required: Art History ( 6 hours). Literature ( 6 hours). Elect one course from the following areas: History ( 3 or 4 hours). Philosophy or Religion ( 3 hours). IV. Social Sciences: 12 hours required. Required: Psychology 111 ( 3 hours). Elect in two of the following areas: Anthropology, all courses ( 3 hours ) . Economics ( 3 hours). Political Science ( 3 hours). Sociology (3 hours ). V. Electives: 4 hours required. Credit courses offered by any department except the student's major department. STUDENT TEACHING Admission into the student teaching semester requires senior stand- ing (90 hours-200 credit poir?ts); a minimum cumulative grnde- point index of 2.25 and 2.50 in art courses at the time of application for student teaching; grade of C or better in English 111 or its equivalent; a grade of C or better in Speech 111; completion of Ed. 232, 333; Art Ec1ucatic)n 241, 343, 342; satisfactory physical ex- amination; recommendation by the Department of Art Education. Applications for student teaching must be on file with and ap- proved by the chairman of art education by mid-term of the spring semester prior to the academic year in which student teaching is anticipated. ART EDUCATION DEPARTMENT A professional program for students interested in art teaching. A structured program preparing majors to teach and supervise at various education levels. All majors are encouraged to specialize in either studio or art history offerings. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 287 - - Requirements: 61 Art curriculum hours 39 Stutlio art hours 16 Art rtlucation hours 6 Art history hours (above 100 level) 19 Education hours 51 Core curriculum hours * Model Program FRESHMAN 165 ( 3 ) Drawine 185 ( 3 ) Sculot~lre II - - - is1 ( 3 j ~ e r a m i r s I A% C ~ i T t i v ~ ( 3 j (2-D Arra) 101 ( 3 ) History of World Art 1 " 102 3 ) History of World A$ I1 O 111 3 ) English0 13) English 211 or 225 / . 3 . ) Humanities a ( 3 ) Social - - . . Science ' 15 Total hours 1 5 Total hours SOPHOMORE FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER 267 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I 268 ( 3 ) Life Drawing I1 271 (3) Painting I 272 ( 3 ) Painting I1 082 ( 4 ) Intro. Study of Teaching (Ed . ) (3 ) Art Electivc (3-D Area) ( 4 ) Natural Science (Biological) " ( 3 ) Art Speclal~zation elective - ( 3 ) Humanities ( 3 ) Art Ed. in Elem (241 or 3$1) (Art Ed. ) 17 Total hours 111 ( 2 ) Speech 17 Total hours JUNIOR FIRST SEMESTER SECOND SEMESTER :ialization elective ( 3 ) Art Specialization elective ory elective 442 ( 3 ) Art Ed. Scc. (Art Ed.) 'isual !at. (Art Ed.) 333 ( 3 ) Sec :. School Student (Ed.) :ia1 Science 3 ) Social S cience tural Science (Physical) :ies O3 ) H u m a ~ l - (Z1 Humanltles a 17 Total hours - 17 Total hours SENIOR FIRST S E ~ ~ E S T E R SECONDSEMESTER (Teaching Block) ( 3 ) Art Specialization elective 406 ( 4 ) Art Curricular (Art Ed.) ( 3 ) Art History elective 408 ( 3 ) Social Aspects Teaching (Ed.) 343 ( 3 ) Fiber & Fabric !Art Ed.) 43.3 ( 2 ) Psych. Aspect? Teaching (Ed.) ( 3 ) Natural Sc~ence 447 ( 7 ) Student Teaching (Art Ed.) ( 3 ) Social Sc~ence * - - ( 2 ) Humanities O 16 Total hours 1 7 Total hmrs Lower Division Courses 240. Art Fundamentals for the Classroom Teacher. (3). For students without previous art background who plan to teach in the elementary school classroom. Study of fundamental methods, materials, and concepts used to develop art knowledge and skills in the elementary age levels. 241. Art Education in the Elementary School. (3). Study of philosophy, psy- chology, and sensory growth of the elementary age student with emphasis on the development of the art program for this level. Prerequisite: Art education major, or Art 240, or consent of instructor. Upper Division Courses 341. Art Education Curriculum in the Elementary School. (3). Study of developmental characteristics of the elementary age student and the develop- Satisfies core curriculum requirements, 288 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS ment of the art p ro~qam with respect to materials, skills and knowledge con- tent. Prerequisite: Art education major. 343. Fiber and Fabric Processes. (3). Fiber processing and structuring in traditional and experimental processes in woven forms and other structural techniques using natural and man-made fiber. Prerequisite: Art 241 or con- sent of instructor. 406. Art Curricular and Supervision Method. (4). The construction of cur- riculum for elementary, junior and senior high levels; techniques of supervision and administration of an art program. 442. Art Education in the Secondary School. (3). The study of philosophy, objectives, and classroom procedures directed toward the development of in- formational and studio skills at the secondary level. 445. Developing Visual Materials for Art Education. (3). A production 1al)oratory which concentrates on the use of technological,~multimedia(films, slides, tapes, projector, etc.) for art eclucation students who will engage in con- structing units of visual learning. 450. Art Workshop . (1-3). May be repeated for credit. (The area to be covered will be inserted at the time course is offered.) Graduate Courses 501f. Seminar in Art. (3). Supervised study and research in the following art area: Art eclucation. Weekly consultation and reports. Individual areas may not be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 517 & 518. Research Problems in Art Education. (3-3). Orientation in re- search methods, findings and designs related to the analysis of studies and current problems in art eclucation. May be repeated once for credit. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. 519. Development of Art Understanding in the Educational Program. (3). Readings, observation and evaluative techniques in the development of con- cepts and materials for art understanding. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 523. Fiber and Fabric Processes. (3). Fiber processing and structuring in traditional and experimental processes in woven forms and other structural techniques using natural and man-made fibers. Prerequisite: Consent of in- structor. 575-576. Thesis. (2-2). DIVISION OF MUSIC The Division of Ilusic, which includes the departments of perform- ance, musicology-composition, and music education, offers courses. programs, and curricula which are designed to train and educate serious music students whc, are planning careers in the music profes- sion, and to allonr students in other colleges to gain an understand- ing of music as a humanistic study. Recitals, by students, faculty. anrl guests augment the overall community programs in the fine arts. The Division of \!~lsics is an acrreclitecl member of the National Association of Schools of Ylusic. Requirements for entrance and graduation are in accort1:~nce with its published regulations. T ~ v oundergracluate clegrees are offered by the Division of hlusic: (1) The Bnchclor. of Jltrsir: Educoiion-containing a minor in edu- COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 289 ciltion meeting the stat? requir-ements for the secondar!. three-year certificate ant1 deg:-ce thre?-year elementary certificate. There are two options within this degree: ( a ) The Bachelor of Ylusic Educa- tion general clegrcc (instrr~mt,ntal emphasis) which is offered to satisfy the needs of the studcnt whose chief performing medium is instrumental or keyboard, and nrho plans to cnter the field of instru- mental music teaching in the public schools; ( 1 7 ) the Bachelor of l lusic Education degree (vocal emphasis) lr~hich is offered to satisfy the needs of thp stuclcnt whose chief performing medium is voice or piano, and \idlo plans to enter the field of vocal music teaching in the public schools. ( 2 ) The h'trt.!tclor of !;rrvir it! ~~e~. for . r ,~nnr -c may emphasize either ;i performing medium (piano, organ, voice, strings, wind or percus- sion). or theory-composition as the major area of concentration. REQUIREMENTS PROFICIENCY EXAMINATIONS YIajors in music must tlemonstrntc performance ability on one in- strument or voice to the satisfaction of th? music examining commit- tee following rcgistration. Entering students unable to meet ap- plied music requirements will be enrolled in Applied SIusic 120. Jn order to determine the status of all students in applied music, proficiency examinations nlill bc given folloliring the registration period. Thereafter, repertoire cards will be maintained, recording the student's progresseach srmester. The piano proficiency examination for all music degree students may be taken by entering students whose background indicates they may pass this requirement without enrolling in class or private piano (nonpiano majors). If the requirement is met, the student may elect other interest areas or additional private study in piano courses designed for the nonpiano major. Transfer students who submit proof, by official transcript or letter from the dean, of completion of a comparable piano proficiency examination, will be exempt. Proficiency examinations in music theory ~vi l l also be given to new students. Those deficient \\?ill be required to enroll concur- rently in rcmedial work until competency has been attained. All proficient!, examinations must be passed before the student will b e allo\rc:d to student teach. STUDENT TEACHING Admission into the student teaching semester requires a minimum c~tmulnticcgrade-point index of 2.23; a minimum grade-point index of 2.50 in music courses; senior standing (90 hours-200 credit points): a grade of C or better in English 111, or its equivalent; 290 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS a gra(!e of C or bctter i!: Speech 111: coniplrtion of pr~recluisites in rducational psycholoe!;. f(~unc;xtions of cducation ant1 music educa- tion methods: i ~ l f i . ~ t1lcrt:r p!i,s.sct/ pinno profciencgt; passed physical cxaminatiou bec i~ rec.r)mmc-.!iclec! b!- the music ctlucation cle- partment. Transfer students must satisfy education department requirements for prerecpisitcs if not taken at \Vichita State University. All students must have application on file with, and approval of, the Admissions Committee of the College of Education and the Depariment of hlusic Education. Application must be filed with the chairman of the music cducation department by midterm of the spring semester prior to the academic year in which student teaching is requested. APPLIED MUSIC REGULATIONS ( 1 ) A minimum of 10 hours practice per week is required for two semester hours credit for applied music in the student's chief per- forming medium. ( 2 ) A minimum of five hours practice per week is required for one semester h o ~ ~ rcredit in the student's secondary performing medium. ( 3 ) Applied music instruction shall receive academic credit only when provided on the University campus with approved music faculty staff. ( 4 ) Applied music students may enroll in the following classifi- cations: Freshman, 120, sophomore, 220; junior, 320; senior, 420, graduate, 520. These applied music courses may be repeated to meet m in im~~m performance requirements. Prior to graduation all music majors must achieve a minimum performance classification \ohich is determined by the faculty according to each student's degree program. Sttidents otl secondary instruments zoill take class or pricate lc.~,sons rinfi! proficiency requirements are met. (5) Prior to graduation, candidates for any degree in music must pass an examination in keyboard proficiency. ( 6 ) Candidates for an). degree must pass an examination on materials in their chief performing medium. Practice rooms are available to all students in the Division of llusic who are enrolled for any phase of applied music. RECITALS .4II music majors are required to enroll in five semesters of recital. liequiremcnts for four of these semc,sters arc, fulfilled by attending minimum of 14 specified recitals and concerts sponsored by the Division of \lusic. The fifth semester recital requirement is ful- filled by a studrnt's performance of his senior recital and he must be enrolled in recital during that semester. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 291 Each student shall be required to declare a chief performancc medium and in this major area shall be required to present a public or jury recital prior to graduation. The decision as to whether the performance will be jury or public is made by an examining committee. Each student is to present to the examining committee a projected senior recital pro- gram The examining committee shall determine (1) the suitabi'ity of the projected program; ( 2 ) the capability of the student to perform the program publicly; ( 3 ) whether this program should be performed before a faculty jury. The theory-composition major shall present a selection of com- positions representing large and small forms, totaling a min im~~m of 20 minutes in duration for his senior recital. These compositions are to he performed publicly. In addition the student may elect to present a recital in his chief performing medium with the per- mission of his applied mcsic instructor and achievement of junior stnnding in that instrument. No graduating senior may prepare or perform the graduation recital ~vithout the guidance of a full-time staff member. In the event the required credit hours have been earned prior to the recital presentation, the student is expected to elect the applied major during the preparation for recital performance. GRADUATE MUSIC STUDIES The Graduate School offers programs leading to a Master of Music Education (elementary, instrumental or choral emphasis), or a !laster of \lusic deqree in performance, theory-composition or history-literature. These programs may be pursued during the S1lrnrnr.1- SC~S~(;II or tlurir~g thc rc~ulur fall and spring terms. For information concerning requirements for entrance and curricula consu!t the Graduate Bulletin and/or the coordinator of Graduate Slusic Studies, Division of Music. MUSIC MAJOR IN THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS AND SCIENCES Students on the Collcgc of Liberal Arts and Sciences who wish to major in music :we I-ecpired to rlect 41 hours as specified in the following are:ls and course listings: CROUP I Music Literature and History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 hours 113, 331-332. GROUP I1 Music Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 hours 15'-1%, 129-130, 227-228, 229, 323. 292 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS GROUP I11 Counterpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours 361. GROUP IV Conducting, Orchestration and Choral Arranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 hours 217 or 218 and 441 or 445. GROUP V Applied Music ( 4 semesters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 hours Voice, Piano, Organ or Orchestral Instrument. GROUP VI Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 hours Select in consultation with adviser. GROUP VII Electives from the areas of Music Literature, hiusic Theory, Counter- point, Conducting, Orchestration, and Choral Literature . . . 4 hours MUSIC MINOR IN THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS AND SCIENCES A music minor in libcral arts consists of 18 hours selected from the follo\ving: Xlusic 127-128. 129-130. 113, 227-228, 229-230, 323, 331, 332, a maximum of four hotus of c~nsrmbles and a maximum of two hours (t\iro scinesters) in applied music. Students \\rho choose to utilize t\vo 170urs of npplicd music must meet the requirements of Applied ylusic 120. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS BACHELOR OF MUSIC DEGREE REQUIREMENTS ( 1) General graduation rcrluirements of the University. ( 2 ) 3lusic reiuircments for Bachelor of llusic in theory-corn- position: Applied Music: Chief performing medium (piano, organ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 hours Other performing media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 h o ~ ~ r s or Chief performing medium (nonkeyboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 hours Keyboard performing medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 hours Other performing media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 hours Theorv and Com~osition: ~ i s i c ,127-128, 129-130, 227-228, 229-230, 323, 359, 360, 361 371, 372, 441, 459-460, and 461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 hours History and Literature of Music: Music 113-114 and 331 and 332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hours Conducting: Music 217 or 218, and 451 or 491 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 hours Ensembles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hours Electives (Music or nonmusic courses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 hours Recital attc.i,rlance for foi~r scmestcrs plus senior recital. The theory-composition major is required to present for pul~lic per- formance a selection of his composition representing large and small forms, totaling a minimum of 20 minutes. In addition the COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 293 student may elect to present a recital in his chief performin medium with the permission of his applied music instructor a n 1 achievement of junior standing in that instrument-applied level 320. ( 3 ) hlusic requirements for Bachelor of ?r.lusic in performance ( instrumental major). Applied Music: Chief performing medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 hours Second performing medium ( 4 semesters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 hours Theorv: MGsic 127-128, 129-130, 227-228, 229-230, 323, 361, and 441 . . . 22 hours History and Literature of Music: Music 113-114 and 331-332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hours Conducting: Music 217 or 218 and 451 or 491 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 hours Ensembles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 hours Electives (either music or nonmusic courses)". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 hours Senior Recital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 hour Attendance at specified number of recitals per semester for four semesters plus senior recital. ( 4 ) Requirements for Bnchelor of llusic performance (vocal major). Foreign Languages 20 hours French 111-112 German 111-1 12 Italian 111-112 (10 hours in each of two of the above three languages.) A student with two units of a foreign language from high school may continue this language for elcctive credit, but is re- quired to take, in addition to this language, 10 hours in each of two of the three languages listed above. Applied Music: Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 hours Piano ( 2 semesters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours Study in another instrument may be substituted if student meets proficiency in Piano 10. Theory: Music 127-128, 129-130, 227-228, 229-230, and 323 . . . . 18 hours History and Literature of Music: Music 113-114, 331-332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hours (Above courses count in the core under humanities) Conducting: Music 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours Voice Pedagogy and Repertoire: Music 425, 426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 hours Ensembles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hours Electives in uuper division Theory, Conducting, Choral Materials, or Music Theater Directing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 hours Senior Recital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 hour Attendance a t specified number of recitals per semester for seven ~emestcrs11l11ssenior recit:~l. Music 381 and 382 required of piano majors. Music 397 and 398, 497 and 498 required of organ majors. BACHELOR OF MUSIC EDUCATION DEGREE REQUIREMENTS The following proTram fulfills both the University requirements for graduation and the Knnsas State Certification requirements and is required of all I3achelor c ~ f'lnsic Education degree candidates: 294 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS Mathematics and Natural Sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 hours A minimum of four hours must be a laboratory science. Courses must be taken in a t least two of the following three sub- divisions: ( 1) Mathematics; ( 2 ) Physical Science; ( 3 ) Biologi- cal Science. Oral and Written Communications, Literature and Foreign Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 hours Required: English 111, 211 or equivalent, Speech 111 History, Social and Behavioral Sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 hours Psychology 111, required; courses in two of the following suh- divisions: Economics, Sociology, .4nthropology, Political Science. History may be used to complete the 12 hours requirement. Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 hours M ~ ~ s i c Any collrse in Hl~manities (two sub- 113, 381, 332 req~~irccl. divisions required), Social Sciences, Mathematics, or Natural Sciences. Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 hours Ed. Psych. 233 or 333 and 433 " Fd. Ed. 232 and 427 or 428 Elementary Education 447h4 " Secondary Education 44734 ' Bachelor of Music Education-General Degree (Instrumental Emphasis) The following additional courses are required of all Bachelor of Music Education degree candidates (instrumental emphasis) : Applied Music Chief performing medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 hours Second performing medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours Third performing medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours The above must include completion of keyboard proficiency and must include two hours of voice (one semester of applied voice and one semester of Music 142). Keyboard majors with an instrumental background who elect the instrumental emphasis program must include two semesters of one orchestral instrument as the third performing medium. Theory: Music 127-128, 129-130, 227-228, 229-230, 333, 441 or 445 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 hours Conducting: Music 217 or 218 and Music 451 or 491 . . . 4 hours Ensembles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hours W i n d and Percrrssion nuriors are required a minimum of six hours in Music B and two hours of hlusic h4. The exceptions are: ( 1 ) Two hours of Music B will be waived if the student elects four hours of h,lusic M; ( 2 ) Women with elementary instrumental emphasis arc not required to elect 3111sic hi, and ( 3 ) Upperclass transfer students, except women with elementary emphasis, are required only one hour of Music M. Keyboard Majors following the instrumental emphasis program are required a minimum of four hours instrumental ensembles. Recital :ittencl;lnee for f o ~ ~ r semesters plws scnior rcxrital. Music Education: Music 202, 302 and 402 " (elementary instrumental emphnsis) or Music 204, 304 and 454 " (secondary instrumental emphasis). 7 hours Music 135, 136, 137, 138, 139 and 140 . . . . . , . . . . 6 hours ~-~ These coursts must be takcn during the student teaching semester. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 295 Bachelor of Music Education-General Degree (Vocal Emphasis) The following additional courses are required of all Bachelor of Music Education degree candidates (vocal emphasis) : Applied Music Chief erforming medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 hours second' performing medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours Applied Music Electives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 hours Keyboard majors must elect two hours of voice (one semester of applied voice and one semester of blusic 142) and complete the keyboard proficiency examination Theory: Music 127-128, 129-130, 227-228, 229-230, 323, 445 . . . . . . 20 hours Conducting: Music 217 or 218 and 451 or 491 4 hours Ensembles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hours Voice majors, secondary emphasis, are required to enroll for two hours of small vocal ensemble and two hours of opera work- shop. Keyboard majors are required to enroll for five hours of vocal ensemble; it is recommended that two of the remaining hni~rsb in piano accnnipaniment or chamber music performance. Music Electives (May not be in applied music) . 6 hours Piano majors in vocal emphasis program must elect Music 381. Music 142 may apply here. Recital attendance for fnur semesters plus senior recital. Music Education: Music 201, 301, 401 ' (elementary vocal emphasis) or Music 203, 303, 403 " (secondary vocal emphasis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 hours * These courses must be taken during the student teaching semester. PERFORMANCE Lower Division Courses 107-108, 207-208. Piano Repertoire. (1-1). Designed to give performing and listening experience to piano majors. 111-112, 211-212. Ensemble. (1-1). (A) orchestra, (B) hand, (C) University Chorus, (F) Univrr.;i& Sinqers ancl A Cappella Choir, (C), Strinq Enremhle, (H) Brass Ensenil-lr. fJ) piano accom~animent, (K) opera theater, (L) small vocal ensemble. (M) football band, (N) Woodwind Ensemble, (0)Saxophone Quartet, (Q) Percussion Ensemble. 121. Italian Diction. (1). A course designed for thr vocal performer including a comprehensive study of Italian consonant and vowel sounds. 122. Enelish Diction. (1). A course desimed for the vocal performer includ- ing a comprehensive study of English consonant and vowel sounds. 148. Double Reed Making and Adjusting. (1). Making and adjusting oboe, English horn ancl bassoon reeds. Prerrquisite: hlusic 138 or consent of in- str~~ctor.hlny he rcpeated for cretlit. 217. Instrumental Conducting. (2). Fundamentals of baton technique, ele- mentary score reading, and musical leadership. Practical experience in con- ducting laboratory and classroom groups. 218. Choral Conducting. (2). Frlndamentals of conducting, score reading, and rrhearsal techniques. Practical experience conducting classroom groups. Prerequisite: hlusic 128, 130. 296 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 221. German Diction. (1) A course designed for the vocal performer including a comprehensive study of German consonant and vowel sounds. 222. French Diction. (1). A course designed for the vocal performer includina a comprehensive study of French consonant and vowel sounds. Upper Division Courses 307-308, 407-408. Piano Repertoire. (1-1). Designed to give performing and listening espcrience to piano majors. 311-312, 411-412. Ensemble. (1-1). (A) orchestra, (B) band, (C) University Chorus, (F), Univrrsity Singers and A Cappella Choir, (G) String Ensemble, (H) Brass Enseml~lc, (J) piano accompaniment, (K) opera theater, (L) small vocal ensemble, ( X I ) football hand, (N) Woodwind Ensemble, (0),Saxophone Quartet, (Q) Percussion Ensrml~le. 381. Piano Materials and Pedagogy. (2). Discussion and analysis of suitable materials and methods for teachins at elementary, intermediate, and early advanced levels. 425. Voice Pedagogy. (2). Designed to acquaint the voice major with vocal techniques, concepts, and materials of private and class instruction. 427. Music Theater Directing. (2). Coaching, mounting, and staging music- drama productions, with emphasis on acting and directing techniques. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. 448. Double Reed Making and Adjusting. (1). Making and adjusting oboe, English horn and bassoon reeds. Prerequisite: Music 138 or consent of in- structor. h4ay be repeated for credit. 451. Advanced Conducting and Score Reading. (2). Baton technique, score reading, musicianship. Prerequisite: Music 217 or 218. 484. String Teaching Seminar. (2). Ilistorical development of string instru- ment teaching. Prol)lems involving traditional and recent techniques. Private study versus class study. School class methods, studio methods, etc. Pre- requisite: Consent of instructor. 491. Advanced Choral Conducting. (2). A comprehensive study of conducting and rehearsal techniques, analysis and ear training, and types of choral com- position for the advanced student. Prerequisite: h4usic 217 or 218. Graduate Courses 507-508. Piano Repetoire. (1-1). Designed to give performing and listening ~uperience to piano performance majors. 511-512. Ensemble. (1-1). (A) orchestra, (B) band, (C) University Chorus, (F) University Singers and A Cappella Choir, (G) String Ensemble, (H) Brass Ensemble, (J) piano accompaniment, (K) opera theater, (L) small vocal ensemble, (M) foot1)all hand, (N), Woodwind Ensemble, (0)Saxophone Quartet, (Q) Percussion Ensemble. 573. Graduate Recital. (2). Performance of a full recital featuring the chief performing medium. Prerequisite: Consent of instructors in applied area. APPLIED MUSIC (1-2-4 hr~.) Instruction is given in the applied media as listed below for the purpose of developing musicianship, performance skills, and reading knowledge of music literature. Specific requirements for each level are set by individual applied areas. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 297 For one semester hour credit the student receives one one-half hour lesson each week and is required a minimum of five hours practice pcr week. For two semester hours of credit the student receives one half-hour private lesscn each week and one one-hour class each week. For two semester hours of credit the student is expected to practice a minimum of 10 hours each week. For four semester hours credit the student receives two one-half hour lessons and one one-hour class lesson each week. The student is expected to practice a minimum of 20 hours per week. The course numbers for the applied media offered by the Division of Music are as follows: 120. Basic instruction, may be repeated for credit, Lower Division. 220. Prerequisite 120,may he repeated for credit, Lower Division. 320. Prerequisite 220, may be repeated for credit, Upper Division. 420. Prerequisite 320, may be repeated for credit, Upper Division. 520. Prerequisite 420, may be repeated for credit, Graduate. Applied Media A Bassoon H Oboe Q Trumpet B Cello J Organ R Tuba C Clarinet K Percussion S Viola D Euphonium L Piano T Violin E Flute h4 Saxophone V Voice F French Horn N String Bass C Harp P Trombone MUSICOLOGY-COMPOSITION Lower Division Courses 60. Rudiments of Music. (2). Intensive study of music fundamentals and elementary aural skills. Required of students not achieving a satisfactory score in departmental placement cvarnination for Music 127 or h4usic 129. 113. Introduction to Music. (2). Development of skills and techinques used in critical analysis and comparison of the contrasting styles of music literature. Designed for music majors or students with advanced musical background. Concurrent enrollment in Music 127 or 128. 114. Music Literature Survey. (2). A survey of representative works from the vocal and instrumental repertaire. Prerequisite: Music 113 or consent of instructor. 127. Theory I. (2). Review of music fundamentals, including notation of pitch, rhythm, scales, intervals and triads; introduction to melodic organization and harmony with emphasis on analysis and creative writing. Prerequisite: Concurrent enrollment in Xfusic GO or satisfactory score on departmental place- ment rxamination, and concurrent enrollment in Music 129. 128. Theory 11. (2). Study of diatonic harmony, including cadence and phrase structure, melody harmonization ancl nonharmonic usage, with emphasis on analysis of rrlatetl literature. and creative writing. Prerequisite: Music 127, and concurrent enrollment in hlr~sic 129 or hlusic 130. 129. Aural Skills I. (2). Recognition, singing, and dictation of rhythms in simple and compound meters, scales, ancl diatonic melodies. Prerequisite: Concurrent enrollment in L.lusic 60 or satisfactory score on departmental placement examination. 130. Aural Skills 11. (2). Continuation of Music 129. Introduction of modu- lating melodies and ~ l c m e n t a n harmonic dictation. Prerequisite: Music 129. 298 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 161. Music Appreciation. (2). Intenclecl to develop a capacity for critical listening and an appreciation for the various musical styles. Special attention given to works from thc stantlard musical repertoire. Designed exclusively for the nonmusic major. 162. Afro-American Jlusic. (2). A survey of Afro-American music, its origins and development, and the of Afro-American music in thei n f ~ ~ e n c e United States to the present time. 227. Theory 111. (2). Review of diatonic harmony; introductory study of chromatic harmony, with emphasis on analysis of related literature and creative writing. Prerequisite: Xlusic 128. 228. Theory IV. (2). Introductory study of contemporary musical techniques with emphasis on analysis of related literature and creative writing. Pre- requisite: Music 227. 229. Aural Skills 111. (2). Recognition, singing, and dictation of advanced rhythmic, melodic, and harmonic materials. Prerequisite: hlusic 130. 230. Aural Skills IV. (2). Continuation of Music 229. Introduction of con- temporary rhythmic, n~clodic. ancl harmonic materials. Prerequisite: Music 229. 245. Jazz Improvisation. (2). hlelodic, harmonic, and rhythmic creation, with emphasis on the relationship of scale patterns and seventh chords. Prerequisite: Music 128 ancl hlusic 130, or consent of the instructor. Upper Division Courses 310. Interrelated Arts. (3). Interdepartmental course presenting an aesthetic analysis of three arts. The course will emphasize style in the three arts. (See English 310.) 315. Music of the 20th Century. (2). An aesthetic approach to music of this century, its major composers, stylistic and formal characteristics. Designed primarily for the nonmusic major who has musical interest and background. Prerequisite: Xiusic 113, or 161, or Humanities 102, or consent of instructor. 316. Symphonic Literature. (2). An advanced course in the great orchestral literature covering the development of the symphony orchestra and its music from the 18th century Slannheim School to the present. Designed primarily for the nonmusic major who has musical interest and background. Prerequisite: Music 113, or 161, or Humanities 103, or consent of instructor. 323. Form and Anaylsis. (2). The elenicnts of structure. form, and d(.sifii~ in musical composition. Prercq~~isitc.: '\Insic 227. 331. History of Music from Antiquity through the 18th Century. (3). An in- tensive surl.ey of the developnicmt and evolution of m ~ ~ s i c a lstyles ; ~ n d prac- tices in \Vestrrn Ci\.il;7n+ion fmm gncicant t c m ~ s to {he 18th r,jntr~rv. Lectureh, reference readings, and the study of representative music of the various periods and composers. (Fall rc-lnc.stc.r only.) Pl.c.rcqulsite: \lusic 11:; and 2% or consent of instructor. 332. History of ?rlusic from the 18th Century to the Present. (3). A rontinua- tion of .\fusic : X I . (Spring sc:mestc,r or~ly.) Prerecl~~isitt.: \,lusic 113 and 229 or conscv~t of instructor. 345. Jazz Arranging. Armn~in!: for small and large jazz ~ n s e n i b l ~ s (2). with cmpliasis on current hi:: Innd styles. I'rrrcquisite: llusic 228 and Jlr~sic 2:3O. or consent of thc i~~structor. 359 & 360. Applied Composition. (2-2). Individual study in fundamentals of mosical composition with eniphasis on the development and expapsion of music materials. Prerequisite: Slr~sic323 or instrnctor's consent. 361. 18th Century Counterpoint. (2). Contrapuntal devices of the 18th (.en- t r~ry as fot~nd in the works of ]. S. Rach. Prerequisite: \Iusic "78. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 299 371. Chromatic Harmony. (2). Ad\,anced studv of chromatic harmonic ma. terials of all pvriotls lvith special attention to the 19th ccntury. .lnal~..;is i1nc1 creative writing will be emphahized. I'rerequisitc: hlr~sic 227. 372. Contemporary Techniques. (2). Ad\:anccd study nf music f m n ~ i ~ n - prcssionirm to the prcscnt, \\.it11 crnphasis on related l i t~ ra tu re and crc,:~tivc. writing. Prcrequisite: hlusic 778. 382. Piano Litcmture. (2). Survey of the historical eras of professional piano reportoire. 397-39s. Organ Literature and Practice. (1-1). Pcrformnncc :inti disc~~ssion of u~orks for the. instrument of all pcriocls, study of organ tlcsign ;untl constr~lc- tion, practicr in nspccts of service playing such ns 1i)inn playin?, modr11:ltion. accompanying, nnc1 improvisation. Prcrequisit?: hlusic 0-28 and Organ 270 or clrpartmcntal consent. Rcquircd of all Organ majors. \1:1y bc reelcctcrl. 423. Opera Literature. (2). A comprel~rnsi\~esnrvev of Italian, German. French, Russian, English and American opera literature from the 17th centnry to thr prcxnt . S o t limited to music niajors. 424. Oratorio and Cantata Literature. (2). A study of thc solo vocal literature of the Inrgcr sacred and secular fornis from tlie 17th ccntury to the present. Not limited to music niajors. 426. Voice Literature. (3). A comprehensive survey of carly Italian arins, Frcmch chansons, Gcr~nan lieder, contcniporary English songs. and Rl~ssinn and Sp:~nisli literature. Open to nonvoicc majors. 441. Orchestration. (2). The study of instrumentation, emphasizing idiomatic scorinz for various instrumental combinations, with an approach to thc pro1)- lerns of full orchestra and band scorcs. Prerequisite: hlusic 227. 445. Choral Arranging. (2). Scoring for \iromcn's, men's, and mixecl choruses. Pcrforniance and analysis of students' arrangement$ in class. (Fall semester only). Prerequisite: l lusic 228, 230. 451. Choral hlaterials. (2). A historical survcy of clior:~l literature from thv Renaissanccx to the 20th ccntury with emphnsis on availability of editions for pcrfonnnnce. (Spring semester only.) Prerequisite: h,lusic 931. 35'7, or consen: of instructor. 459 ck 460. Applied Composition. (2-2). Individual study in musical composi- tion \vitIi cmpli:~sis on \jrriting for both small ensen~bles and lnrgc groups in the larzer forms. Prerequisite: hfusic 360 or instructor's consent. 461. 16th Century Counterpoint. (2). Analysis and application of the con- trapuntal composition techniques of the 16th century. Prerequisite: hl~isic227. 485. String Literature and 31aterials. (2). A survey and stylistic analysis of music fur solo strings and chamber combinations, beginning with the early Baroque period. Prrrcquisite: Consent of instructor. 493. American hlusic. (2). A survey of music in the United Stntcs from 1620 to 1920. Graduate Courses 530. Seminar in hlusic Theory. (3). An analytical studv of the materials used in musical coniposition from antiquity to tlie present. The stud(.nt \vill analvzc music in his own medium, culminnting in a prcscntation to the class; from thas,, prc~entntions a comprrhcnsivc. syntlicsis of thc compositional procedures in various style pcriods wrill bc macle. The course is dcsigncd to develop analytical pc'rspective rather than compositionnl skills. 551. Psychology of hlusic. (2). Adapted to the vicurpoint of the music edu- cator. Emphasis on ph:,.sics of souncl, psychology of performance, and teaching. Aesthetic principles of listening. Prerequisite: Consent of instnictor. 300 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 552. Introduction to Graduate Study. (3). Techniques of research and de- velopment of bibliography in music and music education. Must be elected the first available semester of enrollment. 559-560. Advanced Composition. (2-2). Original work in the large forms. Continuation and expansion of 459-460. Prerequisite: Music 460 or equivalent. 575. Thesh Research. (2). 576. Thesis. (2). 591-592. Seminar in Music History. (3-3). Arras of intrrest in n~usic history will I)e developed as fully as time permits. No effort a t a chronological survey will be made. Ideas evoking the most interest, and considered by the instructor to be of the greatest professional benefit, will he taken when interest warrants. Prerequisite: 331 and 332 or consent of instructor. 593. hlusic of Antirluity through the Ilennissancc. (3). 594. Music of the Baroque Era. (3). 595. Music of the 18th Century. (3). 596. Music of the 19th Century. (3). 597. Music of the 20th Century. (3). MUSIC EDUCATION Lower Division Courses 135. Methods of Teaching Orchestral Instruments (Violin and Viola). (1). Procedures and materials for class and private teaching. Performance and fundamentals in first position. Theory and reading knowledge of positions two through five. Band and orchestra laboratory. 136. Methods of Teaching Orchestral Instruments (Cello and String Bass). (1): Procedures and materials for class and private teaching. Application of fundamental techiques. Knowledge of more difficult positions and special techniques. Band and orchestra laboratory. 137. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instruments (Clarinet and Saxophone). (1). Procedures and materials for class and private teaching. Major emphasis on clarinet tone quality, embouchure, and technique. Band and orchestra laboratory. 138. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instruments (Flute and Double Reeds). (1). Procedure and materials for class and private teaching. Reed making. Application of fundamental techniques and study of more ad- vanced techniques. Band and orchestra laboratory. 139. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instrument (Brass). (1). Procedures and materials for class and private teaching of all brass instru- ments, emphasizing tone qunlitics, difTerences in embouchure, and necessary technique for performance. Band and orchestra laboratory. 140. Methods of Teaching Band and Orchestral Instruments (Percussion). (1). Procedures and materials for class and private instruction. Application of snare drum fundamentals. Study of basic techniques for all percussion. Band and orchestra laboratory. 142. Survey of Choral Techniques and Literature. (1). A study of basic techniques of singing and examination of literature for solo voice, large and small ensembles. Prerequisite: One hour of applied voice.- 201. Fundamentals of Vocal Music for Elementary School. (2). The teach- ing of nir~sic.in tl!r rlernrntnr!. sc,h!)ol. c:)usiclcr:\tion of ol)jrctives. examina- COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 301 tion of materials. For students primarily interested in teaching music in ele- n~entary schools. Includes observation in public schools. Prerequisite: Music education major or consent of instructor. 202. Fundamentals of Instrumental Music for Elementary School. (2). The teaching of music in the elementary school, consideration of objectives, exami- nation of materials. For students primarily interested in teaching music in elementary schools. Includes observation in public schools. Prerequisite: h'lusic education major or consent of instructor. 203. Fundamentals of Vocal Music for Secondary Schools. (2). The teach- ing of music in the secondary school, consideration of objectives, examination of materials. For students primarily interested in teaching music in secondary schools. Includes observation in public schools. Prerequisite: Music educa- tion major or consent of instructor. 201. Fundamentals of Instrumental Music for Secondary Schools. (2). Tech- niques and materials focused on teaching instrumental music in junior and senior high schools. Emphasis on instrumental organization and administra- tion, pedagogical practices, laboratory experiences, guiding student I~ehavior, evaluation, and professional responsi1,ilities. For students primarily interested in teaching instrumental music in the secondary schools. Prerequisite: Music education rnajor or consent of instructor. 251. Music Fundamentals for the Classroom Teacher. (3). For students planning to teach in the elementary school classroom. Bas~c fundamentals of music with emphasis upon development of student's musical ability in singing, playing piano and classroom instruments. 251. Xluqic hlethods Tor the Classroom Teacher. (3). For the elementary class- room teaehw. De\-elopment of chiltlren's musical growth through singing, listening, rli).thtnic and creative activities. Prrrecluisitr: Music 251 or consent of instructor. Upper Division Courses 301. Survey of Vocal Slusic for Srcondary School. (3). An overview of activi- tics in secon(l;lr>. vocal ancl gc.nc.r:~l music programs. Includes stutlv of ol~jec- tives for ~{lr~rirleration materials methods.secontlar-). classc. of and For students primarily interestecl in tc>aching music in the elementary schools. Prerequisite: >IIIF~C201. 302. Survey of Secondary School Music. (3). Methotls and materials used in teaching instrumental n111sic in the srcondary schools. Inclndcs an overview of vocal ;ind ~ r n c r a l niusic prohleti~s in junior high school. Incllltlcs ohservxtion in pul)lic schools. For stutlents primarily interested in teaching instrumental music in the elctnentnry schools. Prcrequisitr: klusic 202. 303. Survey of Vocal Music for Elementary Schools. (3). An overview of activities in the elementan prnrral music program. Inclr~des study of ohjectives for clc.rncntary classes, consideration of material ant1 methotis. For students primarily interelstrc! in trachinc mr~sic in the secondary schools. Prerequisite: Xlr~sic203. 301. Survey of Elementary School Music. (3). A survey of activities in the rlernenhry school, inch~tling con:;itleration of the general music program and instrulncntal instr~~ction. For stutlents primarily interested. in teaching instru- mental n~usic in tltcs sc~cor~tlxry Alusic 204.schools. Prcreqnisite: 306. hlusic Itlethods for Early Childhood Education. (3). hiethods and mate- rials for teachin? niusic in the preschool :mtl kindergarten classroom. Develop- ment of the child's riiusical ~ row~t l ithrouph singing, listening, rhythmic and creative activities; survey of availa1)lr materials; ant1 continuation of playing, singing, ant1 conducting skills. Prerequisite: hlusic 251 or consent of instructor. 302 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 337. Advanccrl Tcchniques in IVoodwind Methods. (1). Special prol~lems and techniques in the teaching of wootlwintl instruments. Survey of current mate- rials. Prereq~~isites:h111qicI37 ant! 138, or equivalent. 339. Advanced Techniques in Brass Methods. (1). Special prohlems and techniques in the te:~chillg of I>r;~ssinstr~~nic~nts.Survey of current materials. Prereqr~isite: hfr~sic 1.39 tor equivalent. 340. Advanced Techniques in Percussion Methods. (1). Special prol~lems ant1 techniques in the teaching of pcrcl~ssion instruments. Sr~rvcy of current mate- rials. Prerequisite: Xt~isic 140 or equivalent. 401." Advanced Techniques of Vocal hlusic for Elementary School. (2). Con- ~ideration of sprcial prol)lems rrlatrd to preparation for student teaching: clevelop~nent of Irsson plans, esamir~ation of materials, considerntion of activi- ties appropriate at each grade Irvcl. Incl~~t lesaudiovisual instruction and mate- rials. Prerf.qnisitc: hlusic 201 and 301. 402." Advanced Techniqucs of Elementary School h,lusic. (2). Emphasis nn special prol~lems relatctl to prcparation for str~tlcnt tcwhing; consideration of the instrumental and the gcnrral music programs at the elcrnentary level. Includes autliovisual instruction and rnatc%rials. Prc~rcquisite: Music 202 ant1 %3w2. 403." Aclvanced Techniques of Vocal hlusic for Secondary Schools. (2). Con- sideration of special prohlenls related to prvparation for strlclrnt teaching: development of plans, examination of materials, consideration of activities appropriate in junior ant1 senior hiqh school music classes. Inclt~des auclio- visl~al instruction and materials. Prrreqr~isite: M ~ ~ s i c 203 and 303. 404." Advanced Tcchniques of Secondary School hlusic. (2). Consideration of special prohlrnls relatctl to prcparation for student teaching. Consitleration of instr~~rnentnl Includesantl general music programs at the secontlary level. ar~tliovisual in';tr~~ction ant1 materials. Prerequisite: 1111sic 204 and 30J. 406. Comparative Arts for Teachers. (3). Emphasis on the related arts of n i~~sic .visr~al art ant1 literature from two approncl~es; an approach that shows the elements the :uts have in common. with an emphasis on creativih; an approach that examines the relationships of the t l~ l -~c . arctas according to hasic philosophies, Attention will I)e givcn to niaterials antl activities suital~le for use in the classroom at varior~s levrls. 432. Teaching of Music Literature. (2). Designeel for the tcaclier preparing to teach music literature or apprcciation. Aesthetic principles in music listening related to the other fine arts, and their application to various levels of teaching. Prrrpqr~isitcx: Consent of ins t r~~r tor . 450. blusic Education Workshop. (1-4). Prrrcqr~isite: Consent of instructor. >lay 1 ~ .repeated for crctlit. 472. Contemporary hlusical Thought in hlusic Education. (2). A consiclera- tion of imaginative ant1 rffective techniques of prescmting contemporary musical coi~cepts to all age levels in p~~!rlic schoql m ~ ~ s i c . Xtusic 323 and Prcrtquisite: (~or~sc,ntof instructor. Graduate Courses 509-510. Contcmporarv 3lusic Education. (2-2). A consideration of new approachcbs to the teachir~y of music \vitli emphasis on expansion of students' concepts ;~ntl pr:lctical kno\vlctlgr of rnusic. Str~cly of the linear, vertical, c!~~r;itionnl,tcxtr~ml, :~ntl rlynarnic of n~usic. Experimentation ~x~ramct r r s with new ways of involving puhlic school stlldel~ts in similar study. 521. Elemcntary Music Supervision. (3). Trends in clementan music educa- tion; cvalr~ation of \-:1rio11a n~attrials ant1 tec.hniqr~es; special projects in planning COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 303 and executing a modern program of music supervision. Prerequisite: Music Ed. 531 or consent of instructor. 531. Developing the Child's Musical Understanding. (3). Definition of under- standings necessary for the attainment of musical awareness in the child. Exploration of classroom experiences directed toward the successful develop- ment of those understandings through the application of basic learning prin- ciples. Prerequisite: Music 401 or consent of instructor. 532. Music in the Junior High School. (3). To include administrative struc- tures, the curriculum, adolescent development, teaching as I~ehavior, and com- petencies needed for successful teaching. 535. Seminar in Music Education Materials (Vocal). (2). Critical analysis of new materials and literature for vocal organizations. Current bibliography. Prerequisite: Consent of instruction. 541-542. Special Project in Music. (1-3, 1-3). Individually supervised study or research with emphasis upon the personal needs of the student. Prerequi- site: Consent of instructor. 545. Seminar in Music Education Materials (Instrumental). (2). Critical anal- ysis of new materials and literature for hand, orchestra, and small ensembles. Current bibliography. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 554. Research Seminar in Music Education. (3). Continued application of techniques of research. Completion of a major research project. Prerequiste: Music 552. 571. Philosophy of Contemporary Music Education. (2). A study of historical trends and contemporary philosophies relevant to music education, behavioral objectives, and curriculum planning. Prerequisite: Music 551. 575. Thesis Research. (2). 576. Thesis. (2). 581. Instrumental bfusic in the Elementary and Junior High School. (2). An examination of recent developments in instrumental music education and their implications for methods of teaching. 585. Instrumental Music Organization and Administration. (3). Problems of developing secondary school instrumental music programs. O To be taken during student teaching semester. 304 COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 31l r .~ iccla.~.~roo~i~.s, and the J lillel. Concert Ha!! .sf~dio.c arc all in the Walter D u e r k s o ~Fine Arts Center. i \..-. ,' - - . - 'LC, COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS 305 306 HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS COLLEGE OF HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS D. CRAMER REED, MD, Dean The College of Health Related Professions was established in 1970 by action of the Kansas Board of Regents and the Kansas Legislature. There are five programs of study presently offered. Two lead to the Bachelor of Science degrce: Nursing and medical technology. The hvo-year Certificate of Applied Science is awarded in cyto- technology, dental hygiene, and inhalation therapy. Physical ther- apy is planned for clinical program implementation by the fall of 1973. Other programs of profeqsional study will be added as they are developed, based on studerit interest, area requirements, faculty availability, funding capabilities, and Board of Regents approval. All formal health related programs leading to a degree or cer ts- cate from Wichita State University are administered through the College of Health Related Professions. Counseling: Health Related Programs The dean of the College of Health Related Professions and the staff provide penera1 counseling and help in career planning for all health related professions including medicine, veterinary medicine, dentistry, optometry, pharmacology, osteopathy, physical therapy, occupational therapy, radiologic technolo;y, mortuary science, etc. All premedical and predental students entering this University are required to maintain a transcript in the office of the dean of CHRP. An interview with the dean of the college is also necessary each semester for those contemplating applying to the University of Kansas School of 34edicine and those anticipating the need for evaluation letters from the "premed counselor." Students interested in professional study in the above health related fields will enroll through the University College for their first year, and in most cases will complete undergraduate study in liberal arts. Faculty in University College and the respective departments of liberal arts advise student5 regarding specific course selection and scheduling to facilitate counseling offered by the College of Health Related Professions pertaining to a specific health related career. HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 307 REQUIREMENTS Admission A student may be admitted to the Collerre of Health Related Pro- fe~sions after he has completccl 24 semester hours at Wichita State University with an overall grade point averace of 2.00 or above, preferably after he has been acceptccl b!. the chairman of one of the c!epartments. Students jvho transfer to Wichita State University from other in- stitutions may enter the College of Health Related Professions if they are not on prohation and their academic record meets the above requirements. Probation and Dismissal Standards It is expected that students will make satisfactory progress in their studies. student who fails to do so map be placed on probation at any time and ultimately di~missed from the University. ( 1 ) A student will be placed on probation for the next semester in which he enrolls if his cumulative grade point index falls below 2.00. ( 2 ) The student remains on roba at ion if he earns at least a 2.00 index in the first semester during which he is on probation even though his cumulative grade point index does not yet meet the minimum standards. If, nt the end of the second semester, his cumulative grade point average is 2.00 or better, he will be removed from probation. ( 3 ) A student on probation who fails to raise his cumulative grade point average to 2.00 may be allo~ved a second and final probationary semester. ( 4 ) A student is subject to dismissal if he fails to raise his cumulative grade point average to 2.00 by the end of a second probationary semester; and n student on probation will be dismissed for poor scholarship if he fails to earn at least a 2.00 for any semester on probation. (5 ) A student who has been dismissed for poor scholarship may enroll onlv with special permission of the Committee on Admission, Advance Standing, and Exceptional Programs following an appeal to the CHRP Record Evaluation Committee. (6 ) Probation is removed when the cumulative grade point index reaches the required level. ( 7 ) A student on probation may not enroll for more than 12 semester hours in an 18 week term or two-thirds as many hours as the number of weeks for which he is enrolled in the summer term, plus one hour of military or air science, physical education, or marching band. Exceptions to this limitation may be made on recommendation of the student's adviser with the approval of 308 HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS his dean. Such exception is to be recorded by the Committee on Admission, Advanced Standing, and Exceptional Programs. Transfer of Credit Within the University Hours completed in other colleges at WSU shall be transferred for credit to the College of Health Related Professions under the following general rules: ( 1 ) Credit shall transfer when the work offered is applicable to the curriculum as specified and if it constitutes progress toward the student's degree goal. ( 2 ) Not more than eight hour. maximum credit shall transfer for applied music and/or art. Degree Requirements The Bachelor of Science degree and Associate of Applied Science Certificates are conferred in this college. The general requirements for graduation listed elsewhere in the Catalog will apply, com- bined with requirements specified in the curriculums for medical technology and nursing. The certificate is awarded to students who fulfill all of the specific requirements of the cumculums of cytotechnology, dental hygiene and inhalation therapy. HEALTH PROFESSIONS The survey course 101 is open to anyone interested in the health related fields. This course is structured primarily for freshmen and is especially recommended for all College of Health Related students. Health professions courses 208 and 230 are also open to qualified non-CHRP students when class space is available. 101. Introduction to Health Professions. (I). 1R. An examination of the health team concept, the role and relationship of the various providers of health care and the criteria for the selection of a health career. Emphasis will be placed on the health team concept. 208. Pharmacology. (2). Therapeutic terms; drug actions; dosage; toxicology; and the application of all d r x s used in the treatment of oral disease. 230. Nutrition. (3). 3R. Service Course. A study of human nutrition; com- position and classification of foods; vitamins and their function; food and public health laws; disaster and space nutrition; detailed application of nutrition knowledge to various conditions (prenatal, child, adult, aged). 250. Workshop in Health Related Professions. 450. Workshop in Health Related Professions. DENTAL HYGIENE In addition to fulfilling all requirements for admission to the Uni- versity, students wishing to enroll in the dental hygiene program must apply for and obtain ripproval of the Admissions Committee of the College of Health llcli~tedProfessions. An application for HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 309 admission must be on file in the college office no later than Febru- ary 1on a comp~titive scholastic basis. It is desirable for the applicant to have kt strong background it1 the bioiogical and physical sciences. The dental hygiene curriculum incluc!es the follo\ving 36 hours of work plus the 41 hours of dental hygiene clinical courses. Hrs. English 111, College English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Sociology 211, Introductory Sociology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Riology 223, Introd~lctory Anatomy & Physiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Health Professions 230, Nutrition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Chemistry 103, General Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Psychology 111, General Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Biology 120, Introduction to Microbiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 S ~ e e c h111. Extem~oraneous S ~ e e c h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 physical ducati ion 315, personal & Community Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Physical Education 117, First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Elective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Social \$;elfare 214; Social Psychology 246; Child Psychology 260; I'sychthogy of Personality 275; Educational Psychology 333; or Speech Pathology 111). DENTAL HYGIENE (Clinical Curriculum) 100. Oral and Dental Anatomy. (4). 2R; 4L. An introduction to the structure antl functions of the head and neck. Included are discussions of individual tooth tlevt~lopment, eruption, arrangement, function, morphology, and charac- teristics. Laboratory and clinical sessions include identification of normal landmarks of the oral cavity, identification of natural specimens of the permanent and deciduous tlentitions, examination of root surfaces in relation to scalcr atlnptation, and reproduction of selectrd permanent terth in was. 101. Introcluction to Dental Hygiene. (4) 2R; GL. The student is presentecl with the basic philosophy of dentistry, dental hygiene, and their relntetl arts. Consideration is given to measures which can be employed to prevent oral disease ant1 promote the health of the teeth and adjacent tissues. Laboratory instruction is given in instrumentation for removal of accretions from the teeth. The latter part of the semester is devoted to orientation in clinical procedures. 102. Clinical Dental IIygiene I. (3). 1R; 6L. Initial instruction will relate to typical emergency medical problems which might he encountered in the tlental office. The student comes in contact with the patient for the first time. Here the principles taught in the Iahoratory are applied to both children and adults. Emphasis is placed on instrument techniques and overall treatment of the patient. Lectures. and demonstrations are designed to augment the stu- dent's clinical practice. 104. Dental Roentgenology. (2). 1R; 3L. The theory and practice of expos- ing, processing ant1 mounting S-my films is presenttd. The lal~oratory periods are used to gain proficiency in X-ray techniques. Care of the equipment is stressetl. 106. Oral Pathology. (2). Normal conditions followed by general pathology as an introtluction to dental pathology of the teeth, tlental pulp, antl perioclon- Lrl~n. .4 consitleration of the signs, symptoms, and manifestations of oral lesions will be accomplished through lectures and visual aids. 107. Principlcs of Chairside Assisting. (3). 2R; 2L. Lectures present use and care of dental instruments, and equipment, aseptic and antiseptic techniques. The study of dental materials is included. Instruction is given in practical laboratory phases of modern technique and the manipulation of materials used in dental practice. 310 HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 201-202. Clinical Dental Hygiene I1 & In. (3-3). 1R; 8L. Students spend three-fifths of their time completing a required amount of work in oral prophy- laxis on patients in the dental clinic. The rest of the time is used for (1) field traininq in hospitals, in public health institutions, and private offices; (2) in thc radiographic laboratory until the student has gained proficiency. One lecture a week is devoted to analyzing interesting cases observed in the clinic. 203. Clinical Dental Hygiene IV. (6). 1R; 15L. During the final semester of clinical dental hygiene, the student has opportunity to utilize variations in scalinp trchniques, and instruments. Technique seminars are scheduletl so that instructors ancl students can discuss rationale behind particular techniques, instrlmient selection, etc. Students complete a patient education notebook. tl(-sicnctl to inform patients of cause of dental disease, its prevention antl,ior corrcctivc measllres which can be implcmentrcl. 205. Histology and Embryology. (2). Developmental and miscroscopic anatomy of the elementary tissues and organs. Comprehensive study of the teeth, their supporting tissues, and adjacent structures. 206. Preventive Dentistrv. , (2). , , The ~revent ive a s ~ e c t s of dental caries. -, its- epidemiology and control; the preventive aspects of malocclusion including a descriution of the develo~nient of the dentition and ureventive, interce~tive. and palliative orthodontic^treatment. 207. Dental Ethics. (2). Laws governing the practice of dentistry and dental hygiener types of professional work for which students may qualify, the eco- nomics and ethics of the professions, the essentials of banking, bookkeeping, office and personnel management, and patient records. History of dentistry and the dental hygiene professions. 209. Dental Health Education. (3). 2R; 2L. Methods and materials used in dental health education for children and adults. Lectures in related public health problems. The history of the puhlic health movement is developed and the place of the dental hygienist within this framework is emphasized. The course is a workshop with the student participating in the class activity as various aspects of this service are presented. Field work in connection with the schools. INHALATION THERAPY In addition to fulfilling all reqvirements for admission to the Uni- versity, students planning to enroll in the Department of Inhalation Therapy should request a personal interview with the hospital's inhalation therapy program director and obtain approval for enroll- ment in the inhalation therapy courses. Applications for admission to this curriculum must be on file in the hospital director's office no later than March 1, 1973. The hospital school of inhalation therapy requires the student to submit three letters of recommendation. The cooperating hospitals are St. Francis Hospital, St. Joseph Hos- pital and Rehabilitation Center, and Wesley Yledical Center. Stu- dents m ~ ~ s t one and on(.-half unitc Iligh school algebra (orhave Alnth 52) and one unit high school geometry (or \lath 60) to qualify for admission to this program. Students are assessed regular \VSU frec for all acadcmic and clinical courses. The inhalation therapy curriculum includes the following 40 hours of liberal arts and sciences courses: HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 311 -- Hrs. Chemistry 103 or 111' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Physics 103, Introductory Physics ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biology 100 or 112' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Biology 120, Microbiology ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 liiology 22:3, Introductory Anatomy & Physiology a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 English 111, College English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Speech 111, Extemporaneous Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Psychology 111, General Psychology ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electives, Humanities and Social Sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 O Requires a C or better. In addition to successful completion of the above courses, a student must receive a C or better in Health Professions 208 (Phanna- cology), and the following 29 hours in the inhalation therapy clin- ical curriculum: INHALATION THERAPY (Clinical Curriculum) 111. Introductory Inhalation Therapy Procedures. (4). 3R; 7L. Introduces ihr stuclcnt to the hospital environment, basic equipment, ant1 procedures: cylinders, piped systems, humidifying devices, oxygen cannulas, oxygen nasal catheter, oxygen masks and tents, oxygen analyzers, oxygen diluting devices, 1iu1:lidificntion principles, and administration of gas mixtures, history, ethics, and nursing arts. 112. Advanced Inhalation Therapy Procedures. (6). 3R; 13L. Advanced equipment and procedures: Bennett respirators. PV-3, PR-1, PR-2, and MA-1; 1?11-~1respirators, hiark 11, hiark 111, Mark VII, Mark I'III, XIark S, and \lark XI\'; SIiirch respirator; Engstroin respirator; ventilator spirometcrs; rcsuscita- iors. airway management and ultrasonic nebulizer therapy. 122. Introductory Clinical Application. (3). 2R; 6L. Clinically orirntecl pro- grnnl of ward conferences, lect~~res, sturlies, and clinical practice. case This program is designed to familiarize the student with treatment of cardiopulmo- nary disorders. Includes rotation through: Surgery, pulmonary function, and obstetrics. Prerequisite: Advanced Inhalation 'Therapy Procedures 112. 202. General Clinical Application. (4). 3R; 5L. Emphasis on pharmacology of aerosolized drugs; includes a rotation through: Pediatrics, emergency areas, and positive pressure equipment. Prerequisite: Introductory Clinical Appli- cation 122. 225. Advanced Pulmonary Physiology. (3). 2R. Lectures from Respiratory Physiology, J. Comroe. Lectures and application in the Pulmonary Function Laboratory. Lectures and application of blood gas and acid-base analyzers. Prerequisite: Human Biology 223, Chemistry 103 or 111. 226. Pathology and Pulmonary Diseases. (3). 3R. Lectures and clinical ol~servation of pulmonary disorders. Causes and mechanisms of development of disease, general and special toxic and pathologic influences of natural and induced agents. 232. Advanced Care of Critically Ill. (4). 3R; 5L. Clinical application for the management of the critical cardiopulmonary patient. Clinical work will be carried out primarily in the intensive care and cardiac care units. The student will also he assicned a research pro1)l~rn in this area. Prerequisites: General Clinical Application 202, Advanced Pulmonary Physiology 225. 261. Inhalation Therapy Ethics and Management. (2). 2R. An opportunity for the student to participate in departmental management and develop in- service training concepts. I I Inhalation Therapy Clinical Experience Includes 14 Weeks in an Affiliated Hospital to Complete Accreditation Requirements 312 HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY The curriculum in this department is designed for men and nromen who wish to become professional medical technologists. The first three years of the medical technology curriculum are designed to provide a bro;idly-l~asecl background in chemistry and the biological sciences, as well as opportunity to elect courses in other fields of interest. The fourth academic year is spent in a combined tutorial-didactic experience in an affiliated, approved clinical laboratory. Upon completion of the academic course work and directed clinical laboratory experience, the student is eligible for a Bachelor of Science degree in medical technology and is eligible to take the qualifying examination of the Registry of Medical Technologists -hlT (ASCP). The general curriculum for this degree is indicatecl below: FRESHMAN YEAR FIRST SEMESTER Course Hrs. Math. 141, Algebra and Trigonometry ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Chemistry 111, General Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biology 112, Introductory Zoology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Speech 111, Extemporaneous Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SECONDSEMESTER Course Hrs. Chemistry 112, General and Inorganic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biology 201, Introductory Cellular Biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Biology 223, Introductory Anatomy & Physiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 English 111, College English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SOPHOMORE YEAR FIRST SEMESTER Course Hrs. Chemistry 231, Organic Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biology 301, Bacteriology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 English 211, Advanced Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Humanitiesf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SECONDSEMESTER Course Hrs. Chemistry 232, Organic Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biology 424, Immunobiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Humanitiesf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Social Sciences f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . 6 JUNIOR YEAR FIRST SEMESTER Course Hrs. Chemistry 323, Introductory Analytical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Biology 302, Pathogenic Microbiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Biology 401, Genetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Humanities7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Social Sciences f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 O Or Math 121 ( 3 ) and Math 122 ( 3 ) . f Electives chosen in the humanities and social sciences must fulfill the University core curriculum. HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 313 SECONDSEMESTER Course Hrs. Electives$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Humanities! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - ~ f Electives chosen in the humanities and social sciences must fulfill the University core curriculum. t May be selected from the areas of biology, chemistry, mathematics, physics, and others as approved by adviser. SENIOR YEAR Courses prescribed by the ASCP will be taken in residence in the School of Medical Technology at St. Francis Hospital, St. Joseph Hospital, Wesley Medical Center, Wichita, Kansas; St. Mary's Hospital, Enid, Oklnhoma, or Jane Phillips Memorial Hospital, Bartlesville, Oklahoma. The student will enroll at Wichita State University for this work. Effective August 1972, an adminis- trative fee of $15 will be assessed each semester the student enrolls; and effec- tive August 1973, regular academic and general fees will be assessed for the 30 hours of clinical practicum. This fourth year must be completed in one of the five hospital programs of medical technology accredited by the Council on Medical Education of the American Medical Association in collaboration with the Board of Schools of Medical Technology of the American Society of Clinical Pathologists. The student should make application to the hospital of his choice well in advance of the completion of his work at the University. The dean of the College of Health Related Professions must be kept informed by the student where the final 30 credit hours of professional training are taken. CYTOTECHNOLOGY The cytotechnologist works in association with the pathologist in the detection of malignancy or cancer cells in various body fluids or in the identification of changes in cast-off body cells. Such specialists become extremely proficient microscopists in the course of screening out slides with normal cells from those with abnormal cells. The cytotechnology student also learns the technique of preparing and staining slides to aid in identification of different forms of malig- nancy. Minimal requirements are two years of college or a total of 60 semester credit hours, 12 of which should be in the biological sciences. At least eight hours of those taken in biological sciences should include laboratory experience. The Wichita State University cytotechnology program is affil- iated with St. Francis FIoipital and Wesley Medical Center's cyto- technology programs, which are approved by the Council of Medi- cal Education of the American Medical Association. While not obligatory for admission to an approved school of cytotechnology, the following program sequence is recommended because of the added emphasis on cellular biology and genetics which qualifies the student for a better understanding of the technical and clinical aspects of cytotechnology. 314 HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS Course Hrs. Biology 112, Introductory Zoology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Biology 223, Introductory Anatomy & Physiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biology 201, Introductory Cellular Biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Biology 401, Genetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Chemistry 111, General Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Chemistry 112, Gen. and Inorganic Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 121. Discrete Math 1 (3)or . , 140; Algebra ( 3 ) or 141, Algebra and Trig. ( 5 ) English 111, College English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 English 211, Advanced Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Speech 111, Extemporaneous Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Psychology 111, General Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Sociology 211, Introductory Sociology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electives, Including Humanities and Social Sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 (PE not to exceed four hours.) The third year of training is spent in an approved hospital under the supervision of a specially trained pathologist and includes formal lectures and laboratory experience in the field. Following this, the student is awarded a certificate, and is then eligible to take the registry examination in cytotechnology and qualify for certification as a registered cytotechnologist-CT( ASCP) . NURSING-BACCALAUREATE PROGRAM Men and women interested in the baccalaureate nursing program should direct their inquiries to the Chairman, Department of Nurs- ing, Wichita State University. Wichita State University core curriculum requirements must be satisfactorily completed as \veil as the follo\i~ing required prenursing courses : Course Hrs. Chemistry 103 or 111, General Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biology 100 or 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Biology 223, Introductory Anatomy & Physiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Biolow 120. Introduction to Microbiolow -, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 L.. Mathematics 121 or 140 * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Sociology 211, Introductory Sociology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Psychology 111, General Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Psychology 260, Child Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Anthropology 202, Cultural Anthropology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 'Or another math course acceptable to the Department of Nursing. The student may transfer from a junior or senior college to the Department of Nursing if the above requirements are met. Application for admission to the Department of Nursing may be submitted after satisfactory completion of the first three semesters of college work, hut must be received by April 1of the year in which enrollment is anticipated. In order to be permitted to enroll in the professional nursing curriculun~ as a generic baccalaurate candidate, the student must fulfill the follo\ving requirements: (1) Have completed or be enrolled in the fourth semester com- pleting the required lower division requirements. HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 315 ( 2 ) Have an overall grade point average of 2.00 or above in all collegiate work completed. ( 3 ) Receive consent of the ;Idmission and Progression Committee of the Department of Nursing. The registered professional nurse \vho is interested in completing the baccalaureate degree in nursing must fulfill the following requirements prior to aclmission to the Department of Nursing: ( 1 ) Must have completed all of the Wichita State University core curriculum requirements and the required prenursing courses. ( 2 ) Must have an overall grade point average of 2.00 or above in all collegc work completed. ( 3 ) Must submit a photocopy of his or her current license to practice as a registered professional nurse. ( 4 ) S:ust s11hmit an official transcript from his or her school of r~nrsing. ( 5 ) 35ust sul~mit refercnees from tlle last two employers. ( 6 ) Reccive consent of thc, Admission and Progression Committee of the Department of Nursing. Progression Policy ( 1 ) To progress in the professional sequence, a grade of C or hetter is required in all nursing courses which constitute the nursing major. These courses are: :301. Core Concepts of Nurzing. 311. Community Health Concepts. :312. Nursing Care of thc Adult. 314. Pathophysiology. 322. Psychiatric Sursing. 411. Nursing Care of the Child. 413. Nursing Care of the Mother and Infant. 421. Ecology of the Profession. 432. Community Health Nursing. 442. Nursing Leadership. 460. Nursing Research Seminar. ( 2 ) In those courses in which thcory and clinical practice arc combined, unsatisfactory performance ( D or F ) in either catcsor!; will constitute a failurc in the course. ( 3 ) Studcnts who receivc n D or I; in any course in the nursing major may not progress in the professional sequence. ( a ) A student who receives a D or F in a course in the nu r s in~ major whose overall acaclemic record remains at 2.00 or al~ove, and \vho desires to continue in thc program may petition in writing to the Committee 011 12dmissions and Progrcssion of the Department of Nursin,~. If reinstated, the course in which a D or I; has been received must be repeated satisfactorily ( C or better) hefore pro- gression in the nursing major will be permitted. 316 HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS Advanced Credit Registercd nurses jvho have met all of the aforementioned re- quirements nrill 11e allon.cd to take advancecl standing examin:~tions for credit in somcJ of the rcquired nursiog courses. In n o instancr. will the candidate be allo~red to ol~tain morc than 3:3 llours in thc nursing major by examination. Crrclit will be granted only if a grade of C or better is obtained in the examination. A fee of $7 per credit hour \\,ill be assessed :mcl the fce must hc paid 1)eforc the student \\,ill 11e ;~llowcd to obtain study material from the n e - partment of Nursing for the advanced standing examination. .I total of 12.1-hours of credit will be rcquired of all candidates for thc degree in nursing. The Major in Nursing The baccalaureate degree in nursing is designed to prepare a practitioner for beginning role\ in nursing. \\:it11 :~dditional gradu- ate study the nurse may build upon this 13.1sic professional founda- tion to prepare for clinical specialization, teaching, administratio:?. and/or research. Ul~less indicated, all courses with a nursilig prefix are required. The student in nursing is encouraged to develop a minor in a related field. Recommended minor fields are anthro- pology, biology, chemistry, psychology, or sociology. A minor usually consists of 15 hours, but requirements for the minor ~hould be checked with the specific department. Courses Open to Nonnursing Majors Courses in the Department of Nursing open to nonnursing stu. dents are: Sursing 2.50 \Vorkshop in Health Related Professions S ~ ~ r s i n g311 C:on~rn~~nityI-Iealth Concepts hursing 314 P:tthophysiology Sursing 315 M~lnian Co~nmunication in the Ilealtli I>isciplincs Sr~rsinfi430 Workship in IIcalth Related I'rofessions The foIlo\\~ing courses from thr nursing professional curriculunl are required for the BS degree in nursing: Sursing :301, :31 1, 3!2. 314, 322, i l l , 413, 421, 432, ,142, and 460. NURSING (Professional Curriculum) 250. Workshop in Health Related Professions. (1-4). Elective. Current con- ccxpt\, practices and prohlcnis rc.lcvant to t h r dclivery of hrnltli care scrviccl. 301. Core Concepts o l Nursing. (6). 3R, 31,. X co~nhincd theory and prac.ti~:c. roursc, in u.hich t l ~ e beginning profcssionnl studcnt is provided the opportu~~it!. to clel.clop those beginning knowlcdqcs. unclc~standings and skills rcqaisitc, to profrssionnl nursing pr;lc:tice. Emph;lsis ~vill l,c fi.i\.cn to the professional role and rrsponsil~ilities, trc11nic:~l skills requisite to noncornplcr nursing c;~i.c. cornm~~nicntionand i~iterpcrsonal rrlationships, thr community concept of health care, rchal~ilitation and he;\lth tcncliing. Prrrequisitr: Dcpartmcnt consent. HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 317 311. Community Health Concepts. (3). This course provides an introduction to thr foundat~ons of public 11c;11th, b!ost:~tistics, cp ide~~l io lo~y , lTy coni- ,ecolo, munity organizations and orga:lization for hcnlth services. I-'rertqt~isite: I),.- part111c.nt conscnt. 312. Nursing Care of the Adult. (6). 3R, 3L. A combined theory and practice course in which the student is assisted in acquiring those knowledges and skills requisite to assessing the nursing needs of adult patients with medical and/or surgical problen~s and planning for, giving, and evaluating the nursinq carc based on this assessment. Special consideration is given to prevention of illnrss, patient teaching, rehahilitation and the effect of individual differences and pathophysiology upon the therapeutic plan of nursing care. Learning ex- periences will I)e provided in a variety of health care agencies. Prerequisite: Department consent. 314. Pathophysiology. (3). Knowledges gained from the basic sciences are utilized in anticipating the physiologic changes associated with gross pathology. The principles underlying selcctecl therapeutic measures are studied as they relate to various pathologic conditions. The student uses this information in predicting health care needs of patients and in planning to meet these needs. Prerequisite: Department consent. 318. IIumnn Communication in the Health Disciplines. (3). Elective. The pragmatics of human communication theories and concepts relevant to pro- viding health care. Verbal and nonverbal aspects of intrapersonal and inter- personal communication. Included are professional-patient relationships, teach- ing and interviewing techniques, and health team concepts. Prerequisite: Department consent. 320. Dircctcd Study in Nursing. (1-3). Elective. Individual study of the various aspects and/or problems of professional nursing. Repeatable. Pre- requisite: Department consent. 322. Psychiatric Nursing. (6). 3R, 3L. Theories, principles and concepts of psychodynamics are studied in relatiqn to behavioral manifestations of stress involving major and minor emotional illnesses. Emphasis is placed on thera- peutic use of self in interpersonal processes. Prerequisite: Department conscnt. 411. Nursing Care of the Child. (6). 3R, 3L. A combined theory and practice course in which the student has opportunity to study the child's growth and drvclopment from infancy through adolescence with emphasis on the effects of various health prol~le~nson the child and his family. The total familv organization is studied in relation to its influence on both the well and ill child. Opportunity for nursing practice is provided in selected hospital or community settings. Prerequisite: Department consent. 413. Nursing Care of the Mqther and Infant. (6). 3R, 3L. A combined theory and practice course which is designed to present the childbearing continuum as it involves thr entire family. Specific emphasis is placed on the mother and newborn including both the normal and deviations from the normal. The studrnt has opportunity to work with families in selected hospital and com- munity settings. Prerequisite: Department consent. 421. Ecol7gy of the Profession. (2). The evolution of nursing as a profession and current perspectives appraised historically within the social, cultural, economic and political developments of the times. Prerequisite: Department consent. 432. Community Health Nursing. (6). 3R, 3L. A combined theory and prac- tice course in which the student has opportunity to apply concepts and principles of community health previously acquired, utilizinq a family cen- terecl approach within the framework of both private and public community health care agencies. Emphasis will be given to helping the student develop an understanding and appreciation of an interdisciplinary approach to meeting community health needs. Prerequisite: Nursing 311. 318 HEALTH RELATED PROFESSIONS 442. Nursing Leadership. (6). 3R, 3L. A combined theory and practice course in which the senior studect studies and applies nursing management and leadership principles in a variety of nursing situations. Included in the coursr are styles of leadership, performance appraisal techniques, and adminis- trative functions necessary to prepare for independent and creative participation in the community's changing health problems. 450. Workshop in Health Related Professions. (1-4). Elective. The course will focus on relevant topics directly and/or indirectly related to the delivery of health care service. 460. Nursing Research Seminar. (2). Introductory research methodology is presented as a Imsis for investigating special nursing problems. The course also includes critical evaluation of selected nursing studies, and utilizes the research process as a basis for developing a questioning attitude toward nursing practices and impleme~iting change. Prerequisites: Senior standing or consent. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 319 UNIVERSITY FACULTY 1971-1972 (Date or dates following title refer to time of initial and successive appoint- ments to the faculty with rank of assistant instructor or higher.) Ackerman, Paul D., Assistant Professor of Psychology (1968). BA, University of Kansas, 1964; ?VIA, ibid., 1966; PhD, ibid., 1968. Adamson, Carl L., Instructor in German (1965, 1971). BA, University of Wich- ita, 1963: hlA, Washington University, 1967. Adrian, Phillip, Instrllctor in Physical Education (1966). BA, Wichita State University, 1965; MA, ibid., 1967. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Ahlberg, Clark D., President and University Professor (1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1939; MA, Syracuse University, 1942; PhD, ibid., 1951; LLD, ibid., 1969. Alexander, David, Instructor in Physics (1971). BS, Kansas State University, 1967; AM, Indiana University, 1968; PhD, ibid., 1971. Allegrucci, Robert L., Assistant Professor of Sociology (1967). BS, Kansas State College of Pittsburg, 1959; MA, ibid, 1960; PhD, University of Missouri, 1969. Allen, Anneke S., Associate Professor of Chemistry (1964). Candidate Ryk- suniversiteit Groningen Netherlands, 1952; PhD, Tulane University, 1935. Allen, Donald R., Adjunct Professor of Chemistry (1971). BS, Wagner Col- lege, 1948; MA, University of Texas, 1950; PhD, University of Florida, 1962. Alley, Robert D., Associate Professor and Chairman of Department of Second- ary Education (1967). BS, Iowa State University, 1957; ME, Montana State University, 1960; EdD, Arizona State University, 1967. Anderson, Robert E., Professor of Educational Administration (1967). BA, University of Iowa, 1952; MA, ibid., 1953; EdD, University of Nebraska, 1963. Anslinger, Raymond W., Major, U. S. Amy, Assistant Professor of Military Science (1968). BA in Industrial Education, Wichita State University, 1960; U. S. Army Armor School, 1966. Artiaga, Lucio, Professor of Mathematics (1968). BA, University of Zaragoza, Spain, 1942; MS, Dalhousie University, 1959; PhD, University of Saskatchewan, 1964. Austin, David L., Assistant Professor of Music Library and Theory (1966). BM, University of Michigan, 1964; AM, ibid., 1967. Avant, James P., Instructor in Painting (1966). BA, Emory University, 1962; MA, University of Iowa, 1966; MFA, ibid., 1971. Bachus, Nancy, Instructor in Economics (1967). BS, University of California, Los Angeles, 1963; MS, Wichita State University, 1967. Bailey, Jerry D., Instructor and Administrative Assistant to the Dean, College of Eclucation (1971)). BS in Ed, Cniversity of Oklahoma, 1062; EdM, ibid., 1966. Bair, Sue F.,Assistant Professor of Physical Education (1966). BA, Wichita State University, 1961; hlA, il)id., 1967. Bajaj, Prem N., Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1968). BA, Puniab Uni- versity, 1951; MA, ibid., 1954; MS, Case Western Reserve University, 1967; PhD, ibid., 1968. Baker, Jess, Assistant Instructor in Sociology and Administrative Assistant to the Vice President for Student Mai r s (1971). BA, Kansas State University, 1968. 320 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Ballenger, Marcus T., \'kiting Assistant Professor of Elementary Education and Director of Early Childhood Education Project (1970). BS in Ed, Xorth Texas State University, 1960; MEd, Texas Tech University, 1963; EclD, ibid., 1970. Bartel, Peter S., Assistant Professor of Physics (1965). AB, Bethel College, 1943; MA, University of Iowa, 1953. Bartz. James R., Assistant Professor and Chairman of Department of Art Edu- cation (1970). BS, Ohio State University, 1964; MA, ihid., 1970. Bass, Nell R., Instructor in Business Education (1971). BS, Texas Woman's University, 1962; MBEd, Eastern New Mexico University, 1966. Bass, Ronald E., Assistant Professor of Industrial Education (1971). BS, Eastern New Mexico University, 1965; MEd, ibid., 1968; EdD, East Texas State University, 1971. Bateman, Morita M., Associate Professor of Administration (1966). BSME, Uni- versity of South Carolina, 1916; MS, University of North Carolina, 1950; PhD, Oklahoma State University, 1967. Bath, James H., Instructor in the Reading Laboratory (1969). BA, Wichita State University, 1967. Becker, D. Wayne, Associate Professor of Industrial Education (1962). BA, Wichita State University, 1958; MS, Kansas State College of Pittst:urg, 1962; EdD, University of Illinois, 1969. Belt, John A., Assistant Professor of Administration (1971). BA, University of Southern California, 1966; PhD, Texas Tech University, 1971. Bendell, Roberta B. Instructor in Educational Psychology (1970). BA, Univer- sity of Southern ~aiifornia, 1961; ME, Wichita State University, 1970. Bennett, James B., Lieutenant Colonel, U. S. Air Force, Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies (1970). BS, University of Illinois, 1954; MS, The George IVashington University, 1968; Academic Instructor and Allied Officer School. Air University, 1971. Benningfield, Lloyd M., Professor and Chairman of Department of Electrical Engineering (1967). BSEE, Oklahoma State University, 1951; MSEE, Univer- sity of Missouri, 1957; PhD, Purdue University, 1965. Berg, J. R., Professor of Geology (1946). BA, Augustana College, 1938; MS, University of Iowa, 1940; PhD, ibid., 1942. Bernard, David E., Professor of Printmaking and Chairman of Department of Studio Art (1949). BFA, University of Illinois, 1939; MFA, University of Iowa, 1949. Bernhart, Walter D., Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1954, 1964). BSCE, Kansas State University, 1950; IMS, Wichita State University, 1959; PhD, Oklahoma State University, 1964. Beshara, Robert J., Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering (1968). BSEE, Oklahoma State University, 1958; MSEE, ibid., 1961. Besser, Milton, Associate Professor of Journalism (19'71). BA, University of Colorado, 1933. Bezzi, D. R., Associate Professor of Elementary Education (1959). BS, Michi- gan State University, 1948; EdM, University of Oklahoma, 1954; EdD, ihid., 1956. Billings, Dorothy, Assistant Professor of Anthropology (1968). BA, University of Wisconsin, 1955. Bish, John T., Assistant Professor of Biology (1963). BS, Wichita State Uni- versity, 1962; MS, ibid., 1965. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 321 Blake, Leslie M., Professor and Chairman of Department of Speech (1910). BS, Kansas State University, 1937; MS, ibid., 1939. Blake, Rufus W., Jr., Assistant Instructor in Sociology and Administrative Assistant to the Vice President for Student Affairs (1968). AB, Wichita State University, 1966. Blythe, Jack G.,Professor of Geology (1949). BA, Wichita State University, 1947; MS, Northwestern University, 1950; PhD, University of Oklahoma, 1957. Boardman, Eunice, Professor of Music Education (1957). BME, Cornell Col- lege, 1947; MA, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1951; EdD, University of Illinois, 1964. Bolton, H. Philip, Assistant Professor of English (1970). BA, Brown Univer- sity, 1966; MA, University of Chicago, 1967. Bontrager, Ralph L., Professor of Educational Administration (1966). BS, Uni- versity of Kansas, 1951; MS, ibid., 1952; EdD, ibid., 1965. Born, John D., Jr., Associate Professor of History (1965). BA, University of Texas, 1952; MA, University of Houston, 1958; PhD, University of New Mexico, 1963. Borresen, C. Robert, Assistant Professor of Psychology (1965). BS, North- western University, 1954; AM, University of h,lissouri, 1959; PhD, ibid., 1968. Borror, Ronald A,, Assistant Professor of Low Brass Instruments (1971). BS in Ed, and BM, The Ohio State University, 1965; hlM, Yale University, 1967. Bostrom, Edwin A., Assistant Professor of Secondary Education (1969). BA, Arizona State University, 1961; MA, ibid., 1967; EdD, ibid., 1968. Bouvhton, Harrison, Associate Professor of Choral Music and Music Education (1961). BA, University of Northern Iowa, 1956; MA, University of Denver, 1959. Bouma, Eueene F.. Captain, U. S. Air Force, Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies (1971). BS, Grove City College, 1965; MS. Air Force Institute of Technology, 1970; Academic Instructor and Allied Officer School, Air Univer- sity, 1971. Bowman, Barbara, Instructor in Biology (1966). BS, University of Utah, 1954; hlSE, Wichita State University, 1966. Boyd, John P., Assistant Professor of Music and Director of Bands (1971). BME, Northwestern University, 1967; MM, ibid., 1968. Brady, Phyllis, Visiting Instructor in Elementary Education (1970). BS, Indi- ana University, 1964; MS, ibid., 1965. Brady, Stephen W., Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1967). AB, Indiana University, 1963; AM, il>id., 1965; PhD, illid., 1968. Brandhorst, Armin L., Assistant Professor of Engineering and Director of Physical Plant (1964). BSME, Kansas State University, 1959. MSME, Okla- homa State University, 1964. Breazeale, John, Professor of Physics, Academic Vice President, and Dean of Faculties (1959). BS, Millsaps College, 1947; MS, University of Alabama, 1951; PhD, University of Virginia, 1955. Brcwer, Donald D., Assistant Professor of Administration (1966, 1970). BS in CE, Kansas State University, 1964; MS, Wichita State University, 1966. Brewer, Jeneva J., Associate Professor of Mathematics (1949). AB, Wichita State University, 1946; MA, ibid., 1949. 322 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Brier, Stephen S., Instructor in Mathematics (1970). BS, The Cooper Union, 1968; MS, Carnegie-\fellon University, 1970. Brinkman, Sidney E., Assistant Professor of Accounting (1958, 1965). BA, Wichita State University, 19.56; hlS, ibitl., 1966; CPA Certificate, Kansas. Britton, Clark V., Jr., Associate Professor and Chairman of Department of Graphic Design (1957). BAA, Auburn University, 1952; MAA, ibid., 1955. Brown, Kenneth E., Instructor in Health Education (1971). BA, Immaculate Conception Seminary, 1968. Bryant. Donald E., Assistant Professor of Administration (1969). BBA, Univer- sity of Oklahoma, 19.58; MBA, ihid., 1960. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Bryant, Lucie M.,Assistant Professor of French (1971). MA, University of Kansas, 1968; XlPh, ibid, 1970. Bubieniec, Ernest Julian, Professor of Biology (1961). AB, Harvard University, 1949; MS, University of \irisconsin, 1952; PhD, ibid., 1957. Buess, Charles M., Profcssor of Chemistry (1961). BA, Ohio State University, 1942; his, Case Western Reserve University, 1946; PhD, University of Southern California, 1949. Burgess, Phyllis, Profcssor of Secondary Education (1957). BA, Southwestern College. 1932; MA, Northwestern University, 1940: EdD, University of Colo- rado, 1964. (Leave of absence, First Semester, 1971-1972.) Burk, Kenneth W., Professor of Logopedics (1971). BA, University of Iowa, 1053; MA, University of Kentucky, 1955; PhD, Purclue University, 1962. Burnett, Darrell Jack, Instructor in Administration, and Administrative Assist- ant to the Assistant to the President and Business Manager (1967). BSBA, Wichita State University, 1957; hlS, ibid., 1967. Bush, Martin H., Associate Professor of History and Assistant Vice President for Academic Resource Developmrnt (1970). BA, State University of New York at Albany, 1958; MA, illid., 1959; PhD, Syracuse University, 1966. Butler. Alvin, Instructor in Administration (1971). BBA, Wichita State Univer- sity, 1969; MS, ibid., 1970. Camin, Kathleen Q., Associate Professor of Economics (1965). AB, Smith College, 1957; PhD, University of Missouri, 1969. Campbell, James H., Associate Professor of Administration (1964). BA, Miami University, 1956; PhD, Michigan State Universit~,, 1966. Carper, William R., Profcssor of Chemistry (1967). BS, State University of Kew York at Albany, 1960; FhD, University of Mississippi, 196.3. Carraway, Edward E., Assistant Professor, Lil~rary and Head of Circulation Department (1967). AB, East Carolina University, 1961; MLS, University of Oklahoma, 1967. Carson, Doris M., Assistant Professor, Library (1957). BA, Kansas Wesleyan University, 1933; MA, University of Kansas, 1941; \IS, University of Illinois, 1954. Cathers. Robert E., Assistant Professor of Chemistry (1965), BS, Wichita State University, 1961; MS, ibid., 1963; PhD, Texas Tech University, 1966. Cavarozzi, Joyce Pcnnington, Assistant Professor of Speech and Drama (1965). BS in Ed, Ohio University, 1953; MA, Ohio State University, 1963. Caesar. James, Professor of \'iolin (19.19). Bhl, Cleveland Institute of Music, 1940; BS, Case Western Reserve University, 1947; MA, ibid., 1949. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 323 Chaffee, Leonard M., Professor of Education and Dean of the College of Edu- cation (1967). BA, Hiram College, 1051; MEd, Kent State University, 1952; PhD, Ohio State University, 1961. Chambers, Ronald Dean, Instructor in Logopedics (1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1934; MA, ibid., 1968. Chandler, Thomas J., Assistant Professor of Speech (1970). BA, University of Kel~mska, 1964; MA, ibid., 1965. Chilrls, David, Assistant Professor of Music Theory (1965). BM, Houghton College, 1960; h.lh1, George Peahody College, 1961; BD, Vanderbilt University, 1965; PhD, George Peal~ody College, 1971. Chopra, Dharam Vir, Associate Professor of Mathematics (1967). BA, Punjab University, India, 1950; MA, i!)icl., 1953; MS, University of Michigan, 1961; AM, ibid., 1963; PhD, University of Nebraska, 1968. Chrismnn, Paul G., Assistant Professor of Speech. Counselor, and Director of Financial Aids (1955, 1957). BS, Kansas State College of Pittsburg, 1936; MS, ibicl., 1941. Christenson Donald D.. Professor of Administration and Dean of the Colleee of Business ~dministratioh (1958). BS, Wichita State University, 1955; -MS, University of Illinois, 1958; PhD, ibid., 1962. Christian, Robert V., Jr., Professor and Chainnan of Department of Chemistry (1946). BS, Wichita State University, 1940; PhD, Iowa State University, 1946. Chung, Kae H., Associate Professor of Administration (1970). BA, Seoul National University, Seoul, Korea, 1959; MBA, Louisiana State University, 1965; PhD, ibid., 1968. Ciboski, Kenneth N., Assistant Professor of Political Science (1968). BA, University of Kansas, 1961; h'IA, ibid, 1965; PhD, University of Washington, 1971. Cochran, Corydon E., Assistant Professor of Educational Psychology (1969). BA, University of Oklahoma, 1974; MEd, ibid., 1939; EdD, Oklahoma State University, 1969. Coin, Herbert H., Assistant Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1967). BSME, Wichita State University, 1957; MSME, ibid., 1963. Coleman, Cecil, Professor of Physical Education and Director of Athletics (1971). BA, Arizona State University, 1950; MA, ibid., 1952. Collins, George W., Associate Professor of History (1968). BS, Northwestern University, 1918; MA, ibid., 1950; PhD, University of Colorado, 1965. Collins, Janet R., Assistant Professor of Educational Psychology (1969). AB, University of Cincinnati, 1941; MA, Washington University, 1962. Collins, Marilyn P., Assistant Professor of Sursing (1970). BSN, University of Kansas, 1966; X,IN, Emory University. 1969. Collison, Brooke B., Assistant Professor of Student Personnel and Guidance (1969). BS, University of Kansas. 1956; )!Ed, ibid., 1962; PhD, University of Missouri, Columbia, 1969. Combs, Joseph C., Assistant Profcssor of Percussion and Music Literature (1970). BSEcI, Northwc,st hlissouri State College, 1962; h,lhlusEd, University of Ok!ahoma, 1966; DMusEd, ibid., 1967. Comstock, George A., Professor of Education ancl Director of Counseling Ser- vices (1933). BA, University of Colorado, 1935; MA, ibid., 1940; EdD, ibid., 1948. 324 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Cook, Everett L., Associate Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1953, 1969). BSAE, Wichita State Univcrsity, 1954; XlSAE, ibid., 1958; PhD, Oklahoma State University, 1967. Cook, Sandra L., Instructor in Administration (1968). BBA, Wichita State University, 1966; MS, illid., 1988. Corbett, Don, Assistant Professor of h111sic Education (1971); BIME, Wichita State University, 193.3; MhlE, ibid., 1939. Corbin, Harry F., University Professor (1946). AB, Wichita State University, 1940; BD, University of Chicago, 1943; LLB, University of Kansas, 1949. Costley, Dan L., Associate Professor of Administration and Associate Dean of the College of Business Administration (1965). BA, University of Oklahoma, 1957; MA, ibid., 1958; PhD, Michigan State University, 1964. Cottam, Richard M., Assistant Professor of Journalism (1971). BJ, University of Missouri, 1955. Cowles, Josephine hl., Associate Professor, Library, and Head of Cataloging Department (1947). ScB, Ottawa University, 1928; BS in LS, University of Illinois, 1936; XIS, ibid., 1949. Cowling, David H., Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering (1970). BSE, Washington Univcrsity, 19ij8; RISEE, University of Illinois, 1967; PhD, ibid., 1970. Cox. Roger A,, Instructor in Industrial Education (1967). BA, Wichita State University, 1967; MS, Oklahoma State University, 1970. (Leave of absence- 1971-1972.) Craig, Andrew J., Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1957, 1960, 1963). BSAE, Texas A & M University, 1952; MSAE, Wichita State University, 1960; PhD, Stanford University, 1964. Crawford, Alfred E., 11, Instructor and Counselor in University College (1970). BA in Education, Wichita State University, 1964; MA, ibid., 1967. Cress, Allan M., Professor and Chairman of Department of German (1953). AB, University of Illinois, 1942; MA, ibid., 1948; PhD, ibid., 1952. Crockett, Helen, Assistant Professor and Director of Continuing Education (1961). AB, \i'ichita State University, 1931; MA, ibid., 1935. Crooms, Gary, Assistant Instructor in Minority Studies and Administrative Assistant in the Department (1972). BS, Southwestern College, 1963; ME, Wichita State University, 1971. Crown, Gary, Associate Professor of Mathematics (1962, 1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1960; MS, illid., 1962; PhD, University of Sew Mexico, 1968. Crowns, Arthur J., Jr., Professor and Chairman of Department of Administra- tion of Justice (1971). BS, \Irisconsin State University at Stevens Point, 1947; JD, University of CVisconsin, 1950; MSSW, ibid., 1958; PhD, Florida State University, 1965. Cunydlo, Roland, Instructor in French (1968). BA, U'ichita State University 1961; MA, ibid., 1967. Cutler, Bruce, Professor of English (1960). BA, University of Iowa, 1951; MS, Kansas State University, 1957. Daniels, Virginia M., Instructor and Counselor in University College (1971). BA, Northwestern University. 1947; hlEd, Wichita State University, 1967. Darling, John R., Professor of Administration (1971). BS, University of Ala- bama, 1959; hIS, ibid., 1980; PhD, University of Illinois, 1967. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 325 Davidson, Marvin L., Research Associate in Aeronautical Engineering (1963). BA, Wichita State University, 1961. Davis, Margaret E., Instructor in Nursing (1971). BS, University of Minnesota, 1949. Davison, Ronald G., Assistant Professor of Educational Administration and Director of Title IV Grant (1969). BA, State University of New York at Buffalo, 1959; EdM, ibid., 1964; EdD, ibid., 1969. Decker, Jay C., Associate Professor of Music and Director of Orchestras (1971). BhIEd, Wichita State University, 1956; hlS in hlusEd, University of Illinois, 1962; DMA, University of Missouri at Kansas City, 1971. Decker, Warren, Instn~ctor in Speech (1969). B4, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1967; hlA, Southwest Missouri State College, 1969. DeFatta, Joseph A., Assistant Professor of Accounting (1970). BS, Centenary College, 1966; MS, Louisiana State University, 1967; PhD, ibid., 1970. DelCastillo, Rosario E., Instructor and Counselor in University College (1971). BA, Wichita State University, 1970. Dempsey, Albert P., Jr., Colonel, U. S. Army, Professor of Military Science (1969). BBA, Wichita State University, 1948; Infantry School, 1955; Language School, 1958; U. S. Army Command and General Staff College, 1962. Denton, Densil Ray, Jr., Assistant Instructor in Psychology and Administrative Assistant to the Director of Research and Sponsored Programs (1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1963. Deutsch, Dian R., Instructor in Health Education and Director, Center for Educational Development for the Health Related Professions (1971). BA, Uni- versity of Kansas, 1970; MS, ibid., 1871. DeVun, Esmund E., Jr., Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1969). BS, Louisi- ana State University at New Orlcans, 1963; \IS, Louisiana State University at Baton Rouge, 1966; PhD, Universitv of hlassachusetts, 1969. Dey, Glen R., Professor of Student Personnel and Guidance (1967). BS, The Universitv of Sebraskn, 1054; hlEd, ibid, 1959; EdD, ibid., 1961. Diaz, Victor Fabri, Instructor in Spanish (1968). BA, javeriana Univcrsitv, Bogotj Colombia, 1063. Dicker. Michael H.. Instructor in 1~70odwincls and llusic Literature (1970). BA, ~ k i v e r s ' t ~ of California at Los ..\ngeles, 1966; Diploma, as soon, Jr~il- liard School of Music, 1070. Diggs, Donald H., Instructor and Counselor in University Col!ege (1971). BS in Ed, Kansas State College of Pittsburg, 1969; )IS, ibid., 1970. Distler, Donald A., Associate Professor of Biology (1963). BA, University of Louis\~ille, 10.52; \IS, ibid., 1057; PhD, Univcrsity of Kansas, 1367. Doerlcr, Charles E., Jr., llajor, U. S. Army, Assistant Professor of lfilitarv Science (1970). BA, Louisiana State University, 1961. Doig, J. Robcrt, Jr., Assistant Professor of Aeronautical Engineerins (1963\. BS, Phys, Union Colleg,e, 1938; \,IS, Penns+lvania State University, 1910. Dominic, Joseph F., Assistant Profcssor of English (1969). BA, llichigi~n State Uni\,crsity, 1962; LIA, ihid., 1964; PhD, ibid., 1969. Douslas, Donald 3I., Assistant Professor of History (1965). AB, Kansas Stat(. University, 1961; ;\I:\, ihid., 1969; PhD, University of Kansas, 1968. 326 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Douglas, J. Rex, Associnte Profcssor of Educ:?tional Administration (1969). BBA, Univcrs!ty of T e u s , 1947; \ [A, \\'estern Statr College, 1961; EdD, Texas Tech University, 1967. Douglas, Virginia C., Instructor in Nursing (1970). BS, Texas Tech University, 1967; ME, West Texas State University, 1969. Dralle, Lewis A., Professor of I-Iistory (1969). AB, University of Chica~c!, I9:3!Ir \IA, Ul~iversity of California, Los Angcles, 1948; PhD, ibid., 1952. Dreifort, John E., ilssistnnt Professor of IIistory (1970). BS, Bowlins Grc.c:n State Univrrsity, 196.5; LIA, ibid.. 1966; PhD. Kent State University, 1970. Drum, Dale S., As~istant Professor of Economics (1969). BS. Bradley Univrr- sity, 1964; hIA. University of S ~ l x a s k a . 1966. Duell, Dennis C., Assistant Professor of Econc~liics (1967). BS, Kansas Statr University, 1961; \IS, ibid., 1969; PhD, University of Illinois, 1969. Duell, Orpha K., Associate Profcssor of Educational Psychology (1967). BS, Kansas State University, 1963; l IS, IJniversity of Illinois, 1963; PhD, ibid., 1967. Dnerlisen. Walter. Universitv Professor and Snecial Assistant to the President (1932)). BPSSI, \~ ich i t a ~ta-te University, 1931; XIh4, Northwestern Univer- sity, 1938. Dunn, Colon H., Professor of Electrical Engineering (1959). BS, John Brown University, 1942: h.IEE, Rensselaer Pol~~technic Institute, 1953. Dunning, Wayne W.. Assistant Professor of Chcmistry (1961). BS, Iowa State University, 1952; \IS, ihid., 1959; PhD, ibid., 1964. Duram, James C., Associate Professor of History (1968). BA, Western Michigan University, 1961; hlA, il~itl., 1963; PhD, Wayne State University, 1968. Durfee, Kent A., Adjunct Assistant Instructor in Industrial Engineering (1969). BSIE, Wichita State University, 1969. Dybdahl, Russell E., Assistant Professor, Library (1956). BA, Union College, 1937; MA, University of South Dakota, 1947. Edwards, Harold T., Assistant Professor of Logopedics (1971). BA, Michigan State University, 1959; MA, ibicl., 1963; PhD, University of Washington, 1971. Eichler, Victor B., Assistant Professor of Biology (1971). BS, University of Illinois, 1963; MS, ibid., 1964; PhD, University of Iowa, 1969. Elcrat, Alan R., Associate Professor of Xfathcmatics (1967). BS, University OF New hIesico, 1963; MA, Indiana University, 1965; PhD, ibid., 1967. Eller, James C., Assistant Professor and Assistant Director for Technical Ser- vices, Lil-rary (1971). BS in Ecl, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1958; MLS, ibid., 1967. Ellis, Howard E., Professor of Music Education and Assistant Dean of the Col- lege of Fine Arts (1935). AB, Albion College, 1942; hlM, University of Michi- gan, 1947; PhD, ibid., 1957. Enlow, Ronald A., Assistant Professor of Inclustrial Engineering (1970). BA, Nol-thwestern University, 1962; MA, Arizona State University, 1968; MS, ibid., 1968; PhD, ibid., 1970. Epley, Donald R., Instructor in Economics (1966). BA, Wichita State Uni- versity, 1964; MA, ihid., 1966. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Erickson, James, Associate Professor of English (1964). BA, University of Minnesota, 1955; MA, ibid., 1957; PhD, ibid., 1961. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 327 Eubanks, Betty, Visiting Instructor in Elementary Education (1970). BS in Ed, Wichita State University, 1964; h4S in Ed, ibid., 1967. Eversman, Walter, Associate Professor of Aeronautical Engineering and Assistant Dcnn of the Graduate School (1864). BSAE, Purclue University, 1959; MS, Engineering 54echanics, Stanford University, 1961; PhD, ibid., 1964. Faires, Wesley L., Assistant Professor of Logopeclics (1965). BA, Wichita State University, 1938; MA, illid., 1962: PhD, ibitl., 1965. Farnsworth, David N., Professor of Political Science (1956). BA, Wichita State University, 1953; AM, University of Illinois, 1955; PhD, ibid., 1959. Faust, Stcphen M., Assistant Professor, Aucliovisual and Instructional Develop- ment (1971). BS, Indiana University, 1970; MS and EdS, ibid., 1971. Fearey, L. Darlene, Instructor in Mathematics (1966). BS, Wichita State University, 1964; his, il,id., 1968. Fcuerberg, Gary, Instructor in Sociology (1971). BA, University of Chicago, 1965; MA, University of Oregon, 1971. Fife, Natasha hlatson, Assistant Professor of Physical Education (1959). BS, Texas Woman's University, 1958; MS, Wichita State University, 1967. Fincher, John H., Assistant Professor of Drawing and Coordinator of Graduate Art Studies (1966). BA, Texas Tech University, 1964; MFA, University of Oklahoma, 1966. Finlayson, Eleanor, Assistant Professor of German (1969). AB, Wayne State Univcrsity, 1960; MA, il)id., 1964. Fisher, Glenn W., Regents' Professor of Urban Affairs (1970). BA, University of Iowa, 1948; MA, University of North Carolina, 1950; PhD, University of Wisconsin, 1954. Fisher, James E., Assistant Professor of Secondary Education (1969). BA, Oklahoma State University, 1958; 54S, ibid., 1960; EdD, ibid., 1969. Floerchinger, Sharon, Instructor in English (1965). BA, University of Ne- braska, 1960; MA, Wichita State University, 1966. Ford, William R., Professor of Electrical Engineering (1961). BSEE, Kansas State University, 1942; MSEE, ibid., 1948; BS in Bus Adm, ibid., 1950. Forsyth, Garyfallia L., Assistant Professor of Nursing (1970). BA, Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1950; MSN, University of Colorado, 1967. Foster, Donald L., Assistant Professor of Physics (1966). BA, Reed College, 1957; PhD, University of Kansas, 1969. Foster, Mary Sue, Assistant Professor of Art Education (1966). BAE, Univer- sity of Kansas, 1961; MS, il~icl., 1963: MFA, ibid., 1971. Founds, Jean, Assistant Instructor in Journalism and Supervising Auditor for the Publications Board (1970). Fremont, Theodore S., Assistant Professor of Educational Psychology (1970). BA, Nehraska \Vesleyan University, 1965, >IS, Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1966; EdD, Oklahoma State University, 1970. French, Thomas C., Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1965). BS, Wichita State University, 1962; MS, Colorado State Univenity, 1964. Friesen, Walter S., Associate Professor of Student Personnel and Guidance and Dean of Llniversity College (IC)69). AB, Tahor College, 1953; MS, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1957; EdD, University of Northern Colorado, 1963. 328 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Frisbie, David A., Assistant Professor of Educational Psychology (1971). BS, \\'isconsin State University, 1866; hlA, hlichigan State University, 1969; PhD, ibid., 1971. Fmka, Robert L., Assistant Professor of Economics (1965). BS, Southern Methodist University, 1957; PhD, i l d . , 1967. Froning, Dorothy Gardner, Professor of Spanish (1947). AB, Park College, 1936; MA, University of Alalmma, 1947; PhD, University of California at Los Angeles, 1961. Fugate, Josephine B., Professor of Mathematics (1955). AB, University of Kansas, 1924; MA, ihid., 1929. Fulton, James A., Assistant Professor of Philosophy (1970). BA, Kansas State College of Pittsburg, 1965; hiA, University of Illinois, 1967; PhD, Brown University, 1970. Furgeson, Charles T., llajor, U. S. Anny, Assistant Professor of Military Science (1969). AAS, hiechanical Engineering, Alfred Technical Institute, 1958; BS, General Science, Alfred University, 1961; US Army Armor School, 1968. Gane, Elizabeth Mae, Assistant Professor and Counselor in Student Senices (1960). AB, Randolph-h4acon \Von~en's College, 1937; MA, Syracuse Univer- sity, 1959. Gass, Marcelle, Instructor in Business Education (1969). BS, University of Kansas, 1949; MS, Wichita State University, 1967. Gates, Therese, Assistant Professor of French (1965). Diploma, Paris, France, 1940; Certificat d'Aptitude, Pedagogique a l'enseignement, Paris, 1954; BA, \Vichita State University, 1962; MA, ibid., 1967. Gemma, James L., Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1971). BS, University of Detroit, 1962; hlS, The Ohio State University, 1963; PhD, ibid., 1970. Genova, Anthony C., Jr., Professor and Chairman of Department of Philosophy (1962). AB, University of Chicago, 1957; IJhB, ibid., 1958; Ahl, ibid., 1958; PhD. ibid., 1965. Gerhard, Armin, Instructor in German (1968). BA, University of Texas, 1966; MA, illid., 1968. Gerlach, E. Hugh, Jr., Adjunct Assistant Professor of Biology (1969). BS, Uni- versity of Kentucky, 1933; PhD, ibid., 1967. Gerling, Amy G., Professor of Sociology (1947). AB, University of Wisconsin, 1931; ,4M, ibid., 1933; PhD, Cornell University, 1939. Gibson, George H., Assistant Professor of Opera Theatre and Voice (1967). Bhl, University of Miami, 1936; hlM, University of Texas, 1959; DMA, Univer- sity of Southern California, 1971. Glass, Ronald R., Instructor in Accounting (1971). BBA, Wichita State Univer- sity, 1970; MS, ibid., 1971, CPA Certificate, Kansas. Gleason, Kenneth G., Professor and Chairman of Department of Educational Administration (1965). AB, \Vichita State University, 1950; hlA, Columbia University, 1952; EdD, ihicl., 1964. Gohn, Lyle, Assistant Professor and Associate Dean of Students (1967). BS, Piirdue University, 1962; MS, ibid., 1964; PhD, ibid., 1967. Goldman, Louis, Assistant Professor of Foundations of Education (1962). AB, University of Michigan, 1950; MA, Columbia University, 1954. Goodpasture, Carter, Adjunct Associate Professor of Health Education (1970). BS, Princeton University, 1932; MD, University of Chicago, 1936. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 329 Gosman, Albert L., Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Assoc'iate Dean of the College of Engineering (1967). BSME, University of Michigan, 1950; MSME, University of Colorado, 1955; PhD, University of Iowa, 1965. Gotterbarn, Donald W., Assistant Professor of Philosophy (1971). BA, Hofstra University, 1964; MA, University of Rochester, 1970; PhD, ibid., 1971. Goudie, Andrea, Assistant Professor of English (1968). BA, University of Min- nesota, 1962; MA, Indiana University, 1963; PhD, ibid., 1969. Goudy, Robert S., Assistant Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1967). BSCE, Duke University, 1957; MSCE, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1958; MS Applied Mechanics, Kansas State University, 1963; PhD, ibid., 1967. Gould, Loyal N., Professor and Chairman of Department of Journalism (1970). BA. Florida State University, 1951; MA, University of North Carolina, 1954; PhD, ibid., 1955. Graham, Archie Richard, Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering (1965). BS, Kansas State University, 1957; MSME, ibid., 1960; PhD, University of Iowa, 1966. Graham, Gerald H., Professor and Chairman of Department of Administration (1967). BS, Northwestern State College, 1959; MSBA, ibid., 1960; PhD, Louisi- ana State University, 1968. Graham, J. Keith, Professor and Chairman of Department of Logopedics (1966). BS, Wayne State University, 1938; MA, ibid., 1951; PhD, Northwest- em University, 1964. Graham, Linda, Instructor in Economics (1966, 1967, 1969). BS, Oklahoma State University, 1963; MS, ibid., 1965. Gray, James, Associate Professor of History (1963). BA, University of Cali- fornia, Los Angeles, 1954; PhD, ibid., 1966. Green, Mary, Assistant Professor of Physical Education (1971). BA, West Texas State University, 19.57; MEd, ibid., 1959. Greenberg, Gary, Assistant Professor of Psychology (1966, 1970). BS, Brooklyn College, 1962; MA, Wichita State University, 1964; PhD, Kansas State Uni- versity, 1970. Gregg, Alvin, Assistant Professor of English (1968). BA, Texas Tech Uni- versity, 1956; MA, ibid., 1957; PhD, University of Texas, 1969. Grewal, Mahesh S., Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering (1969). BSc, University of Allahabad, India, 1953; BS, University of California, Berke- ley, 1957; MS, ibid., 1959; PhD, ibid., 1962. Gries, John C., Assistant Professor of Geology (1971). BS, University of Wy- oming, 1962; MS, ibid., 1965; PhD, University of Texas, 1970. Griffith, Kathryn, Professor of Political Science (1957). AB, Wichita State Uni- versity, 1947; MPA, Syracuse University, 1954; PhD, University of Chicago, 1967. Groh, Magda V., Instructor in Chemistry (1970). BS, University of Melbourne, Australia, 1959. Gundersen, James N., Professor and Chairman of Department of Geology (1970). BS, University of Wisconsin, 1949; MA, University of California at Los Angeles, 1955; PhD, University of Minnesota, 1958. Gustafson, Marilyn, Instructor in Spanish (1965). AB, Lindenwood College, 1963: MA, University of New Mexico, 1965. 330 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Gythiel, Anthony P., Assistant Professor of English (1971). Diploma d'Hu- manit@s, St. Stanislas, Poperinge, Belgium, 1950; BPh, Maison de Philosophy, B ~ s s e l s , Belgium, 1953; MA in Theology, Theologicum University de Louvain, 1956; IMA, University of Detroit, 1966; PhD, ibid., 1971. Haines, Forrest, Assistant Professor of Industrial Engineering (1957, 1965). BS, Kansas State College of Pittsburg, 1947. Hall, Clifford E., Jr., Assistant Instructor in Speech (1970). BA, Wichita State University, 1966. Halstead, Helen L., Assistant Professor of Nursing (1970). BSN, University of Kansas, 1955; MEd, University of Minnesota, 1959. Hammond, Geraldine, Professor of English (1932). AB, Wichita State Univer- sity, 1931; h!4, University of Kansas, 1932; PhD, University of Colorado, 1944. Hannon, Floyd B., Adjunct Professor of Administration of Justice (1972). Hansan, John, Associate Professor of Physical Education (1964). BS, University of Kansas, 1962; MS, ibid, 1963; EdD, University of Oregon, 1969. Harder, Marvin A., Professor of Political Science (1947). AB, Wichita State University, 1947; AM, Columbia University, 1949; PhD, ibid., 1959. Hardy, James Lynn, Professor and Chairman of Department of Music Education (1965). BSME, Southwest Missouri State College, 1948; MME, University of Kansas, 1956; EdD, ibid., 1969. Harnsberger, John L., Professor and Chairman of Department of History (1962). BA, Hamline University, 1948; MA, University of Minnesota, 1950; PhD, ibid., 1956. Harrison, William H., Instructor in Industrial Engineering and Campus Architect (1966). BS in Architecture, University of Kansas, 1938. Hart, Charles William Merton, Visiting Professor of Anthropology (1971). BA University of Sydney, Australia, 1927; IMA ibid., 1929. Hartman, John J., Professor and Chairman of Department of Sociology (1968). BS, Southwest Missouri State College, 1961; h,lS, University of Missouri, 1963; PhD, ibid., 1966. Hay, Bryan S., Assistant Professor of English (1965). BS, University of Rochester, 1958; PhD, ibid., 1969. Haydon, Randall B., Distinguished Profesor of Iloney and Banking (1970). BBA, University of Massachusetts, 1954; MBA, ibid., 1958; PhD, University of Illinois, 1962. Heacock, Audrey hl., Assistant Professor of Latin (1969). AB and MA, State University of New York, Albany, 1956. Heaston, Michael, Instructor, Library (1969). BA, Wichita State University, 1966; MA, ibid., 1969. Hecht, Sabrina M., Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1950). AB, Kansas State College of Pittsburg, 1939; hlS, University of Michigan, 1945. Hedblom, Jack H., Assistant Professor of Sociology (1970). BA, University of Illinois, 1960; h4A, Universih. of Rhode Island, 1962; PhD, State University of New York at Buffalo, 1971. Heilmann, Charles, Assistant Professor of Sociology (1965). BA, Washl~urn University, 1936; JD, ibid., 1939; MA, Wichita State University, 1964. Henderson, Diane D., Instructor in Speech (1971). BA, Michigan State Univer- sity, 1970; MA, ibid., 1971. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 331 Henderson, Stanley E., Instructor and Acting Director of Admissions (1971). BA, Michigan State Universih, 1969; MA, Cornell University, 1971. Henningsen, Rodney J., Associate Professor of Administration of Justice (1971). BA, Augustana College, 1962; 1IA, University of Nebraska, 1966; PhD, ibid., 1971. Herman, David T., Professor and Chairman of Department of Psychology (1949). AB, Indiana University, 1940; hlA, ibid., 1942; PhD, ibid., 1947. Ho, James C., Associate Professor of Physics (1971). BS, National Taiwan University, 1959; 14S, University of California, Berkeley, 1963; PhD, ibid., 1966. Hoa& Gerald B., Associate Professor of English (1967). AB, Loyola University (New Orleans), 1951; AIA, Tulanc University, 1955; PhD, ibid., 1965. Holman, Carol Schowalter, Assistant Professor of Education and Director of Audiovisual Services (1942). BM, Wichita State University, 1935; MME, ibid., 1950. Holmer, Robert M., Professor and Chairman of Department of Physical Educa- tion, Health and Recreation (195.5). BS, University of Kansas, 1941; MS, ibid., 1948; PhD, University of Iowa, 19.54. (Leave of absence, First Semester, 1971-1972.) Holmes, Lowell D., Professor of Anthropology (1959). BS, Northwestern University, 1950; PhD, ibid., 1957. Homburger, Richard IT., Professor of Accounting (19.56). JD, University of Zurich, 1937; XIS, Columbia University, 1946; CPA Certificate, West Virginia. Hood, Don W., Instructor in Phlsical Education (1971). BS, Abilene Christian College, 1955; XIEd, East Texas State University, 1958. Houmanidis, Lazaros Th., Clinton Visiting International Professor of Admini- stration (1971). Athens Graduate School of Economic Sciences and Business. Houston, Martha P., Instructor, Library (1968). BS, Kansas State University, 1945; ML, Kansas Statc Teachers College, Emporia, 1968. Hoyer, Elmer A,, Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering (1966). BS, EE, Wichita State University, 1962; MSEE, University of Missouri, 1964; PhD, ibid., 1967. Hudson, Randall O., Associate Professor of History (1964), BS, University of Georgia, 1937; MA, University of Sort11 Carolina, 1962; PhD, ibid., 1963. Hummel, Don .4., Assistant Professor of Low Brass Instruments (19155). BA, Arizona Statc University, 1958; 1151, Southern Irlinois University, 1959. iLcavc. of absence, 1971-1972.) Humphrey, Bobbye J., Assistant Professor of Social Work (1968). AB, Friend\ University, 1948; lIS\\', University of Kansas, 1964. Ingrnire, Bruce D., Assistant Professor of Secondary Education (1968). BA, San Francisco State College, 1953; 11.4, ibid., 1957; EdD, Arizona Statc University, 1968. Jabara, F. D., \VSU Endowment Association Professor in Busincss Administra- tion (1949). BS, Oklahoma State University, 1948; AIBh, Sorthwestern Uni- versity, 1949; CPA Certificate, Kansas. Jackson, Bill N., .4ssistant Professor of Graphic Design and Publications De- signer in Oficc of Information and Public Events (1970). Kansas City Ar: Institute, 1G38. Jaekel, Rosemarie, Instructor in Nursing (1971). BA, Viterbo College, 1967; BSX, Unikersity of Colorado, 1970; 11s in Nursing, ibid., 1971. 332 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Jakowah, Charles V., Professor of Eleckical Engineering and Dean of the Col- lege of Engineering (1965). BSEE, Kansas State University, 1944; SISEE, ibid., 1947; PhD, University of Illinois, 1953. Jamison, Ines, Assistant Profrssor of \'oice (1970). BSl, Univcmity of Kansas. 1926. Jantze, hlargaret L., Associate Profcssor and Chairman of Dcpartmvnt t r f Business Eclllcntion (1965). BS, Union College. 1947; IIEd, L'niversity of Nebraska, 1959; EdD, ihid., 1963. Janzen, Villna hl., Instructor in Henltll Education (1971). BS in Jl(dTt.cll. Loyo'la Uni\-ersity, Sr\v Orleans, 1955. Johns, Buddy Ava, Jr., Associate Professor of Slathematics (1963). B;\, Friends University, 1947; hlA. Uni\.ersity of Kansas, 1900: P1113, ibid.. 1963. Johnson, Charles E., ;\ssistant Professor of hluthcmatics (1971). BS, Uni\.cr- sity of Utah, 1961; \IS. Uni\.ersity of \\'isconsin, 19G2; PIID, Th(* Ohio St;ttt~ University, 1970. Johnson, Evcrett L., ii~sistant l'rofcssor of Electrical Engirlerring (1971;. BSEE, Univcrsity of K;~ns:ts. 196% SlSEE. Univrrsity of SCM'SI~xi(.o, l!J(j-l: PhD: University of Kansas, 1969. Johnson, John \T:.. Jr., Associate Profrssor of Chemistry (1955). AB. \\.ichit;~ Sh tc University, 1932; JIS, ibid., 19533; PhD, University of Illirloir,, 1956. Johnston, Clara Frances R., A~sistant Professor, Library (1054). AB. \\'icliit.i State University, 1950; t\SIL.S. IJnircrsity of hlichigan, 1933. Johnston, Kcith L., Assistant Profcssor of Ind~~strinlEducation (1968). BS. Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1962; AM, University of Northern Colorado, 1966. Jones, W. James, Assirtnnt Professor of Cl~~rinet(1969). BSI and BSE, Ohio State University, 1060; SIA, ibid., 1962; PhD, University of Iowa, 1970. Jong, hlaw-Tsucy, Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering (1967). BSLE, Sational T a i w ~ n Univers'ty, 1960; JISEE. South Dakota School of Slines and Technology, 1965; PhD, University of Missouri, 1967. Jordan, Donald E., Assistant Professor and Counselor and Director of Career Planning and Placement Center (1965). AB, Wichita State University, 1959; MEd, ibid., 1962. Jovanovic, Milan K., Professor of Mechanical Engineering (1968). Diploma, Ing. (ME,) University of Belgrade, 1938; Diploma, Physics, ibid., 1945; h4S, Northwestern University, 1954; PhD, ibid., 1957. Joyner, H. Sajon, Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineerin (1969). BS in Physics, University of Texas, Austin, 1962; h,IA in Physics, ifid., 1964; MS, University of Missouri, Rolla, 1967; PhD, ibid., 1970. Joyner, Mary Ellen, Assistant Instructor in Secondary Education (1969). AB, Washington University, 1964, MA, Wichita State University, 1971. Kahn, Melvin A., Professor and Chairman of Department of Political Science (1970). BA, University of Florida, 1932; hlA, University of Chicago, 1958; PhD, Indiana University, 1964. Kasten, Roger N., Associate Professor of Logopedics (1971). BS in Ed, Bowl- ing Green State University, 1955; MA, ibid., 1956; PhD, Northwestern Uni- versity, 1964. Kastor, Frank S., Professor and Chairman of Department of English (1969). AB, University of Illinois, 1955; AM, ibid., 1956; PhD, University of California, Berkeley, 1963. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 333 Katz, Jonathan, Assistant Professor of English (1970). BA, Brooklyn College, City University of New York, 1965; MA, Purdue University, 1967. Kelly, Francis L., Assistant Professor of Speech (1965), BA, DePaul University, 1954; MT, University of Illinois, 1959. Kelso, Dennis, Assistant Professor of Secondary Education (1970). BA, State University of New York at Buffalo, 1964; EdM., ibid., 1967. Kenyon, G. Y., Professor of Psychology (1955). BS, Wichita State University, 1949; MA, ibid., 1951, PhD, University of Rochester, 1957. Kerschen, Marlene, Instructor in Nursing (1971). BS, Saint Mary of the Plains College, 1967; MS in Nursing, Indiana University, 1969. Kessinger, Byrl, Assistant Professor and Counselor and Assistant Director of Career Planning and Placement Center (1965). BS and MS, Kansas State Col- lege of Pittsburg, 1956. Kidder, Rushworth M., Assistant Professor of English (1969). AB, Amherst College, 1965; MA, Columbia University, 1966; PhD, ibid., 1969. Killian, Donald G., Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1958). BS, Southeast Missouri State College, 1952; ME, University of Missouri, 1956; AM, ibid., 1958. Kiskadden, Robern M., Professor of Studio Art and Assistant Dean of the Col- lege of Fine Arts (1949). BFA, University of Kansas, 1947; MA, Ohio Wes- leyan University, 1949. Kitch, Sally L., Instructor in English (1969). AB, Cornell University, 1967; MA, University of Chicago, 1968. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Klavins, Andrew, Visiting Assistant Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1971). BS, University ot Illinois, 1963; MS, ihid., 1968; PhD, ibid., 1970. Klingsporn, M. J., Assistant Professor of Psychology (1965). AB, University of Nebraska, 1957; MA, ibid., 1962; PhD, ibid., 1965. Klyman, Fred I., Assistant Professor of Administration of Justice (1971). BS, Memphis State University, 1967; XIEd, illid., 1970. Knapp, Robert K., Associate Professor of Psychology (1961). BA, Kent State University, 1954; MA, ibid., 1936; PhD, Michigan State University, 1960. Kneil, Thomas R., Assistant Professor of Logopedics (1967). AB, Bowdoin College, 1955; MS, Syracuse University, 1960. Knight, Dorothy, Assistant Professor, Library (1966). BEd, Illinois State Uni- versity, 1936; MS, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1961. Knight, Kenneth, Assistant Professor, Library (1971). BS, Knox College, 1930; BS in LS, University of Illinois, 1946; MS (LS), ibid., 1947. Konek, Carol W., Instructor in English (1969). BS, University of Kansas, 1961; MA, Wichita State University, 1968. Koski, Onnie, Adjunct Assistant Professor of Dental Hygiene (1971). BA, Uni- versity of Mississippi, 1953; DDS, University of Tennessee, 1956. Kraft, Frederic B., Assistant Professor of Administration (1972). BA, Wabash College, 1964; MBA, Washington University, 1966. Krauss, Art, Assistant Professor of Graphic Design (1969). BA, Michigan State University, 1968; MA, ibid., 1969. Krehbiel, Bill J., Instructor in Physical Education (1971). BS., Bethel College, 1950; MEd, Wichita State University, 1971. 334 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Kreps, Donald R., Assistant Professor of Sociology (1970). BA, Western Illinois University, 1966;MA, University of Iowa, 1969. Kukral, Dean K., Instructor in Mathematics (1968).AB, Wabash College, 1964; AM, Indiana University, 1966; PhD, ibid., 1972. (Leave of absence, 1971- 1972.) Lakin, Wilbur, Professor of Physics (1967). AB, Union College, 1943;PhD, Carnegie-Mellon University, 1954. Lampert, Dorothy O.,Instructor, Lilrary (1970).AB, southwestern College, 1937;MSLS, Syracuse University, 1970. Landis, David E., Assistant Instructor and Systems Programmer in the Com- puter Center (1971). BS, Wichita State University, 1970. Laptad, Richard C.,Assistant Professor of Physical Education (1965).BS, Uni- versity of Kansas, 1957;MS, ibid., 1962;EdD, University of Oregon, 1971. Lautz, Robert P., Assistant Professor and Director of Testing (1968). BA, Southern Illinois University, 1966;MS, ibid., 1968. Lee, Douglas A., Associate Professor of Music Literature and Piano and Chair- man of Musicology-Composition De artment (1964). BMus, DePauw Univer- sity, 1954;MXIus, University of Mic%igan, 1958;PhD, ibid., 1968. (Leave of absence-Second Semester, 1971-1972.) Leidig, Ruth M., Associate Professor of Nursing (1969). BS, Nursing Educa- tion, Marymount College, 1956; MS, Nursing Education, Indiana University, 1962. Leslie, John H., Jr., Assistant Professor and Chairman of Department of In- dustrial Engineering (1962). BSIE, Wichita State University, 1961; MSME, ibid., 1964;PhD, Oklahoma State University, 1972. Lewis, George A., Jr., Assistant Professor of Psychology (1965). BA, Wichita State University, 1962;MA, Texas Christian University, 1965;PhD, ibid., 1967. Lewis, Vashti, Instructor in English (1970, 1971). BA, Friends University, 1949; MA, Wichita State University, 1971. Linder, Wayne A., Assistant Professor of Music Literature (1970). BA, Uni- versity of Iowa, 1965;MMus, University of Michigan, 1966. Lindquist, Emory, University Professor (1953). AB. Bethany College, 1970; BA, Oxford University, 1933;MA, ibid., 1937;PhD, University of Colorado, 1941;LLD, Augustana College, 1952;LHD, Bethany College, 1963. Lindsley, Sara Rodewald, Instructor in German (1968). BS, Kansas State Uni- versity, 1963;MA, University of Kansas, 1968. .Lindsted, Robert D., Instructor in Mechanical Engineering (1971).BS in ME, Wichita State University, 1969;MS, University of Vermont, 1971. Linscheid, Harold W., Associate Professor of Mathematics (1958). BA, Bethel College, 1929;MEd, Phillips University, 1937;MA, University of Oklahoma, 1911;PhD, ibid., 1955. Lombnrd, John Larry, Assistant Professor of Accounting (1971). BSBA, Uni- versity of Tulsa, 1963;MS in Accounting, Oklahoma State University, 1964; PhD, University of Arkansas, 1971;CPA Certificate, Oklahoma. Loper, Gerald D., Jr., Associate Professor and Chairman of Department of Physics (1964). EA, Wichita State University, 1959; MS, Oklahoma State University, 1962;PhD, ibid., 1964. (Leave of absence-1971-1972.) Lowe, Roger D., Assistant Professor of Accounting, Assistant to President for Finance, and Business Manager (1964).BSBA, Kansas State College of Pitts- burg, 1960;CPA Certificate, Kansas. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 335 Lucas, Walter A., Associate Professor of Elementary Education (1951). BE, State University College at Fredonia, 1941; MS, State University of New York at Albany, 1947; EdD, University of Colorado, 1949. (Leave of absence, Second Semester, 1971-1972.) MacLaren, Alan R., Major, US Air Force, Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies (1969). AB, Amherst College, 1956; Academic and Allied Officer School, Air University, 1970. McBride, John, Assistant Professor of Anthropology (1965). AB, University of Kansas, 1933; LLB, ibid., 1955; PhD, Southern Illinois University, 1971. .llcCall, Mary Gayle, Assistant Professor of Sociology (1969). BA, Washbum Univcrsity, 1963; MA, \\Jichita State University, 1967. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) McCarten, John B., Assistant Professor of Chemistry (1964). BS, Creighton University, 1958; MS, ibid., 1960; PhD, University of Iowa, 1964. McCroskey, Robert Lee, Professor of Logopedics (1967). BS in Ed, Ohio State University, 1948; MA, ibid., 1952; PhD, ibid., 1956. McFarland, Burch, Assistant Professor of Elementary Education (1970). BA, Howard Payne College, 1940; ME, University of Texas at El Paso, 1959; EdD, New Mexico State University, 1971. McFarland, David E., Assistant Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1967). BS, IVichita State University, 1961; MS, ibid., 1964; PhD, University of Kan- sas, 1967. McIntyre, Donald W., Associate Professor of Psychology (1968). AB, University of California at Sania Barbara, 1955; MA, University of Connecticut, 1959; PhD, ibid., 1965. McKcc, John B., Assistant Professor of English (1970). BA, State University of Kew York at Binghampton, 1965; MA, ibid., 1968; PhD, Syracuse University, 1972. hlcKenncy, James W., Assistant Professor of Political Science (1966). BA, \i7illiamette University, 1958; hlA, University of Oregon, 1964; PhD, ibid., 1969. McLuen, Peggy, Assistant Professor of Physical Education (1966). AB, Wichi:a State University, 1947; ME, ibid., 1960. AlcNelis, Lcslic L., Associate Professor of Accounting (1970). BBA, University of Oklahoma, 1956; MBA, Unive~sity of Tulsa, 1963; PhD, University of Oklahoma, 1970; CPA Certificate, Oklahoma. Mack, Ronald C., Instructor in Physical Education (1971). BA in Ed, Wichita State University, 1965. hlagelli, Paul J., University Professor and Dean of Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences (1969). AB, University of Illinois, 1959; MS, ibid., 1960; PhD, illid., 1965. >laiors, Troy, Associate Professor of Philosophy (1964). BA, University of Ar- kansas, 1938; MA, ibid., 1959; PhD, Northwestern University, 1967. Xlallory, William, Assistant Professor of Philosophy (1965). BA, Northwestern University, 10.57; h4A, ibid., 1962; PhD, ibid., 1970. hlalone, Henry II., Assistant Professor of English, and Associate Dean of Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences (1948). AB, Wichita State University, 1932; MA, ibid., 1930. hlalone, Marjxie, Instructor in Spanish (1967). BA, Wichita State University, 1932; AM, University of Kansas, 1934. 336 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY hlarks, Bernard J., Professor of Economics (1969). BSC, Drake University, 1941; &IS, Iowa State University, 1919; PhD, University of Minnesota, 1960. hlartin, Donna Kay, Instructor in Economics (1970). BS, Oklahoma State Uni- versity, 1967; MS, ibid., 1969. Mason, Gary, Assistant Professor of Physical Education (1971). BS in Ed, Kearney State College, 1963; MA in Ed, ibid., 1966. Mathis, William, Associate Professor of Music Education, Coordinator of Gratl- uate llusic Studies and Chairman of Performance Department (1969). AB, Brigham Young University, 1957; MS, ibid., 1961; PhD, University of Michigan, 1969. hlatson, Ronald R., Assistant Professor of Sociology (1970). AB, University of South Dakota, 1965; MA, University of Colorado, 1967. hlays, Walter .4., Assistant Professor of Music Theory (1970). BS, University of Cincinnati, 1963; h l l l , ibid., 1964; DMA, ibid., 1970. Meredith, Ceorgette, Assistant Professor of Anthropology (1967). BA, Univer- sity of Chicago, 1962; MA, ibid., 1966. Merriman, James, Professor of English (1966). BA, Texas Tech University, 1947; Ah4, Columbia University, 1950; PhD, ibid., 1962. Merriman, h4ira P., Associate Professor and Chairman of Department of Art History (1966). BS, Columbia University, 1960; AM, illid., 1963; PhD, ibid., 1968. Meyers, Robert R., Professor of English (1967). BA Abilene Christian College, 1948; MA, University of C)kl:~homa, 1950; PhD, Washington University, 1954. Mickel, Howard A., Assistant Professor of Religion (1965). BA, Nebraska University, 1949; hIA, Northwcstcm University, 1951; BD, Lutheran Theo- logical Seminary, Gett)sl,urg, 1933; PhD, Claremont Graduate School, 1969. Miller, Clendon R., Assistant Profvssor of Biolom (1968). BA, Soufhern Illinois University, 1960; MA, ibid., 196% PhD, University of hlissouri, 1966. Miller, Glenn W., Professor of Econon~ics (1969). BEd, Southern Illinois Uni- versity, 1934; Ahl, University of Illinois, 1935; PhD, ihid., 1939. Miller, Marguerite, Instructor in Piano (1968). BSI, IVichita State University, 1967. Miller, Thomas A., Assistant Professor of Vocal hlusic (1971). BS, Anderson College, 1963; XlXIEd, Wichita State University, 196.5; Dh,lA, UniversLty of Missouri, at Kansas City, 1971. Miller, William E., Associate Professor of Logopedics (1949). BS, Wichita State University, 1940; XIA, illid., 1947; PhD, Sorthwestern University, 1950. Millett, John H., Professor of Political Science (1957). AB, Beloit College, 1940; MA, University of Cincinnati. 1942; PhD, University of Illinois, 1950. Millett, Nancy C., Assistant Professor of Secondary Education (1968). BA, University of Rochester, 1949; MA, ibid., 1931; EdD, University of Colorado, 1972. Mills, Everald E., Assistant Professor of Slathematics (1971). BS, University of Nebraska, 1962; MS, Washington State University, 1968; PhD, ibid., 1972. Mills, Tonk, Adjunct Associate Professor of Dental Hygiene (1968). DDS, University of Missouri at Kansas C i b , 1955. Miner, H. Craig, Assistant Professor of History (1969). BA, Wichita State University, 196G; MA, ibid., 1967; PhD, University of Colorado, 1970. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 337 Mittelstaedt, James S., Assistant Professor of Biology ((1970). BS, University of Arkansas, 1965; MS, ibid., 1968; PhD, Purdue University, 1970. Moellenberndt, Richard A., Assistant Professor of Accounting (1971). BS, Northwest hlissouri State College, 1964; MA, University of Nebraska, 1968. Mohr, Phillip J., Associate Professor of Speech (1946, 1950, 1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1946; MA, ibid., 1947; PhD, Ohio State University, 1960. Moini, Mostafa J., Assistant Professor of Administration (1969). BA, University of Oklahoma, 1964; MA, ibid., 1966; PhD, ibid., 1970. Moler, Penna R., Assistant Professor of French (1967). BA, University of Kansas, 1964; MA, ibid., 1966. Moore, James C., Assistant Professor of Art History (1970). BFA, University of New Mexico, 1966; AM, Indiana University, 1968. Moore, Nancy E., Instructor and Scientific Programmer in the Computer Center (1971). BS, Wichita State University, 1967; MS, ibid., 1971. Moorhouse, Melvin Paul, Associate Professor of Speech (1957). AB, West- minister College (Pennsylvania), 1935; MA, Ohio State University, 1956. Mullikin, Margaret D., Assistant Professor of Sociology (1967). BA, Wichita State University, 1954; h4A, ibid., 1958. Murphey, Dwight D., Assistant Professor of Administration (1967). BSL, University of Denver, 1957; LLB. ibid., 1959. Murphy, James M., Distinguished Professor of Bank Management in Depart- ment of Administration (1968). BS, Indiana University, 1943; MBA, ibid., 1948; DBA, ibid., 1959. Myers, James E., Assistant Professor of Geology (1968). BS, Iowa State Univer- sity, 1942; MS, Wichita State University. 1956; MS, ibid., 1968. Myers, Marilyn S., Instructor, Library (1968). BA, Kansas State University, 1966; MS, University of Illinois, 1968. Myers, Roger A., Instructor in Journalism (1970). BA, Ohio State University, 1969; MA, ibid., 1970. Myers, Walter J., Associate Professor of Trumpet (1963). BS, Ohio State University, 1959; Mh4E, University of Colorado, 1961; MM, Performance, ibid., 1966. Nance, Donald W., Assistant Professor and Counseling Psychologist (1968). BA, University of Redlands: 1964; MA, University of Iowa, 1967; PhD, ibid., 1968. Nasisse, Arline I., Adjunct Associate Professor, Nursing Services (1971). BS, University of Minnesota, 1939; MS in Nursing, Boston University, 1959. Navrat, Leonard, Adjunct Assistant Professor of Dental Hygiene (1968). BSEd, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1957; DDS: Loyola University, 1963. Needles, Audrey, Assistant Professor of Speech and Drama (1965). AB, Uni- versity of Denver, 1947; hlA, ibid., 1948. Neill, Jeffrey P., Instructor in English (1968). BA, Amherst College, 1963; MA, Washington University, 19G.5; hlFA, University of Iowa, 1967. Nelson, Eugene L., Instructor and Assistant Director of Financial Aids (1971). AB, University of Northern Colorado, 1951; MS, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1969. 338 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Nelson, F. William, Professor of English (1947). AB, University of Texas, 1943; Ahl, Columbia University, 1949; PhD, University of Oklahoma, 1957. Nelson, Susan, Instructor in English (1966). BA, Wichita State University, 1954; MA, University of Oklahoma, 1958. Newman, Arthur N., Assistant Professor of Voice (1959). St. Louis Opera Company; International Opera Company; NBC Opera Television and New York City Center Opera. Newton, Lyle D., Assistant Professor of Administration of Justice (1969). BA, Wichita State University, 1961; MA, ibid., 1965. (Leave of absence, Second Semester, 1971-1972). Nickel, James W., Assistant Professor of Philosophy (1968). AB, Tabor College, 1964; hlA, University of Kansas, 1966; PhD, ihicl., 1968. Nickel, John M., Assistant Professor of Secondary Education (1967). BS, Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1957; MS, ibid., 1959; EdD, University of Kansas, 1970. Nickel, Kenneth N., Professor of Secontlary Education and Associate Dean of the College of Education (1956). BA, Wichita State University, 1936; MA, University of Kansas, 1947; EdD, University of Colorado, 1958. Nielsen, Carl C., Associate Professor of Administration (1968). BS, Dana College, 1956: MA, University of Nebraska, 1963; PhD, ibid., 1966. Nini, Eugene A,, Associate Professor of Accounting and Director of Graduate Studies in Business Administration (1970). BBA, Lamar State College, 1958; MBA, University of Arkansas. 1959; PhD, Louisiana State University, 1966; CPA Certificate, Louisiana. Noah, Calvin, Assistant Professor of Geology (1956, 1963). AB, Fort Hays. Kansas Statc College, 1932; XIS, Wichita Statr University, 1956. Nodgaard, Johfl C., Instructor in Administration (1971). BBA, Ir'irhita Statc University, 1910: ;\IS, ibid., 1971. Noel, 0. Carroll, Professor of Elementary Education (19.50). BS, Knns;ls Statr Teachcrs College, Emporia, 1927; MA, \f7ichitn State University, 1948. Norris, Roy, Assistant Professor of El~ctrical Engineering (1961). BSEE, Wichita State University, 1959; MS, ibid., 1962; PhD, Oklahoma State University, 1972. O'Harra, Downing P., Professor, Library (1935). AB, southwestern College, 192.5; AhI. Unitersity of Illinois, 1928. O'Loughlin, John B., Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering and 1)irrctcrr of the Computer Centcr (1967). BSEE, Xlassnchusetts Instilute of Tt.cllnolocry. 1934; XISEE, ibid., 1936. Osbome, Susan K., Instructor in Administration (1971). BHA, \flichita St;~t(s University, 1969; XIS, il~icl., 1971. Ott, Gary L., Assistant Instrl~ctor in Administration and Systems An;~lvst, Digital Computer Center (1970). BSB, Kansas State Teachers College, Em- porin, 1968. Paddock, Beatrice, Assistant Professor. Library (1962). AH. Frirnds Univt,r- sity, 19%: .4BL.S. ITniversity of Xlichipan, I9:30. Park, F. Wesley, Adjunct Profcssor of 11ent;ll I-Iygiene (1968). AB, \Vichita Statc Uni\.ersity. 1934: DDS. Vni~.ersit!~ at Kansas City. 1937. of Sl i~sot~r i Park. Jon, Adjunct Professor and Chairman of Department of Dental Hygic,!ic (1968). DDS, IJniversity of Slissor~ri at Kansas City, 1964. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 339 Parker, Albert R., Professor of IIistory (1952). BS, Central State CoIlcge, 1935; EcllI, University of Oklahoma, 193" PhD, ibid., 1930. Parris, \T7ayne I,., ilssociatc Professor of Anthropology (1968). AB. SlcPherson College, 1944; BD, Bethany Theological Seminary, 1947; MA, Wichita State Uni\.ersity, li).S:3; AIA. Uniwrsity of Colorado, 1966; Phil, ibitl.. 1971. Partridge, Hugh, Assistant Professor of Viola (1970). BM, Indiana University, 1963; X I l I , Butler U~~iversity, 1866. Paske, Gerald H., Associate Professor of Philosophy (1967). BS, University of \\'isconsin, 1958; SIS, ibid., 1962; PhD, ibid.. 1964. Pate, Robert T., Professor and Chairman of Department of Elementary Edu- cation (1967). BA, Central State Collcge, 1958: hlEd, Universtiy of Okla11om:l. 1962; EdD, ibid., 1961. Paulson, 3lerle J., Assistant Professor, Library and Head of Acquisitions Dc.- partmcnt (1962)). BA, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1953; BS, ibid., 1954; SIA, University of Denver, 1362. Payne, Joe Dean, Associate Profrssor of El~rnrnfnrv Education (1967). B.4, Texas Tech University, 1950; MEd, ibid., 1953; EdD, ibid., 1963. Pccchioni, Frank T., Instructor in Xlathematics (1970). B,4, Duns Scotus Col- 'lege, 1969; LIS, IVichita Statc Univcrsity, 1971. Percl, William >I.,Professor and Chairman of Departrncnt of XIathematics (1966). AB, Indiana University, 1949; .4hI, ibid., 1950; PhD, ibid., 1955. Perline. Martin hi.. Professor of Economics and Associate Dean of the Collrrc of ~us ikess Admi~istmtion (1965). BA, Arizona Statc University, 1960; l l x , Ohio State University, 1962; PhD, ibid., 1963. Pettersen, Kenneth, Assistant Professor of Spanish (196.5). BA, Wichita State University, 1964; MA, University of IVisconsin, 1965. Pfannestiel, Maurice, Associate Professor of Economics (1966). BA, Fort Hays Kansas Statc College, 1960; >IS, Oklahoma State University, 1966; Phl), ibid., 1967. Pfeffer, Charles B., Assistant Professor of Industrial Engineering (1956). BS. Northeast llissouri State College, 1936; MA, ibid., 1949. Pfeifer, H. Daniel, Assistant Professor and Counselor in University College (1969). B.4, IVichita State Univers,ty, 1959; l I c , ibid., 1964. (Len\,e of all- scnce, 1971-1972.) Platt, George XI., Associate Professor of Political Science and Director of thr Office of Planning (1969). BA, South Dakota Statc Univcrsity, 1059; SIA, Syracuse University, 1955; PhD, ibid.. 1962. Plett, Sara F., Associate Professor of Nursing (1969). AB, Tabor College, 1947; BS, Sursing Education, University of Minnesota, 1949; >IS. Universitc of California, Berkeley, 1935. Pluckhan, hlargaret L., Associate Professor of Nursing (1970). BS in Nursinq. University of IVisconsin, 1930; LIPS, University of Colorado, 1956; PhD, Uni- \.crsity of Denver, 1970. Podlena, William F., Research Associate in Logopedics (1970). \Vichita Tech- nical Institute, 1970. Poe, John W., Assistant Professor of English (1970). BS, Kansas State Teacher.; College, Emporia, 1960; MA, ibid., 1964; DA, University of Oregon, 1972. Poland, Leo .4., Associate Professor of Accountinq (1958). BS, University of Kansas, 19 17; XIBA, I-Iarvard University, 1948: DBA, University of Indiana. 1962, 340 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Poley, Barbara A., Instructor in Nursing (1970). BS, University of Colorado, 1969; \IS, ibid., 1970. Powell, Jackson O., Professor OF Psycholoqy (1950). BS, Soiltheastern Stat(, College, Oklahoma, 1941; XIS, Syracusc University, 1917; PhD, ihicl., 1950. Pratt, Stephen H., Professor of Psychology (1970). BX, University of Cali- fornia at Los Angeles, 1940; hIS, Purdl~e University, 1950; PhD, ihid., 193.'. Pronko, N. H., Professor of Psychology (1947). AB. George \Vashington Uni- Lrersity, 1941: AXI, Indiana University, 1941; PhD, ibid., 1944. Randlc, William E., Adjunct Instructor in Loqo~cdics (1969). BS, Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1958; MA, University ot hlissouui, 1962. Rappaport, Allen, Assistant Professor of Administration (1966). BS, University of South Carolina, 1961; MBA, ibid., 1962; PhD, University of Texas, 1968. Rector, Larry, Assistant Professor and Associate Director of Financial Aids (1967). BA, Southwestern College, 1962; MEd, Wichita State University, 1967. Reed, D. Cramer, Dean of the College of Health Related Professions, Associate Dean of University of Kansas Medical Center, and Professor of Health Educa- tion (1970). AB, IVichita State University, 1937; IMD, Washington University, 1941. Reed, John A, Assistant Professor of French Horn and Music Theory (1966). BM, Eashnan School of Music, 1955; MME, University of Oklahoma, 1961. Reed, Paul E., Associate Professor of Piano (1966). BM, Drake University, 1956; MM, ibid., 1957. Reif, Martin A,, Professor of History and Associate Dean of Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences (1959). AB, University of California, Los Angeles, 1954; PhD, ibid., 1960. Rensner, Delmar A., Adjunct Associate Professor of Dental Hygiene (1968). BS, University of Illinois, 1945; DDS, ibid., 1947. Reyes, German, Assistant Instructor in Minority Studies (1972). BA, Wichita State University, 1970. Rhatigan, James J., Associate Professor, Vice President for Student Affairs and Dean of Students (1965). BA, Coe College, 1957; MA, Syracuse University, 1959; PhD, University of Iowa, 1965. Rhoads, Jane, Instructor in the Reading and Writing Laboratory (1971). BA, Southwestern College, 1964; MS, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1968. Richardson, James H., Instructor in Electrical Engineering (1970). BSEE, \i'ichita State University, 1968; MSEE, ibid., 1970. Richardson, William H., Associate Professor of Mathematics (1962). AB, Chico State College, 1959; MS, Iowa State University, 1961. Riley, James R., Associate Professor of Music Theory (1970). BM, Centenary College, 1970; MM, North Texas State University, 1963; DMA, University of Texas, 1968. Risser, Arthur C., Associate Professor of Industrial Engineering (1951). AB, Grinnell College, 1929. Ritchie, Gisela, Associate Professor of German (1965). MA, Free University of Berlin, 1952; PhD, University of Michigan, 1965. Robertson, James P., Distinguished Professor of Orchestra and Conducting (1949). AB, Drury College, 1932; BM, ibid., 1936; MA, Teachers College, Columbia University, 1943. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 341 Robinson, R. H., Adjunct Associate Professor and Acting Chairman of Depart- ment of Inhalation Therapy (1971). BS, Southwestern College, 1947; MD, University of Kansas, 1953. Rodgers, Edward J., Professor and Chairman of Department of Aeronautical Engineering (1970). BSE, University of Michigan, 1950; MSE, ibid., 1952; PhD, Pennsylvania State University, 1963. Roe, J. Myme, Instructor in Speech (1971). BA, Southwestern College, 1958; MEd, Wichita State University, 1970. Rogers, Ben F., Assistant Professor of Philosophy and Director of the Honors Program (1966). BA, University of Tennessee, 1958; MAT, Vanderbilt Uni- versity, 1961; MA, University of Indiana, 1966; PhD, ibid., 1970. Rogers, Ethel Elizabeth, Assistant Professor of Mathematics (1958). BS, Kan- sas State University, 1946; MA, Northwestern University, 1950. Rogers, George, Associate Professor and Chairman of Department of Minority Studies (19il). BS in Ed, Langston University, 1961; MEd, Central State Col- lege, 1969; EdD, University of Kansas, 1971. Rogers, Mary B., Instructor in French (1966). BA, Vanderbilt University, 1961; MAT, ibid., 1964. Rohn, Arthur H., Associate Professor and Chairman of Department of Anthro- pology (1970). AB, Harvard University, 1951; PhD, ibid., 1966. Rounds, Harry D., Professor of Biology (1963). BA, University of Virginia, 1952; MS, University of Pittsburgh, 1960; PhD, ibid., 1962. Russell, Todd, Assistant Instructor in Physical Education (1972). BA, Ottawa University, 1966. Saalmann, Dieter, Assistant Professor of German (1971). BA, Northwestern State University of Louisiana, 1963; MA, The Johns Hopkins University, 1965; PhD, Washington University, 1970. Sanderson, Robert W., Colonel, U. S. Air Force, Professor of Aerospace Studies (1970). BS, Arizona State University at Tempe, 1953; MS, University of Michigan, 1959; Academic Instructor and Allied Officer School Air University, 1970. Sarachek, Alvin, Professor and Chairman of Department of Biology (1958). BA, University of Missouri at Kansas City, 1948; MA, ibid., 1950; PhD, Kansas State University, 1958. Saricks, Ambrose, Professor of History, Dean of the Graduate School, and As- sociate Dean of Faculties (1970). BA, Bucknell University, 1937; MA, ibid., 1941; PhD, University of Wisconsin, 1950. Savaiano, Eugene, Professor of Spanish and Chairman of Department of Romance Languages (1946). BS, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1930; MS, ibid., 1937; PhD, University of Chicago, 1948. Schad, Jasper G., Professor of Library Science and Director of Libraries (1971). BA, Occidental College, 1954; MA, Stanford University, 1957; MLS, University of California at Los Angeles, 1961. Schaible, Max A., Assistant Professor of Journalism and Director of Informa- tion and Public Events (1970). BA, University of Colorado, 1957. Schlesier, Karl, Professor of Anthropology (1962). PhD, University of Bonn, 1956. Schmitt, Irene L., Instructor in Administration (1971). BS, Wichita State Uni- versity, 1968; MS, ibid., 1970. 342 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Schneider, Philip H., Instructor in English (1967). BA, State University of New York, College at Oneonta, 1965; MFA, University of Iowa, 1967. Schrag, Dwayne D., Instructor, Library (1970). BA, Bethel College, 1956; ML, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1967. Schrag, Robert L., Professor of Electrical Engineering (1957). BS in EE, Kan- sas State University, 1945; MS, California Institute of Technology, 1946; PhD, Pennsylvania State University, 1934. Schrag, Sam, Assistant Professor, Library (1966). BA, Bethel College, 1961; MS, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1966. Schrag, Sandra K., Instructor, Library (1970). BA, Kansas State Teachers Col- lege, Emporia, 1966; ML, ibid., 1967. Schuermann, Allen C., Jr., Assistant Professor of Industrial Engineering (1971). BA. University of Kansas. 1965; MS, Wichita State University, 1968; PhD, University of Arkansas, 1971. Schuh, Marceil, Instructor in Speech (1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1967; ME, ibid., 1968. Schule, Donald K., Assistant Professor of Sculpture (1967). BA, University of Minnesota, 1964; MFA, ibid., 1967. Scriven, Nancy L., Assistant Professor of Music Education (1967). BME, Wich- ita State University, 1952; MME, ibid., 1966. Segler, Bert L., Assistant Professor of Administration (1965, 1967). BBA, Wichita State University, 1960; MS, ibid., 1962. Seng, Jerry T., Assistant Professor of Biology (1970). BS, Purdue University, 1957; SIA, Indiana University, 1966; PhD, ibid., 1970. Sevart, J?hn B., Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering (1960). BSME, TVichita State University, 1960; MS, ibid., 1962. Sharp, Douglas, Associate Professor and Chairman of Department of Account- ing (1969). BBA, University of Oklahoma, 1961: MBA, ibid., 1963; PhD, University of Missouri, Columbia, 1969; CPA Certificate, Oklahoma. Shaughnessy, J. Michael, Instructor in Mathematics (1970). BA, LeMoyne Collcge, 1968; MA, Indiana University, 1970. Sher~nen, Dorothy M., Professor and Chairman of Department of Student Per- sonnel nncl Guidance (1964). BA, University of Oregon, 1932; MA, ibid., 1934; PhD, Ohio State University, 1945. Sherman, Twyla Gaye, Assistant Professor of Elementary Education (1965). BA, Buena Vista College, 1964; MA, Michigan State University, 1965. Shih, Philip C., Instructor, Library (1969). BA, Tunghai University, Taiwan, China, 1965; MS, Florida State University, 1968. Shurnard, Jack L., Assistant Instructor in Enqineering and Assistant Director of Ph!,sical Plant (1969). DA, \\'ichita State University, 1951; BS in ME, ibid., 1938. Sirnoili, John P., Professor of Graphic Design (1955). AB, Colorado Stat? College, 1948, AM, ibid., 1919; PhD, Ohio State University, 1952; Certificate, hlassachusetts Instit~lte of Technology, 1958. Skaqgs, Jimmy M., Assistant Professor of Economics (1970). BS, Sul Ross State College, 1962; MA, Texas Tech University, 1965; PhD, ibid., 1970. Slay, Annie T., Assistant Instructor in French (1968). L'Institut Professionelle ferninin, CAP and BEPC, 1961. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 343 Slingerland, F. Yvonne, Assistant Professor of Physical Education (1967). BS, Fort Hays Kansas State College, 19.54; MS, ibd., 1964. Small, Blanche L., Assistant Professor, Library (1966). AB, Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1939; MS, Kansas State Teachers College, Emporia, 1961. Smith, Benjamin N., Associate Professor of Cello (1968). BM, Eastman School of hlusic, 1958; MM, ibid., 1960; AMusD, ibid., 1968. Smith, Bert L., Associate Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1966). BS, University of Missouri at Rolla, 1953; MS, ibid., 1960; PhD, Kansas State Uni- versity, 1966. Smith, Clifford J., Instructor in English (1967). BA, Wichita State University, 1960; MA, ibid., 1966. Smith, Clifton T., Instructor in Secondary Education and Director of Upward Bound (1969). BA, University of Texas, 1959; MA, Wichita State University, 1967. Smith, L. George, Professor of Administration (1967). AB, Ball State University, 1932; hlBA, Indiana University, 1957; DBA, ibid., 1963. Smith, Robert hl., Instructor in Speech (1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1967; MA, Ohio University, 1968. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Smith, R. V., Professor and Chairman of Department of Mechanical Engineering (1971). BSME, University of Colorado, 1948; MS, ibid., 1951; MS, University of Utah, 1957; PhD, University of Oxford, 1968. Smith, William H., 11, Adjunct Instructor in Dental Hygiene (1971). BS in Pharmacy, University of Oklahoma, 1962. Snortland, Neil E., Assistant Professor of Political Science (1970). BA, Univer- sity of Colorado, 1965; hlA, ibid., 1966; MPh, University of Kansas, 1970; PhD, ibid., 1971. Snyder, hlelvin H., Jr., Professor of Aeronautical Engineering (1947). BSME, Carnegie-Xlellon University, 1947; MSAE, Wichita State University, 1950; PhD, Oklahoma State University, 1967. Sobin, Anthony G., Instructor in English (1970). BA, Tulane University, 1966; >IFA, University of Iowa, 1969. Sobin, Jacqueline F., Instructor in Nursing (1971). BSN, University of Iowa, 1969; MA in Nursing, ibid., 1971. Soper, Fred J., Associate Professor of Accounting and Director of Center for Slanagement Development (1960, 1963). BS, University of Kansas, 1955; MBA, IVichita State University, 1962; CPA Certificate, Kansas. Soulas, Genevieve, Instructor in French (1970). License es Lettres, University of Paris, 1969; hlA, Kansas State College at Pittsburg, 1970. Sowards, J. Kelley, Professor of History (1956). AB, Wichita State University, 19L7; h1.4, University of hlichigan, 1948; PhD, ibid., 1952. Spanglcr, Euqcne C., Associate Professor of Speech and Drama and Director of Theater Services (1939). BM, Wichita State University, 1939; XfFA, Uni- versity of Iowa, 1950. Sparkes, Alan T., Assistant Professor of Sociology (1971). BA, Memorial Uni- versity of Newfoundland, 1967; hlA, University of Missouri, 1969. Spencer, LaTTona I., Instructor and Counselor in University College (1971). BA, \Vichita State University, 1971. 344 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Spohn, Charles L., Professor of Music and Dean of the College of Fine Arts (1970). B51, Butler University, 1950; MA, Ohio State University, 1953; PhD, ibid., 1959. Stabler, Robert D., Associate Professor of French (1963). AB, Stanford Uni- versity, 19B: Diploma, Institut de Phonctique, Paris, France, 1949; Diploma, UniversitC d'Aix-h~larseille, 1950; Diploma, I'Universiti. de Paris, France, 1952. Stnnqa, John E., Assistant Professor of Political Science (1968). BA, South- eastern Louisiana University, 1961; MA, Louisiana State University, 1963; PhD, University of Wisconsin, 1971. Steinberg, Ann M., Visiting Instructor in Elementary Education (1971). BA, University of Floritla, 1970; XIEd, University of Miami, 1971. Stephcns, Prances A., Assistant Professor of Endish (1970). BA, Texas A&I University, 1956; MA, University of Texas, 1967; PhD, ibid., 1970. St. John, Richard W., Assistant Professor of Ceramics (1969). BFA, Kansas City Art Institute, 1967; MFA, Alfred University, 1969. Stone, Arthur J., Assistant Instructor in Administration of Justice and Director of Traffic and Security (l(n2). Strecker, Joseph L., Associate Professor of Physics (1968). BS, Rockhurst Col- leze, 1955; PhD, Johns Nopkins University, 1961. Streeter, Ronald J., Instructor in Speech (1968). BA, Kansas State University. 1965; ibid., 1969. Suderrnann, Fcderick, Assistant Professor of Political Science, Assistant to the Acndernic Vice President, and Director of Research and Sponsored Programs (1964). BA, IVichita State University, 1958; MA, ibid., 1960. Sullivan, Betty, Instructor in Nursinq (1971). BSN, University of Kansas, 1958; 5,IEcl. IVichita State University, 1970. Summcrville, William L., Assistant Professor of Piano (1970). BM, University of' Alal>ama, 1955; X,IX3, Indiana University, 1957; DMA, University of Mich- igan, 1970. Swairn, Daniel, Assistant Professor of Music Theory and String Bass (1966). BM, University of Cincinnati, 1957; MME, Indiana University, 1964. Sweet, George H., Associate Professor of Biology (1966). BS, Wichita State University, 1960; \IA, University of Kansas, 1982; PhD, ibid., 1965. Sweney, Arthur B., Professor of Administration (1968). BS, University of Illinois, 1947; MS\V, ibid., 1949; PhD, University of Houston, 1958. Taggart, Thoburn, Jr., Assistant Professor, Library, ancl Coordinator of Public Services (1962). BA, Lrniversity of the South, 1953; MA, George Peabody College for Teachers, 1938. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Talaty, Erach R., Professor of Chemistry (1969). BS, Xagpur University, Nag- pur, India, 1918; PhD, ibid., 1954; PhD. Ohio State University, 1957. Tallarico, P. Thomas, Assistant Professor of hfusic Education (1971). BSE, Indiana University of Pennsylvania, 1958; MMEd, Duquesne University, 1963; PhD, West Virginia University, 1972. Tasch, Paul, Professor of Geology (1RSS). BS, College of the City of New York, 1948; MS, Pennsylvania State University, 1950; PhD, University ot Iowa, 1932. Taylor, Ross McLaury, Professor and Chairman of Department of American Studies (1939). AB. University of Oklahon~a, 1930; hIA, ibid., 1933; PhD, University of Iowa, 1938. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 345 Teall, hlary Jane Woodard, Assistant Professor of Speech and Drama (1946). BS, Northwestern University, 1933; MA, ibid., 1937. TenElshof, Annette R., Assistant Professor of Student Personnel and Guidance and Associate Dean of Studcnts (1970). BS, University of Michigan, 1961; MA, Wheaton College, 1963; EdS, Xlichigan State University, 1966; PhD, ibid., 1970. Tejeda, Antoinette, Instructor in Spanish (1967). AB, Bradley University, 1946; MA, Texas Tech University, 1965. Terflinger, Curtis D., Professor of Administration (1957). BA, University of Kansas, 1953; Juris Doctorate, ibid., 1955. Terrell, William T., Associate Professor of Economics (1967). BS, Oklahoma State University, 1958; blS, ibid., 1961; PhD, Vanderbilt University, 1970. Tenvilliger, Gordon B., Professor of Music, Associate Dean of the Graduate School, and Director of the Summer Session (1946). BME, Northwestern University, 1942; MA, Columbia University, 1946; EdD, ibid., 1952. Teufel, Hugo, Jr., Associate Professor of Mathematics (1963). BS, University of Kansas, 1955; h4S, University of Kew Ivlexico, 1960; PhD, ibid., 1968. Thiry, Roberta D., Assistant Professor of Nursing (1969). BA, Wichita State University, 1958; MS Kursing, University of Colorado, 1961. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Thomas, Phillip D., Associate Professor of History (1965). BA, Baylor Uni- versity, 1960; XIA, University of h'ew Mexico, 1964; PhD, ibid., 1965. Thomas, William J., Instructor in English (1971). AB, Indiana University, 1967; AM, ibid., 1969. Thomason, Dwayne B., Assistant Instructor in Biology (1968). BS, Bethany Nazarene College, 1963. Thompson, Nikola, Instructor in Logopedics (1971). BA in Ed, Wichita State University, 1968; MA, illid., 1969. Thompson, Norman D., Assistant Instructor and Director of Operations, Digital Computing Center (1967). Throckmorton, Helen J., Associate Professor of English (1954). AB, Friends University, 1945; hzlEd, University of Colorado, 1956; PhD, ibid., 1972. Thye, Larry D., Instructor in Physical Education (1968). BA, Wichita State University, 1967. Tilford, Michael, Assistant Professor of Secondary Education (1967). BS, Langston Univrrsity, 1957; SIA, Johns Hopkins University, 1958; EdD, Oklahoma State University, 1970. Todd, Richard, Associate Professor of History (1963). AB, Sacramento State College, 1952; BD, Fuller Theological Seminary, 1935; hIA, University of California at Berkeley, 1938; PhD, il)id., 1963. Town, Robert, Assistant Professor of Organ (1965). BM, Eastman School of Music, 1960; hlhl, Syracuse University, 1962. Towt, Mary Gay, Assistant Instructor in Nursing (1972). BS, University of Colorado, 1968. Traylor, Elwood B., Professor and Chainnan of Department of Educational Psychology (1967). AB, Creenville College, 1948; MA, Washington University, 1951; EdD, ibid., 1966. Tuttle, Edward H..Associate Professor of Social Work (1967). BA, Wichita State University, 1934; AM, University of Chicago, 1949. 346 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Ulbricht, Jarvis W., Assistant Professor of Art Education (1970). BAE, Uni- versity of Kansas, 1965; IIA, ibid., 1968. Unrau, William, Professor of History (1965). BA, Bethany College, 1951; MA, University of Wyoming, 1936; PhD, University of Colorado, 1963. (Leave of absence, Second Semester 1971-1972.) Uruuh, Henry, Jr., Professor and Acting Chairman of Department of Physics (1961). AB, \T7ichita State L'niversity, 19.50; his, Kansas State University, 1952; PhD, Case Western Reserve University, 1960. Vahdat, Pari, Associate Professor of Psychology (1967). AB, Indiana University, 1953; AM, ibid., 1957; PhD, ibid., 1964. VanderLeest, Patricia, Professor and Chairman of Department of Nursing (1970). BSN, University of \Vashington, 1934; h.iN, ibid., 1955; PhD, University of Denver, 1970. Vargo, Albert J., Assistant Professor of Cerman (1970). BA, Wayne State Uni- versity, 1964; MA, ibid., 1966. Vedder, Charles B., Assistant Professor of Sociology (1970). BA, Lawrence University, 1965; MA, University of Iowa, 1969; PhD, ibid., 1972. Veon, Betty A., Instructor in Elementary Education (1970). BA, Wichita State University, 1963; ME, ibid., 1968. Vickery, W. Dean, Assistant Professor of Administration (1971). BA, Wichita State University, 1954; his, ibid.. 1968. Vollmer, George E., Instructor in English (1969, 1971). BA, Wichita State University, 1949; MA, ibid., 1968. Vornholt, David, Assistant Professor of Flute (1971). BM, University of Cin- cinnati, 1949; MM, ibid., 1968. IVaddell, hfina Jean, Assistant Professor, Library and Head of Rcslcrcnce I> . - pnrtment (196F;). BA, Vi7ichitn State University. 1998; X.lS, Kansas Stntc Teach- ers College, Emporia. 1.963. Wall, Lillian, Associate Professor of Spanish (19671. BA, Kansas \\'esleyaii. 1932; XIS, Kansa9 State Teachrrs College, Emporia. 1953; PhD., Uni~rersit)~ of \\'isconsin, 1969. Wallingford, Frances ti., Assistant Professor of Piano (1936). Bhl, Sol~tli- western College, 1991; AB, ibid., 1933: IIXl, IVichita State University. 1'336; Certificates, American Conservatory in Fontaint:l)lrau, France, 1'328 ant1 10(i:3. IValsh. David A., Assistant Professor of Art History (1971). BA, American U.1:- \.ersitp, 1963; IIA, University of I\linncsota, 1968. IYalters, Dorothy, Associate Professor of Enzlish (1967). BX. University of Oklahoma, 19.48; BA in LS. ibid., 1951; PhD, ibid., 1960. Watertor, Jean L., Assistant Professor of Biolog!~ (1968). BA, University of Iowa, 1944; 4IS, University of \\'iscowin, 1948; PhD, Iowa Stntc Universit)., 1965. Watson, Dale L., Assistant Professor xnd Chairman of L)cpart~iient of Rclig~on (1969). BA, Guillord College, 19.58; UD, Louisville P r c ~ h ~ t e r i n nTl~c~olo~icnl Seminary, 1961; T h l I , Duke University, 1963: PliIl, 1I:lrtford Srmin:irv Fonnclation, 1970. Watson, Richzrd L., Associate Profcssor of Elt~mcntary Ed~~cu t ion a t1 Dirrctor of Rending Center (1071). AB, \,\'nbnsli College, 1955; \.IsEd, Indiana Ilni- vcrsity, 1039; EdD: ibicl., 1964. WlCH ITA STATE UNIVERSITY 347 Webb, Edgar L., Assistant Profcssor and Chnirnlan of Dcpartmcnt of Industrial Education (1959). BA, IVichita State Univcbrsity, 1959; \IS. l inns~~sStatc Collcgc of l'ittsburg, 1961. Webb, Samucl C., Associate Prof?ssor of Economics (1966). BS. Uni\.crsity of Missouri, 1957; XIS, ibid.. 1959: PhD, I!nivrrsity of' Km~sas, 1968. Weed, Norman L., Associate Professor of Economics (1971). BS, Uni~.ersity of Nebraska, 1959; PhD, Tulane University, 1968. Weldin, Scott J., Instructor in Speech and Drama (1968). BA, hlichijinn Statt University, 1967; \[A, ibid., 1968. Wells, Allcn J., Instructor in Industrial Education (1971). BA, IVichit;~ State Uni\rersity, 1970. Welsbacher, Betty T., Assistant Professor of Xlnsic Education (196.4, lRGS, 1970). BSE, Ohio Stat? University, 1946; XIME, IVichita St:ltc* U~>i\.ersity. 1961. Welsbacher, Richard C., Professor of Speech and Drama (1958). AB, Denison University, 1918; MA, University of Denver, 1930, PhD, Ohio State University, 1965. Wentworth, C. Russell, Associatc Professnr of Administration and Dean of Admissions and Rccords (1971). BA. Xlichigan Statr Uni\.crsity, 1949; l I i Z , ibid., 195% PhD, ibid., 1970. Wentz, William H., Jr., Associate Professor of Aeronautical Enqincr.rinc! (1957. 1963). BSAIE, IIJichita State University, 1955: XISAE, ibid., 1961; PhD, Uni- versity of Kansas, 1969. West, Elles C., rlssociate Professor of Physical Education (1965). Physic:~l Therap);, Karolinska University, Stockholm, Sweden, 19.50; XIA. Stanford Univcrs~ty, 1956; PhD, Univerhity of Oregon, 196.5. Wherritt, Robert C., Associate Professor of Mathematics (1962). BS, Tulane University, 1955; XIS. ibid., 1961; PhD, Ne\v llesico State University, 1971. Wiebe, Paul G., Assistant Profrssor of Religion (1969). BA, Bethel Collcgr. 1960; MA, Uni~rcrsity of Cl~icago, 1966. Wiebe, Raymond F., Asqistant Professor, Assistant to the Dean, ancl Counsclor in University College (1965). AB, Tabor College, 1953; hlS, Icansas State University, 1965. Wiggins, Margaret, Assistant Instructor in Elementary Education (1972). BS, Troy State University; MS, Oklahoma State University, 1970. IVilde, Ronnie L., C;lptain, U. S. Am~y, Assistant Profrssor of Slilitnry Sci,-ncl. (1969). RS, Xlathematics, Xlid~vestern Univcrsity, 196:;; U. S. A m ~ y Artillcr! and Alissile Schonl, 1967. Wilkes, Mary Nell, Assistant Professor of Bcrsiness Education (1956). RS, Tcxa.. Woman's University, 1939; SIRE, Llnivrrsity of Colorado, 1961. Williams, hlichzel G., Assistant Professor and Counsclor in Student Serlices (1970). BA, San Jose State C~l!~qc., 1966. Williams, Richard K., Assist:lnt Professor of Spanish (1971). AB, Grinnrll Collcge, 1956; >[A, Symcuse University, 1962. Wilson, Gary D., Instructor in English (1971). AB, McPherson Collcge, 1966: \IA, IVichitu Statc University, 1968. jvilson, Herman, Assistant Prof(2ssor of Physical Education ant1 Track Cnach (1967). AS, Kansas State Univcrsity. 1952; XIS, ibid., 1963. 348 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY Wilson, John H., Associate Prof~ssor of Elementary Education (1908). R.4. IVichita State University, 1958; EdII, ibid.. 1964; EdD. University of Okln- homn, 1967. Wineke, Donald R., Assistant Professor of English (1971). BA, University of Washington, 1960; MA, Pennsylvania State University, 1962; PhD, Indiana University, 1971. Winget, Lynn, Profescor of Spanish (1961). BA. \ir~chita Stotc Univrrsity. 19 15. LIA, Univcrsity of \\'isconsin, 1949; PhD, ibid., 1960. Wolfe, Joseph A., Instructor in French (1968). BA, University of 1on.a. 1966: MA, ibid., 1968. (Leave of absence, 1971-1972.) Wong, John C., jissociatc Professor of I~Icnlth Education and :\swciate Dr::n of the College of Ilenltli Rcl:~ted Profcssions (1970). AB, Phillips Univcrsit!.. 1958; LIS, University of Oklalionia, 1967; EdD, Uni\.ersity of \Iissniiri. 1971. Wood, L. Cr~rtise. Professor of Adm;n;str..+;n~ i1956). BA, Coe Collrgc.. 19.38; MA, University of Iowa, 1956; PhD, ibid., 1956. Woodard. Francis 0..Professor and Chairman of De~artment of Economics. and cooidinator of kradu:lte Studies in hconomics -(l965). BS, ~nir.rrsit)- of Nebraska, 1941: AIA, ibid., 1938; PliD, ibid., 1962. 1T1u, D3h Cheng, Assistant Professor of Geology (1968). BS, National Taiwan University. 1962; hIS, University of Oklnhomn, 1966; PhD. ihitl., 1!)69. Wyancko, Ronald J. , Assistant Professor of Silvrrsniitliing (1969). BF.1. Uni- versity of Kansas, 1961: Ll;\. .4rizona Stnte Univt-rsity, 1966; '\11;:2, Universii!. of Kansas. 1969. Wyatt, P. J., Assistant Professor of English (1964, 1966). AB, Uni\.ersity of Arizona, 1931; IIA, Indiana Uni\~ersity, 1957. Yates, Richard, Distinguished Writer-in-Residence (1971). Columbia University School of General Studies. Yeargan, Richard G., Assistant Professor and Director of the Reading Improve- ment Laboratory (1970). AB, Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1959; MA, University of Northern Colorado, 1963. Yenne, Vernon Lee, Assistant Professor of Voice (1966). BME, University of Indiana, 1961; hll\iE, ibid., 1963; DMA, ibid., 1969. Yoon, I. N., Associate Professor of Economics (1968). BA, Lynchburg College, 1955; M.4, University of hiinnesota, 1958; PhD, ibid., 1967. Youngman, Arthur L., Assistant Professor of Biology (1965). BA, Montana State University, 1959; his, Case Western Reserve University, 1961; PhD, University of Texas, 1965. Zandler, Melvin E., Assistant Professor of Chemistry (1966). BA, Friends Uni- versity, 1960; hlS, Wichita State University, 1963; PhD, Arizona State Univer- sity, 1965. Zanghi, William A., Instructor in Italian (1971). BA, State University of New York at Buflalo, 1967; MA, University of Illinois, 1969. Zavarella, Victor, Acting Registrar and Assistant Professor of Education (1970). BS, University.of Illinois, 1050: MEd, ibid., 1953; PhD, ibid., 1971. Zody, Richard E., Assistant Professor of Political Science (1968). AB, Indiana State University, 1963; MA, ibid., 1965; PhD, Southern Illinois University, 1968. Zuercher, Victor H., Instructor and Counselor in University College (1967). BA, \ilichita State University, 1966; ME, ibid., 1967. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY 349 Zumwalt, Glen W., Distinguished Professor of A~~ronautical Engineering (1968). BS, University of Texas, 1918; BSME, ibid., 1949; MSME, ibid., 1953; PhD. University of Illinois, 1959. RETIRED FACULTY Albright, Penrose S., Professor Emeritus of Physics (1943). BS, Renssalaer Polytechnic Institute, 1922; MS, University of Wisconsin, 1929; PhD, ibid., 1936. Aldrich, Benjamin M., Professor Emeritus of Mechanical En@neering (1956). BSME, University of Nebraska, 1927; MS, South Dakota College, 1934; Reg- istered Professional Engineer. Angulo, J. E., Retired Assistant Professor of Spanish (1961). BS, Instituto Santiago de Cuba, 1921; AB, Friends University, 1925; MA, University of Kansas, 1931. Beebe, Viola McKinney, Assistant Professor Emeritus of Classical Languages (1929). AB, Wichita State University, 1909; AM, ibid., 1932. Branch, Hazel Elisabeth, Professor Emeritus of Zoology (1922). BA, University of Kansas, 1908; AM, ibid., 1912; PhD, Cornell University, 1921. Downing, Jacquetta, Professor Emeritus of French (1917). AB, Wichita State University, 1921; Bh4, ibid., 1921; AM, University of Kansas, 1922; L'Institut de Phonbtique (Sorbonne), 1929. Duerksen, George N., Assistant Professor Emeritus of Industrial Education (1967). BS, Kansas State College of Pittsburg, 1929; MS, ibid., 1938. Fletcher, Worth A., Professor Emeritus of Chemistry (1927). AB, University of Indiana, 1925; MA, ibid., 1926; PhD, ibid., 1927. Gossett, Lucille, Assistant Professor Emeritus of English (1937). BA, Baker University, 1922; MA, Wichita State University, 1940. Graham, Marie, Associate Professor Emeritus of History (1917). AB, Wichita State University, 1915; MA, University of Chicago, 1916. Hanson, Gordon C., Professor Emeritus of Educational Psychology (1938). BA, Augsburg College, 1928; PhD, University of North Dakota, 1937. Hanson, Loring O., Professor Emeritus of Aeonautical Engineering (1955). BSCE. University of Kansas, 1928; MSCE, University of Wisconsin, 1932. Haymaker, Mary, Associate Professor Emeritus of English (1925). AB, Wichita State University, 1925; MA, University of Colorado, 1927. Hekhuis, Lambertus, Dean Emeritus of College of Liberal Arts and Sciences (1926). AB, Hope College, 1913; MA, ibid., 1916; BD, University of Chicago, 1925; PhD, ibid., 1925. Hinton, Evelyn .4., Associate Professor Emeritus of Educational Psychology (1929). Graduate, Columbia Normal School of Physical Education at Chicazo, 1924; BA, Wichita State University, 1929; MS, University of R'ashington, 1938. Major, S. S., Retired Instructor in Physics (1932). AB, William Jewel1 College, 1917. Marsh, T. Reese, Professor Emeritus of English (1943). BA, Johns Hopkins University, 1924; PhD, University of Iowa, 1933. Mood, Robert Gibbs, Profe.